Home

Agilent Technologies E4440

1. Table 4 2 System Default Settings Feature Default Setting Restored Automatic Alignment On Alert Off On yes Power On Last Preset Preset yes Preset Type Factory User Mode Mode yes 5 External Amplifier Gain 0 dBm yes S Input Impedance 50 Ohm yes H GPIB Address 18 yes S IP address 10 10 10 10 no S Host Name mypsa no d Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 no N SCPI Telnet Port 5023 On yes SCPI Socket Port 5025 On yes SICL Server On yes Instrument Color Palette Default palette yes Printer Setup Language PCL3 yes Printer Setup Color Capability No yes Print Orientation Portrait yes Color Printing Off yes Prints Page 1 yes Date Format MDY yes Time Date Display On yes Verbose error messages Off yes Display Viewing Angle 4 yes Manual Tracking Adjustment 2048 yes Page Size Letter yes Printer Selection Auto yes Key Path System Chapter 4 275 N LI a 2 E Q D O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System Remote Command SYSTem PRESet PERSistent Example SYST PRES PERS 4 8 12 Licensing Accesses the security system to enable licensing for individual options You can install a measurement mode personality options in an instrument at any time After you load the personality mode into memory you must enter a license key to allow access to the option For information on how to use this system see the installation informat
2. Signal Name RJ 45 Pin t RJ 45 Pin Signal Name RX 1 3 TX RX 2 6 TX TX 3 1 RX TX 6 2 RX Not 4 4 Not Used 5 Used 7 7 8 8 a Either end of this cable can be used at the instrument or LAN device The connector names are a convention use ful during cable construction only This cable can be used to cascade hubs or to make point to point connections without a LAN hub 544 Chapter 6 NOTE NOTE Figure 6 2 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument A convenient way to make a cross over adapter is to use two RJ 45 jacks wired according to Table 6 4 above Standard straight through patch cables can then be used from the instrument to the adapter and from the adapter to other LAN devices If you use a special purpose adapter you will avoid having a cross over cable mistaken for a standard straight through patch cable Some commercially available cross over cables do not implement the cross over wiring required for your instrument Please refer to Table 6 4 above and verify all connections before using cables not made by Agilent Technologies Cross Over Patch Cable Wiring cross over end Pin 1 Pin 8 To Other Connector sd623c Chapter 6 545 E D 3 ES E 3 T E E Q D 3 7 E cE 7 un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals Programming in C U
3. Table 5 1 Key Function oe m Measure 297 Meas Control 329 Mode Setup 333 Restart 347 Single 349 ACP Measurement Z Meas Setup 351 I Trace View 367 E Burst Power Measurement S Meas Setup 371 S Trace View 377 E CCDF Measurement Power Stat S Meas Setup 381 S Display 385 Span X Scale 389 Marker 391 Channel Power Measurement Meas Setup 399 Trace View 405 Harmonic Distortion Measurement Meas Setup 409 Trace View 421 294 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Functions Table 5 1 Key Function Tee Intermod TOI Measurement Meas Setup 423 Mult Carrier Power Measurement Meas Setup 429 Trace View 447 Occupied BW Measurement Meas Setup 451 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Meas Setup 457 Trace View 477 Display 479 Span X Scale 481 Marker 483 Spurious Emissions Measurement Meas Setup 485 el i U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 295 One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Functions 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 296 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode In the Spectrum Analysis mode see the Mode key this key displays a menu that l
4. More 2of2 suonouny jueuieJnseo y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan 1uauieJnseay uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw 9c9 6 191deu2 Meas Control Key Functions Meas Control Restart Key toggles between Pause and Resume Single Measure Cont pe883a Pause sde nuam Juswesnseayy uonng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw 6 1e3deu2 Zen Mode Setup Key Mode Ch Setup If Radio Std is any W LAN or DVB T standard this key is greyed out Mode Setup Radio Std None NW pe910a I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices Std Setup gt Std Setup Retain Params On Off Enable RI Measurements Yes No Radio Std Radio Std Radio Std dece TETRA 1S 95A Bees W LAN c J STD 008 EES DVB T 1S 95C NADC GSM EDGE PDC W San Bluetooth More More More 10f3 20f 3 3 of 3 W LRN DVB T 802 11a pier 802 11b G PRL NICRM 802 119 PAL NICAM HiperLAN 2 suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan uawansea uonng eug suoljaun4 jueuiensee y uoyng 3u0 sde nuaw 8c9 6 191deu2 Std
5. Type Format Extension State State STA Trace Trace state TRC Comma separated trace values CSV Limit Internal data format LIM Screen Bitmap GIF Reverse bitmap GIF Metafile WMF Reverse metafile WMF Corrections Internal data format ANT CBL OTH and AMP Measurement Comma separated values CSV Results Key Path File Rename 2 5 6 3 Sort Allows you to view your saved files according to a selected file attribute See Sort on page 133 for more information Key Path File Rename 2 5 6 4 Name Displays the Alpha Editor and enables you to enter the file name you want to rename the file to The numeric keypad can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed Complete your entry by pressing Return or Enter See Name on page 143 for more information NOTE Only capital letters A Z and digits 0 9 may appear in file names 8 characters maximum Additionally file names include a 3 digit extension which is automatically set by the instrument 154 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File Key Path File Rename 2 5 6 5 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Rename 2 5 6 6 Dir Select Displays the highlighted directory See Dir Select on page 135 for more information Key Path File Rename 2 5 7 C
6. gt These hardkeys are disabled within the SEM measurement as the features in the menus are unavailable E KH I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices sdey nuan puawansea uoyng 3u0 Suoioun jueuieinsee A uoyng 3uo sde nuaw Spurious Emissions Measurement Meas Setup Key Meas Setup Setup If measurement chosen is Spurious Emissions Rvg Number 10 On Off 6 1e deu2 Y Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe902a L g Rvg Mode Exp Repeat Range Table SS Meas Type Examine Full Spur H Ref Level 0 00 dBm On Off Fast Spurious Meas On Off Range Table Range 1 On Off Start Freq 1 92000000 GHz Stop Freq 1 98000000 GHz Res BH 1 20000000 MHz Video BH 1 20000000 MHz Sweep Time 1 000 ms Auto an More 1of2 Range Table Range 1 On Off Rbs Start Limit 50 00 dBm Rbs Stop Limit 50 00 dBm Auto Man Peak Excursn 6 00 dB Pk Threshold 90 00 dB More 2 of 2 T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan 1uauieJnseay uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw
7. 7 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP Remote Command SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe Example ACP FILT 1 ACP FILT 5 6 12 Filter Alpha Press Filter to input the alpha value for the RRC Filter This parameter is available when 3GPP W CDMA NADC or TETRA has been selected as the Radio Std from the Mode Setup menu Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 22 when W CDMA is selected 0 35 when NADC or TETRA is selected otherwise Off Knob Increment 0 01 Step Key Increment 0 1 Range 0 01 to 1 0 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC ALPHA lt number gt SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC ALPHA Example ACP FILT ALPH 0 22 ACP FILT ALPH 5 6 13 Noise Correction Pressing Noise Correction turns noise correction on or off When you set Noise Corr to On a calibration of the noise floor is performed and used to correct for analyzer noise floor contribution to measurement levels increasing dynamic range Noise Correction is unavailable if signal tracking is on or when the radio standard is set to NADC or PDC when the measurement method is set to RBW Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument
8. 0 0 00 00 cc eee eens 575 STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle number 515 STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle eee 575 STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition number 576 STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition 0 0 0 0 0 0 ees 576 STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition number 576 STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition 000 eee 576 STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt eee cee e 575 STATus QUESUuonable CONDition 6 0 R K r RR R KR dienes areca OY RR henge en RRR eben 573 STATus QUEStionable ENABle number 573 STAT QUE Stionable KN 5 Ne wer ede EEN KEE ER eX aita Fick i opa cos kb Rs 573 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition 000000 eee tees 576 24 List of Commands STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt cnumber gt ssnananan unnan aenneren 577 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle 0 0 ees 577 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt number gt ssns sssaaa nrn non 577 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition cc teens 577 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition number 578 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition 0 0 0 000 ccc eens 578 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt 0 0 0 cece ne 577 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition cc eens 578 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle number 578 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle 2 0 0 0 00 cee eens 578 STATus QUEStionab
9. PSC PSC Power on Status Complete SAV register Save Instrument State SRE number SRE Service Request Enable STB Read Status Byte Query TRG Trigger a Sweep Measurement TST Self test Query WAI Wait to Continue STATus Commands Operation Registers STATus OPERation lt keyword gt Operation Condition Query Operation Enable Operation Event Query Operation Negative Transition Operation Positive Transition Preset the Status Bytes STATus PRESet Status Registers STATus QUEStionable lt keyword gt Chapter 7 559 Cc o 5 a La gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E I E KA 2 ky 3 S Lr 7 o L Lei f N D Using the STATus System Status System Commands STATus Commands Questionable Condition Questionable Enable Questionable Event Query Questionable Negative Transition Questionable Positive Transition Calibration Registers STATus QUEStionable CALibration keyword Questionable Calibration Condition Questionable Calibration Enable Questionable Calibration Event Query Questionable Calibration Negative Transition Questionable Calibration Positive Transition Frequency Registers STATus QUEStionable FREQuency lt keyword gt Questionable Frequency Condition Questionable Integrity Enable
10. pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 376 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Trace View Burst Power 5 9 Trace View Burst Power If Burst Power has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate Trace View menu for the burst power measurement Displays menu keys that enable you to set how trace information is stored and displayed Key Path Front panel key Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 5 9 1 RF Envelope Press RF Envelope to view the measurement results as shown in the following figure The results are updated after each sweep Meas Setup Rvg Number DHL Ch Freq 1 GHz Trig RF B 18 Burst Power Bluetooth i NNI On Off Center 1 000000000 GHz fivg Mode Exp Repeat Atten 6 dB Average Type Log RMS Threshold Lvl 3 00 dB Abs Rel Meas Method Measured Burst Hidth Burst Width 369 1 ps Auto Man VBH 50 MHz Amplitude Threshold Current Data Output Par Max Pt i Optimize 11 50 dBm 11 39 dB 4 28 dB Ref Level G Ej i WA E Ki ps El D H E bi 3 bi E T E El 7 GA Ej Ki Key Path Trace View History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Chapter 5 377 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Burst Power 5 9 2 Combined Pressing Combined
11. 0 eee eee 515 Using an Option Mode Optimize your GSM output RF spectrum switching measurement 515 Using an Option Mode Avoid using RFBurst trigger for single burst signals 515 Using an Option Mode When making power measurements on multiple bursts or slots use CALCulate DATAcH COM Press jeu ek id Lees Ra EEG AE E AE E EAS AER 516 Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes 000 cece eee eee eee nee eees 519 Across PSA Modes Command Subsystem Similares ccc eee eee 519 Across PSA Modes Specific Command Differences 0 00 aae 521 Using Applications in PSA Series vs VSA E4406A lees 522 Using the LAN to Control the Instrument 524 Using tip for Wile Transters 22222224 x Re 28540 6494 eR RO8 RUE KO RUE CRESCE ADR OR a 524 Using Telnet ta bend Commands jas ced dd ie dows ROCK R he CR Qe N 527 Using Socket LAN to Send Commandes 530 Using SICL LAN to Control the Instrument 531 Using HP Agilent VEE Over Socket LAN 536 Using a Java Applet Over Socket LAN 538 Using a C Program Over Socket LAN 538 General LAN Troubleshooting AN NEIER eaa ak XR EE A E CO AE RC 538 Programming imn G Using the YTL aR RR 2686S AE i OEN CA EC REG RCNH AE 546 Typical Example Program Contents Re WISEN RSR A RSR WENN E beeen 546 Contents y zZ oO o O o kl E E M CLs ET EE EE 547 b Compiling and Linking a VTL Program 547 Exacnle E EE 549 Includi
12. Get Device I Advanced I O Config Direct 1 0 OK Cancel Help Save Config cance Help H lo I 200 Auto Scale Frequency that device and fill in the SCPI commands click on Start and you re talking to the HP 871xE via SICL LAN Select the HPIB device that you want to use from Instrument Manager of I O menu add Direct 1 0 for ote You must set up an HP VISA SICL io Libraries for your HP VEE Ready To send SCPI commands to the instrument select I O Instrument Manager and the GPIB device just added Select Direct I O You can now type SCPI commands in the command window and they are sent over the LAN to your instrument Controlling Your Instrument with SICL LAN and Agilent BASIC for Windows Before you can use Agilent BASIC for Windows with SICL LAN you need to set up VISA SICL LAN I O drivers for use with your BASIC applications Consult your BASIC documentation for information how to do this To set up SICL LAN for BASIC add the following statement to your AUTOST program all on a single line LOAD BIN GPIBS DEV lan analyzer IP address GPIB name TIME 30 ISC 7 Replace analyzer IP address with the IP address of your instrument GPIP name with the GPIB name given to your instrument and 7 with the logical unit number For example the following LOAD statement should be added to your AUTOST program for the parameters list
13. ey ad sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan File Key 6 of 6 See page 127 Tyoe 1 t09 8 191deu2 Used for Catalog Copy Rename and Delete Type 2 T Type Type RII Corrections Trace Measurement Results Limits Screen More More 1of 2 2of2 pe861a Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Used for Load Type Type Corrections Trace Limits Used for Save Type 3 Type Type Corrections Measurement Trace Results Limits Screen More More 1of2 2of2 I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices zz eBed ees 9 Jo Je aid s s jeuy wnoadg sde nuan 8 1e deu2 S09 T FREQUENCY Channel Key See page 163 FREQUENCY Channel pe862a Freg Channel Center Freq 13 2550000 GHz Start Freq 10 0000000 MHz Stop Freq 26 5000000 GHz CF Step 2 64900000 GHz Auto an Freq Offset 0 00000000 Hz Signal Track On Off A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function sis Jeuy winayeds sdejy nue 91 eBed ees Aen jeuueu A9Nano3u3 sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 909 8 191deu2 Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Input Output Key See pa
14. nsen 59 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 2 0 0 eee eee 59 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel 0 0 cence 49 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing LINear LOGarithmic 54 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing unana 54 BS i Pawel ig di owe ea eee ee Geb bee ida epee ee eed eee eee ba 306 PETC BPOWERAN 124 db arua eda epa ebbe de back era pee ee ee EGRE E Rb p EE doe 320 Pun oe nen Ch Orel ob Ser qd dui d bad d c Ba SE ud bd Ee 303 19 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands EBETDCICEHPowor DEINSHIT s Lesage bog eee Eee eee She Gp PIG Redde dd drip 303 ARGUE i EE 303 FETCh HARMOonics AMPLitude ALL EEN R R RRR RRR hh e hehe 316 FETCh HARMorics AMPLit de n T ssec T RRR R ATE RR Ry RR HEEN HER RO UR E YR PRA RS 316 FETCHHARMonies FREQuoney ALL iua ak oo a OC ee RACER ke K N 316 FETCrHaARMonice RE Queney EE 317 PR Ch HAR Monice UN Dementall cs stand ae L 0 RB REGERE RR PG RAO ARR SEED N 317 SFETCB EABMoncsEDISTor onl 22x2emat m e EE dE EE dE AE E e E RT 316 PE he Eeler i e depo edd des o eR eg CR dee E ea Rete dee eee 317 ACLS ade E u MN RM E 310 Ke wi TONE obzdeda ded tede pado d dux bas dud aad Dems ISONE c Rog 310 EE BUE Su boues dabei adeunda bdo dud ped abet ee bi edenda ppc qd te sees 311 IFETCILOBWEERBOIT iuoc4usestikkbe ke 9 REEL AE AE AER OG NAT RE SERRE Y Eu AER E 9 304 PET
15. 262 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 5 1 GPIB Address Shows the current GPIB address and allows you to change this value using the numeric keyboard The new value is displayed in the active function area The GPIB port is always active The knob and step keys are not active for this function Key Path System Config I O State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default 18 Reset by System Restore Sys Defaults E Terminators Enter 5 Default Terminator None E Resolution Rounding 3 Truncation Integer S H Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 Range 0 to 30 Remote Command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess integer SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 20 4 8 5 2 IP Address Allows you to set the IP internet protocol address domain name and node host name for the instrument The IP address of the instrument can be changed by entering a numeric address composed of numbers and decimal points Press ENTER to complete the entry Key Path System Config I O State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Default 199 199 199 199 Not reset by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SELF IP lt string gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SELF IP Chapter 4 263 N LI
16. Chapter 5 417 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion 5 16 6 5 Video BW Video BW is used to set the video bandwidth of the analyzer When Auto is selected the analyzer determines the optimum setting while Man enables you to determine the setting Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset Auto Knob Increment Steps through the available video bandwidth filters Step Key Increment Steps through the available video bandwidth filters Range Video bandwidth range of your analyzer History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command This parameter can send up to 10 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 selects the mode SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo lt integer gt The query for this parameter will always return 10 values SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo 5 16 6 6 Sweep Time Sweep Time is used to set the sweep time of the analyzer If the range is z
17. Delete Correction A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function sis Jeuy uingjoedsg sdejy nue N Edit Rmplitude 2 dB Delete Point 6p eBed ees z Jo y eje s A FGNLMdWV sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis 26S 8 191deu2 Auto Couple Key 1 of 3 See page 71 RUTO COUPLE In Auto Couple Ruto RII FFT amp Sweep Auto Beste FF T amp Sweep Dynamic Range PhNoise Opt Fast Tunng Kl PhNoise Opt Auto Man Detector Normab Detector Auto Man Avg VBW Type LE Log Pwr Video e d Avg VBN type Auto Man ADC Dither off ADC Dither Auto Man ADC Ranging Autorange K ADC Ranging Best S N pe849a i A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function T A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan LZ eBed ees c jo Aay ejdno2 ony 8 1e deu2 6S Auto Couple Key 2 of 3 See page 71 PhNoise Opt FFT amp Sweep EP Optimize Avg VBH type Detector l Avg VBW Type FFT amp Sweep A
18. Instrument Functions M O Marker volts For example when the percent ratio with Y axis units in volts is 2096 0 2 the percent ratio with Y axis units in watts will be 4 0 2 0 04 When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether you are in log dB or linear percent e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od c o E 5 AL 7 E 178 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker Marker functions Marker Noise and Band Intvl Power the display shows the values with units that are dependent on the function and the Y axis units Refer to the individual function descriptions for more details about the units used When you read the value out remotely you have to know what the expected units are Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE POSition DELTa BAND SPAN OFF CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE Sets or queries the marker control mode see parameter list above CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X lt param gt Sets the marker X position to a specified point on the X axis in the current X axis units frequency or time If the frequency or time chosen would place the marker off screen the marker will be placed at the left or right side of the display on the trace This command will have no effect if the marker is OFF CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X Queries the marker X position in the current x axis units The marker must be ON for the response to be valid SENSe MARKer 1
19. List of Commands AD Dulate LLIN GAL DELO Li uud ee g hee eee heehee de dra d E rd wq 122 CALCulsate LLINGCMODe FIXed RELAUIVG 5 00554 0 8 8 evade RARE terk tE RR RR E RR Reden 121 iCALGCulate LLINeCMODe een duis ANE deen i e ke ok EEN RE REES EXE E A RES S 121 CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain FREQuency TIME 0 0 e eee eee 120 AL Culate LLIN CON rol DON SIN oc joy sows ch we hee Eob NOEL de es 120 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear 119 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE 0 0 cece eee ene 119 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear 119 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE 0 0 00 119 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA x axis lt ampl gt lt connected gt lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 109 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA MERGe lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt 0 cee eee eee eee 109 JR ERI EE EIN TE IZDATA T 109 i CALGCulate LLINe 1I 2 DR Lere cros sr cae sc hm Ro Rer EG hk Re ERO RRR AER H 116 CALColate bEINeD Z DESPIS uo essent Ga due er e ev RO ever en eae Co ede Re 111 CALCU b TEE HE EE S cock ka bae RE Ca E Lr een doo x opa decks icd een 111 VM SER E EE RRE JS EF cC p PLE 111 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin ampl reis 113 CALCulate LLINe 1 2
20. One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion potential errors due to VSWR Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE 420 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Trace View Harmonics 5 17 Trace View Harmonics If Harmonic Distortion has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate Trace View menu to view the harmonic measurement results Displays menu keys to view the harmonic measurement results in two views Harmonic and Harmonic amp THD Key Path Front panel key History Modified with firmware revision A 03 00 Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 17 1 Harmonics Press Harmonics to view the measurement results in numeric form Key Path Trace View 5 17 2 Harmonics amp THD Press Harmonics amp THD to view the measurement results in numeric form as well as the total harmonic distortion THD displayed as a percentage and as a dB value e p s D Key Path Trace View Gd z 3 Agilent 13 33 30 Jun 7 2002 Meas View 5 Z Ch Freq Harmonics D Harmonic Distortion E Harmonics S amp THD bi 4 dBm Atten n E O E E 7 VBH 2 kHz Amplitude Amplitude 5 85 dBn d Trace Chapter 5 421 One Button Measurement Functio
21. Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum RIGHt Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH selects marker 2 and moves it to the next peak to the right 4 1 3 Next Pk Left Moves the marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker The peak must meet the defined peak excursion and threshold limits Peaks that are less than 1 of the current span away from 0 Hz are ignored If no valid peak is found an error No Peak Found is displayed Press ESC to clear this message before attempting another search Also see the Peak Excursn and Pk Threshold key descriptions Key Path Peak Search State Saved Not part of saved state Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum LEFT Example CALC MARK2 MAX LEFT selects marker 2 and moves it to the next peak to the left 4 1 4 Min Search Moves the active marker to the minimum detected amplitude value on the current trace 210 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search Key Path Peak Search State Saved Not part of saved state Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MINimum Example CALC MARK MIN selects marker 1 and moves it to the minimum amplitude value 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E Tl E E 1 E a U LI N Chapter 4 211 N A a o E 9 G E ra m c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search 4 1 5 Pk Pk Search Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency or time if in
22. SENSe RADio STANdard PACKet Example RAD STAN PACK DH1 5 3 2 4 Band Class This function is only available when you have selected the standard IS 95C It enables you to select the band class Key Path Mode Setup Std Setup Factory Preset US K or Cell History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard BAND CLASs BCO BC1 SENSe RADio STANdard BAND CLASs Example RAD STAN BAND CLAS BCL 5 3 3 Retain Params Enables you to retain the base instrument parameter settings used by individual measurements that are typically lost when switching between measurements When Retain Params is set to Off the values of the fully configurable parameters saved and recalled during a measurement change When Retain Params is set to On the fully configurable parameters will be saved and recalled during a measurement change along with Span Ref Level Single Cont Detector Avg VBW Type Points and if applicable Spectrum Bar Combined and Graticule On Off 342 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode NOTE When Radio Std or Radio Std Setup is changed Retain Params is set to Off Once Retain Params has been set to Off parameters will no longer be retained and any settings you may have entered will be lost el i U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 343 2 E Q D L
23. WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Key Path Display Factory Preset n a Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic STORe REFerence Example CALC PST STOR REF Chapter 5 385 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 11 3 Ref Trace Press Ref Trace to toggle the reference trace display function between On and Off Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Remote Command DISPlay PSTatistic REFerence STATe OFF ON O 1 DISPlay PSTatistic REFerence STATe Example PST REF 1 PST REF 5 11 4 Gaussian Trace Press Gaussian Line to toggle the Gaussian line display function between On and Off Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Remote Command DISPlay PSTatistic GAUSsian STATe OFF ON O0 1 DISPlay PSTatistic GAUSsian STATe Example PST GAUS 1 PST GAUS 5 11 5 Preferences Displays the menu key that enables you to turn the graticule and annotation on or off Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset No title Fundamental Units N A History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 386 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Fu
24. o 3 3 E io Tl E E Q E 3 bi E cE o Chapter 6 555 Programming Fundamentals Overview of the GPIB Bus o c o E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a 556 Chapter 6 Using the STATus System Le o EJ Q Se gt oO D gt La Hd o lt Hd 4 oO E Using the STATus System When you are programming the instrument you may need to monitor instrument status to check for error conditions or monitor changes You can determine the state of certain instrument events conditions by programming the status register system IEEE common commands those beginning with access the higher level summary registers To access the information from specific registers you would use the STATus commands E I E KA 2 ky 3 S Lr 7 o lt Ld Lei f N D This chapter includes s A list of the commands e Instructions on using the commands Complete command descriptions 558 Chapter7 Using the STATus System Status System Commands Status System Commands IEEE Commands CAL Calibration Query CLS Clear Status ESE number ESE Standard Event Status Enable ESR Standard Event Status Register Query IDN Identification Query OPC Operation Complete Command OPC Operation Complete Query OPT Option Information Query RCL register Recall Instrument State RST Reset the Instrument
25. Consider using LAN instead of GPIB on page 514 There are additional things you can do to run faster if you are using a measurement personality option i e instrument Modes other than the standard Spectrum Analysis Mode These considerations only apply to specific option modes Using an Option Mode Minimize the number of GPIB transactions on page 514 Using an Option Mode Avoid automatic attenuator setting on page 515 Using an Option Mode Optimize your GSM output RF spectrum switching measurement on page 515 Using an Option Mode Avoid using RF Burst trigger for single burst signals on page 515 Using an Option Mode When making power measurements on multiple bursts or slots use CALCulate DATA lt n gt COMPress on page 516 Turn off the display updates DISPlay ENABle OFF turns off the display That is the data may still be visible but it will no longer be updated Updating the display slows down the measurement For remote testing since the computer is processing the data rather than a person there is no need to display the data on the analyzer screen D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b Chapter 6 511 un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Use binary data format instead of ASCII The ASCII data format is the instrument default since it is easier for pe
26. Measurement Results Available Command n Results Returned Condition CONFigure SEMask N A Not Applicable INITiate SEMask FETCh SEMask n n 1 or not Returns 60 scalar results in the following order MEASure SEMaskIn specified READ SEMask n 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Absolute power at the center frequency Using Total Power reference area dBm Reference 3 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 4 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 5 Peak frequency in the center frequency reference area Hz 6 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 7 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 8 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 9 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 10 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 11 Relative power on the negative offset A dBc 12 Absolute power on the negative offset A dBm 13 Relative peak power on the negative offset A dBc 14 Absolute peak power on the negative offset A dBm 15 Peak frequency in the negative offset A Hz 16 Relative power on the positive offset A dBc 17 Absolute power on the positive offset A dBm 18 Relative peak power on the positive offset A dBc 19 Absolute peak power on the positive offset A dBm 20 Peak frequency in the positive offset A Hz 21 Relative power on the negative offset B dBc o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E
27. Ref Lvl Offset 0 00 dB Y Axis Units Int Preamp On Off Corrections K Ext Amp Gain 0 00 dB Atten Step 2 dB 10 dB More 2 of 3 More 3 of 3 A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T t A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings 6p abed ees z jo Aay eje s A 3anirdiiv sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 Les AMPLITUDE Y Scale Key 2 of 2 See page 49 Corrections User Corrections Corrections DEE bud On Off Corrections 1 Freq inter Off Yes No Log in fintenna Off Edit Cable Graf Other or User or Delete All Corrections Delete Moe ew More Correction 1of2 2 of 2 pe853a T Other Correction On Off Edit Cable On Correction Off Edit Antenna Correction On Off Edit Frequency 300 MHz Delete Correction Edit Delete Correction d Edit
28. Remote Command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVe1 OFFSet rel power in dB DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Example DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 12 7 Sets the Ref Level Offset to 12 7 dB The only valid suffix is dB If no suffix is sent dB will be assumed 2 0 9 Int Preamp Option 1DS only Turns the internal preamp on and off The preamp functions over a frequency range of 100 kHz to 3 GHz When the preamp is on an automatic adjustment compensates for the gain of the preamp so that displayed amplitude readings still accurately reflect the value at the analyzer input connector The preamp is switched off for frequencies above 3 GHz and the correction is not applied even though the PA annotation remains on screen For signal frequencies below 100 kHz the preamp is not automatically switched out but signal amplitude roll off occurs even in the DC setting of the RF Coupling control The gain of the preamp is nominally 30 dB PSA or 20 dB ESA Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale Dependencies Couplings Reference level Attenuation State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Off Remote Command SENSe POWer RF GAIN STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe POWer RF GAIN STATe Example POW GAIN 1 POW GAIN 2 0 10 Corrections Accesses the Corrections menu keys that allow you to enable the corrections function and to Chapter 2 59 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c
29. SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution freq freq up to five values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS 1 You may only enter valid Res BW filter frequencies Refer to Res BW on page 83 466 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Example SEM OFFS LIST BAND 40 kHz or SEM OFFS LIST BWID 40 kHz SEM OFFS LIST BAND or SEM OFFS LIST BWID SEM OFFS LIST BAND AUTO 0 or SEM OFFS LIST BWID AUTO 0 SEM OFFS LIST BAND AUTO or SEM OFFS LIST BWID AUTO el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 467 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E O One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 22 4 Meas BW Enables you to specify the bandwidth to use when measuring the offset When using the front panel only the currently selected offset is affected All the offsets are affected when using the remote command This is the multiplier applied to the resolution bandwidth to
30. Span RBW 106 Ruto Man i A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices i S6S A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function sis Jeuy uingjoedsg sdejy nue eg oDed eos lav BAy Mg sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 96S g 1e1deu2 Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Det Demod Key See page 95 Det Demod j Det Demod Detector Detector Normal Auto Man Average Log RMS V Negative Peak pe854a A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices c6 oDed aac foy pouegneg siskjeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 26S T Display Key 1 of 2 See page 103 Display Lp If no measurement is chosen Meas Off Selected Display Note The menus under Display are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe908a Full Screen Display Line 25 00 dBm On Off Limits Limits gt Act Fctn Posn Active Fctn Position Center Top gt Title Change Title Clear Title LK Aloha Editor 3 Title Preferences Graticule On Off Preferences gt A dagg
31. You can select a unique trigger source for each mode Each trigger source can have unique settings for the its delay level and polarity 522 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes Command PSA Series VSA E4406A A 04 00 VSA E4406A A 05 00 AUTO ON OFF control and setting manual values We recommend that you set a function s automatic state to OFF before you send it your manual value Some functions will turn off the automatic mode when you send a specific manual value but others will not This also varies with the instrument model We recommend that you set a function s automatic state to OFF before you send it your manual value Some functions will turn off the automatic mode when you send a specific manual value but others will not This also varies with the instrument model We recommend that you set a function s automatic state to OFF before you send it your manual value Some functions will turn off the automatic mode when you send a specific manual value but others will not This also varies with the instrument model Chapter 6 523 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi D D un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument
32. o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E O One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 22 2 Meas Type Displays a menu where you can select a measurement reference type Total Pwr Ref or PSD Ref Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset Total Pwr Ref Remote Command L SENSE SEMask TYPE TPRef PSDRef SENSE SEMask TYPE Example SEM TYPE TPRef or SEM TYPE PSDRef SEM TYPE 5 22 2 1 Total Pwr Ref When Total Pwr Ref is selected the power in the carrier is used as the reference in computing the relative power values for the offsets Key Path Meas Setup Meas Type Readback Reads back Total Pwr Ref to the Meas Type key History Updated with firmware revision A 03 00 5 22 2 2 PSD Ref When PSD Ref is selected the mean power spectral density of the carrier is used in computing the relative power spectral density values for the offsets Key Path Meas Setup Meas Type Readback Reads back PSD Ref to the Meas Type key Factory Preset On Auto History Updated with firmware revision A 03 00 5 22 3 Ref Channel Accesses the menu of keys that enable you to change the reference channel settings Key Path Meas Setup 458 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 22 3 1 Chan Integ BW Specifies the integration bandwidth used in calculating the power in the main ch
33. s MAXimum sets the parameter to the largest possible value The numeric value for the function s MINimum MAXimum or DEFault can be queried by adding the keyword to the command in its query form The keyword must be entered following the question mark Example query SENSE FREQ CENTER MAX Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics Variable Parameters freq bandwidth time seconds voltage power lt ampl gt lt rel_power gt lt rel_ampl gt lt angle gt lt degrees gt lt integer gt lt real gt lt percent gt lt string gt lt bit_pattern gt Chapter 6 Is a positive rational number followed by optional units The default unit is Hz Acceptable units include HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ Is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are seconds Acceptable units include S MS US Is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are V Acceptable units include Volts V MV UV Is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are dBm Acceptable units include DBM DBMV W Is a positive rational number followed by optional units The default units are dB Acceptable units include DB Is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are degrees Acceptable units include DEG RAD An integer value has no units Is a floating point number with no units Is a rational num
34. 1 S C On 3 515 4 000 30 00 26 00 26 00 Couple 30 00 30 00 1 S D On 4 000 8 000 1000 0 13 00 13 00 Couple 30 00 30 00 1 6 E On 8 000 12 500 1000 0 13 00 13 00 Couple 30 00 30 00 1 a Fail Mask is set to Absolute and Rel Stop is set to Couple 462 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Table 5 3 Offsets amp Limits Defaulted for W CDMA 3GPP Mobile Station Measurements Offset Start Stop ResBW Abs Abs Rel Rel Rel Meas Freq Freq kHz Start Stop Start Stop Couple BW MHz MHz dBm dBm dBc dBc A On 2 515 3 485 30 00 71 07 11 07 85 23 49 78 Man 1 B On 4 000 7 500 1000 0 55 84 55 84 35 50 39 00 Man 1 C On 7 500 8 500 1000 0 55 84 55 84 39 00 49 00 Man 1 D On 8 500 12 000 1000 0 55 84 55 84 49 00 49 00 Couple 1 E Off 12 500 15 000 1000 0 55 84 55 84 49 00 49 00 Couple 1 a Abs Stop is set to Couple and Fail Mask is set to Abs AND Rel Table 5 4 Offsets amp Limits Defaulted for 802 11a and HiperLAN 2 Radio Standards Offset Start Stop Abs Abs Abs Rel Rel Rel Meas Freq Freq Start Stop Couple Start Stop Couple BW MHz MHz dBm dBm dBe dBo A On 9 00 11 00 16 00 4 00 Man 0 00 20 00 Man 1 B On 11 00 20 00 4 00
35. 12 00 Man 20 00 28 00 Man 1 C On 20 00 30 00 12 00 24 00 Man 28 00 40 00 Man 1 D On 30 00 50 00 24 00 24 00 Couple 40 00 40 00 Couple 1 E Off 50 00 100 00 24 00 24 00 Couple 40 00 40 00 Couple 1 a Sweep Time is set to 100 mseconds Res BW is set to 100 kHz and Fail Mask is set to Rel Table 5 5 Offsets amp Limits Defaulted for 802 11b Radio Standard Offset Start Stop Abs Abs Rel Rel Meas Freq Freq Start Stop Start Stop BW MHz MHz dBm dBm dBo dBo el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 A On 11 00 22 00 10 00 10 00 30 00 30 00 1 B On 22 00 50 00 80 00 30 00 50 00 50 00 1 C Off 50 00 10 00 80 00 30 00 50 00 50 00 1 D Off 70 00 90 00 30 00 30 00 50 00 50 00 1 E Off 90 00 100 00 30 00 30 00 50 00 50 00 1 a Sweep Time is set to 100 mseconds Res BW is set to 100 kHz Fail Mask is set to Rel and Abs Stop and Rel Stop are both set to Couple Chapter 5 463 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 22 4 1 Offset Selects the offset pairs upper and lower that the menu keys affect and displa
36. 5 2 1 Restart This function restarts a previously paused measurement at the beginning If the current measurement is still in process it will stop it as soon as possible and restart it from the beginning Key Path Front panel key It can also be found under Meas Control Remote Command INITiate RESTart Remote Command Notes This command is equivalent to sending an ABORt command followed by an INITiate IMMediate command See Abort the Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only on page 331 for more information Example INIT REST 5 2 2 Measure Switches the analyzer between triggering the current measurement sweep continuously or triggering a single measurement The front panel Single key also puts the analyzer in single measurement mode Key Path Meas Control State Saved Save Factory Preset Continuous Chapter 5 329 O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T E 3 bi 7 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Control Remote Command Use INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON See SWEEP on page 241 Remote Command Notes This command affects sweeping when in the SA mode It affects measurements when a measurement has been selected from the MEASure command subsystem s When ON at the completion of each trigger cycle the trigger system immediately initiates another
37. Allows you to write a title across the top of the display Press Change Title to access the Alpha Editor Menus that contain available characters and symbols You may also use the numeric keypad to enter numbers Press Enter or Return to complete the entry Press ESC to cancel the entry and preserve your existing title The display title will remain until you press Change Title again or you recall a trace or state ora Factory Preset is performed A title can also be cleared by pressing Title Clear Title Pressing this key cancels any active function Key Path Display Title State Saved Saved in instrument state Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA lt string gt DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA Example DISP ANN TITL DATA This Is My Title 122 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 6 2 Clear Title Allows you to clear a title from the front panel display Once cleared the title cannot be retrieved Key Path Display Title Factory Preset No title Remote Command There is no equivalent command but the example below shows how to enter an empty title Example DISP ANN TITL DATA TEST 3 2 4 7 Preferences Accesses menu keys which allow you to turn the graticule and annotation on or off Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset and RST No title Factory Default n a History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 2 4 7 1 Graticule On Off Pressing G
38. Amplitude values are in amplitude units separated by commas ASCII format requires more memory than the binary formats Handling large amounts of this type of data takes more time and storage space Integer 32 Binary 32 bit integer values in internal units dBm in a definite length block Real 32 or 64 Binary 32 bit or 64 bit real values in amplitude units in a finite length block Transfers of real data are done in a binary block format 160 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File A definite length block of data starts with an ASCII header that begins with and indicates how many additional data points are following in the block Suppose the header is 512320 s The first digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits bytes there are in the header The 12320 means that 12 320 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your selected data format bytes point either 8 for real 64 or 4 for real 32 In this example if you are using real 64 then there are 1540 data points in the block State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Survives Preset but not power cycle Powers up in ASCII format Remote Command FORMat TRACe DATA ASCii INTeger 32 REAL 32 REAL 64 UINTeger 16 FORMat TRACe L DATA Remote Command Notes Corrected Trace Data Types for TRACe DATA lt trace_name gt Data Type Result ASCii Amplitude Units
39. C is not an actual disk drive but an area of nonvolatile flash memory which is presented as though it were a disk drive The internal analyzer drive I is used for instrument firmware and optional measurement personalities It is not available for data file storage Key Path File Remote Command MMEMory CATalog dir name gt Remote Command Notes Query returns all files in the specified drive path name The return data will be in the format mem used mem free lt file listing Each file listing indicates the name and size in bytes of one file in the directory list in the form lt file name file size gt for example a file called SCRENOOO GIF which is 21286 bytes in size would list as SCRENO00 GIF 21286 Directories are indicated by square brackets for example MYDIR All files are listed without regard to the preferences selected for the file catalog on the analyzer screen If you use lowercase characters they are converted to uppercase in interpreting catalog commands Example MMEM CAT C MYDIR MYMEAS E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E 130 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 1 1 Type Allows you to select the desired type of instrument data files to be displayed Common types of instrument data files include trace data limit line data and amplitude correction data See File Types on page 127
40. E E 3 Im E 7 E Instrument Functions A L Display Factory Preset 25 dBm Off Factory Default 25 dBm Off Terminators dBm mV uV Range 370 dBm to 30 dBm Remote Command DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe lt ampl gt DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe Example DISP WIND TRAC Y DLIN 32 dBm DISP WIND TRAC Y DLIN STAT OFF 2 4 8 Display Line Activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference line The line has an amplitude value that corresponds to its vertical position relative to the reference level The value of the display line appears on the left side of the display below the label D1 The display line can be adjusted using the step keys knob or numeric keypad The units of Display Line are determined by the Y Axis Units setting under Amplitude Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 25 dBm Off Factory Default 25 dBm Off Terminators dBm mV uV Range 370 dBm to 30 dBm Remote Command DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe lt ampl gt DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe Example DISP WIND TRAC Y DLIN 32 dBm DISP WIND TRAC Y DLIN STAT OFF 104 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display 5 D zt E c 3 3 Tn c
41. Example TRAC MODE MAXH 4 9 5 Min Hold Maintains the minimum level for each trace point of the selected trace 1 2 or 3 and updates each trace point if a new minimum level is detected in successive sweeps NOTE Pressing Restart changing the vertical scale Amplitude Scale Type Log or Lin or turning averaging on BW Avg Average On restarts the held trace Key Path Trace View History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command See Trace View on page 283 Example TRAC MODE MINH Chapter 4 285 Instrument Functions P Z Trace View 4 9 6 View Holds and displays the amplitude data of the selected trace The trace is not updated as the analyzer sweeps Key Path Trace View Trace History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command See Trace View on page 283 Example TRAC MODE VIEW 4 9 7 Blank Stores the amplitude data for the selected trace and removes it from the display The selected trace register will not be updated as the analyzer sweeps N 1 a 2 E Q E O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Key Path Trace View History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command See Trace View on page 283 Example TRAC MODE BLAN 286 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Trig 4 10 Trig Displays menu keys that enable you to select the trigger mode of a sweep or measurement Whenina trigger mode other than Free Run the analyzer will
42. FREQUENCY Channel Range Model Minimum Maximum E4440A 1Hz 27 0 GHz E4443A 1Hz 7 2 GHz E4445A 1Hz 13 7 GHz E4446A 1Hz 44 5 GHz E4448A 1Hz 51 0 GHz Remote Command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement freq SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement 7 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON FREQ CENT STEP 500 MHz FREQ CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz FREQ CENT STEP FREQ CENT STEP AUTO 2 6 5 Freq Offset Enables you to input a frequency offset value to account for frequency conversions external to the analyzer This value is added to the display readout of the marker frequency center frequency start frequency stop frequency and all other absolute frequency settings in the analyzer When a frequency offset is entered the value appears below the center of the graticule Offsets may only be entered using the numeric keypad not the knob or step keys To eliminate an offset perform a Factory Preset or set the frequency offset to 0 Hz This command does not affect any bandwidths or the settings of relative frequency parameters such as delta markers or span It does not affect the current hardware settings of the analyzer but only the displayed frequency values Offsets are not added to the frequency count readouts Entering an offset does not affect the trace display Key Path
43. G E ra m c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search 4 1 9 3 Peak Search Sets the mode for Peak Search to either Max or Param and applies to Peak Search only e Max Maximum mode places a marker on the highest peak whenever a Peak Search is performed s Param Parameter mode searches only for peaks that meet the values set with Peak Excursn and Pk Threshold Key Path Peak Search Search Param State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Maximum Factory Default Maximum Remote Command CALCulate MARKer PEAK 1 2 3 4 SEARCh MODE PARameter MAXimum CALCulate MARKer PEAK 1 2 3 4 SEARCh MODE Remote Command Notes If mode is set to MAXimum Max peak search will place the marker at the maximum amplitude in the trace If mode is set to PARameter Param peak search will place the marker at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error error 202 is issued The following commands are not affected by the setting of CALC MARK PEAK SEAR MODE They will always use the parameter search mode that defines peaks based on peak excursion and peak threshold CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum LEFT CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum NEXT CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum RIGHt CALCulate MARKer PEAK TABLe STATe OFF
44. Preset on page 221 for more information Key Path System Power On Preset State Saved Survives preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Remote Command SYSTem PON TYPE PRESet LAST SYSTem PON TYPE Example SYST PON TYPE LAST defines the power on type as the last state the analyzer was in before power was turned off SYST DON TYPE Chapter 4 249 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a N E 2 O E 2 LL E o E E E s 7 E Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 2 2 Preset Type Enables you to select what type of preset will be initiated when you press the green Preset key or send the remote command using SYST PRES Choose between Factory Mode or User defined presets Key Path System Power On Preset State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but is not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Preset Does not change the Preset Type Factory Default Mode Remote Command SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER MODE SYSTem PRESet TYPE Remote Command Notes SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE defines the user preset Example SYST PRES TYPE FACT defines the type of preset as the factory preset 4 8 2 2 1 User Sets the preset type to User When you do a preset the instrument state that you have defined as the user preset setting will be restored Use
45. Questionable Calibration Condition STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Calibration Enable STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle number STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register which also sets the Calibration Summary bit bit 8 in the Questionable Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Example STAT QUES CAL ENABLE 16384 could be used if you have turned off the automatic alignment and you want to query if an alignment is needed Factory Preset 3276 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Calibration Event Query STATus QUEStionable CALibration EV ENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register Chapter 8 575 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem The register requires that the ass
46. Time Date System Key 2 of 4 See page 247 Config 0 Color Palette 819 8 191deu2 pe875a K Alignments ck Align Subsys Config 1 0 L Color Palette Time Date S GPIB NO Align RF T Address Default Time Date Qn ert Off 18 On Off i IP Address e Align All Now Align IF tl 499 1969 199 199 Vision Impair 1 m EUER Align Subsys Align ADC Host Name Aloha Editor 2 Vision Impair 2 Set Time dade 182544 Align Current Subnet Mask z gt T Optical Filter Set Date IF Flatness 255 255 0 0 ecPILEN p 20010102 Gateway SCPI Telnet di uc T Rddress Port 5023 Monochrome y 0 0 0 0 On Off SCPI Socket SCPI LAN K Port 5025 On Off Restore Align SICL Server Defaults On Off A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function Lyc oDed ees y jo Aay uejs g sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 619 System Key 3 of 4 See page 247 EE Pvyr n Preset Diagnostics Licensing gt PwrOn Preset m Preset Type Diagnostics Licensing Reference Freq Re
47. Une Button Measurement Functions SPAN X Scale Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 25 SPAN X Scale Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Activates the Span function for the SEM measurement and displays the menu of span functions Key Path Front panel key State Saved Saved in Instrument State Remote Command See the Scale Div Ref Value and Ref Position commands below 5 25 1 Scale Div Allows you to enter a numeric value to change the horizontal display sensitivity by setting the frequency units per horizontal graticule division To determine full display frequency span multiply the frequency span per horizontal graticule division by 10 This function is only available when you select Spectrum Emissions Mask from the Measurement menu Key Path MEASURE Spectrum Emission Mask SPAN X Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 2 50000000 MHz History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 25 2 Ref Value Press Ref Value to set the frequency represented by the selected horizontal graticule line on the display the reference The current value is indicated by Ref Value in the upper left corner of the display You can change the reference value using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad You can set the reference line location using the Ref Position setting This function is only available when you select Spectrum Emissions Mask from the Measurement menu Key Path MEASURE Spectrum Emission Mask SPAN
48. 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN TETR 5 3 1 14 W LAN Accesses the W LAN radio standards key menu to enable you to select a W LAN standard Selecting a radio standard modifies spectrum analyzer settings for the CHP or CCDF measurement activated under the MEASURE menu 5 3 1 14 1 802 11a Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard 802 11a This standard is only available for the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 338 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Example RAD STAN WL802DOT11A 5 3 1 14 2 802 11b Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard 802 11b This standard is only available for the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 0
49. 2 3 4 X POSition lt param gt Sets the marker X position to a specified point on the X axis in display points values of 0 to 600 or the current number of points in the sweep The marker must already be on SENSe MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition Returns the current marker X position in display points CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 Y Queries the marker Y value or delta in the current y axis units Can also be used to read the results of marker functions such as Marker Noise The marker must be ON for the response to be valid Remote Command Notes The CALC MARK PEAK SEARC MODE MAX PAR command specifies how a peak is identified for use with the marker commands See Peak Search on page 218 Example CALC MARK MODE POS selects marker 1 and sets it to Normal CALC MARK2 X 20 GHZ selects marker 2 and moves it to 20 GHz Marker 2 must first be turned on Chapter 3 179 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O O 1 E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Iz s 7 E Instrument Functions M O Marker 3 1 1 Select Marker Selects one of the four possible marker or marker pairs Once a marker is selected it can be set to any of the control modes Normal Delta Delta Pair Span Pair or Off Key Path Marker State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Marker 1 Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CA
50. 2 5 2 4 Save Now Executes the save function While the file is being saved the popup message Saving file followed by Reading directory is displayed After a successful save the text message xxxxxx file saved where xxxxxx is the file name appears in the status line Once you have used the File Save Save Now keys to setup and save a file the Save hardkey will perform an immediate Save Now of your file in the same format and to the same location The analyzer will pick a filename for you based on the table below The in the auto generated file name represents a three digit number which the analyzer has chosen to be the lowest number in the current sequence that does not conflict with an existing file name The number starts at 000 with a new analyzer or after the installation of new firmware and counts up with each attempted Save After a Restore Sys Defaults the number will start at a number that may be lower then the lowest number of the file the currently saved files The number counts up with each attempted Save but will skip the numbers already in use and not over write existing files If you want to enter your own file name refer to Name page 143 for additional information Type Auto Generated Extension File Name State STATE STA Trace TRACE TRC or CSV Screen SCREN GIF or WMF NOTE Never remove the floppy disk during a save operation To do so could corrupt all d
51. 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls EI LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 9 Query Trace Data Remote Command Only This command queries trace data from the specified trace The data format is set by the command FORMat TRACe DATA When ASCII format is selected the data is comma separated ASCII values Real or Integer format uses a definite length block of data The number of trace points returned is set by SENSE SWE POIN from 101 to 8192 Remote Command TRACe DATA TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 LLINE1 LLINE2 Remote Command Notes Commands MMEM STOR TRAC and MMEM LOAD TRAC are used to transfer trace data to or from the internal hard drive or floppy drive of the instrument The query returns the current values of the designated trace The data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt for GPIB that is newline or linefeed followed by EOI set true for RS 232 this is newline only Example TRAC DATA TRACE1 2 5 10 Move Data to a File Remote Command Only This command loads a block of data in the format lt definite_length_block gt into the instrument memory location lt file name gt The query form of the command returns the contents of the file identified by lt file name gt in the format of a definite length block of data The query can be used for copying files out of the analyze
52. 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale select which set of correction factors you wish to modify These frequency amplitude corrections will be applied to the displayed data to correct for system losses gains outside the analyzer Four different sets of correction data can be stored Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command for this key A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Ld c 9 E 5 x a E 60 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 10 1 Apply Corrections Pressing Apply Corrections Yes turns on the amplitude correction factors Corrections will only be applied for the sets of correction factors whose correction state is set to On To turn a set of correction factors on use the Correction On Off key in the Antenna Cable Other or User menus Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Annunciation Annotation When Apply Corrections Yes is selected an A will appear in the screen annotation on the left edge of the display whether or not a correction set has been turned on using the Correction On key in the Antenna Cable Other or User menus State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset No Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe Remote Command Notes To turn On or Off an individual correction s
53. 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Chapter 5 443 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Remote Command SENSe MCPower LIMit STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower LIMit STATe Example MCP LIM ON MCP LIM 5 19 10 RRC Filter Pressing RRC Filter turns the Root Raised Cosine filter on or off for the carriers and all adjacent channels The RRC filter is the type specified in the 3GPP W CDMA standards with roll off a Filter Alpha parameter defined below T is set to 1 Carrier Integ BW for carriers or 1 Offset Integ BW for Offsets Key Path Meas Setup More Key Notes This key is not available when Meas Setup Method RBW is selected State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC STATe Example MCP FILT 1 MCP FILT 5 19 11 Filter Alpha Press Filter to input the alpha value for the RRC Filter This parameter is only available when 3GPP W CDMA or None has been selected as the radio standard from the Mode Setup menu Key Path Meas Setup More State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 22 when W CDMA is selected otherwise Off Range Off On History Added with firm
54. 84 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO ORRIONTIOIT 84 SENSe BANDwidth BW TD LRE Solution AUTO ee eee 84 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution lessen 84 SENSe BPOWer AVERage COUNt integer 371 Et NSaEB CUSGICAVREBARERU OL NT iudici td E pibe a aae dea dd Kao iden 371 SENSe BPOWer AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat 0 0 00 cee eee 372 SENSe BPOWer AVERage TCONYol 0 0 R RRR R RRR RRR R RR A RR hs 372 SENSe BPOWer AVERage TYPe LPOWer POWer 0 0 cece eee eee 372 SENSE BPO WorAVE Rage EE 373 SENSe BPOWer AVERage STATe OFF ON O 1 0 eee eee eee 371 SENSe BPOWer AVERage STATe en eese ke e Rb dees RR RE aes e beeen 371 SENSe BPOWer BURSt AUTO OFF ON 0O 1 0 0 eee ee eee 375 SENSE BPO Wer BURSHAUUTO sc ecwiwe pi eb lee Pei E Ege Ra d ole kx paci poe po ee 375 SEIN Get Fee BURSE WIDTH viccrneleier ieee edd E EC NEE EEN ose whee 375 B lt ae 3 TES E BREMER MEET 375 30 List of Commands SENSe BPOWer METHod THReshold BWIDth 0 0 cece ee 374 PESE SSLHBPOWQIMEPHOQ pisos ques ndo dd RE dria E dea die qc B pene dic maces 374 SENSeT BPOWer THReshold lt number gt sins dees eae ey uh yy pare us 373 SENSe BPOWer THReshold TYPE ABSolute TREI atve eee ee eee 373 ESENSeD BPOWerTHBeshol TYPE prii jess iwc Ge nee ped eww hie ows RO ERROR 373 SENSE DREN EE 373 SENSe C HPower AVERage COUNt
55. A L NOTE The front and rear panel features along with the numeric keypad and alpha numeric softkey fundamentals are illustrated and described in your Getting Started guide l l lt o E Q O E E LL EZ E o E EJ E KA E 48 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Activates the Reference Level function and displays the Amplitude menu keys These functions control how data on the vertical Y axis is displayed and corrected and control instrument settings that affect the vertical axis 2 0 1 Ref Level Enables you to adjust the absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display the reference level Ref in the upper left corner of the display indicates the current value The Amplitude Y Axis Units setting determines the Reference Level units To change the reference level use the front panel step keys knob or numeric keypad Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale Dependencies Couplings If you reduce the Attenuation setting the analyzer may have to lower the Reference Level to maintain the proper level at the top of the screen If you then increase Attenuation the Reference Level does not increase to its previous value When the input attenuator is auto coupled Attenuation Auto its setting may be affected by changes in the reference level setting See Attenuation on page 50 Reference level is affected by Attenuation Preamp Ext Amp Gain Reference
56. Channel display 5 D o E c 3 D 5 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI r Chapter 2 169 Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY Channel Dependencies Couplings Signal Track is turned off when you do any of the following 1 Preset is pressed with Preset Type set to Factory 2 Markers All Off is pressed Signal Track is not available when any of the following is true 1 Signal ID on 2 Span 0 Hz 3 Frequency scale type Log 4 Segmented sweep on The following features are not available when Signal Track is on 1 Signal ID 2 Segmented sweep 3 Log sweep State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe Example CALC MARK1 TRCK ON turns on Signal Track using Marker 1 CALC MARK1 TRCK LI lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 170 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Input Output 2 7 Input Output Displays the keys that control some of the signal inputs and outputs of the analyzer 2 7 1 Input Port Brings up a menu of input signal sources the most common one being the front panel RF Input port Key Path Input Output State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset RF Remote Command SENSe FEED RF AREFerence EMIXer SENSe FEED Example FEED AREF selects the 50 MHz amplitude
57. Copy Rename More 1of 2 File gt Delete All Create Dir Create Dir Delete All Now Create Dir Now Name Aloha Editor 2 Delete Alb Dir Up More 2of2 Dir Select s s jeuy winajeds sdejy nue zz eed ees 9 Jo ey ad sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua 009 8 191deu2 File Key 2 of 6 See page 127 i Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Catalog Type State Sort Lp Type 1 E Dir Up Dir Select pe857a A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings gt Sort zz eBed ees 9 Jo Je aid siskjeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 L09 File Key 3 of 6 See page 127 Load Load Load Now Type a 7 b State NL Tyoe 3 E Sort ZI Sort 5 Destination Delete B C Delete Delete Now Type State gt f Sort x When Type lt Trace Dir Up Dir Select Destination pe859a Otherwise Destination is greyed out When Type Limits Source Limit 2 Dir Up Dir Select Copy Type 1 Sort X L mi Copy Copy
58. E T E El 7 GA Ej Ki Chapter 5 427 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Intermod TOI Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example TOIN RANG AUTO ONCE TOIN RANG AUTO o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 428 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP 5 19 Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP If the MCP measurement has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the MCP measurement setup menu The Multi Carrier Power measurement is a measure of the power in two or more transmit channels and of the power that leaks into their adjacent transmit channels The results reported are similar to the adjacent channel power measurement but the setup is different to allow for two or more carriers present Key Path Front panel key Dependencies Couplings Parameter defaults change depending on the Radio Standard selected e Sweep time is coupled to span RBW and VBW if the measurement method is set to IBW History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 19 1 Avg Number Pressing Avg Number to On enables you to specify the number of measurements that will be averaged when calculating the measurement result The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Setting Avg Numbe
59. E E c CH o e LI a NOTE Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL on the default resource manager and then for each device you will be using The following is a summary of sessions that can be opened e Aresource manager session is used to initialize the VISA system It is a parent session that knows about all the opened sessions A resource manager session must be opened before any other session can be opened e A device session is used to communicate with a device on an interface A device session must be opened for each device you will be using When you use a device session you can communicate without worrying about the type of interface to which it si connected This insulation makes applications more robust and portable across interfaces Typically a device is an instrument but could be a computer a plotter or a printer All devices that you will be using need to be connected and in working condition prior to the first VTL function call viopenDefaultRM The system is configured only on the first viOpenDefaultRM per process Therefore if viOpenDefaultRM is called without devices connected and then called again when devices are connected the devices will not be recognized You must close ALL resource manager sessions and re open with all devices connected and in working condition Device Sessions There are two parts to opening a communications session with a specific device First you must
60. E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals Overview of the GPIB Bus Overview of the GPIB Bus An instrument that is part of a GPIB network is categorized as a listener talker or controller depending on its current function in the network Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from other instruments Any number of instruments in the GPIB network can be listeners simultaneously Talker A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to other instruments To avoid confusion a GPIB system allows only one device at a time to be an active talker Controller A controller is an instrument typically a computer capable of managing the various GPIB activities Only one device at a time can be an active controller GPIB Command Statements Command statements form the nucleus of GPIB programming They are understood by all instruments in the network When combined with the programming language codes they provide all management and data communication instructions for the system Refer to the your programming language manual and your computers I O programming manual for more information The seven fundamental command functions are as follows e An abort function that stops all listener talker activity on the interface bus and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller Typically this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known starting
61. If a marker is already enabled it must be placed at the signal peak before activating this function Presel Center only functions when measuring signals 22 85 GHz in band 1 and higher bands The instrument is in band 1 or higher when the stop frequency is 3 GHz NOTE If the signal is noise like the algorithm will not function properly For analyzers with a frequency range greater than 26 5 GHz there are two preselectors microwave band and millimeter bands To create an adjustment value for both the user must setup and request a Presel Center in a microwave band then set up and request a Presel Center in a millimeter band With Input Mixer Ext selected and the Mixer Type set to Presel preselected Presel Center adjusts the frequency of the external preselector filter to maximize the amplitude at the active marker frequency Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale Remote Command SENSe POWer RF PCENter Remote Command Notes This command has no effect if it is invoked in a non preselected band or the active marker is less than 3 GHz Example POW PCEN 54 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 6 Presel Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response on the signal of interest This function is only available when measuring signals 22 85 GHz in band 1 and higher bands For analyzers that have both millimeter wave and microwave types of bands E
62. If local file is unspecified ftp uses the remote file name as the local file name help Provides a list of ftp commands help command Provides a brief description of command image Sets the file transfer type to binary led ocal directory Sets the local working directory to local directory ls remote directory Lists the contents of the specified remote directory If the remote directory is unspecified the contents of the current remote directory are listed mget remote file local file Copy remote file to the local system If local file is unspecified ftp uses the remote file name as the local file name mput local file Copies ocal file to remote file If remote file is unspecified remote file ftp uses the ocal file name as the remote file name put ocal file Copies ocal file to remote file If remote file is unspecified remote file ftp uses the local_file name as the remote file name quit Closes the connection to the host and exits ftp 526 Chapter 6 NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Using Telnet to Send Commands Using telnet to send commands to your instrument works in a similar way to communicating over GPIB You establish a connection with the instrument and then send or receive information using SCPI commands If you need to control the bus using device clear or SRQ s you can use SICL
63. Menu Maps One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Menu Maps 7 E e OD E gt LH 652 Chapter 9 Index Symbols LRN 564 RST 45 Numerics 10 dB step 68 10 MHz Out key 270 2 dB step 68 3GPP W CDMA key 335 488 2 IEEE commands 563 802 11a key 338 802 11b key 339 802 11g key 339 A absolute limit 493 495 Absolute Limit key 493 495 ACP Meas Setup menu 629 Trace View menu 630 ACP key 305 Activate key 277 ADC dither automatic 79 off 80 on 80 ADC Dither key 79 ADC ranging automatic 80 bypass 80 81 ADC Ranging key 80 adjacent channel power key 305 measurement 305 measurement setup 351 adjacent channel power measurement measurement setup 371 trace 367 viewing trace 367 Agilent Technologies URL 2 align now 568 Align ADC key 259 Align All Now key 257 Align Current IF Flatness key 259 Align Current SysGain key 261 Align IF key 258 Align RF key 258 Align Subsys key 258 aligning ADC 259 align all 257 automatic align 255 IF 258 IF flatness 259 RF 258 subsystems 258 system gain 261 alignment functions 279 alignments time corrections 262 Alignments key 255 268 All key 131 All Traces key 142 alpha 401 alpha editor menu map 588 589 Amplitude key 115 amplitude reference 171 amplitude Y scale menu map 590 591 AMPLITUDE Y Scale front panel key 49 Amptd Interp key 119 Amptd Ref key 171 angle param
64. Model Serial number Firmware version For example Agilent Technologies E4440A US00000123 B 02 02 for PSA Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Remarks An in the firmware revision information indicates that it is proto firmware Front Panel Access System Show System Instrument State Query LRN This command is not implemented Other commands are available for 564 Chapter8 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands returning the LRN data Use IDN to return the instrument model number serial number and firmware version Use the SAV RCL commands to save and then return the instrument state information Operation Complete OPC OPC The OPC command sets bit 0 in the standard event status register to 1 when pending operations have finished It does not hold off subsequent operations The OPC query stops new commands from being processed until the current processing is complete Then it returns a 1 and the program continues This query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus The instrument does not wait for completion of all processes for these commands The processes that are monitored are identified in the STATus OPERation register These include PSA Process posui Byte Value Calibrating 0 1 Sweeping 3 8 MEASuring not in all 4 16 modes Waiting for trigger 5 32 For example if you want to verify the
65. Offset Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 00 dB Default Terminator dB Range 200 dB to 200 dB Chapter 5 357 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 358 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP Remote Command CALCulate ACPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA rel power rel power rel power rel power rel power rel power CALCulate ACPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA Example CALC ACP OFFS LIST LIM POS DATA 10 10 10 10 10 10 CALC ACP OFFS LIST LIM POS DATA 5 6 4 5 Neg Offset Limit Enables you to set the upper limit for the lower segment of the specified offset pair Key Path Meas Setup Offset Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 00 dB Default Terminator dB Range 200 dB to 200 dB History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command CALCulate ACPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA rel power rel power gt lt rel power rel power rel power rel power CALCulate ACPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA Example CALC ACP OFFS LIST LIM NEG DATA 50 50 50 50 50 50 CALC ACP OFFS LIST LIM NEG DATA 5 6 5 Meas T
66. PHNoise Opt key phase noise optimization 76 pinging the analyzer 542 Pk Threshold key 216 496 Pk Pk Search key 212 Point key 114 Points key 244 Portrait key 231 Pos Offset Limit key 357 power toggling internal preamp 59 Y Axis Units 56 dBm 57 dBmV 57 dBuV 57 volts 57 watts 58 power averaging 89 power condition register 583 584 585 Index 7 Index power on preset 248 Power On key 249 Power On Preset key 248 power parameter variables 507 power spectral density 362 power stat CCDF Gaussian line display 386 power statistics CCDF measurement interval 382 number of sampling points 382 reference trace display 386 Store reference trace 385 power on time 281 power on status clear IEEE command 566 preamp internal 59 Preferences key 386 479 Presel Adjust key 55 Presel Center key 54 preselector adjusting 55 preselector center 54 Preset factory 224 mode 224 power on 248 user 222 preset 566 factory 251 menu map 612 mode 251 saving 225 252 status registers 573 user 250 preset defaults LAN 539 Preset front panel key 221 Preset Type key 250 Previous Page key 248 print aborting 227 Print front panel key 227 Print Setup front panel key 229 printer color 234 color capability 230 compatibility 229 eject page 232 language PCL8 229 PCL5 229 language PL3 PL5 230 orientation 231 landscape 231 portrait 231 Index 8 paper size 23
67. RRC Filter T 1 000ms Deeds AbsORRel t 75 0000 kHz measurement On Off Auto an i Puto an Res BW Rel Stop Total Pwr Ref t Filter Alpha T 30 00kHz T 30 00 dBc T 74 30 d3 de Puto Man Couple Man futo Man imi Meas BN s Optimize t Integ Bl Fail Mask p Ref Leve ty Res BW Absolute More More More More Be Lof2 E 2 of 20 i Letz gt 2 of 2 Meas Type This key will be Total Pwr Refkey title will be Total Pwr Refor PSD Ref depending on currently selected Meas Type greyed out and set to PSD Ref when Radio Std 802 1 1a pened 802 1 1b or HiperLAN 2 I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function 6 191deu2 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Trace View Key Trace View If measurement chosen is Spectrum Emission Mask 6 1e3deu2 y Integrated Note The menus under Power Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe904a I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices D suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan uawansea uonng eug suoljaun4 jueuiensee y uoyng 3u0 sde nuaw Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Display Key Dis
68. Spur is enabled no longer greyed out A marker added set to the frequency of the worst spur All active ranges are measured Upon completion the measurement is set to the idle state The message No Spurs is displayed All active ranges are measured and the found spurs are reported Upon completion the measurement is set to the idle state The trace of the last active range is displayed Measurement continually cycles through all active ranges All active ranges are measured and the found spurs are reported On each cycle of the active ranges the report on spurs found is reset This ensures that remote queries retrieve the trace data that matches the currently displayed results Meas Setup Factory Preset Examine Range Examine Full Chapter 5 Saved in instrument state 497 O E T D Le ch ech E bi D a E bi 3 bi E m T E EJ iv El 7 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions Remote Command SENSe SPURious TYPE EXAMine FULL SENSe SPURious TYPE Remote Command Notes n a Example SPUR TYPE FULL 5 27 5 Spur Enables you to view any spurs that have been found The measurement sets the analyzer to the range in which the currently selected spur was found The range settings changes on
69. System 4 8 System Displays the System menu keys to control overall System functions This is also the GPIB LOCAL key Pressing System after the analyzer has been placed in the remote GPIB mode returns it to the local mode and enables front panel control During GPIB operation R appears in the upper right corner of the display indicating the instrument is in Remote mode A T L or S may appear during remote operation indicating Talk Listen or Service request Pressing the System Local key removes the R symbol in the upper right corner Symbol Description 2 R Remote E El T Talk 7 S L Listen a S Service Request S v N Key Path Front panel key Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 1 Show Errors Accesses a display of the last 30 errors reported The most recent error will appear at the top of the list The first error listed will be the first error removed if the error list is longer than 30 entries If the same error message occurs several times the error message will be incremented rather than added to the list as a new error message If there is more than one of the same type of error the date and time identify the first time and the last time an error occurred and the number of identical errors is shown NOTE A continuous recurring error reappears in the queue even if it had been cleared Key Path System Annunciation Annotati
70. Temperature Registers STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature lt keyword gt Questionable Temperature Condition Questionable Temperature Enable Questionable Temperature Event Query Questionable Temperature Negative Transition Questionable Temperature Positive Transition Chapter 7 561 Cc o 5 a zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 Using the STATus System Status System Commands E LG E KA gt ky 3 S LE 7 o L D GA D 562 Chapter 7 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands Common IEEE Commands These commands are specified in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Numeric values for bit patterns can be entered using decimal or hexidecimal representations i e 0 to 32767 is equivalent to H0 to H7FFF See the SCPI Basics information about using bit patterns for variable parameters Calibration Query CAL Performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful A one is returned if any part of the alignment fails The equivalent SCPI command is CALibrate ALL Front Panel Access System Alignments Align All Now Clear Status CLS Clears the status byte It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits in all of the event regist
71. This key only effects display of date at the top of the screen not in the file catalog Key Path System Time Date State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default MDY Restored by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat MDY DMY DISPlay ANNotation CLOCK DATE FORMat 7 Example DISP ANN CLOC DATE FORM DMY 4 8 3 3 Set Time Enables you to set the time of the real time clock Enter the time in 24 hour HHMMSS format Key Path System Time Date Chapter 4 253 N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z System Dependencies Couplings None State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default Not affected by Restore Sys Defaults Terminators Unitless Default Terminator None Range Hour HH 00 to 23 Minute MM 00 to 59 Second SS 00 to 59 Remote Command SYSTem TIME hour minute second SYSTem TIME Example SYST TIME 12 42 00 Sets the clock to 12 42 00 PM 4 8 3 4 Adjust Time Setting Remote Command Only Adjust the instruments internal time by the value entered Key Path System Time Date SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Terminators No units are allowed with the command Def
72. Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Refer to the function description chapters for information about configuring the instrument input output settings from the front panel Use the SYSTem commands to change settings remotely Remember that in any type programming using LAN you should avoid constantly opening and closing connections This uses up processing resources adds to your system overhead and can cause problems with asynchronous implementation of successive commands When you are sending the instrument multiple commands open the connection send all the commands and close the connection e Using ftp for File Transfers on page 6 524 e Using Telnet to Send Commands on page 6 527 e Using Socket LAN to Send Commands on page 6 530 e Using SICL LAN to Control the Instrument on page 6 531 e Using HP Agilent VEE Over Socket LAN on page 6 536 e Using a Java Applet Over Socket LAN on page 6 538 e Using a C Program Over Socket LAN on page 6 538 e General LAN Troubleshooting on page 6 538 Using ftp for File Transfers You can use the instrument LAN connection to transfer files For example you can use the ftp functionality to download instrument screen dumps to an external server The following is an example of an ftp session from an MSDOS window on a PC 1 ftp 141 88 163 118 enter the instrument IP address found set from the front panel by pressing System Config I O
73. and will compile with Java compilers versions 1 0 and above This program is also on the documentation CD ROM that shipped with your product Using a C Program Over Socket LAN The PSA Measurement Guide and Programming Examples book contains two examples of simple LAN socket programs They are written in C One compiles in the HP UX UNIX environment and one is written for the WIN32 environment In UNIX LAN communication via sockets is very similar to reading or writing a file The only difference is the openSocket routine which uses a few network library routines to create the TCP IP network connection Once this connection is created the standard fread and fwrite routines are used for network communication In Windows the routines send and recv must be used because fread and fwrite may not work on sockets You may need to enable the termination character attribute when using the VISA libraries for socket communication If the termchar attribute is disabled then no termination character is sent with the data and the bus will time out waiting for it Set vi_attr_termchar_en General LAN Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Initial Connection on page 6 538 e Common Problems After a Connection is Made on page 6 540 e Pinging the Instrument from a Computer or Workstation on page 6 542 s EIA TIA 568B Wiring Information on page 6 544 Troubleshooting the Initial Connection Getting the inst
74. cdma2000 1xEV DO settings to the defaults Averaging is turned on and set to 10 The instrument is put in single measurement mode It does not initiate a measurement Use Command ME Noise ge Noise W CDMA GSM EDGE Keeser NADC PDC Modes CONFigure Accesses the measurement Accesses the measurement measurement and sets the instrument and sets the instrument settings to the defaults If you were already in single measurement mode it takes one measurement and then waits If you were in continuous measurement mode it means that every error status bit change that has occurred will be returned with a ESR query You must set the value of ESE to choose only the bits status that you want returned INIT IMM to make one continues to measure measurement ESE default Default is 255 which Default is 0 which means that none of the error status bit changes that have occurred will be returned with a ESR query You must set the value of ESE to choose the bits status that you want returned recalling traces TRIGger For these modes only one For these modes a unique commands trigger source can be trigger source can be selected and it will be selected for each mode common across the modes Also each trigger source Also only one value can be can have unique settings set for the trigger delay for the its delay level and level or polarity polarity Saving and Traces can only be sav
75. lack of 528 Edge Freq key 354 EDGE measurement 335 Edit key 114 editing amplitude 115 connecting points 116 deleting limits 116 deleting points 116 frequency 115 limits 114 115 points 114 116 Eject Page key 232 Enable All Measurements key 344 error handling 557 error messages 542 error monitoring 567 571 errors clearing 248 connecting remotely 539 connection refused 541 connection timed out 541 displaying 247 file moving copying 540 LAN troubleshooting 538 no response from host 541 packets lost 540 timeout 539 event status byte enable and read 563 event status enable IEEE command 563 event status register query and clear 564 Example term 45 expanding display screen 385 479 Ext Amp Gain key 68 Ext Front key 289 Ext Rear key 289 Index 3 Index external amplifier gain 68 F factory defaults 261 LAN 539 Factory key 251 Factory Preset key 224 Factory Preset term 45 fail mask condition absolute limit 472 absolute limit AND relative limit 472 absolute limit OR relative limit 472 relative limit 472 Fast Spurious Test key 499 fast spurious testing 499 faster measurements display off 125 FETCh commands 299 FFT 74 FFT amp Sweep key 72 73 74 FFTs Span key 75 file all 131 catalog 130 copy 151 copy now 151 corrections 133 delete 147 delete now 149 format 139 limits 133 load now 144 menu map 599 600 601 602 603 604 n
76. menu contains a key for each loaded application Please refer to the documentation for the specific application you are using for these menus coz eed ees Aen IQON siskjeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 LLO Peak Search Key See page 209 Peak Search Note This key is disabled if the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement is chosen pe869a Peak Search Peak Search Search Param Next Peak Continuous Pk On Off Peak Excursn 6 00 dB Next Pk Right Pk Threshold 90 00 dBm Next Pk Left Search Param Peak Search Param Max Min Search Pk Pk Search Mkr gt CF More More 1of2 2of2 s s jeuy unagjoedsg sdejy nue 60z a6ed eec lay uo1eeg yeag sis jeuy unjjoeds sde nuan CL9 8 191deu2 Preset Key See page 221 Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis preset If System selection of Preset Typeis Factory or Mode this key immediately performs mode setup or a full factory If System selection of Preset p Type isUser Preset then this menu appears Preset pe870a User Preset Be Saves state for all modes Mode Preset Factory Preset Save User Preset Lec eBed ees Lou 1esaJd sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan Print Setup Key See page 229 PRINT SETUP 8 1e deu2 P
77. query returns the current measurement name 298 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Fetch Commands FETCh lt measurement gt n This command puts selected data from the most recent measurement into the output buffer Use FETCh if you have already made a good measurement and you want to return several types of data different n values e g both scalars and trace data from a single measurement FETCh saves you the time of re making the measurement You can only FETCh results from the measurement that is currently active it will not change to a different measurement If you need to get new measurement data use the READ command which is equivalent to an INITiate followed by a FETCh The scalar measurement results will be returned if the optional n value is not included or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster then the ASCII format FORMat DATA FETCh may be used to return results other than those specified with the original READ or MEASure command that you sent INITiate Commands INITiate lt measurement gt This command is not available for measurements in all the instrument modes
78. ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 134 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 1 2 3 By Extension Sorts and displays the current file catalog in alphabetical order by the file extension of the file names for example TRC STA Key Path File Catalog Sort 2 5 1 2 4 By Size Sorts and displays the current file catalog by the size of the files Key Path File Catalog Sort 2 5 1 2 5 Order Changes the order of the display of the current file catalog Up sorts the files in ascending order A to Z 1 to 9 while Down sorts in descending order Z to A 9 to 1 Key Path File Catalog Sort 2 5 1 3 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Catalog 2 5 1 4 Dir Select Selects the drive or directory that is highlighted on the display You can use the up and down arrows to select and highlight the desired drive or directory If the top entry in the catalog has a indication you are in a subdirectory and this key acts the same as the Dir Up key When you are at the top directory level this key moves up to the drive level Key Path File Catalog Chapter 2 135 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 a E a gt LI P 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrume
79. terminating with one of the unit keys shown Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 1 00e5 Range 1e3 to 1e9 History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe PSTatistic COUNts integer SENSe PSTatistic COUNts Example PST COUN 1 0e6 PST COUNt 5 10 3 Meas Interval Press Meas Interval to specify the time interval over which the measurement is made The minimum setting is 100 us The maximum setting depends on the measurement bandwidth setting but never exceeds 600 ms The resolution is 1 us Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 1 0ms Default Terminator s Range 100 us to 600 ms History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 382 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Remote Command SENSe PSTatistic SWEep TIME lt time gt SENSe PSTatistic SWEep TIME Example PST SWE TIME 1 0e 3 PST SWE TIME 5 10 4 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There will always be a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset n a Range n a History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe PO
80. un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics Parameters in Commands There are four basic types of parameters booleans keywords variables and arbitrary block program data OFF ON 0 1 Boolean keyword Units Variable 506 This is a two state boolean type parameter The numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON The numeric values of 0 or 1 are commonly used in the command instead of OFF or ON Queries of the parameter always return a numeric value of 0 or 1 The keywords that are allowed for a particular command are defined in the command syntax description Numeric variables may include units The valid units for a command depend on the variable type being used See the following variable descriptions The indicated default units will be used if no units are sent Units can follow the numerical value with or without a space A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric format The appropriate range of the variable and its optional units are defined in the command description The following keywords may also be used in commands but not all commands allow keyword variables s DEFault resets the parameter to its default value s UP increments the parameter s DOWN decrements the parameter MINimum sets the parameter to the smallest possible value
81. unteger 00 eee 68 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation STEP INCRement 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 68 POE Niel E AE WEE 50 35 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands SENSe POWer RF GAIN STATe OFF ON 0 1 2 cues seen Hm RR 59 pebNSeEPONSEEBFPGATNESTATSIS erriei hd pede dd mque dq ens Rae d cd BR den 59 SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer power 69 SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer seeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 69 SENSe POWerl RF MMWPADJust lt freq gt cocci cba be ee rrr RR ERR we A 55 SENSe PO Werl RFIMMW PADJust Luisa deg Go db ARE ee ew ANE TER 56 SENSe POWer RF MW PADJust reg 55 SENSe POWer RF MW PADJust 0 0 KR R RE KR RRR ee een eee ere n 55 ESE NSeEPOWerEREEPCEBENTLE 203 6 EE eave eSI Roe a RR Roo e d Robe aren ae Dede 54 SENSeE POWerEL REI RANGe AUTO ONCE Aa RRR RR RRR RRR xe RR yh x RR es 383 SENSe PSTatisticcBANDwidth BWIDth reg 381 eb N Sel PS TatisheBANDwIidth BWHDB EE AE E acea EE a dog OR kaw 381 ESENSel PoTatistetOUNts pe oi ki wed AE EE ERES ENERGY EXE GEM EO ERE GUY 382 Re 2 EE COLD NIST sq exar ee RE EE EE 382 SENSe PSTatisticcSWEep TIME time ew Ra K K R RKR R R RN K R RKR eee eens 383 LEE EN EE 383 SENSe RADio STANdard BAND CLASs BCOTBCL ees 342 SENSe RADio STANdard BAND CLASs 0 0 cece eee teenies 342 SENSe RADio STANdard DEVice BTS MS
82. 0 0 0 cece eee nee 341 SENSelRADioSTANdard DEVICE i poids Ra R eee ds da Ehe ub bia iris piak 341 R lt e ha Dicis TAN dor RUANEGRS cad rida gd ax biasre ce ba nierac eee ounces sadn 344 SENSe RADio STANdard HAMeas 0 cece mm 344 SENSe RADio STANdard PACKet DH1 DH3 DH5 0 0 00 eee eee eee 342 ESE NSEERADIG DTANdard EE 342 BR NSeT RA Da 5 TAN dard RPARams STATE dace ew ed ade eee kee ew da R 344 SENSe RADio STANdard RPARams STATe ON OTT 10 nnana 344 SENSe RADio STANdard SBWidth freq 0 0 eee eee eee ene 341 DSR N Sel RADIO STAN dard SBWidth o cc acces sic eden eR EE EIERE EE EEN E RR GR e 341 SENSe RADio STANdard SE Lect NONE IS95a JSTD IS95C GSM W3GPP C2000MC1 C2000DS C2000MC3 NADC PDC BLUEtooth TETRa WL802DOT11A WL802DOT11B WL802DOT11G HIPERLAN2 DVBT ek EE EE EECH 333 36 List of Commands ESENSeDRADIG STANdard E SERLect NN ER ENK EEN EIER ER Rak Ree RR CR eR EROS 333 SENSe ROSCillator EXTernalFREQuency value 0 0 eee eee 268 SENSe ROSCillator EXTernakFREQuency lees 268 SENSe ROSCillator OUTPut STATe OFF ON O 1 sees nRSMeRRR 270 LSENSe ROSCillate OQUIPut STATe T i jackie wh cb aGe eee bes eww hee ewe bee 270 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce DN fernallK fernal 00 ccc eens 268 LRN el OUTI SOURCE cocwgentaud ooh eee 248 e AE PA d ee dg Re a 268 SENSe SEMask AVERage COUN
83. 2 At the user name prompt enter vsa 3 At the password prompt enter service You are now in the instrument users directory and can get files from the instrument The ftp commands in the following steps may not all be available from your controller To show the ftp commands available on your system type help at the prompt To end the ftp session type quit Do not delete files from this directory Most of the files are required for 524 Chapter 6 NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument instrument operation and for the operation of optional personality modes cd userdir change to the directory where data files are saved 4 5 1s list all available files 1s 1a shows file permissions 6 bin change to the binary file transfer mode 7 get myfilename enter the file name the name is case sensitive This gets copies your file The file is copied to the location you were pointing to when you started the ftp process To query the current location enter Led include the period To change the current location enter the desired path directory location as follows lcd C my path mydir To use a web browser for this example enter ftp vsa service 141 88 163 118 userdir The Standard UNIX FTP Command Synopsis ftp g i n v server host B DataSocketBufferSize Description The tp command is used to transfer files using the File Transfer Protocol ftp
84. 227 Instrument Functions P Z Print N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 228 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Print Setup 4 4 Print Setup Displays the functions that specify a particular printer and control its output Key Path Front panel key Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 4 1 Printer Setup Enables you to define a printer by selecting its printer language and color capability Supported printers are equipped with a parallel interface A supported printer is one that accepts Printer Control Language Level 3 or 5 Your printer language can be found in its documentation or in the specifications found on the manufacturer s web page PCL3 printers include most HP DeskJet printers s PCL5 printers include most HP LaserJet printers The table below lists some current Hewlett Packard printers and their settings Printer Models Language Type Color Capable HP DeskJet 310 PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 320 PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 400 PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 670C 672C 680C 682C PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 720C 722C Windows only not compatible HP DeskJet 600C 660C 670C 680C 690C PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 820C Windows only not compatible HP DeskJet 840C 850C 870C 890C 895C PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 935C 990C PCL3 yes HP DeskJet 1120C PCL3 yes HP LaserJet 4L 4P PCL5 no HP LaserJet 5 5L 5M 5P 5MP 5N PCL5 no HP LaserJe
85. 247 Show Hdwr key 271 Show License key 278 Show System key 270 showing hardware 271 license 278 system 270 SICL LAN 531 SICL over LAN 267 Signal BW key 341 Signal Track key 168 Single front panel key 349 single measurement 329 socket LAN programming 536 with C program 538 with Java program 538 socket programming 530 sockets over LAN 266 sort by date 133 by extension 135 by name 133 by size 135 order up down 135 Sort key 133 146 149 152 154 source selecting 152 Source key 142 span 415 Span key 237 238 415 481 Span Pair key 184 span X scale CCDF menu map 615 menu map 614 SPAN X Scale front panel key 237 389 481 spectral density 362 Spectrum Analysis key 204 Spectrum Emission Mask Display menu 648 Marker menu 650 Meas Setup menu 646 SPAN X Scale menu 649 Trace View menu 647 spectrum emission mask measure setup measurement reference type 458 Spur key 498 Spurious Emissions Meas Setup menu 651 spurious test fast 499 SRQ 557 567 ST Harmonic key 410 standard event status byte enable and read 563 Index 9 Index standard event status register IEEE command 564 standards setup 341 Start Freq key 164 488 start frequencyr 488 start measurement 330 568 State file type 127 state get data 564 recalling 566 saved 45 saving 567 State key 131 State Saved term 45 states automatic detection 97 status preset 573 status
86. 3 84 MHz Terminators Hz kHz MHz GHz Default Terminator Hz Resolution Knob Increment Span 50 Step Key Increment If CF Step Auto is selected span 10 If CF Step Man is selected CF Step Range 100 Hz to 20 MHz History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Chapter 5 437 el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Remote Command SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration lt Hz gt SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration Example MCP CARR BAND 3 5MHz 2 85MHz 3 84MHz 5 19 4 Offsets Limits Displays menu keys that enable you to configure the offsets and limits for the MCP measurement Key Path Meas Setup History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 19 4 1 Offset Enables you to select the offset the menu keys will affect Press Offset until the letter of the desired offset A B or C is underlined Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Factory Preset A History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 19 4 2 Offset Freq Sets the frequency difference between the center of the uppermost carrier
87. 347 One Button Measurement Functions Restart 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 348 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Single 5 5 Single If the analyzer is in continuous sweep mode and not in a measurement Measure Meas Off pressing Single changes the sweep control to single sweep and executes a sweep after the trigger condition is met If the analyzer is already in single sweep pressing Single executes a new sweep after the trigger condition is met Some instrument settings require more than one sweep to complete the measurement see BW Avg Average or if you have selected a measurement from the functions under the MEASURE key this function sets the trigger system to be initiated only once In this case the trigger condition can be met only once and then all the necessary sweeps will be executed to make the measurement or complete the averaging function With Average on BW Avg Average On pressing Single resets the average trace and starts the average again from a count of zero Sweeps are averaged until N sweeps are then taken where N is the average number and then the sweep is halted State Saved Single sweep setting is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Continuous Remote Command INITiate IMMediate TRG Remote Command Notes Use the TRIGger SEQuence SOURce command to select the trigger source See also the Single
88. 5 e ES 5 n gt LI r Chapter 2 105 A LI lt o e 2 G E ra m c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 4 Active Fctn Position Selects the screen position for the Active Function Display Depending on the type of trace date being viewed you can move the Active Function Display position for less visual interference with your screen data Key Path Display Readback The selection of the position to display the active function Top Center Bottom reads back to line 3 of this key State Saved Not saved in instrument state survives power cycle and preset Factory Preset No effect persistent variable survives power cycle and preset Factory Default Center Pressing System Restore Sys Defaults will reset to factory defaults History Added with firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command DISPlay AFUNction POSition BOTtom CENTer TOP DISPlay AFUNCtion POSition Example DISP AFUN POS BOT 2 4 4 1 Top Displays the active function in the top left corner of the display 3k Agilent 02 18 21 Nov 8 2001 Marker Ref dBm Atten 10 dE 59 75 Select Marker Norm E g 3 A Marker 25 000000000 GHz Normal 59 75 dBm SC Delta Delta Pair Tracking Ref Ref A Span Pair pan Center Key Path Display Active Fctn Position Readback Top reads back to line 3 of this key State Saved Not saved in instrument state survives power cyc
89. 5 15 3 3 Max Hold See Max Hold on page 285 for more information 5 15 3 4 Min Hold See Min Hold on page 285 for more information 5 15 3 5 View See View on page 286 for more information 406 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Channel Power Measurement 5 15 3 6 Blank See Blank on page 286 for more information el i U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 407 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Channel Power Measurement o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 408 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion 5 16 Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion When the harmonic distortion measurement has been selected in the Measure key menu of the Spectrum Analysis Mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu Key Path Front Panel key Saved State Not saved 5 16 1 Avg Number Press Avg Number On to specify the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Range 1 to 1000 Remote Command SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt integer SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt SENSe HARMonics AVERage STATe
90. 7 Method Enables you to set the measurement method to either the integration bandwidth method IBW or the resolution bandwidth method RBW The resolution bandwidth method is most useful for measuring cdmaOne and cdma2000 signals the integration bandwidth method is preferred for other signals Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset IBW History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower METHod IBW RBW SENSe ACPower METHod Example ACP METH RBW ACP METH 360 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP el i U E E E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E m T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 361 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP 5 6 8 Total Pwr Ref Enables you to set the adjacent channel power reference to automatic or manual When set to automatic the carrier power result reflects the measured power value in the carrier When set to manual the last measured value is captured and held or may be entered by the user Relative values are displayed referenced to the total power measured in the main channel Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Auto Measured carrier power value History Adde
91. Alpha Editor ABCDEFG HIJKLMN OPQARSTU VWXYZ L Alpha Editor j The Alpha Editor 2 menu y Alpha Editor Alpha Editor is used to name files ABCDEFG abcdefg HIJKLMN hijkImn OPQRSTU opqrstu VWXYZ VN XN ZK More More m gt 1of2 2of2 Z Io shay 1oyp3 eydiy sis jeuy wnsjoeds sde nua 8 1e deu2 68S Alpha Editor Keys 2 of 2 Aloha Editor 3 The Alpha Editor 3 menu is used to change titles on the display pe847a Alpha Editor Alpha Editor Alpha Editor RBCDEFG abcdefg ir ir HIJKLMN hijkImn _ OPORSTU opqrstu K lt gt p VWXYZ V N XYZ K lTM DAZ Or XpTY LE eE T Space Space Space st m e sis Jeuy winaypeds sdejy nue Z 40 shay soupy eud y sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua 06S 8 191deu2 AMPLITUDE Y Scale Key 1 of 2 See page 49 P Corrections RMPLITUDE Y Scale pe848a Amplitude Attenuation 10 00 dB Auto Man Scale Div 10 08 dB Scale Type Log Lin Presel Center Presel Adjust 0 00000000 Hz More 10f3 H Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Amplitude Amplitude Y Axis Units dBm T Max Mixer Lv 10 00 dBm
92. Antenna Cable Other or User Edit State Saved Not part of instrument state saved in a corrections file Remote Command See Edit on page 62 2 0 10 2 2 4 Delete Point Allows you to delete the amplitude correction data for the currently selected point The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete Point again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Cable Other or User Edit Remote Command See Edit on page 62 2 0 10 2 3 Delete Corrections Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude correction set The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete again will delete the correction set Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Cable Other or User Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DELete Remote Command Notes CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSETI is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSETS is Other CSETA is User Example CORR CSET4 DEL 66 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 10 3 Freq Interp Allows you to determine how trace values are computed between points in a correction table If the linear mode is selected a straight line is used between points in the correction table f
93. BLANK oon oannnannannanan 378 TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANK ooo nnnnnanannanan 406 TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANK esses sees 448 27 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands TRACO AS MODE EE 283 ER S SME sccers pen hac dtp duda pde ark EE 369 TRAC 2 3 MODE eine AE Re RR RE EE EE ANER AE AE YET RerRERE GER ER RN 379 TRACE 2S MODE eset RO ERR PE PE ROC RHODE VIR AUR obe Ip be v ad d CER pde RURE 406 TRACAS S MODE ED DRM 448 Aa iGser 5EQuencol DELas JI 24d haw he ee A CON Ae 290 TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe OFbFIONTIOIT BI 290 TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe RRR R KA RA RRR RRR ee eee s 290 TRiGger SE Quencel DELAY oes cack EELER RR ghe WIER Ree VOR RR E PCR RR RR ken 290 TRiGger SE Quence OF FP Set Uii cessere Xa e X cC X CO KIA RR ea we 291 TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe OFkTONTIoIT a 291 TRIGger SEQuence OF ESet SEATe oc ikckucecek RRR RE ACER RR OR date a Raed RR RUE SEU 291 ER Beeler R i AAA A ER RR AEN EE AE EE AE EE ER PEG Ap d X YS 291 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe POSitive INEGatve eee 290 TAREIGSserDoEQuenco SLOPE ocu iex snn A hw ie Mak Red RR he A EN A 290 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce IMMediate VIDeo LINE EXTernal 1 EXTernal2 RFBurst 287 TERIGSerLoEQuencol SOURCE usus EA AE Rue NU REOR RODROC R RE SOR RO SCC CROR ROSE 287 TRIGg
94. CALCulate MARK r 1 2 3 4X enaa 6 K K srno tad peek dees See ee kaka x Eee 179 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer lt param gt 0 00 cece cence eee eee 185 15 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4XCENTer 2 0 0 0 ccc cc III 185 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer paramz c eee 184 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer 184 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN paramz ee 185 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN 5 lsssseeeseeeeee ee 185 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt lt param gt sleeeleeeeeeeee 182 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt 0 eee eee eee 182 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP paramz 20 0 0 cece 182 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP 0 eee eens 182 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout FREQuency TIME ITIMe PERiod 186 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout ssllueeseeeeeeeeeee enn 187 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN lt param gt 0 ccc cece eee I hn 185 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN RKR RRR R en 185 CALCO MARR e M 23 ER Lu stes wat eT ek uh ORR EOE EEN 179 VALCulate MARESSBIIZ IS YT oo ern das ERO cow dO EE 179 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET CENTer 200 0 cee eee III 197 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4
95. CCDF 381 Dos RN E aue pex Epod M HERE EE D HE EUR dE bd ddp bee ed b dpa 381 Contents 2 S E 2 9 E E EUIS oda dari uth ede 4d e pud E vp bu p X PER abdo dU d PE T EX 382 Ideas Interval WEE 382 SGK E E EE 383 Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 385 BH BPO EE P RED qq eed gsqeidarduttedbacidAbduu d aad 385 Store Rof PFAD Su ed HERE UE HEE ACE EOS ob RC RD lido SHORE REOR S ERU ee Eee 385 BEEF DESDE 2 usan Xd Ng ERA Se AV dO RE de e ida JUR o REA RR CS e ees 386 Gaussian 44 LO XVERUEPEEEY GRNOORIORG d RIOXEO EG RARO GR ES RARE RAO E X AU RRS 386 TEE La pco d Epub EE Xe ede pede E EE 386 SPAN X Scale Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 389 CIE Looati yh EA V ADEL RI BE a DEI CIC CREAR ORE de CORO AREE A SA RAE A IR det 389 Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 391 E EAE ET qose pacrapp aded ee c I HX ERR OG CE EUER doi od Cip de Ke epa e 392 Namal EE 392 15 uq 9 SIEMPRE VASE RE i QU xut baie RE d RE o REED EE 392 d CP UELUT 394 Diet PAS sabe ee xx ibis PREECE SEEMED SOLS pd o b Ora IE deca dp 394 Marker AI CT iustos uude REGES ODER DEG EE AGER gd eR dE S P GbR RUE 394 Marker X POSION 44d acp Oe dw he SOS OE he We den p ca udo d ROCCO E RC e SERE 395 Marker Y Position Remote Command Only 00 eee ene 396 Marker Maximum and Minimum Remote Command Only 397 M
96. CCDF Power Stat Measurement Meas Setup Key T Meas Setup Meas Setup If measurement L p chosen is Power Stat CCDF Meas BW 5 0 MHz Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe891a Counts 100 0 kpts Meas Interval 1 00 ms Optimize Ref Leve A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function suonouny jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan JuUswesnseay uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw FCO 6 191deu2 Functions CCDF Power Stat Measurement Trace View Key Trace View If measurement L chosen is Power Stat CCDF Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe892a I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices Meas View CCDF sde nuam 3ueuiensee uong eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw 6 1e deu2 GL Display CCDF Power Stat Measurement Display Key If measurement pe893a suonouny jueuieJnseo y UOoung au0 sde y nus Preferences Graticule On Off LN chosen is c Display Power Stat CCDF Full Screen Store Ref Trace Ref Tr
97. Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 9 1 Default Selects the factory default color palette Dependencies Couplings None Chapter 4 271 Instrument Functions P Z System Key Path System Color Palette SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None 4 8 9 2 Vision Impair 1 Selects a special color scheme to accommodate color deficient vision problems Key Path System Color Palette SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Dependencies Couplings None Remote Command There is no remote command for this key N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 4 8 9 8 Vision Impair 2 Selects a special color scheme to accommodate color deficient vision problems Key Path System Color Palette Dependencies Couplings None SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 9 4 Optical Filter Selects a special color scheme to accommodate protective goggles while viewing lasers Key Path System Color Palette Dependencies Couplings None SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 272 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System 5 D o g c 3 D 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Chapter 4 273 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 9 5 Monochrome
98. Commands MMEM STOR TRAC and MMEM LOAD TRAC are used to transfer trace data to from the internal hard drive or floppy drive of the instrument See Save Now on page 137 and Load Now on page 144 Example TRAC TRACE2 queries the analyzer for the contents of trace 2 4 9 2 Trace Determines which trace the menu keys will affect Press Trace until the number of the desired trace is underlined Key Path Trace View State Saved Saved in Instrument State for all traces Factory Preset Trace 1 is active Factory Default Trace 1 is active History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 284 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Trace View 4 9 3 Clear Write Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace and continuously displays signals during the sweep of the analyzer Key Path Trace View Remote Command See Trace View on page 283 Example TRAC MODE WRIT 4 9 4 Max Hold Maintains the maximum level for each trace point of the selected trace 1 2 or 3 and updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps NOTE Pressing Restart changing the vertical scale Amplitude Scale Type Log or Lin or turning averaging on BW Avg Average On restarts the held trace 5 D o E c 3 5 Tn c 5 e ES n 70 U N Key Path Trace View Remote Command See Trace View on page 283
99. Continuous sweep function in Sweep on page 242 and the command INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF See also the TRG command information in the STATus section Example TRG TRIG IMM G E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Chapter 5 349 One Button Measurement Functions Single 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 350 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP 5 6 Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP If the adjacent channel power ACP measurement has been selected in the Measure menu of the spectrum analysis mode this key displays the ACP measurement setup menu The adjacent channel power measurement measures the power that leaks into adjacent transmit channels Depending on the radio standard chosen from the Mode Setup menu this measurement can run in several different modes in order to measure different types of signals Key Path Front panel key History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 6 1 Avg Number Pressing Avg Number to On enables you to specify the number of measurements that will be averaged when calculating the measurement result The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Setting Avg Number to Off disables the measurement averaging Key Path Meas Setup S
100. E m o E e 59 Absolute peak power on the positive offset E dBm 60 Peak frequency in the positive offset E Hz 324 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Command Condition n Results Returned Using Power Spectral Continued Density Reference n 1 or not specified Returns 60 scalar results in the following order 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Absolute power at the center frequency reference area dBm 3 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 4 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 5 Peak frequency in the center frequency reference area Hz 6 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 7 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 8 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 9 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 10 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 11 Relative power on the negative offset A dB 12 Absolute power on the negative offset A dBm Hz 13 Relative peak power on the negative offset A dB 14 Absolute peak power on the negative offset A dBm Hz 15 Peak frequency in the negative offset A Hz 16 Relative power on the positive offset A dB 17 Absolute power on the positive offset A dBm Hz 18 Relative peak power on the positive offset A dB 19 Absolute peak power on the positive offset A dBm Hz 20
101. Ee he ee dd pA he ey etd Fade sU Red deed ee aI Gok ERR Po 201 Span ZOOM EE 238 Boll RU uoce pp RUPEE d Ro a ek AR RO E RR NU RR AULA JURO Cx ee o REO RU 238 ACPO DAD 39 Seek E REN RR RR P EON RON UE SORES cd qx s HAY dS 238 Meh ODE caasa qd pad pua qd bdo a qd I Ra gd e E du Red ed d pd oed I EEN 239 zu dul 65 2d Abie hae ee ee dere ee eo Aha ee e 241 EE lane 44 jp a ama OPE RE EA NE AE ER eR D VE ARA A ee ee AO 241 WROD 223a d 4 XP TRENT SUE RANG RINGS XN PIX EE ES 242 Judd Oe EE Red dedo oie doo eg hl pa ees 243 uu a ee eee ee ee ee Er ee ee ee ee ee 244 EE EE 247 SD EDE WEE Say eer 247 Puuwor Om E eth dab p pa Sp pd HE CRORE ROD E EK CR d EME EEN 248 jor ga ir CP 252 ASEM 2 E e ROO ER CR RE Cana oce e dA Ed E CROCO E WAR REX OUR be S oda 255 Ey a D 9 e 3 6 Contents 2 S E 2 9 E E LOEO DO adque ed EE E PTEE S E EAA INEL EE dob pap qudd pen beeen 262 Referente i EE EE EE EE EE EROR EORR REOR Eo Roo AO AUGE KR GR on 268 cae E be CE SOR EA ha C TERR CARA E def c cafe RR RR REA a Ol CRURA 270 Glue HOW 28 ese bee RAPS OSES URES SEAS OHSS EEN EOE A XC X RN qe EE Gddcd Rees 271 RIG SE EE 271 BIET GC RRERITC RI CU COE QOL TIL AOE TESS AREER RES 274 Restore oye erate ch judi vd heeded EE 274 Lien es 244395 eRe RADE EUROS SEES SHEE ERS ORE FOES Ae Oe See 276 SE EE EE 279 EE 279 Keyboard Lock Remote Command Only 280 Remote Message 26 06 den RRE Ee AE EE AER EEN SEXE dx
102. FREQUENCY Dependencies Couplings Frequency offset is not available when segmented sweep is on or when frequency scale type is set to log i e Log Sweep is on State Saved Saved in Instrument State Chapter 2 167 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E n c o E 5 Im E D E Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY Channel Factory Preset 0 Hz Range 500 THz to 500 THz Remote Command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet freq SENSe FREQuency OFFSet 7 Example FREQ OFFS 10 MHz 2 6 6 Signal Track When a marker is placed on a signal and Signal Track is pressed the marker will remain on the signal while the analyzer retunes the center frequency to the marker frequency The analyzer will keep the signal at the center of the display as long as the amplitude of the signal does not change by more than 3 dB from one sweep to another If no marker is active pressing Signal Track to On will activate a marker perform a peak search and center the marker on the display If the signal is lost an attempt will be made to find it again and continue tracking If there are other signals on screen near the same amplitude one of them may be found instead Signals near 0 Hz cannot be tracked effectively as they cannot be distinguished from the LO feedthrough which is excluded by intent from the search algorithm When Signal Track is On and the span is reduce
103. However if there is no user preset state saved the analyzer performs a factory preset Key Path System 248 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 2 1 Power On Enables you to set the state the analyzer will be put in when it is powered on You can set the state to Last or Preset If Power On is set to Last then the instrument returns to the last saved instrument state and all the modes are restored to that last state The instrument saves its current state internally every 2 minutes So the last saved state that is restored at power on is the state at power off or within a maximum of two minutes before power off If Power On is set to Preset the instrument state is determined by the preset type setting prior to turning the power off s Preset type Factory powers on in the Spectrum Analysis mode and all modes are set to their factory defaults e Preset type Mode powers on with the last mode the analyzer was in when it was powered off and presets that mode to the factory defaults It also restores all other modes to their factory preset s Preset type User powers on with the user defined state saved when a Save User Preset was last performed The setting Last or Preset of the Power On function is not changed by pressing Preset Use the Power On Preset menu key function to change the setting of the analyzer state that is recalled at power on Limit lines are not recalled when the analyzer is powered on Refer to
104. LAN SICL LAN provides control of your instrument via IEEE 488 2 GPIB over the LAN See Using SICL LAN to Control the Instrument on page 6 531 in this chapter On unix or PC The syntax of the telnet command is telnet IP address 5023 The initial telnet connection message will be displayed and then a SCPI gt prompt At the SCPI prompt simply enter the desired SCPI commands On a PC with telnet gui that has host port setting menu You would type at the dos prompt telnet Unix Telnet Example To connect to the instrument with host name aaa and port number 5023 enter the following command telnet aaa 5023 When you connect to the instrument it will display a welcome message and a command prompt The instrument is now ready to accept your SCPI commands As you type SCPI commands query results appear on the next line At any time you can send a device clear by pressing cntrl c on your keyboard When you are done break the telnet connection using your escape character and type quit When the instrument responds with the welcome message and the SCPI prompt you can immediately enter programming SCPI commands Typical commands might be CALC MARK MODE POS CALC MARK MAX CALC MARK X The small program above sets the instrument to measure a signal amplitude by placing a marker on the maximum point of the trace and then querying the instrument for the amplitude of the marker You need to press Enter after
105. LI O CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt X Chapter 3 195 Instrument Functions M O Marker Fctn Remote Command Notes Using the CALC MARK 1 2 3 4 FCO command If the specified marker number in the command is not the active marker it becomes the active marker If the marker number is not turned on it is first turned on and then it becomes the active marker Once the marker count function is turned on it will be on for any active marker not just the marker number specified when the command was sent Using the CALC MARK 1 2 3 4 FCO X query O U E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Be s 7 E The query returns a 1 only if the marker count function is on and the marker number selected is the currently active marker The query returns 9e15 if the marker count function is off or if the specified marker is not the active marker Example CALC MARK2 FCO ON CALC MARK2 FCO X returns the counted frequency 3 2 5 2 Gate Time Controls the length of time during which the frequency counter measures the signal frequency For 2 ms and longer gate times the counter resolution is 0 001 Hz Longer gate times allow for greater averaging of signals whose frequency is noisy at the expense of throughput If the gate time is an integer multiple of the length of a power line cycle 20 ms for 50 Hz
106. Las d Park edo ERI Ced EE EE 359 Optimize Ret Level e lt lt sess ERR 445444005 EA REDE ee oO ROSA CA GR Kor HE ae 360 DIETRO oi ace aceite ERE UE C HORAE UR GARE EE 360 Total Pwr Bel 22ziecc3 e Re EE EE AE EE EE EE HAE eee RN ERE 362 eA EE Rde qax donde ede bct tard d nde eyed bebe de o eoa 362 Limit Test ee ee REG RUE EELER ERR EE 363 EDD EE 363 Puller AIDIM 93 466 ere EELER EE ESI SNR Ee OS qq es R QN 364 Iain EE deben capri Sd gp O E E Ep Re ddp yew d 364 Trace View ACP Measurement lees 367 ER 367 BarGraph g sn sisi rori rii ee ee ee ee reer ee ee ee ee ERES 367 SAGARA se ie x dd sae pda pv Simla AE deta EO Seems Ea e ed roe d Exo adeeb 368 Combined View LB i40 05264 040860504 4228000 RARO REOR RA REOR EON RHEE S EERE E 368 KEE 368 Meas Setup burst Power sso eed ous PIER RR AEN SEHR eee ee SHORES Ee SEERA Gd RETE 371 Pee MEE E E R L E R RE LRE RE LH E E R A RER EE KAR E 04 371 Ru lc P p ee TREES EE EE EE EE REA 372 Peri lu Mo aT EE 372 Threshold Ll 2 gg au ek EE E EE EE EE QUEE ERAS Ae ER 373 oO Method iiie a d b PEE HORROR N IEEE LEER ck a doped dede abd 373 Burst Width ee ee eee 374 Hota se RE Lese iia bh bak dea owe AAW SE ROE EE b AO we OR 375 Teace View Burst Power lziko gg ode ceeds ed E AE OWE C due dx os RRR Ee 377 BE Bago pe Ae KEE EE aUe edo ee ee ee ee 377 Combined 22s cssc do ORAS PRET RATS EREE ER MOH STEERS RAO EER EE bus 378 WEE 378 Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function
107. MARGin STATe ObkbTONTOIT B RRBBRI 112 CALOulate bEINeDM 2 MABGItQSTATe7 s cae vehi eek RR eee RARE AT ERR RA hae eee es 112 CAL Dalate LLAN AMARGI uid EE 113 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe OFF ON 1011 RR 111 CALCulate LLINe I 2 STAT ee EEN kh EE RRR R teren RRR RRR RRR RRR E RR Rs 111 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 TYPE UPPer LOWer III 110 ADU gate bEINeDU 2 TYPE Louis eon Vrbe deer dede ie Po ede Re de Re OR Reste 110 EE MARK or AORT AER EE KKR RELA he OE KE R RAKA da pus 189 A ALUUlste MARKerF Dunbt GATelime mes uaa ssaeecdreaabare e dae RR RED DES ERE edd 196 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATetime AUTO OFF ON 0O 1 00 0 eee ee eee 196 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATetime AUTO 0 eee eens 196 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATetime s 9 K ee eee eee kee eee ee eee 196 CALCulate MARKer PEAK I1 2 3 4 SEARch MODE PARameter MAXimum 218 14 List of Commands CALCulate MARKer PEAK 1 2 3 4 SEARch MODE ssslsseseeeeee eh 218 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe OFF ONJ0 1 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 189 CALCulate MARKer ITABLe STATe 20 0 enn hh ese 189 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe OFRTIONTIOIT 0 000200 0 0 212 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe 0 0 ccc cece I 213 LAL lane AER Ker lU 2 38 E occ K ieee eed rx RR Re ee RR Rm 195 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe OobtlIONTOI 0020002 e ee 195 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt
108. Now Type State Sort Dir Erom To Dir Up Dir Select e K Type i Sort T A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings sis Jeuy uingjoedsg sdejy nue zz eed ees 9 Jo ey ally sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan c09 8 191deu2 File Key 4 of 6 See page 127 Rename pe860a Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Sort MH Rename Rename Now Type State m LK Type 1 Sort e pI Sort Name LN Alpha Editor 2 Up By Extension Order Down Dir Up Dir Select zz eBed ees 9 Jo Je ad siskjeuy unjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 09 File Key 5 of 6 See page 127 Save Save Save Now Type State E N Format When Type Trace Trace State Source All Traces Name Aloha Editor 2 Dir Up Dir Select pe858a Trace 1 Trace 2 All Traces When Type Corrections When Type Limits Otherwise Source is greyed out Source Antenna Source Limit 1 Limit 2 i A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices sis Jeuy winayeds sdejy nue zz eed ees 9 Jo
109. OFF FREQ SYNT 3 selects optimization for fast tuning 2 1 3 1 Auto Selects the LO phase noise behavior to optimize speed or dynamic range for various instrument operating conditions For PSA the Auto rules choose Fast Tuning whenever the span 210 5 MHz or the Res BW 2200 kHz Otherwise for spans gt 141 4 kHz and for Res BWs gt 9 1 kHz the Auto rules choose Optimize f for f gt 50 kHz All remaining cases choose Optimize f for f 50 kHz Key Path Auto Couple PhNoise Opt Remote Command See PhNoise Opt on page 76 Example FREQ SYNT AUTO ON 76 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 2 1 3 2 Optimize f for frequencies lt 50 kHz The LO phase noise is optimized for offsets less than 50 kHz from the carrier at the expense of phase noise beyond 50 kHz offset Key Path Auto Couple PhNoise Opt Remote Command See PhNoise Opt on page 76 Example FREQ SYNT 1 2 1 3 3 Optimize f for frequencies gt 50 kHz Optimizes phase noise for offsets above 50 kHz from the carrier especially those from 70 kHz to 300 kHz Closer offsets are compromised and the throughput of measurements especially remote measurements where the center frequency is changing rapidly is reduced There is a graph of typical phase noise performance in the Specifications Guide Key Path Auto Couple PhNoise Opt Remote Command See PhNoise Opt on page 76 Example FREQ SYNT 2 2 1 3 4 Optimize LO fo
110. Peak frequency in the positive offset A Hz 21 Relative power on the negative offset B dB 59 Absolute peak power on the positive offset E dBm Hz 60 Peak frequency in the positive offset E Hz n 2 Returns the displayed frequency domain spectrum trace data separated by comma The number of data points is determined by the setting of the trace points parameter Returns the displayed frequency domain absolute limit trace data separated by comma The number of data points is determined by the setting of the trace points parameter Returns the displayed frequency domain relative limit trace data separated by comma The number of data points is determined by the setting of the trace points parameter Chapter 5 325 O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Command n Results Returned Condition Using Total Power n 5 Total Power Reference Reference Returns 12 scalar values in dBm of the absolute power of the segment frequencies 1 Total power reference dBm 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E Using Power Spectral n 5 Power Spectral Density Reference Density Refer
111. RATijo intepetos KR K R 0 RRR RRR aed KR RUE ACEGUR OX ERROR A ROS ame 76 BE NSE ey ep PUG ag tke akon RE OE SERRE Kee SES naan Baers 76 SENSe SWEep POINts number of points gt 2 0 ee eens 245 ESENSerSW EE 245 EBNSeL SWEopn TIME S Lun e tous hd bao kaw eh egw ANE wwe hee bee A AC 242 SENSeESWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 Linsccicacaawenndbsaubawnd ae EEN NEES ALSK 242 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO RULes NORMal ACCuracy eese 243 SENSeE SWEep TIME AUTO RULe8 co gR eese kou Rt EELER EES E ERR E EY 243 LSE NSeh SW Hep TIMEAUTO tr EEN RR REOR Regan Ogee Re de der Rad ge dios 242 pie NET s rd bk p RR E he IEE Ee Geka Ree RR EX p a RN 242 SE NSaESWEOpITYPE AITO EET 0 0 s pid RR RR TR eS Raro qub cec c a 72 SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO RULes SPEed DRANge eee 73 ESENSeh SW Hep TYPE AUTOR Lies v RR RR ER EROR NEE VR RR NEE ERR ERU n 73 SE H Bep TYPE EA VERENA P RR EN UOCE PROCU CEP RR ER PRU Pao Ee T2 SENSe TOIN AV ERage COUNT rnteserm ssseusscw rrr ER ratun EE EORR RR RR 423 ESENSEeKTOINAVERa ze COUN ad sand dE ee de mee Eq dad 423 SENSe TOIN AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat 0 0 0 c eee eee 425 DSR N Sel TOUN AVE Rage TOONTO 4 nonce eee bie hee RU eb eae hheeeben sea SCR RR ed 425 SENSe TOIN AVERage STATe OFF ON O 1 2 0 0 0 0 ccc RI 423 EENSeLTPOINIAVERageL S TAToI EE 423 SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe AUTO OFRTONTIOI eene 426 40 List of Commands SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe
112. RMS 2 2 5 4 Voltage Avg In this Average type all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the envelope of the signal This scale is good for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or pulse modulated signals such as radar and TDMA transmitters but its response to noise like signals is 1 049 dB lower than the average power of those noise signals This is compensated for in the Marker Noise function When this type of averaging is selected VAvg appears on the left side of the display In the equation for averaging on this scale below N is the number of averages accumulated In continuous sweep mode once N has reached the Average Number N stays at that value Chapter 2 91 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI LI lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Old Avg New dat 20 20 Assumes all values in dB Key Path BW Avg Avg VBW Type or Auto Couple Avg VBW Type Remote Command See Ave VBW Type on page 89 Example AVER TYPE SCAL 92 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L BW Avg 2 2 6 Span RBW Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth A factory preset sets the ratio to 106 1 The ratio can be changed using the front panel step keys knob or numeric keypad Key Path BW Avg Saved State Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 106 1 Range 2 to 10 000 History Added with fir
113. STATe 00 0 0 cece eee 195 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion BPOWer NOISe IOP nonnnunannnna nan 191 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion 0 ee 191 CALCulate MAKKer 1 2 3 4 MAXImutmi NEE rh dh Rx RRR RR RRR ERR RR ba EE E 209 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum LEFT 0 0 0 0 cece e 210 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum NEXT 20 00 cece eee nee 210 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum RIGHt 00 210 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MINimum 211 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE POSition DELTa BAND SPAN OFF 179 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE 0 00 0 0 cece e 179 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PEAK EXCursion rel amplitude lslsleslssu 215 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 PEAK EXCursion 0 0000 215 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PEAK THReshold 0 0 cece cece eh 216 SE EE lae MARET I2 3 4 PTPaab iiuasessaosbrperetidakbeqe Ee dox pude es 212 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFFJONJ0 1 lseeeeeene RI 180 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe hn 180 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe 1 2 3 0 00 ccc IR 186 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO OokbIONTIoI e eee eee 186 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO eh 186 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe 0 0 0 0 ee 186 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe OokblOoNTIolt nnnnnaa aa 170 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe 20 0 0 ccc eee eae 170
114. Saved Not saved in instrument state Factory Preset On Factory Default On Remote Command DISPlay ENABle OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ENABle Example DISP ENAB OFF Chapter 2 125 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 ES El D gt LI r Instrument Functions A L Display 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 126 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 File Displays a menu of functions that enable you to load save and manage data on either a floppy disk A or the analyzer s internal drive C you can recall save copy delete or rename files of instrument states trace data and screen captures The menu keys display dialog boxes appropriate for the selected function Agilent analyzers use different types of mass storage devices e 3 5 inch disk drive high density 1 44 MBytes formatted designated A Saving directly to drive A can be slow Try saving first to internal drive C and then transferring the file s Part of flash memory and treated as a device designated C Part of flash memory and treated as a device for internal use only to store personality option firmware designated I The MMEMory command syntax term lt file name gt is a specifier having the form DRIVE DIRECTORY NAME EXT where the following rules apply e DRIVE is A or C e DIRECTORY V is the path name s NA
115. See Sort on page 133 for more information Key Path File Delete Chapter 2 149 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L File 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 150 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 4 4 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Delete 2 5 4 5 Dir Select Displays the highlighted directory See Dir Select on page 135 for more information Key Path File Delete 2 5 5 Copy Displays the functions to copy instrument data files in the selected directory to the directory and file name that you choose This key also displays a catalog of the files that are currently saved in the selected directory and data entry fields for the following file name type and path location Key Path File 2 5 5 1 Copy Now Executes the copy function coping data files from one directory to another on one or more mass storage devices using the currently displayed file settings While the file is being copied the Copying file followed by Reading directory popup message is displayed After a successful copy the green text message xxxxxx file copied where xxxxxx is the file name appears in the status line If a copy is being done f
116. See Dir Select on page 135 for more information Key Path File Save Remote Command The directory is entered as part of the directory path name that is sent with the SCPI command See Save Now on page 137 2 5 3 Load Displays the menu key that enables you to load instrument data files from the selected drive and directory back into the instrument This function displays the file list box which shows the data entry fields for the file name type destination and path The catalog list box is active and can be used for selecting the file information in the data entry fields Only loadable files that match the current type are shown Placing the Chapter 2 143 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls al 1 KA E Q O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L File cursor on a file name causes it to be loaded into the file name field Key Path File 2 5 3 1 Load Now Loads the currently selected file Displayed settings include name type destination and path While the file is being loaded a popup message is displayed Loading file After a successful load the text message xxxxxx file loaded where xxxxxx is the file name appears in the status line When traces are loaded they always load in View mode Traces save in TRC format can be loaded individually or as a group When a trace is loaded the state that existed when that trace was sa
117. Sets the color palette to single color mode The monochrome display uses different shades of green for each green value This is especially useful for driving external monochrome monitors Key Path System Color Palette Dependencies Couplings None SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 10 Diagnostics Access front panel diagnostic functions Key Path System Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 10 1 Front Panel Test Used to test the front panel keys It shows a list of all the front panel keys with counter numbers indicating the number times the key is pressed Press the ESC key to exit the test mode and return to the menu Key Path System Diagnostics Annunciation Annotation Text Screen Dependencies Couplings The active function is disabled Factory Preset Off 4 8 11 Restore Sys Defaults Resets the system settings including most persistent functions to their factory defaults It also does a Factory Preset that resets the analyzer to the Spectrum Analysis Mode It does not reset user data such as saved instrument states 274 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System Persistent functions are things such as the GPIB address time date display style and auto alignment state These are parameters that are unaffected by a power cycle or an instrument preset
118. The first harmonic is the fundamental If fewer than ten harmonics are measured zero is returned for any harmonic not measured 316 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Command n Results Returned FETCh HARMonics FREQuency n n 2 to 10 Returns the frequency of the specified MEASure HARMonics FREQuency n n 1 for n harmonic number N in Hz 9 not l specified READ HARMonics FREQuency n FETCh HARMonics FUNDamental N A Returns the frequency of the fundamental MEASure HARMonics FUNDamental EES READ HARMonics FUNDamental FETCh HARMonics n n 1 to 2 These commands return the power of the MEASure HARMonics n n 1 for n spurious emissions at the selected harmonic READ HARMonics n not frequencies of the current channel frequency specified using the selected resolution bandwidth filter You can set the number of harmonics to be measured For each harmonic the reference level is set 40 dB above the largest amplitude limit with input attenuation held constant The attenuation is set to limit the carrier fundamental power at the spectrum analyzer input mixer to the value determined by Max Mixer Lvl not specified or n 1 Returns one value that corresponds to the total harmonic distortion RMS voltage 96 n 2 Returns one value that corresponds to the total harmonic distortion dB E
119. Tracking Ref Ref 4j Span Pair Span Center O FTun Marker vw 26 600000900 GHz 59 99 dBm GHz Off nter Res BH 3 Key Path Display Active Fctn Position Readback Bottom reads back to line 3 of this key State Saved Not saved in instrument state survives power cycle and preset Factory Preset No effect persistent variable survives power cycle and preset Factory Default Center History Added with firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command DISPlay AFUNction POSition BOTtom Example DISP AFUN POS BOT 2 4 5 Limits Limit lines can be defined to compare the data to your defined limits and indicate a pass or fail condition Limits accesses menus that allow you to create modify and change the properties of limit lines There are two limit lines in the instrument Key Path Display State Saved Not saved in instrument state SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies No OPC dependencies Factory Default Unaffected by system defaults 108 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA x axis lt ampl gt lt connected gt lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA Defines the limit line values and destroys all existing data Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit using the following parameters lt x axis gt can be frequency or time values as specified
120. X Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Center frequency value in Factory Preset state History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 25 3 Ref Position Press Ref Position to position the X Scale reference to the extreme left line center line or Chapter 5 481 O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 One Button Measurement Functions SPAN X Scale Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM extreme right line of the display graticule Key Path MEASURE Spectrum Emission Mask SPAN X Scale Factory Preset Center o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 482 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 20 Marker Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Displays the Marker control menu for the SEM measurement If no markers are active Marker selects marker 1 sets it to Normal and places it to the right of the display There are two control modes for the markers s Normal POSition A single marker that can be moved to any point on the trace Off O Turns off the active marker or marker pair Key Path Front panel key State Saved The control mode for each marker as well as the position of each marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset All Off Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 26 1 Select Marker Selects on
121. a N E 2 O E 2 LL E o E E E s 7 E Instrument Functions P Z System Example SYST COMM LAN IP 150 222 50 52 mypsa Sets the IP address to 150 222 50 52 and sets the host name to mypsa 4 8 5 3 Host Name Displays the host name of the instrument Pressing the key activates the alpha editor which enables you to change the host name Press ENTER to complete the entry NOTE This will not change your LAN system representation of the host name You must work through your local system administrator to change the host name Changing it in the instrument only changes the displayed information it will not enable LAN access with the new name Key Path System Config I O State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Default mypsa Not reset by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command See above command SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SELF IP lt string gt Example SYST COMM LAN IP 150 222 50 52 mypsa Sets the IP address to 150 222 50 52 and sets the host name to mypsa 4 8 5 4 Host ID Remote Command Only Enables you to query the host ID remotely The current value of the host ID can be viewed on the display by pressing System Show System SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default Value is unique to your instrument Not reset by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command SYSTem HID Remote Command Notes The host ID cannot be set
122. absolute power dBm 25 Negative Offset Frequency 6 relative power dB 26 Negative Offset Frequency 6 absolute power dBm 27 Positive Offset Frequency 6 relative power dB 28 Positive Offset Frequency 6 absolute power dBm Main channel relative power is relative to the main channel absolute power and therefore is always equal to 0 00 dB 306 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Condition Command Results Returned Radio Std z None Returns 28 values that correspond in the or following order Radio Std None and iore than one ofbdot ia 1 Main Channel relative power spectral on density dB 2 Main Channel power spectral density Meas Type Total Pwr dBm Hz Ref 3 Main Channel relative power spectral density dB 4 Main Channel power spectral density dBm Hz 5 Negative Offset Frequency 1 relative power spectral density dB 6 Negative Offset Frequency 1 power spectral density dBm Hz 7 Positive Offset Frequency 1 relative power spectral density dB 8 Positive Offset Frequency 1 power spectral density dBm Hz 25 Negative Offset Frequency 6 relative power dB 26 Negative Offset Frequency 6 absolute power dBm 27 Positive Offset Frequency 6 relative power dB 28 Positive Offset Frequency 6 absolute power dBm Main channel
123. analyzer span History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration freq SENSe ACPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration Example ACP BWID INT 5E6 ACP BWID INT 5 6 4 Offset Limits Accesses menu keys that allow you to configure the offsets for the ACP measurement Key Path Meas Setup 5 6 4 1 Offset Selects the offset the menu keys will affect Press Offset until the letter of the desired offset is underlined Key Path Meas Setup Offset Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset A History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 6 4 2 Offset Freq or Edge Freq Enables you to set the frequency difference from the center of the main channel to the center of the offset for a maximum of 6 offsets labeled A F It also allows you to turn on off the offsets that you want to measure NOTE This key label changes to Edge Freq when IS 95C cdma2000 MC 1X cdma2000 MC 3X and cdma2000 DS is selected 354 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP Key Path Meas Setup Offset Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 3 MHz The following table shows the default array if no radio standard None is selected el i al E m pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1
124. and returns the measurement data f you are doing bottom middle top measurements on base stations you can reduce transactions by making a time slot active at each of the B M T frequencies Then issue three measurements at once in the programming code and retrieve three data sets with just one GPIB transaction pair write read For example send READ PFER Freq bottom PFER lt Freq_middle gt PFER Freq top This single transaction initiates three different phase and frequency error measurements at each of the three different frequencies provided and returns the data Then you read the three sets of data un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a 514 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Using an Option Mode Avoid automatic attenuator setting The internal process for automatically setting the value of the attenuator requires measuring an initial burst to identify the proper attenuator setting before the next burst can be measured properly If you know the amount of attenuation or the signal level needed for your measurement just set it Note that spurious types of measurements must be done with the attenuator set to automatic for measurements like output RF spectrum transmit spurs adjacent channel power spectrum emission mask These types of measurements start by tuning to the signal then they tune away from it and must be able to reset the attenuation
125. and the center of the upper element of the offset pair as well as the frequency difference between the center of the lower element of the offset pair and the center of the lowermost carrier If you set the frequency of any offset to 0 Hz the offset is turned off and not included in the displayed results Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 5 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz Terminators Hz kHz MHz GHz Default Terminator Hz 438 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Range 0 MHz to 45 MHz History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST FREQuency Hz Hz Hz SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST FREQuency Example MCP OFFS LIST 5MHz 7 5MHz 15MHz MCP OFFS LIST 5 19 4 3 Offset Integ BW Sets the bandwidth over which the power is integrated for the selected offset refer to Offset above Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits Key Notes If RRC Filter is set to On the actual integration bandwidth used is the displayed integration bandwidth multiplied by 1 Filter Alpha State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 3 84 MHz 3 84 MHz 3 84 MHz Terminators Hz kHz MHz GHz Default Terminator Hz Knob Increment Span 50 Step Key Increment If CF Step Auto is selected span 10 If CF Step Man is selected CF Step Range 100 Hz to 20 MHz History Adde
126. are available for this standard Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 336 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Example RAD STAN C2000DS 5 3 1 0 NADC Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard NADC Channel Power and Intermod TOI measurements are not available when Device MS is selected All other measurements are available when this radio standard is selected except Spectrum Emissions Mask Harmonic Distortion Spurious Emissions and Multi Carrier Power Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use L SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN NADC 5 3 1 1 PDC Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard PDC The Burst Power measurement is not available when Device BTS is selected The Channel Power and Intermod TOI measurements are not available when Device MS is selected All ot
127. average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential Range EXPonential REPeat Remote Command SENSe SPURious AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe SPURious AVERage TCONro1 Example SPUR AVG TCON EXP SPUR AVG TCON 5 27 8 Range Table Enables you to enter the settings for up to 20 ranges either using the instrument front panel keys or remotely Upon entering the range table the measurement stops then the analyzer is set to a constantly sweeping idle state The analyzer is then set to the current values for range 1 whether range 1 is on or off If a range is currently off the values in the range table for that range are replaced with see Range 5 in the illustration to 486 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions indicate this range is currently inactive 3 Agilent 14 95 22 Jun 7 2002 Range Table Range Ch Freq Trig Free 5 Spurious Emissions i DEN On Off Range 5 Start Freq 800 000000 MHz Stop Freq 1 20000000 GHz Res BH 4 00000000 MHz Auto Man Video BH 4 00000000 MHz H Auto Man Sweep Time 1 800 ms Auto Man VBH 4 MHz More 1 of 2 Key Path Meas Setup Saved State All values for all ranges are saved in instrument state Factory Preset For each range the following settings are selected Video BW Auto Sweep Time Auto Absolute Limit 50 dBm Pe
128. box 6 Click on the Add button and type in the following C VXIPNP WIN95 LIB MSC For Borland C version 4 0 compilers You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths They are set under the Options Project menu selection Double click on Directories from the Topics list box and add the following C VXIPNP WIN95 INCLUDE C VXIPNP WIN95 LIB BC 16 bit Applications The following is a summary of important compiler specific considerations for the Windows compiler For Microsoft Visual C version 1 5 To set the memory model do the following 1 Select Options Project 2 Click on the Compiler button then select Memory Model from the Category list 3 Click on the Model list arrow to display the model options and select Large 4 Click on OK to close the Compiler dialog box e You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths They are set under the Options Directories menu selection C VXIPNP WIN INCLUDE C VXIPNP WIN LIB MSC Otherwise the library and include files should be explicitly specified in the project file un c E c 9 G E ra E E E E c CH o e LI a 548 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL Example Program This example program queries a GPIB device for an identification string and prints the results Note that you must change the address idn c program filename include v
129. bursts or slots use CALCulate DATA lt n gt COMPress The CALC DATA COMP query is the fastest way to measure power data for multiple bursts slots There are two reasons for this 1 it can be used to measure data across multiple consecutive slots frames with just one measurement instead of a separate measurement on each slot and 2 it can pre process and or decimate the data so that you only return the information that you need which minimizes data transfer to the computer For example let s say you want to do a power measurement for a GSM base station where you generate a repeating frame with 8 different power levels You can gather all the data with a single CALC DATA COMP acquisition using the waveform measurement With CALC DATA2 COMP MEAN 9 197 1730 you can measure the mean power in those bursts This single command will measure the data across all 8 frames locate the first slot burst in each of the frames calculate the mean power of those bursts then return the resulting 8 values For later version of firmware after A 02 00 you can use equivalent time values for the CALC DATA lt n gt COMP query The command would then be CALC DATA2 COMP MEAN 25us 526us 579 6us 8 Let s set up the GSM Waveform measurement 516 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed CONF WAV turns on the waveform measurement WAV BAND 300khz sets a resolution bandwidth of 300 kHz WAV SWE TIME 5ms sets a sweep t
130. c o E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a 518 Chapter6 Programming Fundamentals Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes Across PSA Modes Command Subsystem Similarities When you select different modes you get different sets of available programming commands That is only the commands that are appropriate for the current mode are available Also some commands have the same syntax in different modes but have different ranges or settings that are only appropriate to the current mode The following table shows which command subsystems are the same across different modes If there is no X by a particular subsystem then the set of available commands is different in those modes Command ranges or defaults may also be different Refer to the programming command descriptions in the documentation for each mode for details Command Subsystem Same command set is available SA mode compared with the application modes W CDMA cdmaOne cdma2000 1xEV DO Basic GSM EDGE NADC or PDC Same command set is available SA mode compared with the application mode Phase Noise IEEE common commands X X ABORt X X CALCulate CALibration X X CONFigure COU Dle not available in these not available in this application modes application modes DISPlay FETCh
131. ccc eee eee 278 HON Len LRE e OLI c odo ke ach sev eo DARK ROR ERC ERED OR ERED AEDS OD o Rs LEE 271 Do MESS ee Laurus acie EROR Po XO EC ed de eap pe od o eda d de E 280 iym IemibNESSIsEOOUEN 112 cusesaestxabkb cad Race dub pac d Rx RC URUE Se pde 281 O EE 270 SY o lem PON ET Me 0 0 0 cee eee ke Y EN LRR ren LENE EONS nat ES HEV E Pee Ee eee dg 281 io lem PON TYPE PRESSL LAST AE Ree poe ROC ADR PROC EES and 249 rc lam NL 0 tweed uo Sae do Leda we hd epp dab ba Vw dol d E NECARE doa oe 249 SOPAT RET Ladusedtithiereaqindswa nx re eae ee eer ee ere eer re DEAE Cut ee re ua 222 YS Lom PRESGUPERSISIONE sro 05 00 55458 644 OR4S LSM ORARE ERASER OWE ES EG REG ERROR RA 276 SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER MODE 0 0 eee III 250 io ene PERESECTYPE EE EE 250 io Pom PRESA USERISAVE EE EE 252 SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt 0c cee eee nn 254 SYS lem TIME AD dust eoeond m ois cies e e Hehe ke OVERS CONSE TOE ResPV TENE R eee we 254 ENN EE EE EE 254 ao be Lene Von 2x2 ACE EE RR R R KE RRR R SUPERI Vibe MUR V epo Oe EAA ele PRU ES 281 SEET SIESOO PEN EE aa owed beo ae ec ROC A RENE dO RECO EUR AE 284 TRACe DATA TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACES LLINE1 LLINE2 158 TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANK ooo onnnnnnannanan 283 TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANK nnnnnunnnnanan 369 TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW
132. completion of both calibration and waiting for trigger set STAT OPER ENAB 35 and monitor any changes Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Query Instrument Options OPT For ESA and PSA analyzers This command is not implemented However the information is available remotely by using SCPI commands See SYSTem OPTions in the SYSTem subsystem Chapter 8 565 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands Power On Status Clear PSC PSC Sets the state of the power on status clear flag This command allows you to specify if the service request enable register and the event status enable register should be cleared at power up The query returns the contents of the power on status clear flag Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Recall RCL register This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory register If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the revision of the instrument the state will be loaded If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the parts of the state that apply to the olde
133. condition sometimes called abort abortio reset halt e A remote function that causes an instrument to change from local control to remote control In remote control the front panel keys are disabled except for the Local key and the line power switch sometimes called remote resume e A local lockout function that can be used with the remote function to disable the front panel Local key With the Local key disabled only the controller or a hard reset by the line power switch can restore local control sometimes called local lockout e A local function that is the complement to the remote command causing an instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel sometimes called local resume 554 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Overview of the GPIB Bus s A clear function that causes all GPIB instruments or addressed instruments to assume a cleared condition The definition of clear is unique for each instrument sometimes called clear reset control send Anoutput function that is used to send function commands and data commands from the controller to the addressed instrument sometimes called output control convert image iobuffer transfer Anenter function that is the complement of the output function and is used to transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller sometimes called enter convert image iobuffer on timeout set timeout transfer E fe Kei
134. determine the bandwidth to integrate when calculating the power Key Path Key Notes Dependencies Couplings State Saved Factory Preset Meas Setup Offset Limits When setting Meas BW gt 1 dynamic range is increased however measurement time is also increased since an increased number of sweep points are required to make the measurement For Meas BW gt 1 consider this equation for trace points Trace points Offset Stop Freq Offset Start Freq Meas BW 100 When Meas BW 1 the number of trace points are set at the value specified upon entering the measurement This parameter must adhere to the rule N x Res BW lt Stop Freq of the offset Start freq of the offset where N is Meas BW value If the Res BW is changed Meas BW will change to ensure this rule n a Saved in instrument state 1 Default Terminator x Res BW Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment Range History 1 1 to 1000 Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth IMULti integer SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth IMULti SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 Example for MS Default is BTS 1 SEM O
135. displays measurement results the same as RF Envelope but has a blue bar between the markers to indicate the measured output power level The actual measure output power is displayed at the bottom of the bar Refer to the following figure 3X Agilent 17 50 54 Jun 10 2002 Meas View DH1 Ch Freq 1 GHz Trig RF B RF Envelope Burst Power Bluetooth ea Combined sRtten 6 dB HSC 50 MHz Output Power Amplitude Threshold Measured Burst Width Current Data 11 58 dBm Output Pur Max Pt Full Burst Width 369 1 ps 11 50 dBm 11 40 dBm iracar Key Path Trace View History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 9 3 Trace One button measurements do not change this function See Trace on page 284 for more information 5 9 3 1 Trace 1 2 3 Determines which trace the menu keys will affect Press Trace 123 until the number of the desired trace is underlined Key Path Trace View Trace State Saved Saved in Instrument State for all traces History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANK WRITe Clear Write MAXHold Max Hold MINHold Min Hold VIEW View 378 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Trace View Burst Power BLANK Blank TRACe 1 2 3 MODE Example TRAC MODE WRIT TRAC MODE MAXH TRAC MODE MINH TRAC MODE VIEW TRAC MODE BLANK TRAC MODE 5 9 3 2 Clear Write See Clear Write on page 285 for more inform
136. e ES 5 n gt LI LI lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L Det Demod Because they may not find a spectral component s true peak neither average nor sample detectors measure amplitudes of CW signals as accurately as peak or normal but they do measure noise without the biases of peak detection The detector in use is indicated on the left side of the display If the detector has been manually selected a appears next to it TIP RMS Detection To measure the average power RMS voltage in each display point set Detector to Average and verify that Avg VBW Type is set to Pwr Avg RMS Key Path Det Demod State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Normal Auto Coupled Remote Command SENSe DETector FUNCtion AVERage NEGative NORMa1 POSitive SAMP1e RMS SENSe DETector FUNCtion The query returns a name that corresponds to the detector mode as shown by the following terms NORM Normal AVER Average POS Positive peak SAMP Sample NEG Negative peak Example DET POS 96 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Det Demod 2 3 1 4 Auto The system selects normal detection as the default but if a condition arises where a different type of detection scheme would be better utilized the system uses the alternate scheme For example when in Auto mode the Marker Noise function uses Average detection because the system dete
137. ees PEE Ts 172 Dru DDB cle one eee d d GE EH RLS acd E Ra pde oe pd edd rac ER dep d 172 g T T EE 173 3 Instrument Functions M O EE 177 Select Markor saouau sisRreseseze9RZEERE EE EAR aO RS E Kal e edd NR pos 180 E WEE IND ES PERPE deed ib M Ub deoa d E a o di p wed 180 p PPP 181 Da PRU LI is oa ERA E SOR oa de Ro RC DR de BRE EE 181 Bpan Pale AAR PRG GRE RE ERE RR ARE REGN RASEN SEE Ee ers da Cs RE d d 184 DE era gate ee deed aeu bebe REA IEEE ba RAS Pd 185 Marker EE 185 PR OU Lo sek dee ACORN RAE CE T de RR HC LASER ORAL ARCA Rd CORE No 186 Markor R 2izeesia 3m E ERG Erde E PROS EE EE e PX SHES RR ER 189 Dither UE CHE oua eee Red ded dd pe Jo ox ERE Ro ER EE ode Pa dec ed ane pacop deep es 189 Marker EE 191 Poe e L EE 15 oa de th dace OE AR kA AS ASG ee EON 191 Markor NONO 3 24 2686 erer EIS GLEE THEE SEAS S ESSE OSs Sud EE 191 Ben lated EE EE 193 Puce eR P XR 194 Dc E BEL EE 194 IO Dlxha ST E R N AE XN RS SOE ES ERS TPIXetex e PROSE RECS ESHER qM EIE 197 REG SEN Lips d peurd dde dd Vd OEC ES ENS dt peu Jed add Perd d EM 197 ligo c FILTRE 197 OS ia scs dac d o hoe hala oe de BORD EE 197 MED DO eS L EE oS SSE REET SE ERL ES AAS E ORES EAE She SIGNA SERS SS 199 MESS D UN 146444 rated dt eee EE EE t qup ddp a eb 199 uoc dH e Tv rTT 199 Bb E Vosa SERERE EE Ed epa dad t asd d CEREREM ped 200 Contents Meas Setup SA with Measurements Off 201 Measurement EEN 201 ON
138. extension of TRC or CSV The file extension determines whether a trace is stored CSV or a trace with its state TRO are stored The file name must include the complete path for example C MYTRACE TRC Lowercase characters are interpreted as uppercase These commands will fail if the lt file name gt already exists For the MMEM STOR LIM LLINE2 C mylimit lim command there is no short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 MMEM STOR STAT 1 C mystate sta saves the current instrument state to the specified file name The sta extension is required SAV saves the current instrument state to a file name REGxxx where xxx the register number The available register numbers are 0 to 127 MMEM STOR SCR C myscreen gif The file must have a gif or wmf file extension The specified file extension determines which file format the instrument will use to save the image Only Bitmap and Metafile are available not Reverse Bitmap and Reverse Metafile MMEM STOR TRAC TRACE3 C mytrace trc Saves trace 3 to the trace state file C MYTRACE TRC MMEM STOR CORR ANT A TEST1 AMP saves the current antenna correction to the specified file name The amp extension is required MMEM STOR LIM LLINE2 C mylimit lim saves the current limit line two data set to the specified file name The lim extension is required MMEM STOR RES A ACP CSV saves the current ACP measurement results to the
139. for more information The catalog displays all files if Type is set to All or files of the currently selected file type All directories are always displayed Type Format Destination Extension State State STA Trace Trace state Trace 1 2 3 or all traces TRC Comma separated trace values Trace 1 2 3 or all traces CSV Limit Internal data format LIM Screen Bitmap GIF Reverse bitmap GIF Metafile WMF Reverse metafile WMF Corrections Internal data format ANT CBL OTH and AMP Measurement Comma separated values CSV Results Key Path File Catalog State Saved Type is not saved in the instrument state Factory Preset Type survives Factory Preset and RST but is set to State at power on Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 2 5 1 1 1 All Displays all files located in the selected directory If selected it applies to Catalog Delete Copy and Rename Key Path File Catalog Type 2 5 1 1 2 State Displays all state files STA in the selected directory State files contain most instrument settings If selected it applies to all File functions Key Path File Catalog Type 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 ES El D gt LI r Chapter 2 131 Instrument Functions A L File 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 132 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 1 1 3 Tr
140. freq freq up to five vac tee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee TETT 466 37 E G C 9 e 3 3 D 5 2 2 List of Commands SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 466 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO 466 SE NSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution 466 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STARt freq Lreoazl 464 SENSe SEMask OF FSet n LIST FREQuency STARt 0 kee eres 464 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STOP freq lt freq gt 002 eee 465 2 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STOP 0 2 ee eee eee 465 e E SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt ABSolute ampl ampl up to five values 469 8 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt ABSolute 2 0 0 0 cece eee 469 5 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt RCARrier lt rel_ampl gt lt rel_ampl gt A Pep tO five Vales EE 471 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt RCARrier seen 471 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STATe ORFTONTOl BB 464 SENSel SEMask OFFSet n LIST STATe AE ENEE NEEN NEEN E eee A ERE XR d 464 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute lt ampl gt lt ampl gt up to five values 470 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute COUPle ObRFTONTOIT 470 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSol
141. front panel key Operation Enable STATus OPERation ENABle integer STATus OPERation ENABle This command determines which bits in the Operation Event register will set the Operation Status Summary bit bit 7 in the Status Byte Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0 To have any Operation Events reported to the Status Byte Register one or more bits need to be set to 1 Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Chapter 8 571 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Operation Event Query STATus OPERation EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Operation Negative Transition STATus OPERation NTRansition integer SSTATus OPERation NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Oper
142. gt Harmonic Distortion gt Grayed out when t Range Table is On i Grayed out when T Range Table is On Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe897a Meas Setup Avg Number On Off Rvg Mode Exp Repeat Range Table Center Freq 1 920 GHz Harmonics 10 Span 0 00000000 H N ST Harmonic 0 015 uto Man LI Range Table On Off Res DN 10 000000 kHz Auto Man Video BW 100 000000 kHz Auto a Range Table r Sweep Time 500 0 ms Auto a Optimize Ref Leve Auto Fil Range Table T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings sdey nuan puawansea uoyng 3u0 Suoioun jueuieinsee A uoyng 3uo sde nuaw Harmonic Distortion Measurement Trace View Key Trace View If measurement chosen is Harmonic Distortion Meas View 6 4a deyD y Harmonics Harmonics amp THD Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe898a I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices Lrg suonoun4 jueuie
143. how to install the software Dependencies Couplings Saved State Other modes besides Spectrum Analysis must be installed licensed in your instrument before they will appear in the Mode menu Some modes also require the presence of specific hardware Saved in instrument state SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed the Factory Preset status bits should be read and any errors resolved prior to switching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Hence any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up Spectrum Analysis If Preset Type Mode is selected then the analyzer settings are preset but it stays in that selected mode Remote Command INSTrument SELect BASIC CDMA CDMA1XEV CDMA2K EDGEGSM LINK NADC NFIGURE PDC PNOISE SA WCDMA INSTrument SELect Chapter 3 203 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O O 1 E KA E
144. is coupled to Res BW so changing Res BW affects Video BW but changing Video BW does not affect Res BW Changing Video BW puts it in manual instead of auto coupled When Video BW is set to Man it is unaffected by Res BW changes When a function is in the Man state a will appear next to its annotation on the display If one or more functions are manually set so that the amplitude or frequency measurement becomes uncalibrated Meas Uncal appears on the top right side of the graticule 2 1 1 Auto All Auto couples all coupled functions If Auto Allis pressed all coupled functions are set to Auto Setting any auto coupled function to Man manual uncouples that function without changing the coupling of other functions Coupled functions are functions that are linked When Auto All is pressed the analyzer automatically couples all instrument settings that have auto man choices In most cases these auto settings give the most accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range When a function is coupled it is in the Auto state When it is uncoupled it is in the Man state Key Path Auto Couple Dependencies Couplings When segmented sweep is on this key is not available greyed out When Auto All is selected Resolution BW couples to Span and Span RBW e Video BW couples to Res BW and VBW RBW Sweep Time couples to Res BW Video BW Detector Span and Center Frequency e CF Step couples to Span in swept spans to Res BW in
145. is set to this value Each of the subsequent range center frequency parameters are set to the appropriate integer multiple of the fundamental frequency The span for range one is set to that of the current range Each of the subsequent range span parameters are set to the appropriate integer multiple of the fundamental span This means that if the fundamental range is zero span all the ranges will be zero span If the range span is zero Res BW Video BW and Sweep Time are set to the current base instrument settings If the range span is non zero Res BW Video BW and Sweep Time for all harmonics are set to the same settings as for the fundamental Span is set to zero for all harmonics and the fundamental Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Knob Increment 196 Step Key Increment 1 12 5 24 3 5 7 5 10 Range Sweep time range of your analyzer History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe HARMonics RTABle FILL no query Example HARM RTAB FILL 5 16 7 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There will always be a minimum of 2 dB of attenuation set to reduce the Chapter 5 419 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e
146. leaks into adjacent transmit channels when two or more carriers are present The results reported are identical to the adjacent power measurement but the setup is different to allow for two or more carriers For more information see Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP on page 429 The measurement settings may be configured by pressing Meas Setup after Multi Carrier Power has been selected Pressing Meas Control allows you to pause or restart your measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement mode Key Path MEASURE el i al E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 309 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command n Results Returned CONFigure MCPow N A Not Applicable er FETCh MCPInP n 1 or not Returns 20 comma separated scalar results in the MEASure MCPIn specified following order READ MCPIn First Carrier relative power dBc First Carrier absolute power dBm Second carrier frequency relative power dBc Second carrier frequency absolute power dBm lower offset A relative power dBc lower offset A absolute power dBm upper offset A relative power dBc upper offset A absolute power dBm Ne ope cb So UE odds Ze E lower offset B relative power dBc 10 lower offset B absolute power dBm 11
147. lines as a reference with fixed frequency and amplitude values The relative Rel setting results in the current limit line value to be relative to the displayed center frequency and reference level amplitude values When limit lines are specified with time rather than frequency the Rel setting only affects the amplitude values The current amplitude values will be relative to the displayed reference level amplitude but the time values will always start at the left edge of the graticule For example assume you have a frequency limit line If the limit line is specified as fixed Fixed entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz If the same limit line table is specified as relative Rel it is displayed relative to the analyzer center frequency and reference level If the center frequency is at 1 0 GHz a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1 3 GHz If the amplitude component of the relative limit line segment is 10 dB the 10 dB is added to the reference level value to obtain the amplitude of the given segment reference level offset included A limit line entered as Fixed may be changed to Rel and one entered as Rel may be changed to Fixed When changing between fixed and relative limit lines the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same posi
148. lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 156 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 7 3 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Create Dir 2 5 7 4 Dir Select Displays the highlighted directory See Dir Select on page 135 for more information Key Path File Create Dir 2 5 8 Delete All Deletes all the files on a floppy disk any information on the disk will be destroyed Key Type Branch Key Notes This key displays the file manager display form which includes data entry fields for the new drive name and path There is another definition of Format key that defines the format file type of you data that you want to save Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 2 5 8 1 Delete All Now Executes the Delete All function After pressing Delete All the following message will appear on the display WARNING You are about to destroy ALL data on volume A Press Delete All again to proceed or any other key to abort While deleting a popup message is displayed Deleting A11 After a successful floppy disk file deletion the green text message Volume A delete complete appears in the status line Key Path File Delete All Remote Command There is no remote command for this key Chapter 2 157
149. mixer Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in Instrument State Remote Command Example ADC RANG NONE Chapter 2 81 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 82 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L BW Avg 2 2 BW Avg Activates the resolution bandwidth function and displays the menu keys that control both the bandwidth and averaging functions 2 2 1 Res BW Enables you to select the 3 01 dB resolution bandwidth RBW of the analyzer in 10 steps from 1 Hz to 3 MHz plus bandwidths of 4 5 6 or 8 MHz If an unavailable bandwidth is entered with the numeric keypad the closest available bandwidth is selected Sweep time is coupled to RBW As the RBW changes the sweep time if set to Auto is changed to maintain amplitude calibration Video bandwidth VBW is coupled to RBW As the resolution bandwidth changes the video bandwidth if set to Auto changes to maintain the ratio set by VBW RBW When Res BW is set to Auto resolution bandwidth is autocoupled to span The ratio of span to RBW is set by Span RBW described on page 93 The factory default for this ratio is approximately 106 1 when auto coupled When Res BW is set to Man bandwidths are entered by the user and these bandwidths are used regardless of other analyzer settings NOTE In zero span the auto man
150. more information 5 20 4 5 View See View on page 286 for more information 5 20 4 Blank See Blank on page 286 for more information 450 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW 5 21 Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW When Occupied BW has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis Mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu The Occupied Bandwidth measurement integrates the power of the displayed spectrum and puts markers at the frequencies between which a selected percentage of the power is contained The measurement defaults to 99 of the occupied bandwidth power The power bandwidth routine first computes the combined power of all signal responses contained in the trace For 99 occupied power bandwidth markers are placed at the frequencies on either side of 99 of the power 1 of the power is evenly distributed outside the markers The difference between the marker frequencies is the 99 power bandwidth and is the value displayed The occupied bandwidth function also indicates the difference between the analyzer center frequency and the center frequency of the channel referred to as Transmit Freq Error The measurement can be made in single or continuous sweep mode The center frequency reference level and channel spacing must be set by the user Key Path Front panel key 5 21 1 Avg Number Press Avg Number On to specify
151. o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measure Commands MEASure measurements n This is a fast single command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings e g radio standard that you have currently selected Stops the current measurement if any and sets up the instrument for the specified measurement using the factory defaults e Initiates the data acquisition for the measurement s Blocks other SCPI communication waiting until the measurement is complete before returning results e After the data is valid it returns the scalar results or the trace data for the specified measurement The type of data returned may be defined by an n value that is sent with the command The scalar measurement results will be returned if the optional n value is not included or is set to 1 If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available ASCII is the default format for the data output Older versions of Spectrum Analysis and Phase Noise mode measurements only use ASCII The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster than the ASCII format Refer to the FORMat DATA comm
152. of instrument 557 Config I O key 262 configuration GPIB address 263 host ID 264 host name 264 IP address 263 265 LAN 265 Configure Carriers key 434 CONFigure commands 298 Connected To Previous key 116 connection errors 539 connection refused error 541 connection timed out error 541 continuous measurements 329 Continuous Pk key 212 213 control keys 47 175 207 Control LAN Telnet key 266 Control SICL LAN key 267 Control Socket LAN key 266 controller 554 controlling gate time 196 Copy key 151 Copy Now key 151 copying files 151 correction antenna 61 62 64 cable 61 frequency 64 66 67 other 61 user 61 correction constant default 261 Corrections file type 129 corrections applying 61 Index time 262 Corrections key 59 133 counter 194 Counts key 382 Coupling key 172 couplings 45 Create Dir key 155 Create Dir Now key 155 creating directories 155 directories now 155 CSV format 141 CSV key 141 CSV trace type 129 current measurement query 328 D data arbitrary blocks 508 data acquisition sampling points 382 data byte order setting 160 data format 160 data to a file moving 158 date display on off 253 displaying 252 setting 252 Date Format key 253 dBm key 57 dBmV key 57 dBuV key 57 default color palette 271 Default key 271 default values setting remotely 298 defaults LAN 539 restoring system 274 defining limits 108 defi
153. of preset key choices You must press one of these keys to initiate an instrument preset Pressing User Preset resets to the settings values that you have previously defined as the User preset state using the Save User Preset key 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Pressing Mode Preset does not change the mode it only resets the current mode settings to the factory defaults Pressing Factory Preset resets the settings for all the modes to the factory defaults The factory preset mode is Spectrum Analysis with continuous sweep If you are not already in the Spectrum Analysis mode it switches to that mode Pressing Save User Preset saves the current user settings None of these instrument presets resets persistent functions such as GPIB address time date display style or auto alignment state to the factory defaults See Restore Sys Defaults on page 231 If Preset Type is set to Factory in the System menu pressing the Preset front panel key performs a factory preset which implements the following Resets the analyzer to Spectrum Analyzer mode e Brings up the Freq menu with no active function e Sets certain conditions in all modes to their default values e Clears the input and output buffers and all the trace data e Amplitude correction factors are turned off but remain in analyzer memory e Limit line testing is turned off but the limit line tables remain in anal
154. percent occupied bandwidth is then calculated The analyzer span will be set to the same value as the OBW Span for the measurement OBW Span should be set to approximately 2 times the expected occupied bandwidth result Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset 3 MHz or as defined by the radio standard selected Default Terminator Hz Range Remote Command o c e 5 o c E nt c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e SENSe OBW PREQuency SPAN freq SENSe OBW FREQuency SPAN Example OBW FREQ SPAN 10 MHz OBW FREO SPAN 454 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW 5 21 6 x dB Enables you to specify the power level used to determine the emission bandwidth as the number of dB down from the highest signal point P4 within the occupied bandwidth span Frequencies f and f are determined as the furthest frequencies xdB below and above P respectively The emission bandwidth is then calculated as fy f as shown in Figure 5 1 NOTE The asterisk next to the x dB bandwidth value in Figure 5 1 indicates the results may not have been determined with optimal analyzer settings If emission bandwidth is your primary interest select Meas Setup Max Hold Then change detector mode to peak by pressing Det Demod Detector Peak Acquiring peak data ensures accuracy of this measurement Figure 5 1 Occupied Bandwidth Measure
155. quzesesederwikskeQXP EE eee d 311 MEASIEOBWTERBEOE cce cse yx Der RXRR iex VERRE e Y ROUEN RO ACA RR RP RR ks 304 MiASureOR WOR WINN uui Ligue bd eek dda asd edo e dac ORE RC RR RO dde 304 KE u cee nieces orsta oures e REGER e RE qE Ruga ERR REA x ARAdq Ree E 304 MEASurQOBW EE sche RR RO RUE EE RERO ATR AER Rage obe AG RR Sek e 304 d KE OK 314 MEADQIESENASEIBI Lu ioa dame eat R Rep e doe back Ope Pt dole qe oio de eed i de iiid 324 NB Mure IOUS 4 5 pkcdadepsdod d piod REE R EE EC PORop E bd Pappe acad 322 CAE E EE 321 IMEASureTOINIPS ANE dives ke EE A EE EE AE A EE ME EA NEE ERE ES 321 MES SUE TIN Loose pe bUPRO ERA qe PEERS EDU VEO be EERE E Ub E PRONUS A M CARES 321 WMBIEMQoESLATalog cdit MARES wy ieee d OO ACEN ANEREN de RR SY ek 130 MMEMory COPY hnle namel gt lt file nam c K ci wi ewe dk bee WEA RN RAN RR RR n 151 22 List of Commands MMEMory DATA file name definite length bock 158 IME More DATA lt Dle WANES eei que Eppure pd cS it 5 doge au ug ua Ra alta Bedding 158 MMEMory DELete file name 149 MMEMory LOAD CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER lt file name gt 144 MMEMory LOAD LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name 144 IMMEMornsEOADGSTAIsI HBHle ame usa sew koe rn Ade WE RER AC CE RO a 144 MMEMory LOAD TRACe lt label gt lt file name 144 MMEMory MDIRectory dir name 155 MMEMory MOVE lt file namel1 ffile name 153 MMEMory RDIRectory
156. reference as the signal input 2 7 1 4 RF Selects the front panel RF Input port to be the analyzer signal input Key Path Input Output Input Port Remote Command See Input Port on page 171 Example FEED AREF selects the 50 MHz amplitude reference as the signal input 2 7 1 2 Amptd Ref Selects the 50 MHz 25 dBm internal amplitude reference as the input signal Key Path Input Output Input Port Remote Command See Input Port on page 171 Example FEED AREF selects the 50 MHz amplitude reference as the signal input Chapter 2 171 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 a E a gt LI P LI lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L Input Output 2 7 2 RF Coupling Specifies alternating current AC or direct current DC coupling at the analyzer RF input port Selecting AC coupling switches in a blocking capacitor that blocks any DC voltage present at the analyzer input This decreases the input frequency range of the analyzer but prevents damage to the input circuitry of the analyzer if there is a DC voltage present at the RF input In AC coupling mode signals less than 20 MHz are not calibrated You must switch to DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz Note that the message DC Coupled will be displayed on the analyzer when DC is selected Some amplitude specifications apply only when coupling is set to DC Refer t
157. relative power is relative to the main channel power spectral density and therefore is always equal to 0 00 dB Remote Command Notes The main channel power is returned in the current amplitude Example units and the lower and upper channel results are always returned in dB FETC ACP or MEAS ACP or READ ACP commands return the scalar results of main channel power lower channel power relative and upper channel power relative if only one offset is set to on and the Radio Standard is set to None Otherwise 28 values are returned If Meas Type is Total Power Ref these are the main channel power in dBm and in dBc from the carrier 0 dBc each repeated followed by the absolute and relative power levels for each lower and upper offset if Meas Type is Total Power Ref Otherwise they are the main channel power spectral density and relative power spectral density 0 dB each repeated followed by the absolute and relative spectral density values for each lower and upper offset Chapter 5 307 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 308 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 6 Multi Carrier Power Multi Carrier Power is the measure of the power that
158. revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command These commands control the three marker modes Refer to the Normal Delta and Off key descriptions for additional information CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE NORMal DELTa OFF CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE Remote Command Notes See also the marker positioning commands Marker X Position on page 395 Marker Y Position Remote Command Only on page 396 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Marker Maximum and Minimum Remote Command Only on page 397 Example CALC PST MARK MODE DELT activates a delta marker marker 1 at the 0 dB point of your measurement yellow line Chapter 5 391 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 13 1 Select Marker Selects one of the four possible markers Once a marker is selected it can be set to any of the control modes Normal Delta or Off Key Path Marker after MEASURE Power Stat CCDF is selected State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Marker 1 Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe 7 Sets or queries th
159. select the function Example CALC MARK2 FUNC OFF turns the marker 2 function off 3 2 5 Marker Count Accesses the marker count menu Key Path Marker Fctn 3 2 5 1 Marker Count Turns the marker frequency counter on and off for any active marker If no marker is active before Marker Count is pressed a marker is activated at the center of the display An asterisk may appear in the upper right area ofthe display along with the message Cntr 1 the number in the message depends on the active marker If the marker count function is on and you change the active marker the new active marker will use marker count If the frequency counter function is on with only one active marker and that marker is turned off then the frequency counter function is turned off If the frequency counter function is on with multiple markers turned on and only one is turned off the frequency counter function stays on Marker Count frequency readings are not affected by the frequency offset function In Zero Span the counter continues to function counting any signal near the center frequency of the analyzer NOTE Setting Marker Fctn to Off does not turn Marker Count off Key Path Marker Fctn Marker Count 194 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker Fctn State Saved If Marker Count is on that setting is saved in the instrument state Factory Preset Off Remote Command 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 E v E
160. selected the vertical graticule divisions are scaled in logarithmic units The top line of the graticule is the Reference Level and use the scaling per division Scale Div to assign values to the other locations on the graticule When Scale Type Lin is selected the vertical graticule divisions are linearly scaled with the reference level value at the top of the display and zero volts at the bottom Each vertical division of the graticule represents one tenth of the Reference Level The Y Axis Units used for each type of display are set by pressing Y Axis Units The analyzer remembers the settings for both Log and Lin Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State 52 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Factory Preset Log 5 D o E c 3 D 5 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls Chapter 2 53 E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Remote Command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing LINear LOGarithmic DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing Example DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC 2 0 5 Presel Center Adjusts the centering of the preselector filter to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the active marker frequency If no marker is on when Presel Center is pressed the analyzer turns on the currently selected marker and places it on the peak signal
161. set the instrument IP address and host name o Is the upper and lower case character usage in your host name consistent o Have any of the following files been deleted or overwritten UNIX etc hosts etc inetd conf etc services PCs dependent network files If you know or suspect that something has changed on your network consult with your network administrator Timeout Errors Timeout errors such as Device Timeout File Timeout and Operation Timeout are symptoms of one or both of the following problems The currently configured timeout limits are too short compared to the time it takes the LAN to complete some operations This problem may occur during periods of increased LAN traffic The LAN connection has failed or fails occasionally To increase your timeout period refer to your computer documentation for instructions Contact your LAN administrator if E fe Kei o 3 3 E io Tl E E Q E 3 bi E cE o Chapter 6 539 un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument problems continue Packets Routinely Lost If packets are routinely lost proceed to the troubleshooting section in this chapter relating to your network Problems Transferring or Copying Files If you have problems copying files out of or into the instrument you migh
162. tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Remote Command Refer to Fail Mask on page 472 5 22 4 11 4 Abs OR Rel Set the limit test to show Fail if one of the absolute spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Abs Start and Abs Stop OR one of the relative spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Rel Start and Rel Stop Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More Fail Mask State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Remote Command Refer to Fail Mask on page 472 5 22 5 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There is always a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE 5 22 6 RRC Filter Pressing RRC Filter turns the Root Raised Cosine filter on or off This filter is the type Chapter 5 475 G E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas S
163. the Save User Preset key to define your user preset settings Refer to Preset on page 221 for more information If you have not saved a user state then the instrument will save the power up state for you to use as a default user preset state Key Path System Power On Preset Preset Type Readback User Annunciation Annotation None State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but no saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default Mode Remote Command See Preset Type on page 250 Example SYST PRES USER SAVE saves the current state to be used as the preset 250 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System user state SYST PRES TYPE USER defines the type of preset as the user preset With user preset selected and a user state saved use SYST PRES to do a user preset 4 8 2 2 Mode Sets the preset type to Mode When you do a preset the current mode factory default instrument state will be restored A mode preset does not change the mode Refer to Preset on page 221 for more information Key Path System Power On Preset Preset Type Hd Readback Mode 3 Annunciation S Annotation None D EJ Dependencies 2 Couplings None S State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but no saved in Instrument State M N SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default Mode Remote Command SYSTem PRESet TYPE See Preset Type o
164. the default factory configuration settings Key Path System Power On Preset Preset if the preset type is set to User See Save User Preset on page 225 Annunciation Annotation None Dependencies Couplings None SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Remote Command SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Example SYST PRES SAVE Use SYST PRES TYPE USER to set factory preset type to User Then use SYST PRES to do the preset 4 8 3 Time Date Displays the Time Date function menu keys used to set and display the real time clock Key Path System Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 252 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 3 1 Time Date Turns the display of the real time clock on or off Key Path System Time Date Annunciation Annotation Current time and date are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default On Restored by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk STATe ON OFF DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk STATe 7 Example DISP ANN CLOC ON 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N 4 8 3 2 Date Format Enables you to set the date display to month day year or day month year It is set to a month day year format when the instrument System Defaults are restored
165. the host name and IP address are correctly entered in 542 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument the node names database If you are using a UNIX environment ping each node along the route between your workstation and the instrument starting with the your workstation Ping each gateway then attempt a ping of the remote file server If the instrument still does not respond to ping then you should suspect a hardware problem with the instrument To check the instrument performance refer to Verify the Instrument Performance in this chapter Intermittent Response Ifyou received 1 to 8 packets back there is probably a problem with the network Because the number of packets received depends on your network traffic and integrity the number might be different for your network Use a LAN analyzer or LAN management software to monitor activity and determine where bottlenecks or other problems are occurring The instrument will still function but communications over the LAN will be slower On a single client single server network the most likely cause of intermittent response to an echo request is a hardware problem with the LAN module installed in the PC the cable or the instrument To check the instrument refer to Verify the Instrument Performance later in this chapter The Standard UNIX PING Command Synopsis ping l r v ol host packetsize count Description The ping command s
166. the mode It resets only the current mode settings to the factory defaults Key Path Preset History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command See SYSTem PRESet on page 186 RST The RST command always does a mode preset except that it sets the instrument to do a single sweep measurement instead of continuous Example SYST PRES TYPE MODE selects the mode type preset SYST PRES immediately presets the current analyzer mode 4 2 8 Factory Preset This key is available only when the preset type is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type Factory A factory preset returns instrument settings to the factory default values If you are not already in the spectrum analysis mode it switches to that mode A factory preset does not reset persistent functions such as GPIB address time date display style or auto alignment state see Restore Sys Defaults on page 231 Key Path Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet See SYSTem PRESet on page 186 Remote Command Notes This command will not reset persistent functions such as GPIB address time date display style or auto alignment state to their factory defaults Use SYSTem PRESet PERSistent See Restore Sys Defaults on page 231 Example SYST PRES TYPE FACT selects the factory type preset SYST PRES immediately presets the analyzer to its factory defaults 224 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Preset 4 2 4
167. the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result The average is displayed at the end of each sweep Press Avg Number Off to disable measurement averaging Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Range 1 through 1000 Remote Command el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 SENSe OBW AVERage COUNt lt integer gt SENSe OBW AVERage COUNT 7 SENSe OBW AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe OBW AVERage L STATe 7 Example OBW AVER COUN 20 OBW AVER COUN Chapter 5 451 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW OBW AVER ON OBW AVER 5 21 2 Avg Mode Enables you to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached s EXP Exponential Averaging mode Each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average is displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat After reachi
168. this improved throughput if there is excessive LAN traffic i e your test instrument is connected to enterprise LAN You may want to use a private LAN that is only for your test system Using an Option Mode Minimize the number of GPIB transactions When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument each transaction requires driver overhead and bus handshaking so minimizing these transactions reduces the time used You can reduce bus transactions by sending multiple commands per transaction See the information on Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line in the SCPI Language Basics section e Ifyou are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup use the READ command It is faster then using INITiate and FETCh f you are changing the frequency and making a measurement repeatedly you can reduce transactions by sending the optional frequency parameter with your READ command for example READ lt meas gt lt freq gt These optional parameters are not available in some personality modes such as Spectrum Analysis or Phase Noise The CONFigure M EASure READ commands for measurements in the option Modes allow you to send center frequency setup information along with the command for example MEAS PVT 935 2MHz This sets the power vs time measurement to it s defaults then changes the center frequency to 935 2 MHz initiates a measurement waits until it is complete
169. to all traces This function applies to Next Peak Next Peak Left and Next Peak Right If Peak Search is set to Param it also applies to Peak Search Key Path Peak Search Search Param Dependencies Couplings This function is not available when Y Axis is set to Frequency instead of Amplitude State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 6 0 dB Factory Default 6 0 dB Terminators dB Default Terminator dB Resolution Rounding Truncation 0 01 dB Knob Increment 1 dB Step Key Increment 1dB Range 0 0 dB to 100 dB Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PEAK EXCursion rel amplitude UP DOWN MIN MAX DEFault CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PEAK EXCursion Remote Command Notes CALC MARK PEAK SEAR MODE must be set to PARameter if Chapter 4 215 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N A a o E 9 G E ra m c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search you want Peak Search to take advantage of the threshold excursion Example CALC MARK PEAK EXC 30 DB sets the minimum peak excursion requirement to 30 dB See the full example for the CALC MARK PEAK SEAR MODE command below 4 1 9 2 Pk Threshold Specifies the minimum signal level for the analyzer internal peak identification routine to recognize as a peak A signal must rise above the Peak Threshold by the value specified in Peak Excursn then fall back to the
170. transfers files over a network connection between a local machine and the remote server host Options and Parameters When ftp is invoked with a server host specified a connection is opened immediately Otherwise ftp waits for user commands The following options are supported g disables expansion of shell metacharacters in file and directory names i disables prompts during multiple file operations n disables automatic log in v enables verbose output B specifies a new DataSocketBufferSize server host the name or address of the remote host Chapter 6 525 p fe S 9 3 3 5 Co T E 5 2 D 3 f 3 S D o c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Table 6 2 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument This table lists the available user commands ftp Commands Command Description ascii Sets the file transfer type to ASCII binary Sets the file transfer type to binary bye Closes the connection to the host and exits ftp cd remote directory Sets the working directory on the host to remote directory delete remote file Deletes remote file or empty remote directory dir remote directory Lists the contents of the specified remote directory If remote directory is unspecified the contents of the current remote directory are listed get remote file Local file Copies remote file to local file
171. trigger cycle s When OFF the trigger system remains in an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON or an INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single trigger cycle and then return to the idle state The query INIT CONT returns 1 or 0 1 is returned when the instrument is continuous triggering 0 is returned when it is single triggering Example INIT CONT OFF 5 2 3 Pause or Resume This function pauses the currently running measurement Pressing Pause will toggle between pausing and resuming your measurement The key label will toggle between Pause and Resume If an averaged measurement was in progress the average counter is frozen when the measurement is halted Key Path Meas Control Remote Command INITiate PAUSe to pause the measurement INITiate RESume to resume the measurement Example INIT PAUS Remote Command Notes See Abort the Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only on page 331 for more information 5 2 4 Trigger a Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only This command initiates a sweep if in S mode with no measurement currently selected The command is ignored if the instrument is in a measurement selected under the MEASURE key but the measurement is currently running INITiate CONTinuous ON If a measurement is selected but it is in the idle state i e it s not running INITiate CONT OFF this comman
172. typing in each command After pressing Chapter 6 527 E fe te S 9 3 3 5 rs T E 5 2 D 3 f 3 5 D un c E c 9 G E ra E E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Enter on the last line in the example above the instrument returns the amplitude level of the marker to your computer and displays it on the next line For example after typing CALC MARK MAX and pressing Enter the computer could display 2 50000000000E 010 When you are done close the telnet connection Enter the escape character to get the telnet prompt The escape character Ctrl and in this example does not print At the telnet prompt type quit or close The telnet connection closes and you see your regular prompt Connection closed The following example shows a terminal screen using the example commands above Telnet Example Welcome to at42 Agilent Technologies E4440A US41220095 A 02 04 20010921 10 52 07 SCPI calc mark mode pos SCPI calc mark max SCPI calc mark x 2 5000000000000000E 010 SCPI gt If your telnet connection is in a mode called line by line there is no local echo This means you will not be able to see the characters you are typing on your computer s display until after you press the Enter key To remedy this you need to change your telnet connection to character by character mode This can
173. upper Output Intercept Power value in dBm Gelb EA E el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 FETCh TOIN IP3 Returns the worst case Output Intercept Power value MEASure TOIN IP3 in dBm READ TOIN IP3 Example FETC TOIN or MEAS TOIN or READ TOIN FETC TOIN IP3 or MEAS TOIN IP3 or READ TOIN IP3 Chapter 5 321 o c e 5 o c E H Ld c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 11 Spurious Emissions The spurious emissions measurement identifies and determines the power level of spurious emissions in certain frequency bands For more information see Meas Setup Spurious Emissions on page 485 Key Path MEASURE Remote Command CONFigure SPURious INITiate SPURious FETCh SPURious n MEASure SPURious n READ SPURious n n Results Returned n 1 or not Returns a variable length list of values containing detailed spur specified information The total number of data values returned is 1 6x spurs where x is the number of spurs identified You can have up to 121 data entries if you have the maximum 20 spurs identified The values returned are in the following order 1 Number of spurs in items 2 through 6 in this list Repeat the following for each spur Spur number Range number in which spur was located integer Fre
174. upper offset C absolute power dBm If the results are not available 999 0 is returned Example FETC MCP or MEA MCP or READ MCP O E WA c e EI bi D 7 L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Chapter 5 311 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 7 Power Stat CCDF The CCDF measurement is a statistical measurement of a high level signal or peak power It shows in both graphical and tabular form for what percentage of the time a signal exceeds its average power and by how much this average is exceeded For more information see Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF on page 381 For each single sweep of this measurement the average power is defined by Pavg Ke n 1 where V is the envelope voltage Zo is the characteristic impedance and n is the number of samples 32k maximum Pavg is used as a guideline to define the probability of the samples which is xdB above the average power The number of samples collected per sweep depends upon the sampling rate and the setting of the measurement interval Multiple sweeps may be required if the sample number exceeds the number of samples collected per sweep The results and the CCDF curve are updated after each sweep Results from a 2 17 GHz 3GPP W CDMA input si
175. value as needed Using an Option Mode Optimize your GSM output RF spectrum switching measurement For ORFS switching setting the break frequency to zero 0 puts the analyzer in a measurement setup where it can use a direct time measurement algorithm instead of an FFT based algorithm This non FFT approach is faster However remember that your break frequency for ORFS modulation measurements must be gt 400 kHz for valid measurements so you will need to change the break frequency if you are making both types of measurements Using an Option Mode Avoid using RFBurst trigger for single burst signals RFBurst triggering works best when measuring signals with repetitive bursts For a non repetitive or single burst signals use the IF video trigger or external trigger depending on what you have available RFBurst triggering depends on its establishment of a valid triggering reference level based on previous bursts If you only have a single burst the peak detection nature of this triggering function may result in the trigger being done at the wrong level point generating incorrect data or it may not trigger at all Are you making a single burst measurement To get consistent triggering and good data for this type of measurement application you need to synchronize the triggering of the DUT with the analyzer You should use the analyzer s internal status system for this The first step in this process is to initialize the
176. value by using the numeric keypad Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob After entering a frequency Amplitude becomes active A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude correction factors Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front panel NOTE The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered Similarly the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Cable Other or User Edit State Saved Not part of instrument state saved in a corrections file Remote Command See Edit on page 62 64 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 5 D o E c 3 D 5 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI r Chapter 2 65 E 1 KA E Q O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 10 2 2 3 Amplitude Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point After entering an amplitude the point number automatically increments and Frequency becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections
177. when Combined is selected Key Path Trace View Factory Preset dBc History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 20 4 Trace One button measurements do not change this function See Trace on page 284 for more information 5 20 4 1 Trace 123 Determines which trace the menu keys will affect Press Trace 123 until the number of the desired trace is underlined Key Path Trace View Trace State Saved Saved in Instrument State for all traces History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANk WRITe Clear Write MAXHold Max Hold MINHold Min Hold VIEW View BLANK Blank TRACe 1 2 3 MODE Example TRAC MODE WRIT TRAC MODE MAXH TRAC MODE MINH TRAC MODE VIEW TRAC MODE BLANk TRAC MODE 448 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Multi Carrier Power Measurement el i al E E E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E m T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 449 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Multi Carrier Power Measurement 5 20 4 2 Clear Write See Clear Write on page 285 for more information 5 20 4 3 Max Hold See Max Hold on page 285 for more information 5 20 4 4 Min Hold See Min Hold on page 285 for
178. you must include the INSTR parameter in the syntax The following are examples of valid symbolic names XI0 24 INSTR Device at VXI logical address 24 that is of VISA type INSTR VXI2 128 Device at VXI logical address 128 in the third VXI system VXI2 GPIB VXIO 24 A VXI device at logical address 24 This VXI device is connected via a GPIB VXI command module GPIBO 7 0 A GPIB device at primary address 7 and secondary address 0 on the GPIB interface The following is an example of opening a device session with the GPIB device at primary address23 ViSession defaultRM vi 552 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 23 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp vi viClose vi viClose defaultRM Closing a Session The viClose function must be used to close each session You can close the specific device session which will free all data structures that had been allocated for the session If you close the default resource manager session all sessions opened using that resource manager will be closed Since system resources are also used when searching for resources viFindRsrc or waiting for events viWaitOnEvent the viClose function needs to be called to free up find lists and event contexts Chapter 6 553 E fe te S 9 3 3 5 rs T E 5 2 D 3 f 3 5 D un c E c 9 G E ra o E E
179. zero if the alignment is successful Example CAL IF 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N 4 8 4 4 3 Align ADC Initiates an alignment on the ADC circuitry Key Path System Alignments Align Subsys Annunciation Annotation Message boxes indicating alignment of ADC progress SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies Status questionable calibration Bit 6 will be set if Align ADC fails Remote Command CALibration ADC CALibration ADC Remote Command Notes The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful Example CAL ADC 4 8 4 4 4 Align Current IF Flatness Initiates an alignment of the current IF flatness for the purpose of improving absolute amplitude within FFT Sweeps and improving group delay in some digital demodulation measurements Key Path System Alignments Align Subsys Annunciation Annotation Will display a series of pop up message boxes explaining what is being Chapter 4 259 Instrument Functions P Z System aligned a subset of the Align All Now message boxes Remote Command CALibration FLATness IF CALibration FLATness IF Remote Command Notes The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful Example CAL FLAT IF N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 260 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 4 84 5 Align Current SysGain Initiate
180. zero span differences between the highest and lowest trace points by setting a reference marker on the peak signal and placing a A marker on the minimum signal Key Path Peak Search State Saved Not part of saved state Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PTPeak Example CALC MARK PTP CALC MARK Y queries the delta amplitude value for marker 1 For more information on this command see Marker on page 177 4 1 6 Mkr gt CF See Mkr gt CF on page 197 for the command to select this function Key Path Peak Search 4 1 7 Continuous Pk When a marker is placed on a signal and Continuous Pk is pressed the marker will remain on the signal even if the signal frequency changes as long as the amplitude of the signal does not change by more than 3 dB from one sweep to another If the signal is lost an attempt will be made to find it again and maintain the marker on the signal peak If there are other signals on screen near the same amplitude one of them may be found instead Signals near 0 Hz cannot be maintained effectively because they cannot be distinguished from the LO feedthrough which is excluded by intent from the search algorithm NOTE This function is intended to maintain the marker on signals with a frequency that is changing and an amplitude that is not changing Key Path Peak Search State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2
181. 0 Added with PSA firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN WL802DOT11B 5 3 1 14 3 802 11g Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard 802 11g This standard is only available for the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN WL802DOT11G el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 5 3 1 14 4 Hiper LAN 2 Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard Hiper LAN2 This standard is only available for the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Chapter 5 339 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Example RAD STAN HIPERLAN2 5 3 1 15 DVB T Accesses the DVB T key menu to enable you to select a DVB T mask filterin
182. 0 820 0 9 9 000 910 0 10 10 00 1000 0 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 16 6 1 Range Selects a range and updates the values on the other Range Table keys so that they reflect the settings for the selected range If Range is set to On it is used as part of the measurement when set to Off it is excluded A range is made up of the next parameters Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Table 5 1 on page 414 Range Off On 414 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion Remote Command This parameter can send up to 10 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted For example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values remain as they were SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST STATe OFF ON 0 1 The query for this parameter will always return 20 values SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST STATe Example HARM RANG LIST STAT ON OFF ON ON 5 16 6 2 Center Freq Used to set the center frequency of the analyzer Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Table 5 1 on page 414 Knob Increment 196 Step Key Increment l 125 2 3 5b 7 5 10 Range Frequency range of your analyzer History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command This parameter can send up
183. 0 dB 0 dB Default Terminator dB Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 5 Range 200 dB through 200 dB History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA lt dB gt lt dB gt lt dB gt CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA Example CALC MCP OFFS LIST LIM NEG DATA 50dB 55dB 60dB CALC MCP OFFS LIST LIM NEG DATA 440 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP 5 19 5 Carrier Result Press Carrier Result to select the result you wish to display on the last line of the carrier power results list except when s the carrier result number lt 4 the first 4 carrier power results are displayed thecarrier result number 2 9 the last 4 carrier power results are displayed Key Path Meas Setup Key Notes This key is only available when Meas Control Measure Single is selected State Saved Not saved Factory Preset 1 Step Key Increment 1 Range 1 to number of carriers History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 19 6 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There will always be a minimum of 2 dB of attenuation set to reduce the potential errors due to VSWR Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Not sa
184. 1 Instrument Protocol defined by the VXIbus Consortium working group Older versions of National Instruments VISA does not support the VXI 11 Instrument Protocol Contact National Instruments for their latest version SICL LAN can be used with Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT and HP UX Your instrument has a SICL LAN server to emulate GPIB over LAN but it cannot be used to control other externally connected GPIB instruments Collecting SICL LAN Set up Information Before you set up your instrument as a SICL LAN server you need some information about your instrument The value of the following parameters is used to set up your VISA SICL LAN client application Emulated GPIB Name The GPIB name is the name given to a device used to communicate with the instrument Your instrument is shipped with gpib7 as its GPIB name The GPIB name is the same as the remote SICL address Emulated GPIB Logical Unit The logical unit number is a unique integer assigned to the device to be controlled using SICL LAN Your instrument is shipped with the logical unit number set Chapter 6 531 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument to 8 This can t be change but you don t care Numbers 0 through 30 excluding 21 are valid logical unit numbers for your instrument Logical unit number 21 is used for the instrument s internal emulation mode
185. 19 45 69 Jun 24 2002 Range Table Ch Freq Trig Free Range Harmonic Distortion a Cs 1 n Off Center Freq 56 0000000 MHz f 21 44 dBm Atten 1f amp Span 0 00000000 Hz Res BH 100 000000 kHz Ruto Man Video BH 100 000000 kHz to Man Li aa Sweep Time 16 08 ms Auto Man Auto Fill Range Table h NOTE You can edit the range table at anytime by pressing any front panel key except the following Esc System File Save Print Setup Print Marker Peak Search Freq Count Next Marker Next Window or Zoom el i U E pb E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Key Path Meas Setup Saved State All values for all ranges are saved in instrument state Chapter 5 413 2 c Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion Factory Preset For each range the following settings are selected Range State On Zero Span Res BW Mode Man Video BW Man is set to 2 kHz and Sweep Time Mode Auto is set to 10 ms The table below defines the other default parameter settings for the measurement Table 5 1 Range Table Default Settings Range Center Res BW Freq GHz kHz 1 1 000 100 0 2 2 000 200 0 3 3 000 300 0 4 4 000 430 0 5 5 000 510 0 6 6 000 620 0 7 7 000 750 0 8 8 00
186. 2 E 2 LL E o E E Be s 7 E Instrument Functions M O MODE Remote Command Notes Select the measurement mode The actual available choices depend upon which modes measurement applications are installed in the instrument A list of the valid choices is returned with the INST CAT query Once an instrument mode is selected only the commands that are valid for that mode can be executed BASIC CDMAIXEV 1xEV DO CDMA2K cdma2000 EDGEGSM GSM with EDGE LINK 89600 VSA Link software NADC NFIGURE noise figure PDC PNOISE phase noise SA TDSCDMA WCDMA 3GPP Example INST SA INST 3 5 1 Spectrum Analysis Selects the spectrum analysis measurement mode for your analyzer Key Path Mode Remote Command INS Trument SELect SA Example INST SA INST 3 5 2 Application Mode Number Selection Remote command only Select the measurement mode by its mode number The actual available choices depend upon which applications are installed in your instrument Dependencies Couplings Other modes besides Spectrum Analysis must be installed licensed in your instrument before they will appear in the Mode menu Some modes also require the presence of specific hardware 204 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O MODE SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed the status bits should be read and any errors resolved prior to sw
187. 2 printer language 229 prints per page 232 printer setup 229 Printer Setup key 229 printer parallel HP printers 229 printout orientation 231 Prints Page key 232 programmer s reference using 44 programming command parameters 506 command syntax 503 compatibility among PSA modes 519 521 compatibility PSA series versus VSA 522 example using C language 549 SCPI basics 503 socket LAN 530 538 using C language 546 valid commands 504 via LAN 530 with C 538 with Java 538 programming commands IEEE 563 PSA series versus VSA programming compatibility 522 PSD Ref key 458 461 Pwr Avg key 91 Q questionable condition register 573 574 R Radio Std Setup key 341 Range key 412 414 488 range table 412 413 414 486 488 Range Table key 413 486 ratio VBW RBW 86 READ commands 299 300 Readout key 186 real number data format 160 rear panel features see Getting Started guide 44 recall IEEE command 566 Ref BW key 357 Ref Carrier Freq key 433 Ref Carrier key 431 Ref Channel key 458 Ref Level key 49 498 Ref Lvl Offset key 58 Ref Trace key 386 reference bandwidth 357 reference level 498 reference level key 49 reference level offset 58 reference trace 386 reference trace storing 385 register calibration condition 575 576 frequency condition 576 577 578 integrity condition 578 579 integrity signal condition 580 581 operation condition 571 5
188. 20 test 111 time 115 units 120 upper 109 Limits key 108 121 133 Line key 288 Linear scale type 52 listener 554 Load key 143 Load Now key 144 loading files 144 limit lines from file 144 local echo lack of 528 locating peaks 209 210 211 212 213 Log scale type 52 log power averaging 89 Log Pwr Avg key 90 lower limit type 110 lower limit 109 Lower Offset Limit key 440 M manual using 44 margin off 112 on 112 Margin key 112 marker menu map 607 moving to center frequency 212 X position 395 396 397 Marker gt front panel key 197 Marker gt CF key 197 Marker gt CF Step key 197 Marker gt Ref Lvl key 200 Marker gt Start key 197 Marker gt Stop key 199 Marker All Off key 189 394 marker control mode Delta 181 392 Delta Pair 181 Normal 180 392 484 Span Pair 184 Marker Count key 194 access 194 Marker A gt Span key 199 marker fctn menu map 609 Marker Fctn front panel key 191 Marker front panel key 177 391 483 marker function 191 Index 5 Index Marker Noise key 191 Marker Table key 189 marker to menu map 608 Marker Trace key 185 394 markers all off 189 394 bandwidth power 193 frequency readout 187 inverse time readout 188 moving 197 199 200 209 off 185 189 194 394 484 peak continuous 212 213 excursion 215 minimum search 211 next 209 next left 210 next right 210 search 218 threshold 21
189. 22 3 4 Res BW Specifies the resolution bandwidth used in measuring and the power in the main channel Key Path Meas Setup Ref Channel Factory Preset 100 kHz On Range Full Range provided by Base Instrument Hardware History Remote command updated with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command L SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution freq SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution 7 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO Remote Command Notes If an unavailable bandwidth is entered the closest available bandwidth is used Refer to Res BW on page 83 Example SEM BAND 4 MHz SEM BWID 4 MHz SEM BAND SEM BWID SEM BAND AUTO 1 SEM BWID AUTO 1 SEM BAND AUTO SEM BW TD AUTO 460 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 22 3 5 Total Pwr Ref or PSD Ref Displays the type of power measurement reference selected using the Meas Type key see Meas Type on page 458 Total Pwr Ref is the power in the carrier that is used as the reference in computing the relative power values for the offsets When Man is selected this can be set by the user When Auto is selected this is the measured power in the reference carrier PSD Ref is the mean power spectral density in the carrier that is used as the reference in computing the relative power spectral density values for the offs
190. 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI LI lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Saved State Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Auto Log power Remote Command SENSe AVERage TYPE RMS LOG SCALar SENSe AVERage TYPE SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO Example AVER TYPE RMS Sets Power RMS averaging AVER TYPE SCAL Sets Voltage averaging AVER TYPE LOG Sets Log Power video averaging 2 2 5 1 Auto Chooses the optimum type of averaging for the current instrument measurement settings Auto selects Power RMS Averaging if Marker Noise is on Band Intvl Power is on or Detector is set to Man and Average It selects Voltage Averaging if Amplitude Scale Type is set to Lin For other conditions Auto selects Log Power Average Key Path BW Avg Avg VBW Type Remote Command See Avg VBW Type on page 89 Example AVER TYPE AUTO ON 2 2 5 2 Log Pwr Avg Video Selects the logarithmic decibel scale for all filtering and averaging processes This scale is sometimes call Video because it is the most common display and analysis scale for the video signal within a spectrum analyzer This scale is excellent for finding CW signals near noise but its response to noise like signals is 2 506 dB lower than the average power of those noise signals This is compensated for in the Marker Noise functio
191. 3 depending on which trace is being accessed arbitrary block data Consists of a block of data bytes The first information sent in the block is an ASCII header beginning with The block is terminated with a semi colon The header can be used to determine how many bytes are in the data block There are no units For example suppose the header is 512320 The first digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits bytes there are in the header The 12320 means 12 thousand 3 hundred 20 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your current data format bytes data point either 8 for real64 or 4 for real32 For this example if you re using real64 then there are 1540 points in the block Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Multiple commands can be written on the same line reducing your code space requirement To do this Commands must be separated with a semicolon fthe commands are in different subsystems the key word for the new subsystem must be preceded by a colon Ifthe commands are in the same subsystem the full hierarchy of the command key words need not be included The second command can start at the same key word level as the command that was just executed 508 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax A terminator must be provided when an instrument is controlled using RS 232 There
192. 3 4 CPEak STATe OFF ON 0 1 212 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe Remote Command Notes This command may not be used to activate a given marker Example CALC MARK CPE ON 4 1 8 N dB Points Activates the N dB function Pressing N dB Points On turns on the N dB feature and activates two arrows that are N dB down from the marker The frequency difference between the two arrows will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the display If the feature is unable to find data N dB below the marker the value of 100 Hz will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the display For example N dB Points can be used to measure the 3 dB bandwidth of a filter in a transmission test with the tracking generator The measured signal cannot have more than one peak that is greater than or equal to N dB A signal must be greater than the peak excursion above the peak threshold to be identified The setting for peak excursion may be increased from the 6 dB default value so that noise will not be identified as signals Increasing the value too much may cause a smaller signal to be missed or misinterpreted as part of a larger signal The amplitude scale may be either linear or logarithmic The N dB function follows the active marker If you turn on a marker after N dB Points has been activated the arrows will follow that marker If the marker associated with N dB Points mo
193. 3 MC key 336 Cell band class 342 Center Freq key 163 415 center frequency marker to 212 center frequencyr 415 CF Step key 166 Chan Integ BW key 353 Chan Integ Bw key 459 Chan Pwr Span key 389 401 Chan Span key 459 Change Title key 122 changing frequency span 237 238 239 481 Channel Power Meas Setup menu 638 Trace View menu 639 Channel Power key 301 channel power measurement 301 measurement setup 399 storing trace 479 trace 405 viewing trace 405 479 channel power span 389 401 Clear Error Queue key 248 clear status IEEE command 563 Clear Title key 123 Clear Write key 285 369 379 406 450 clearing errors 248 code programming compatibility across PSA modes 519 521 compatibility PSA series versus VSA 522 Color Capable key 230 Color key 234 color palette defaults 271 selecting 274 Color Palette key 271 Combined key 378 command complete 565 commands boolean parameter 506 compatibility across PSA modes 519 521 CONFigure 298 FETCh 299 keyword parameter 506 MEASure 298 multiple on a line 508 parameters 506 PSA series versus VSA compatibility 522 READ 299 300 syntax 503 termination IEEE 509 units parameter 506 valid commands 504 variable parameter 506 variable parameter keywords 506 compatibility programming across PSA modes 519 PSA series versus VSA 522 complementary cumulative distribution function measurement measurement setup 381 condition
194. 3 Sort Allows you to view your saved files according to a selected file attribute See Sort on page 133 for more information Key Path File Copy 2 5 5 4 Dir From To Allows you to select the source and destination directories for your copy on one or more drives When you press Dir From To it toggles between the two displayed directory list windows Allowing you to define the From and To locations for copying Key Path File Copy State Saved Powers up with C as both the From and To drives Not save in state Survives Factory Preset 152 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 5 5 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Copy 2 5 5 6 Dir Select Displays the highlighted directory See Dir Select on page 135 for more information Key Path File Copy 2 5 6 Rename Allows you to rename a file The catalog list box is active and can be used for selecting both the path and a file name Only loadable files that match the current type are shown Placing the cursor on a file name causes it to be loaded into the file name field Key Path File 2 5 6 1 Rename Now Executes the rename function When the rename is complete the message XXXXXX file renamed to YYYYYY where XXXXXX and YYYYYY are the filenames will a
195. 4448A and E4446A analyzers the adjustment is band specific If the currently active marker or the center frequency is in one of the four lower bands bands 1 to 4 the preselector adjustment specified is used for the microwave bands However if the active marker or center frequency is in one of the two upper bands bands 5 to 6 then the preselector adjustment is applied for those millimeter bands NOTE In the 26 4 to 26 8 GHz range there is an overlap between bands 4 and 5 that causes the boundary between these two bands to shift dynamically You must be aware that the preselector adjustment is applied to the correct band either 4 or 5 based on the current settings of the analyzer When the preselector adjustment is being changed the active function area of the display shows a third line mm wave bands preselector or MW bands preselector dependent on the preselector applied The preselector applied is determined by the analyzer settings of the start stop and marker frequency settings as shown below Note that applied preselector will be notated in the active function block of the display PSA Frequency Setting Preselector Applied Start gt 26 8 GHz Millimeter SItop 26 8 GHz Microwave Start gt 26 4 GHz Millimeter Start lt 26 4 GHz Microwave Marker lt 26 8 GHz Start lt 26 4 GHz Millimeter Marker gt 26 8 GHz Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Facto
196. 5 GHz E4445A 6 605 GHz E4446A 22 005 GHz E4448A 25 005 GHz Chapter 2 163 7 Ind E 3 bi E T c E LO a E D gt LI r E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY Channel Range Model Frequency Range with Frequency Offset 0 Hz E4440A 100 0 MHz to 26 0 GHz E4443A 100 0 MHz to 7 2 GHz E4445A 100 0 MHz to 13 7 GHz E4446A 100 0 MHz to 44 5 GHz E4448A 100 0 MHz to 51 0 GHz Remote Command SENSe FREQuency CENTer frequency UP DOWN SENSe FREQuency CENTer Example FREQ CENT 5 GHZ sets the center frequency to 5 GHz FREQ CENT UP changes the center frequency to 5 1 GHz if you use FREQ CENT STEP 100 MHz to set the center frequency step size to 100 MHz FREQ CENT 2 6 2 Start Freq Sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule and sets the frequency entry mode to Start Stop When the Start Stop Frequency entry mode is activate the start and stop frequency values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When Start Freq reaches the upper frequency limit the stop frequency is set to the highest available frequency and the start frequency is changed to be less then the stop frequency by the minimum span 10 Hz Center Freq will be updated
197. 6 peak to peak search 212 period readout 1877 readout 186 search parameters 215 selecting 180 185 392 394 483 time readout 187 to center frequency 197 to center frequency step 197 to reference level 200 to span 199 to start frequency 197 to stop frequency 199 trace assignment 186 394 markers off 180 392 483 Max Hold key 285 369 3779 406 450 452 Max Mixer Lvl key 69 Maximum Value term 45 Meas BW key 381 Meas Control menu 626 Meas Interval key 382 Meas Off key 300 Meas Setup ACP Measurement 351 371 CCDF Measurement 381 Channel Power Measurement 399 Harmonic Distortion Measurement 409 Occupied BW Measurement 423 451 457 485 Index 6 Meas Setup front panel key 201 351 371 381 399 409 423 429 451 457 485 Meas Type key 359 458 497 MEASURE menu 625 MEASure commands 298 Measure Control front panel key 329 MEASURE front panel key 297 Measure key 329 measure setup frequency span 425 spectrum segment offset offsets and limits 462 measurement gated FFT 74 resume 329 measurement bandwidth 381 measurement modes selecting 203 204 206 measurement reference type power spectral density reference 458 total power reference 458 Measurement Results file type 129 measurement time interval 382 measurements aborting 331 adjacent channel power 305 bottom middle top 514 burst power 377 channel power 301 harmonic distortion 315 increasi
198. 7 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 6 Reference Displays functions that control the external frequency reference Key Path System Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 6 1 Freq Ref Specifies the frequency reference as being internal or external If the frequency reference is specified as internal the frequency of the reference is automatically identified as being 10 MHz If the frequency reference is specified as external you must enter the frequency of the external reference being used If External Reference is selected Ext Ref will appear on the right side of the display The frequency of an external frequency reference is not automatically detected If an external frequency source is selected the frequency of the source must be entered If Ext is selected and you press Freq Ref Ext will remain selected and the Ext reference frequency will become the active function If Freq Ref is pressed again Int will become selected at 10 MHz The Ext reference frequency is remembered and will be used again if Ext is selected If the external reference is missing or out of range or the frequency reference is unlocked the message External reference missing or out of range will appear on the display Key Path System Reference State Saved Not Saved in Instrument State Neither the external reference frequency nor the state of this function Int or Ext are affected by factory preset
199. 7 Chapter 5 355 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP Default Terminator Hz Knob Increment Span 50 if non zero span RBW 100 if zero span Step Key Increment RBW if CF Step is set to Auto with zero span Span 10 if CF Step is set to Auto with non zero span CF Step if CF Step is set to Manual Range gt 0 Hz to 45 MHz History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST FREQuency f offset f offset gt lt f offset f offset gt lt f offset gt lt f offset SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST FREQuency SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST STATE OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0O 1 SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST STATE Remote Command Notes This command along with commands SENSe ACPower OF FSet LIST BAN Dwidth BWIDth INTegration and SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST STATe are used to set the parameters for all of the offsets up to six The following table shows the values of these parameters if no radio standard None is selected o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e Offset State Frequency Integ BW A ON 3 MHz 2 MHz B OFF 0 2 MHz C OFF 0 2 MHz D OFF 0 2 MHz E OFF 0 2 MHz F OFF 0 2 MHz 356 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power
200. 72 power condition 583 584 585 questionable condition 573 574 temperature condition 585 586 registers calibration condition 575 576 relative power parameter variables 507 Remote Command term 45 Rename key 153 Rename Now key 153 renaming files 153 Res BW key 83 416 460 490 reset IEEE command 566 resolution bandwidth 83 416 490 adjusting 83 Resolution BW Auto Man 83 Restart front panel key 347 restart the measurement 329 Restor Sys Defaults key 274 Restore Align Defaults key 261 restoring defaults 261 system defaults 274 results data identifying block size 508 Resume key 330 resume the measurement 329 Retain Params key 342 Reverse Bitmap format 141 Reverse Bitmap key 141 Reverse Metafile format 141 Reverse Metafile key 141 RF Burst key 289 RF Coupling key 172 RF Envelope key 377 RF key 171 RMS detection averaging 91 Index RMS detection command averaging 90 99 RRC filter 476 RRC Filter key 363 402 444 475 RST term 45 S Sample key 99 save file 136 Save front panel key 235 Save key 136 Save Now key 137 Save User Preset key 225 252 save IEEE command 567 saved state 45 saving trace data 158 421 477 478 user preset 225 252 scale per division 52 scale type Linear 52 Log 52 Scale Type key 52 Scale Div key 52 SCPI version of 281 SCPI LAN control 267 socket 266 telnet 266 SCPI LAN key 265 SCPI language basic inf
201. A 2 0 13 Max Mixer Lvl Enables you to set the relationship between the highest signal that can be displayed the reference level and the input attenuation The relationship applies whenever the Attenuation is set to Auto The relationship is that the attenuation is given by reference level minus the max mixer level For example as the reference level changes the input attenuator changes to ensure that a signal at the reference level does not exceed the Max Mixer Lvl setting Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 10 dBm Range 50 dBm to 10 dBm Remote Command SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer lt power gt SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer Example POW MIX RANG 15 dBm Chapter 2 69 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E 1 a E a gt LI P Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 70 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 2 1 Auto Couple Coupled functions are functions that are linked dependent on other functions Pressing Auto Couple displays some of the most important coupled analyzer functions An example of a coupled function is Res BW resolution bandwidth When Res BW is set to auto the Res BW is automatically set based on the span setting Coupled functions are affected depending on how they are coupled For example Video BW
202. A 03 00 2 4 5 1 5 3 Amplitude Pressing Amplitude allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current limit point After entering a value Connected becomes active If a front panel arrow key is pressed without entering a value the current Amplitude and Connected values of the point are selected If the up arrow is pressed the point number automatically increments to allow entry of the amplitude of the next point If it is a new point the Frequency may also be entered for the new point Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Edit Display Limits Limit 2 Edit Factory Preset and RST 0 dBm Fundamental Units dBm Terminators dBm Default Terminator dBm Resolution 0 1 dBm Knob Increment 0 1 dBm Step Key Increment 10 dBm Range 140 dBm to 100 dBm Chapter 2 115 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI al LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L Display History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 2 4 5 1 5 4 Connected To Previous Pt A current point may be connected to the previous point by pressing Yes No limit testing is performed between disconnected points Pressing this key when the Connected field is selected toggles the connected value of the current point and increments the Point number to allow entry or editing of the Frequency of the next point If an arrow key is pressed without entering a value the current Connected val
203. ACP Example Sending fewer than six parameters to one of these commands will leave the values of the unspecified offsets unchanged If you don t send settings for all 6 offsets it will set all the offsets that you specified then it will set any remaining offsets to the same setting as the last offset that you sent ACP OFFS LIST 50 Hz 75 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz 150 Hz 175 Hz ACP OFFS LIST STAT ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF For example after the above command is sent sending the command with only four parameters ACP OFFS LIST STAT ON ON ON OFF will result in the fifth and sixth offset remaining the same as the previous setting OFF 5 6 4 5 Ref BW Sets the reference bandwidth integration bandwidth for each offset Key Path Meas Setup Offset Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 2 MHz if no radio standard None is selected Default Terminator Hz Range 300 Hz to 20 MHz History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration bw bw bw bw bw bw SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration Example ACP OFFS LIST BAND 50 50 50 50 50 50 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 ACP OFFS LIST BAND 5 6 4 4 Pos Offset Limit Enables you to set the upper limit for the upper segment of the specified offset pair Key Path Meas Setup
204. ARM AVG TCON 5 16 3 Harmonies Harmonics indicates the number of harmonics to measure before computing the total harmonic distortion The minimum number is 2 only the fundamental and second harmonic will be measured The maximum number is 10 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 Range 2 to 10 Remote Command SENSe HARMonics NUMBer integer SENSe HARMonics NUMBer Example HARM NUMB 5 5 16 4 ST Harmonic Sets the sweep time used to measure each harmonic The value is set to 200 divided by the resolution bandwidth or 10 ms whichever is greater when the measurement is started This sweep time is used only for measuring harmonics The analyzer sweep time before the measurement was started is used for finding the fundamental Key Path Meas Setup 410 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 ms Auto Default Terminator seconds Range 10 ms to maximum sweep time of the analyzer el i U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 411 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion Remote Command SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime S
205. AUTO seeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 426 SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe UPPer number 426 SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe UPPer 0 0 eee eee eens 426 SENSe TOIN FREQuency SPAN number 425 ESENSel TON FREQ eny SPAN ioc i aad ewe dde ERE ee Oe ewe ta 425 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 41 List of Commands o E e E E G oO Mes o be 2 3 42 1 Using This Document This book provides you with descriptions and programming information for your analyzer 43 5 E D EI o 3 fo 5 Using This Document Book Organization Book Organization There are many terms used throughout this book for example active function block that are explained in detail in the Getting Started guide It is recommended that you read the Getting Started guide first NOTE The front and rear panel features along with the numeric keypad and alpha numeric softkey fundamentals are illustrated and described in your Getting Started guide What is in This Book Book Organization describes the organization of this book Instrument Functions provides information about the front panel and lower level key functions of your analyzer and their associated programming commands This information is organized alphabetically by the front panel key name For your convenience the instrument functions information has been divided into three separate chapt
206. BUR CA AGE do EERE 301 Ound hh aoo d e ROO eai V ORE E RC RR OR We ON GR REOR 304 Adjacent Channel Power ACP l eee hs 305 Mult aries POSEE a Led dag pep ELE ede ed do ea ed Fo pb Seed Ode dede d e pc dea god 309 Power Stat CCDF TETTE 312 Euro E 4 5 e he abe x RE DEC ACC RC AER E 315 Burds EE 318 HES e D 6 E e penta ar d cbe ur ke y XE RU RE d EE Eae ea C E C die der 321 Spurius EE 322 Spectrum Mauser Mask EE 322 Contents S oO E 9 E S Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only 328 a Maas Control ee ee ee ee dE 329 l Suid ee id otk d Ed Ee de et adhe eeh eek ae 329 Ou EE 329 Pause EE EE 330 Trigger a Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only suus 330 Abort the Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only 331 Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Model 333 Had Sl s cosas re bate ene pape Gece eerie Pd Xe d Pu d pd dd Bob pd Odd qub pida 333 Radio Std Setupc deze EE EE EOE SOSA RH E qo Pos AE os 341 Relat Paradis oe cce ate EE 342 Enable All Measurements cs A 9 204 E YS ERR RR WX o GaN Y uds RE eS 344 Autorange of Power Setting Remote command only 344 Restart PETITUM 347 EE EE a CREAR RU SA RE NR 349 Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Dower ACh ees 351 Pom MUNN acquc epa E P XE ACC CERNI ES E RR DE b Kop EEN 351 P pad de TPPC EMTUETTUEUUT 353 MT oM T RETE TIT C TU UTT 353 WCC dit vct e EX eR RA REESE ee ee ee re eee Rap s RUE Rb n 354 Dans D 39e
207. C O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Chapter 5 389 One Button Measurement Functions SPAN X Scale Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 390 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 13 Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Displays the Marker control menu for the CCDF measurement All markers are off until either Normal or Delta is pressed There are three control modes for the markers s Normal POSition A single marker placed at the 0 dB point of the selected value of Marker Trace that can be moved to any point on the trace Delta DELTa Places the selected marker and the next marker at the position of the previous marker on the specified trace selected by pressing Marker Trace The next marker is the reference marker set to normal and the selected marker is a moveable marker delta that you can place at any point on the trace The difference between the selected marker and the reference marker is displayed Off O Turns off the active marker Key Path Front panel key State Saved The control mode for each marker as well as the position of each marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset All Off History Added with firmware
208. C URWOE Widths os AE RRR e doe EIER Nerd Ra Ve bene ERR Ede eRe RAS Ghee PEE 304 ERICUIHOBWS E jak gow b ERA IO ERE ER d PEE d Ku awe dd edo qp ded deu 304 d KK wie 304 FETCH PSTatistie N eie rorre EE EE REA EO RERRRREESER EE RERGUG CR GG dE AE A RR ns 314 CWETCh SEMask n ee EE Re RR RE RERO be Ree REL A Or RAE dE dE de oe 324 hK R T NBI T su i dart cd Re m RR edo CR AU RC ROR e RR de aer be RR ed 322 ERICBTDINSEEST Qo uae b ego ed op dede Pob ORI Ea PED Glee obe qrpdeu dus ded dea 321 39 R S TUN SEES S secntdq uae onera oppida Rd eua SS EE 321 PECK TON oe 6448435064 OUR GSS ERES OREERICRRPeEE Y EIE e Xer kva peshrEYYQ ber ES 321 FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAP ped eis en ENEE sence i oie TEEN XR E XR RA GERA E EROR OR 160 JOBRNS BORDET Lose Ee be one Eee OU HE Ae DRA A EA PROUD EE 160 FORMat TRACe DATA ASCii INTeger 32 REAL 32 REAL 64 UINTeger 16 161 IEUBRISUCTRADSIDDATAIT cuasusxenawdtispspbew4beisbiresmuqpusdSqjaswegpePaa e sq ER PRg QR as 161 IHCOPS ABOBE EE 227 HOOP DE ViceCO bor NO YES sek agosto hono Ve area eode esc ao en Pe e de eos 230 IHCOP REESEN EE cea db hE ees JACKS Pe E REE EC Eh 230 HOOPy DEVice LAN Guage E EA EE EE 230 EE EE Bere i db pau ardua Bd eeu CES Wd Bde OR fera 230 20 List of Commands HOOP IMAGe CObar STATe OFF ON 0 12i wu TEE EIERE eph RC CR e kr RR da 234 EE Ee da RE RE 234 HCOP IITEMCFFEedLIMMediatel iiisesuzesheke ue 9 Feb Ode Teese dw E X 232 HCOPy PAGE ORIentati
209. CALibration command and before the measurement command Note that sending the query form of a CAL command will automatically hold off any following commands until the query value is returned Bit 0 CALibration must be set to 1 in the STATus OPERation ENABle register to ensure that the WAI command waits for calibration to complete This is the factory preset and RST setting Key Path System Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 4 1 Auto Align Allows you to turn the instrument automatic alignment On or Off or select Alert to be Chapter 4 255 N LI a 2 E Q D O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System alerted that alignments are needed Off the instrument won t initiate any visible alignments or alerts All turns on the automatic alignment of all measurement systems When Auto Align Allis selected AA appears along the left edge of the display Alert a 3 degree Celsius temperature change or a time span of 24 hours since the last successful Full alignment e g Align All Now will trigger an alert that alignments need to be done but no alignments will be performed without user input When Auto Align Alert is selected AL appears along the left edge of the display All but RF turns on the automatic alignment of all measurement systems except the RF section Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents changes in the input impe
210. Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 22 Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM When the spectrum emissions mask measurement has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis Mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM measurement includes the in band and out of band spurious emissions As it applies to W CDMA 3GPP this is the power contained in a specified frequency bandwidth at certain offsets relative to the total carrier power It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band Key Path Front panel key History Updated with firmware revision A 03 00 Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 22 1 Avg Number Press Avg Number On to specify the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Range 1 through 1000 Remote Command SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt lt integer gt SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNT 7 O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage L STATe Example SEM AVER COUN 15 SEM AVER 1 Chapter 5 457
211. Command SENSe MCPower RCFRequency lt Freq gt SENSe MCPower RCFRequency SENSe MCPower RCFRequency AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower RCFRequency AUTO Chapter 5 433 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E O One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Example MCP RCFR 2 GHz MCP RCFR 5 19 3 4 Configure Carriers Accesses the Config Carriers menu that allows further definition of each carrier Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 19 3 4 1 Carrier Selects the carrier number you wish to configure Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers Dependencies Couplings All keys available on the Configure Carrier key menu are coupled to this key State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 1 Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 Range 2 to 12 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 19 3 4 2 Carrier Pwr Present Press Carrier Pwr Present Yes to specify carriers which have power present First press the Carrier key and select the carrier number you wish to define using the Step Keys U fl the knob or the numeric keypad The carrier number selected is shown on the Carrier key Then toggle the Carrier P
212. Condition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition 576 Chapter 8 NOTE NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Frequency Enable STATus QUESt onable FREQuency ENABle number STATus QUESt onable FREQuency ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register which also sets the Frequency Summary bit bit 5 in the Questionable Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 3276 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Frequency Event Query STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Frequency Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable F
213. Control the Instrument Figure 5 Sample VEE Screen GA Pro spectrum yee O x File Edit View Debug Flow Device 170 Data Display Window Help OSHS rnn beh md MANK XB EO EN Main Connect Port 5025 HostName 14112188191 Aphatumeric 4j Timeout 15 x a Agilent Technologies E4440A US00000029 4 03 03 WRITE TEXT IDN EOL READ TEXT x STR GE E Lal T 0 S l meFemsSoket 5 5 5 4 bm Connect Port 5025 Host Name 141 121 88 191 Timeout 15 WRITE TEXT INST SA EOL WRITE TEXT RST CLS EOL WRITE TEXT INIT CONT 0 EOL M WRITE TEXT SENS FEED AREF EOL H Tare WRITE TEXT SENS FREQ CENT 50E6 EOL WRITE TEXT SENS FREQ SPAN 10E6 EOL WRITE TEXT SWEEP POINTS 1001 EOL WRITE TEXT FORM DATA REAL 64 EOL WRITE TEXT INIT IMM WAI EOL WRITE TEXT TRAC DATA TRACE1 EOL READ BINBLOCK y REAL64 ARRAY lt Double Click to Add Transaction Trace Paints File saved VEE 6 Jee MOD WEB 7 Chapter 6 537 D D 3 ES E 3 T E E Q D 3 7 E cE 7 un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Using a Java Applet Over Socket LAN There is a programming example in the PSA Measurement Guide and Programming Examples that demonstrates simple socket programming with Java It is written in Java programming language
214. D RC E c 425 TE SUA ad E eee des SS See TTT 425 Dias Wiser DSL EE 426 Contents S oO E 9 E S Ophis Rel Lordi EE 426 m Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP 0 ccc eee ees 429 PUE EE EE 429 BUS NUUS Lies REP PER PESE E RENT BOWE ORES SESE S RANG SRE OS Pix sd ai S 430 E La ES doped E bd V RN d b OD ICE RR dE Rad db Raid 430 EA E mrCT CP TT 438 COTPISE BOUE ua ec cee PE dO RONDA ee d e Van ue E ge EE 441 Ontinuze Ret Level 122 vpkes eir REGX4E RRR L I En REOR RYE ELE ARR ER YWG RARE p 441 DEGUBOM cep ddp T E ERU EE ER CR beers e db E E db OUR eoi dea de e o eot e pad 441 Power Ref 4 065444 63580 SAARRERG EGRE CARES ped AREER TEES SS HORS REESE S REE SO 442 Dui VE 443 ERG Bidtet ecc PEEL 444 luli do pP rr 444 Noise DOFTGGUD uus soREOESpESOERG ERG Xu E qo REC UE SOR DESO aD cR dE Adoos RAGES 445 Trace View Multi Carrier Power Measurement e 447 EE 447 erii CE 447 Combined View Waite i255 6406 6 28S tert raran rT TERPS ESTs PRG SG pe s ROR ED 448 rh EE 448 Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidtbh OBWi sees 451 SUE DD EE AE eee he ke RA ROD ER Ce d prd e X ace X X Ee e 451 Cad ld TL 452 DIESE DS jase Pepe ewe ER RE Ee ck d rs dd E REUTERS ees 452 ce BW kee uis be E e P3 T Qe UAXV RE EA ETA RET ERES SSeS ESS 454 OEM DIRE ih ome kx pcd rd de Ug ed CODEC ROUES pa Edd E Pr bun doe ed acd dco eC Oed 454 ROE oos dd Ee dob a deo dotado dob duos oak Rus eee dolo ae oai Sub des dota ee 455 Pat
215. Dvwidth BWIDth INTegration lt Hz gt 438 SENSe MC Power CARRier LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration 438 SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST PPResent YES NO cee eee eee eee 435 SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST PPResent e 435 SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST WIDTh Ha 437 SENSeE MGPower CARBier LIST WIDTH 2 06464 018 bebo dbo ede ur ee eee eee EN NA 437 GENSeE MUPower GEELEN E EE s 442 SENSeI MGCPower CARRierEPOWerl NEE E RR R e or x ERES REESE EE E A 442 SENSe MCPower CORRection NOISe AUTO OFFIONTIOIT 0 00 02 e eee 445 SK NSe MC Power COR Rection N OLSeT AUTO eee eee 445 SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC ALPHA number 445 SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC ALPHA enn 445 SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 sese BR 444 SENSe MCPower LIMit STATe ObkkIONTOoI IIR 444 SRN Sel MC Power LIMEESTATe T i Ka N dut ae EE 444 SENSeE MCPower METHed IBW RBW K es S K K Kd KR dad ee cede REC ex ep kr EK es 442 gb NN KREE 442 34 List of Commands SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST FRE Quency lt Hz gt lt Hz gt lt Hz gt 0 eee 439 SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST FREQuency 439 SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST BAN Dwidth BWIDth INTegration lt Hz gt lt Hz gt lt Hz gt 439 SENSe MCPower RCARrier AUTO OFF ONJ0 1 sees eee ee eee 431 ESENSe NICPower RCAR Or AUTO EE 431 SSENSe MCPower RCARrier lt integer gt eee 431
216. E el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 NOTE The measurements described above are those available in SA mode see Mode key Other measurements are available in other modes if an optional personality is installed Key Path MEASURE Chapter 5 319 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command n Results Returned CONFigure BPOWer N A Not Applicable INITiate BPOWer FETCh BPOWer n n 1 or not Returns 10 scalar results in the following MEASure BPOWer n specified order READ BPOWerl n 1 Sample time 2 Power RMS of carrier power 3 Power averaged 4 Number of samples 5 Amplitude threshold relative 6 Maximum trace point on the measured part of the burst 7 Minimum trace point on the measured part of the burst 8 Burst width actual measured width using the threshold level 9 Measured time 10 Measured points n 2 Returns the displayed RF envelope trace data separated by commas The number of data values is determined by the setting of the trace points parameter Example FETC BPOW or MEAS BPOW or READ BPOW 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e 320 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 10 Intermod TOD The th
217. E 203 Ppechrmdi ANAS alius CAEN iw RR SHEE RAR SUS CEES ELE S GER ert 2 EKER GRATES 204 Application Mode Number Selection Remote command only 204 Application Mode Catalog Query Remote command only 206 4 Instrument Functions P Z Desk E a yy yous hee RARE d LO eee A A IU CL OS 209 Next Peak 45 22266 64485 69 806 286 SSE ES HOSS EGE SAO E Eee PASTE REXGeEg D IU PUES 209 Du eh EE 210 Nest Pk Lett ER 210 Did CATE ceca AE pA I ath GMDATE CA USE EMERGED A I Se UR AC RR RUE 211 l E 2sesdsee S S66 HG 6 xtX Ead RI SUE OS DEN OSS qiu ed RE Es 212 MEG p EE 212 Contngssus EEN 212 BL SB PB EE 213 DORUM Parad svasd c3 93 ReQo ENEE E E HES ERS 215 o m 221 Riser Preset EEN 222 Bode R GEET 224 Factory EE EEN 224 paye ar Preset erar neei EEEIEE x Picks ead a PC d ced d E 225 PU 224223493 EF ERAS ASSERERE Ra Ades desc A RE Auro obs RE aw REAR 221 Abort the Printout Remote Command On 227 PROG OUND angi Wed SE GONG S SHS SHED STEED AON SU ROES FARES OSHS ES hehe Sa OSS 229 Peer SOLD a L H ic pode d E pp Ue D EMRE EEN 229 Ehrang 2 6 454 44 dE 2 ARE UL OS HOES EE ESE OEE DEERE SE eS 231 EE eh ee EAE RON OU 232 Dh d A AE arer EE Er EE Ee Ee EE ES ESS 232 Fa SEES cud ad ad xdpacead add Xaq asia qs add kd doped dpi ed acea oe dew cag 232 COG 29 pA debe dE 6 AER SALE dos AE BASE Ke AES eee aS Oe Rub doas RES 234 ae soe d bong NEC deep E hs A a ae ee A a de C E 235 OPANI HCG A ek A SE ESS SEES ERE le FN SOE OE Steg 237 PD ador qur ad
218. EAD measurement n Does not preset the measurement to the factory default settings For example if you have previously initiated the ACP measurement and you send READ ACP it will initiate a new measurement using the same instrument settings Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer If a measurement other than the current one is specified the instrument will switch to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results For example suppose you have previously initiated the ACP measurement but now you are running the channel power measurement Then you send READ ACP It will change from channel power back to ACP and using the previous ACP settings will initiate the measurement and return results s Blocks other SCPI communication waiting until the measurement is complete before returning the results If the optional n value is not included or is set to 1 the scalar measurement results will be returned If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used when handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster then the ASCII format FORMat DATA 5 1 2 Meas Off Turns the measurement function off so no measurement is currently active When Meas Off is selected there are no functio
219. EES 280 Remote Measase Turned Off RR KRK K R R RR bere X Ra e x acad EM C 281 Power On Elapsed Time Remote Command One 281 SCPI Version Query Remote Command Only 281 Trac View 2 2 die xd eR ERRNGORE RO QR ee ee ER NAR AER EE RAA Ge CREE EE EU 283 Query Trace Data Remote Command Only 284 dk iaa c inant ex dob ERGOR RR E GODROR CREE E REOR RE E RER OR KE AUR ACA RUE ee 284 Chea 00 eme E EM RE REM 285 Max Hold cin csds ds Gee OE XE SERO RE RE KE RLRE ARAR S CERE CES P x SER EYE 285 DICES os ep be Rx Pea ao RE cd E E E Ra dp e p ed X eed d qe ded p d 285 E STEER EE EE EE 286 Bink A EEA O Ee dE Ee E E TE 286 Ok EE 287 EE 287 Videi a EE EE EE EE ee ee ee ee 288 OE was eh Nee Ee A ASA Le te dee dee A eg 288 Le ee re eae ee ee re a PER ERE E REGN ee ee 289 Eet ROS 6s 6 AR LAT NR EEN 289 RF Burst Wideband aga agr Ad tranar rirani Eee EE GER ER ROO ROLE RR Ee s 289 Ton EE 290 Ine Dolay lt 3 aad eke ER AES SHE SERT IEWRLIEXETPICeeS IS 8 PHO EE ERE ES Rees dd ves 290 Trig Offset Remote Command Only AANEREN KL eee ee yx ear e e e 291 5 One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Functions 0 0 0 0 0 eas 294 MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee eens 297 Command Interactions MEASure CONFigure FETCh INITiate and READ 297 EE Ee E UN doa EV ca CUP wake d ed ae Pe Ced CR Cab dea ENEE 300 Channel Power iisdem DER 8404 oS PARURE OR RS AGE SS RO
220. EES SPE RR RR ERED ERR EEN 19 SENSe ADC RANGe AUTO NONE asn RR RRR RRR e S R 0 81 ESE Nie ADO RANG EC a r drip ts prid id eperik anEEP ERR dd bbb EE 81 LSENSel AVE Rage CLE AEN EELER EEN RO R EA E CE Eb bd xd 89 LSR N Sel AV R Rage COUNT Integer 2 22 NEE EELER Hehe bade ee eS EXT EXE ER YE 89 29 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands SENSo AVER ape COL NU ner EE EEN EE A EE Ee A BRS 89 SENSE AVEBase TYPE RMS LOG SCOALA RE RR RR RE ROLE Rond aed cea 90 SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO OPTION 1011 0 0 RR RR 90 oENSeI AVERAge TY PEANUT osc aie poche EE EE 90 D OENSSIAYERASUPEPBT uu ii idee eee die dee Adee d DOE ede I we eee es 90 SENSeL AVERageE S TATe OFF ON O L raga KRK R sea ER bie ENEE s 89 paENDSLAVRESESESTATSI s5 40 cored 140d cePR Ge ed Oe RANE ROEM idR RAE ERU EUR dern 89 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo lt freq gt rununu nannaa 86 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO OFF ION IOI 86 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO 2 I 86 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio number 87 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 00008 87 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO 0 eee eee 87 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio 2 een eens 87 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDt VIDeo c ia cs a E K K RR Rhea doe eds NEE ANE ee 86 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution reg
221. ES 5 n gt LI ls Chapter 2 117 A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Lud c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 1 Freq Intern This key is greyed out if Time is the selected X Axis Units Sets the interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified limiting points set allowing you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table The available interpolation modes are linear and logarithmic If the linear Lin mode is used for both frequency and amplitude a straight line is used when interpolating between points in a limit table If frequency interpolation is logarithmic Log frequency values between limit points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both the table values and the intermediate value A linear interpolation is then performed in this logarithmic frequency space An exactly analogous manipulation is done for logarithmic amplitude interpolation NOTE Key Path State Saved If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency a single vertical line is the result In this case if an upper line is chosen the amplitude of lesser frequency amplitude 1 is tested If a lower line is chosen the amplitude of greater frequency amplitude 2 is tested For linear amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as vied Yi f f y had DES For linear amplitude inte
222. Eep TIME AUTO 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 419 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEHep TIME 0 0 0 0 00 419 SENSe HARMonics RTABle FILL lt no query gt anrs n nenen nnn 419 SENSe HARMonics RTABle STATe OQbWION 1011 RR BI 412 ESENSe HABRMonie RTABIeSSTATe A RR KRK RR RKR AKR N RKR Re Ra whe Ran 412 SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime me 412 SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime STATe OFFTONTIOIT nananana 412 33 E G C 9 e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands SENSe J HARMonics SWEeptime STATe 2 0 0 0 0 eh 412 SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime 0 0 00 R RR R RR hs 412 SENSe MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition paramz ee 179 SE N Sel MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSIiUGn coser eR RE ER UR oe NEE EE RR RD SEENEN 179 SENSe MCPower AVERage COUNt integer 429 SENSeLMCPower AVERage COUNT A K R aE 0 RER bares E dae he ew R 429 SENSe MCPower AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat 430 SENSe MCPower AVERage TCONroDP uus he 430 SENSe MCPower AVERagel STATe OFF ON J0 1 ls sees BB 429 SSENSe MCPower AVERage STATe hh 429 SENSe MCPower CARRier AUTO STATe ObRTIONTIOIT aa 442 SENSeEMCPower CABRIer AUTOESTATe A 0 RRR SEN A thu REES RR RR RE CR RR d 442 SENSe MCPower CARRier COUNt lt integer gt 431 SENSeEMCPower CAR Rier COUNT oi 0 RRR R R E e RR Re P RU E SEENEN eS 431 SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST BAN
223. FETCh CHPower DENSity Returns a single value that corresponds to the Power MEASure CHPower DENSity Spectral Density READ CHPower DENSity Remote Command Notes The main channel power is returned in the current amplitude units and the density value is returned in current amplitude units Hz Example FETC CHP or MEAS CHP or READ CHP command returns scalar results of main channel power and power density FETC CHP CHP or MEAS CHP DENS or READ CHP DENS commands will return the single scalar result specified Chapter 5 303 O e i WA E Ki ps El D 7 E bi 3 iv E T E El 7 GA o e 7 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 4 Occupied BW Occupied Bandwidth integrates the power of the displayed spectrum and puts markers at the frequencies between which a selected percentage of the power is contained The measurement defaults to 9996 of the occupied bandwidth power The power bandwidth routine first computes the combined power of all signal responses contained in the trace For 99 occupied power bandwidth markers are placed at the frequencies on either side of 99 of the power 1 of the power is evenly distributed outside the markers The difference between the marker frequencies is the 99 power bandwidth and is the value displayed For mor
224. FF ON J0 1 491 SENSe SPURious RANGel LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO 491 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDe0 no nnnnnnannan naana 491 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STARt integer 0 0 00 eee ee 488 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STARt 0 0 eee eee 489 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STOP lt integer gt 0 0 e eee eee 490 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STOP 0 0 cece ee eee ee 490 39 E G C 9 e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK EXCursion res 496 SENSe SPURious RANGel LISTI PEAK EXCursion sese 496 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK THReshold 496 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK THReshold 0 0 cece eee eee eee 497 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST STATe OFFJONJ0 1 0 0 0 eee eee eee 488 SENSel SPURious RANGel LIST STATE EE EE NEEN bead ee RR ER ERROR OR RR hm ed 488 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST SWEep TIME time time up to 20 sweeptimes 492 SENSe SPURious RANGel LIST SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 492 SENSe SPURious RANGel LISTI SWEep ITIME AUTO 0 0 eee eee 492 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST SWEep TIME 0 0 0 eee eee eee 492 SENSeE SWEep FEFT SPAN
225. FFS LIST BAND IMUL 40 or SEM OFFS LIST BWID IMUL 40 468 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM SEM OFFS LIST BAND IMUL or SEM OFFS LIST BWID IMUL SEM OFFS LIST BAND AUTO 0 or SEM OFFS LIST BWID AUTO 0 SEM OFFS LIST BAND AUTO or SEM OFFS LIST BWID AUTO 5 22 4 7 Abs Start Enables you to enter an absolute level limit at Start Freq for the currently selected offset ranging from 200 00 to 50 00 dBm with 0 01 dB resolution Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator dBm Range 200 dBm to 50 dBm Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt ABSolute ampl ampl up to five values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt ABSolute Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS 1 Example SEM OFFS LIST STAR ABS 20 dBm SEM OFFS LIST STAR ABS 5 22 4 8 Abs Stop el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Enables you to enter an absolute level limit at Stop Freq for the currently selected offset ranging from 200 00 to 450 00 dBm with 0 01 dB resolution and to toggle this function between Couple and Man If set t
226. FORMat X HCOPy X X INITiate INPut not available in these X application modes Chapter 6 519 E D 3 ES E 3 T E E Q D 3 7 E cE 7 o c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes Command Subsystem Same command set is available SA mode compared with the application modes W CDMA cdmaOne cdma2000 1xEV DO Basic GSM EDGE NADC or PDC Same command set is available SA mode compared with the application mode Phase Noise MEASure MEMory X X MMEMory X X MMEMory STORe TRACe not available in application X modes READ SENSe SENSe CHANnel SENSe CORRection SENSe FEED SENSe FREQuency CENTer SENSe FREQuency lt other subsystems gt SENSe lt measurement gt SENSe POWer SENSe RADio X not available in application modes not available in application modes SENSe SYNC STATus X X SYSTem X X TRACe not available in application X modes TRIGger UNIT X X 520 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes Across PSA Modes Specific Command Differences Some programming commands operate differently depending on which Mode the analyzer is set to Spectrum Analysis Basic cdmaOne
227. Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 15 2 Combined Pressing Combined selects the measurement to be displayed as a bar graph and spectrum Key Path Trace View Factory Preset Spectrum G Ej i WA E Ki ps El D H E bi 3 bi E T E El 7 GA Ej Ki History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 15 3 Trace One button measurements do not change this function See Trace on page 284 for more information Chapter 5 405 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Channel Power Measurement 5 15 3 1 Trace 123 Determines which trace the menu keys will affect Press Trace 123 until the number of the desired trace is underlined Key Path Trace View Trace State Saved Saved in Instrument State for all traces History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANK WRITe Clear Write MAXHold Max Hold MINHold Min Hold VIEW View BLANK Blank TRACe 1 2 3 MODE Example TRAC MODE WRIT TRAC MODE MAXH TRAC MODE MINH TRAC MODE VIEW TRAC MODE BLANk TRAC MODE 5 15 3 2 Clear Write See Clear Write on page 285 for more information o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e
228. GGER IN Ext2 Key Path Trig External Annunciation Annotation At the left side of the display outside the graticule the letter E indicates that the External Trigger is active Remote Command See Trig on page 287 Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 to select rear panel external triggering Chapter 2 173 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 a E a gt LI P Instrument Functions A L Input Output 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 174 Chapter2 3 Instrument Functions M O This chapter provides key descriptions and programming information for the front panel key functions of your analyzer starting with the letters M through O The front panel functions are listed alphabetically and are described with their associated menu keys The lower level menu keys are arranged and described as they appear in your analyzer 175 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 E v E LI O Instrument Functions M O NOTE The front and rear panel features along with the numeric keypad and alpha numeric softkey fundamentals are illustrated and described in your Getting Started guide O U E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Iz s 7 176 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker 3 1 Marker Accesses the marker control menu If no markers are active pressing Marker activates the currently selected marker as a normal ty
229. If you are using Agilent VEE and SICL LAN the logical unit number is limited to the range of 0 8 Emulated GPIB Address The emulated GPIB address bus address is assigned to the device to be controlled using SICL LAN The instrument is shipped with the emulated GPIB address set to 18 The emulated GPIB address will always be 18 regardless of what you set the GPIB address to The SICL LAN server uses the GPIB name GPIB logical unit number and GPIB address configuration on the SICL LAN client to communicate with the client You must match these parameters exactly including case when you set up the SICL LAN client and server Configuring Your Instrument as a SICL LAN Server After you have collected the required information from the SICL LAN client perform the following steps to set up your instrument as a SICL LAN server 1 Identify the GPIB name Press System Config I O SICL Server Emulated GPIB Name and notice that it is gpib7 2 Notice that the Emulated GPIB Logical Unit is set to 8 3 Notice that the Emulated GPIB Address is set to 18 Configuring a PC as a SICL LAN Client The descriptions here are based on Agilent s VISA revision G 02 02 model number 2094G A copy of Agilent VISA instrument io libraries can be found on Agilent s website http www agilent com find iolib see also http www agilent com find vee The VISA User s Guide information on LAN programming may also be useful see ftp ftp agi
230. Initiates a trigger cycle for the specified measurement but does not output any data You must then use the FETCh lt meas gt command to return data Ifa measurement other than the current one is specified the instrument will switch to that measurement and then initiate it For example suppose you have previously initiated the ACP measurement but now you are running the channel power measurement If you send INIT ACP it will change from channel power to ACP and will initiate an ACP measurement Does not change any of the measurement settings For example if you have previously started the ACP measurement and you send INIT ACP it will initiate a new ACP measurement using the same instrument settings as the last time ACP was run If your selected measurement is currently active in the idle state it triggers the measurement assuming the trigger conditions are met Then it completes one trigger cycle Depending upon the measurement and the number of averages there may be multiple data acquisitions with multiple trigger events for one full trigger cycle It also holds off additional commands on GPIB until the acquisition is complete O e i WA E Ki ps El D 7 E bi 3 bi E T E El 7 GA Ej Ki Chapter 5 299 o c e 5 o c E H Ld c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode READ Commands R
231. Jnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nua JUswesnseeyy uonng eug suoljaun4 jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw evga 6 191deu2 Intermod TOD Meas Setup Key T Meas Setup Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions If measurement chosen is Intermod TOI Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe901a Meas Setup Avg Number 10 On Off Avg Mode Exp Repeat TOI Span 15 MHz Max Mixer Lv 30 00 dB futo Man Optimize Ref Leve A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function sde nuam puawansea uoyng 3u0 Suoioun jueuieinsee A uoyng 3uo sde nuaw 6 1e deu2 GG i Meas Setup If measurement chosen is Multi Carrier Power Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe889a Multi Carrier Power Measurement Meas Setup Key Meas Setup Meas Setup Offset Limits Carrier Setup m gt Config Carri Cer Method Offset Carriers Car On Off IBW RBW A B 4 Avg Mode eier e Offset Freq Ref mis e Exp Repeat Alite an 5 00000000 MHz Auto Ram Yes S Offset Ref Car Freq Carrier Setup ee Integ BW 6 59750 GHz dE 3 84000000 MHz t Man Upper Offset Car Offset
232. LCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe Sets or queries the state of a marker Setting a marker to state ON or 1 selects that marker Setting a marker which is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the display Setting a marker to state OFF or 0 selects that marker and turns it off The response to the query will be 0 if OFF 1 if ON Example CALC MARK2 STAT ON selects marker 2 CALC MARK STAT ON will not modify a marker that is already on 3 1 2 Normal Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Normal see Marker on page 177 If the marker is off a single marker is activated at the center of the display The marker stays on the trace at the horizontal screen position where it was placed unless Signal Track or a marker to key function such as Mkr gt CF Mkr RL Mkr CF STEP Mkr A Span or Min Search is selected If you are in a marker pair mode for example Delta Marker the reference marker is turned off You can then adjust the trace point of the marker Key Path Marker Remote Command See Marker on page 177 for the mode command Example CALC MARK MODE POS selects marker 1 and sets it to Normal 180 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker 3 1 3 Delta Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta see Marker on page 177 In Delta mode the display shows the difference between the active Delta marker and a reference marker When Delta mo
233. LLINe 1 2 MARGin Responds with the margin offset value 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E 1 a E a gt LI P Chapter 2 113 LI lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 1 5 Edit Pressing Edit accesses menus for editing limit lines and for accessing the limit line table editor Navigation through the limit line table is achieved by using the front panel arrow and tab keys Entering data in each field navigates to the next field New limit segments will only be applied after the editor is closed Pressing Return or any key that is not associated with the editor will close the limit line table editor NOTE Refer to your Getting Started guide for more information about navigation within tables using your front panel arrow and tab keys Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 Factory Preset and RST Exits the edit mode History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 2 4 5 1 5 1 Point Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit line using Point Enter the point number to be created or edited using the numeric keypad then press Enter or use the front panel knob or step keys to move to an existing point The step up key takes you to the next point while the step down key takes you to the previous point After selecting a point Frequency or Time depending on x axis selection becomes active Key Path Displa
234. Limits On RRC is Limit pina Integ uM 0 00 dB 3 84000000 Carrier Result Filter Alpha Lower N 1 Ve 0 00 dB Noise Optimize H Correction Ref Level On Off More More 1of2 2of2 suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings sde nua jJuawesnseay uoyng uo suoljaun4 jueuiensee y uoyng 3u0 sde nuaw vv9 6 191deu2 Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions Multi Carrier Power Measurement Trace View Key Trace View If measurement L chosen is Multi Carrier Power Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe890a Meas View Trace Spectrum Trace AR 2 3 Max Hold Combined View Units Min Hold Rel Rbs View Blank Trace i A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices sde nuam Juswesnseay uong eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Meas Setup Key 2 Meas m gt Meas Setup D Setup o If measurement Avg Number o L chosen is T 10 Di Occ
235. MCP Remote Command SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST WIDTh Hz SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST WIDTh Remote Command Notes The position number of the each carrier width in the list sent corresponds to the carrier number you are defining For example 5 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz defines six carriers Carriers 1 2 4 and 5 are defined as having power present whereas carriers 3 and 6 do not have power present If you need to change carrier 5 you must send all carriers up to 5 Carrier 6 will remain unchanged If you send more values than the number of carriers specified using the Carriers key in this example there are six carriers they will be ignored The query for this parameter returns the current value for all carriers with and without power present Example MCP CARR LIST WIDT 5 MHz 10 MHz 4 MHz 15 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz MCP CARR LIST WIDT 5 19 3 4 4 Carrier IntegBW Press Carrier IntegBW to define the integration bandwidth used to calculate the power in the carriers Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers State Saved Saved in instrument state SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies The integration bandwidth is specified differently depending on the radio standard selected If Mode Setup Radio Std 3GPP W CDMA is selected and the RRC filter is on the actual integration bandwidth used will be the displayed integration bandwidth multiplied by 1 filter alpha Factory Preset 3 84 MHz 3 84 MHz 3 84 MHz
236. ME is a DOS file name of up to eight characters letters A Z a z and numbers 0 9 only e EXT is an optional file extension using the same rules as name but consists of up to three characters total File Types You can save the following types of files State A file that contains a copy of the state of the analyzer at the time the file is saved The settings of most analyzer functions are saved in the state files but not traces limits and corrections When a State file is loaded into the analyzer the analyzer is restored to the same state as when the file was saved Some settings are not saved in the State files for example the GPIB address these settings are called persistent In this manual each function describes whether that function is saved in Instrument State or is persistent s Trace A file that contains a copy of the trace data for one or more traces There are two formats for trace files Trace State and CSV files Trace State A file that contains the trace data and a copy of the current analyzer state The trace and state are stored in an internal data format TRC which cannot be loaded into a PC but can be loaded back into the analyzer Traces can be loaded individually or as a group When a Trace State file is loaded into the analyzer the trace data that was on the screen when saved is loaded into the analyzer This enables you to view the trace as it looked when it was saved Bec
237. MM LAN SCPI SOCK ENAB ON 266 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 5 7 8 SICL Server Turns on off the SICL server capability enabling you to limit SCPI access over LAN via the SICL server SICL IEEE 488 2 protocol Table 4 1 SCPI Default Settings Parameter Description Setting Maximum Connections The maximum number of connections that can be accessed 5 simultaneously Instrument Name The name same as the remote SICL address of your instO analyzer 2 Instrument Logical Unit The unique integer assigned to your analyzer when using 8 5 SICL LAN S Emulated GPIB Name The name same as the remote SICL address of the device gpib7 H used when communicating with your analyzer 8 Emulated GPIB Logical Unit The unique integer assigned to your device when itis being 8 E controlled using SICL LAN Se Emulated GPIB Address The emulated GPIB address assigned to your transmitter 18 N tester when it is a SICL server the same as your GPIB address Key Path System SCPI Lan State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default On Reset by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI SICL ENABle OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI SICL ENABle Example SYST COMM LAN SCPI SICL ENAB ON Chapter 4 267 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee
238. N ee Ee eh EE ed PEOR ee vni E WHERE ee Pd d 300 QUON Ta M RE us oa A eh Io a od Sad WOCHE RC IER ACA IA ERU ek ded B e X RC d E CEA UR 324 CON Maite SPURIOUS 140k 66500 oh sep ENEE EE EE E ee X RAS XqaE XA Rp d 322 SCH Denger POIN EE EE RR GORERU Reese PERE RE EC ERG EGG RE EE ORARE AER x 321 OON PUGET S sop V EE EE ERG c e E RARE GARE A AES ARSE 328 SE ALLE NONE 2a dinde obit Re cr eR ERR ph oboe de bt de baden ded ice de 12 EE 12 oue bebo bebe c ihid pes dq eh ci Eb EP EE E 72 DISP y AFU Noton POSition BU DUI 22s iex EE d Rd RUE RE AE 108 DISPlay AFUNction POSition BOTtom CENfer DOP 106 DISPlay APUNCtion POSitien CEN Ter occ Rua e lx RR ee CORR OR ACE RR E PARRA ES 107 DISP BR POSiHon TOP c veec heen dote PROC ROV TERE RE PEARS TER Re ded 107 IDESPlay AVUN chor POSION EE 106 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat MDY DMY cee eee ee 253 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat 0 0 0 cece teen eee 253 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCK STATe ON OFF 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee 253 DISPlay AN NotatiomCLOCKI STAI LosusekeRleaX qu E dera ACD Ee eee ele os ce Ren 253 DISPlay ANNotation TITLE DATA lt String gt 4 dei ew ewe eX Xx XR RR AR Ra AC KEE KE 122 TISEIy SAN Notation Y Y TN NEE 122 18 List of Commands SDISPIag ENADBIS OPF JON U T oua KARR KERE RRR RR EE 125 DISP ABB EE 125 DISPlay FSCReen STATe OFFJON 0 1 eK KR R RRR RRR RR IRI 103 SDISPIav PoC heen S DATI oun oe RR HE a EROR Ae ORE HOw WP ROUEN UA P
239. NSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN IS95C 5 3 15 GSM EDGE Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard GSM EDGE Power Stat CCDF and Burst Power are the only measurements available for this standard Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use L SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN GSM 5 3 1 6 3GPP W CDMA Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard W CDMA All measurements except Harmonic Distortion and Spurious Emissions are available for this standard G E WA c e EI bi D bi E L 3 o 5 T E 3 bi 7 Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN W3GPP 5 3 1 7 cdma2000 MC 1X Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard cdma2000 MC 1X All measurements except Harmonic Distortion Spuriou
240. NSeFREQuency UO E EE E 168 SENSe FREQuency SPAN reg 238 SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio walue seus 93 SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO OFF ON O 1 93 SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO 0000000 93 SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio 0 0 eee ee ee eee 93 keeper E SD A E E EE 238 SENSe E FREQuency SPAN PREVious lees s 239 SE NSEEFBEGUBOCHIBPANT Loss en Ue TRE EROR VR RE URINE AUR ERAN RA Ko SPREE RS 238 PSE NSek E REQuenty STARE lt freq gt Ai cond debe he ee OR AUR AUR ARRA CER OUR RA ARA E ERROR UR 165 SENSE Eeer LABES uu cuna disse AER Ae d dC REA CERO ACE ROO UC ERO Rd e 165 SENSe FREQuency STOP frequency A R RR cee eh 166 SENSeE FREQuency STOP EE EE dee ee RR abies RRR RH ORE RERO RT REOR Ron 166 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis 1I9I9 III 76 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO OPTION 1011 RI 76 SENSeLI FREQuency SYNThbsis ALITOT weiss vba heehee dee aka E HAC ca a oboe wes 76 SENSaE KREQuencc RN EE 76 32 List of Commands SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt integer eee 409 SSENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee teen nee 409 SENSe HARMonics AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeart 000 cee eee 410 5ENSe HARMonics AVERageTCONFOlY NN A EEN NN e ER REOR ER RR RR 410 SENSe HARMonics AVERage STATe OFRTIONTIOIT ene 409 SRN
241. NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition STATus QUEStonable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable IN Tegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 3276 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Power Register Questionable Power Condition STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Chapter 8 583 Cc o 5 E z
242. OFF ON 0 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage L STATe 7 Example HARM AVER COUN 100 HARM AVER ON el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 5 16 2 Avg Mode Press Avg Mode to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function to either Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Chapter 5 409 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E O One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion s Repeat When you set Avg Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previous result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential Range EXPonential REPeat History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe HARMonics AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe HARMonics AVERage TCONrol1 Example HARM AVG TCON EXP H
243. ON 0 1 Example CALC MARK PEAK SEARC MODE PAR sets the parameter search mode CALC MARK PEAK THR 60 dBm sets the threshold to 60 dBm CALC MARK PEAK EXC 30 dB sets the minimum peak excursion requirement to 30 dB CALC MARK STAT ON turns on marker number 1 and puts it on the active trace at mid screen 218 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search CALC MARK MAX puts marker 1 on the highest peak that is at least 30 dB above the 60 dBm threshold CALC MARK Y returns the y axis amplitude value of the marker in current y axis units 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E Tl E E 1 E a U LI N Chapter 4 219 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 220 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Preset 4 2 Preset Presetting the instrument provides a known convenient starting point of the instrument state for making measurements There are three possible actions when you press the Preset key For preset type Mode default the green Preset key immediately performs a mode preset See the descriptions below Press System Power On Preset Preset Type to select the preset type For preset type Factory the green Preset key immediately performs a factory preset See the descriptions below Press System Power On Preset Preset Type to select the preset type For preset type User the green Preset key brings up a menu
244. ONTIOI 0 0 ee ee 365 SENSe ACPower CORRection NOISe AUTO 00 6 eee eens 365 SENSe AC Power FILTer RRC ALPHA number 364 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON O 1 sa 0 0 eee eee eee 364 SENSe ACPower LIMit STATe OFF ON O0 1 E RRR AR RRR ees 363 LSENSel ACPoawerLIMXESTATeol 6622665900 RR ERE RR OEEE RESET QE sede Y EE dE a 363 SENSe ACPower METHod IBW RBW A AEN EIERE woken Ar RR ROO eee RE ER Re 360 SENSE AC Power PEO 4 ics Suk Ah ERA IRR ES d SOROR S C we he NOTA RC eb RO RA 360 SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration c Dus cbwscbws bwscbws KDW ak ce kexexeeew xxu A RACE ee RA RP ROO REA A A 357 SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration 357 SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST STATE OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 356 SENSe ACPowerOPFFSetLIST SGTATE A A cena s ee eee eae eae a ORE REEL FPES 356 SENSe AC Power OF FSet LIST FREQuency lt f_offset gt lt f_offset gt lt f_offset gt lt f_offset gt lt f_offset gt lt f_offset gt 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 356 SENSe ACPower OFFSet LIST FREQuency 2 eee ee nee 356 LSENSe ACBower TYPE PSDRet TPREf Ae i ki sas ew di wee sawed eG dae ieee dows 359 ESENSS BLR R KA si100000 nee thse Coeds RR EXER RENE ERE AED Saa EAR Sq ws 360 SENSe ADC DITHer STATe OFF ON AUTO III 79 L SENSeL ADC IDITHerESTATel crore sees cees N
245. ORR EREINEN AE EERE RRRA 608 Marker Fctn Key See page 191 eet tess edd ee ies se eee REY ER RESTER ESYES AERE ES 609 MODE Key See pace EE 610 Peak Search Key Sece pape 200 aga a ENEE Rev bv RRR RRR R karro kokak urno NEERA 611 Proset Key See pase EE 612 Print Setup Key See page 220 EE EE anne sietett tee perir iue RE AEN 613 SPAN X Scale Key Soo page 237 NK etter x pex de x aed dac a de Ce EA 614 SPAN X Scale Key for CCDF Measurement See page 2891 annann nnn 615 Sweep Rey ee pale SET cosa ako wack OR ROC AC A Ra OR RR RC DAC CA RN A 616 System Key 1of 4 See page247 cc eeeeeeeeeeee eere hh hh nnn 617 Trace View Key See page 2BON ases d EE VRAD Ow EEDE PEENE Oe RR ea RR A 621 Trig Key See page 287 2220 250 cdeeew dares ieee ites ede AE EE AE AN 622 9 Menu Maps One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Menu Maps 624 MEASURE Key 666 KON Kde K Oper eee el eheeedehs E 625 Meas Control Rey lt oo i665 485350 EE AE Me AE OEE TERS RE Res s 626 Modo EE a DOE EO ea ewe eas 627 Mode Setup Key 2 of 2 ihn Sees bs AEN EE EE NEE EEN Se eee ede Os 628 ACP Measurement Meas Setup be 629 ACP Measurement Trace View Key 630 Burst Power Measurement Meas Setup Key 631 Burst Power Measurement Trace View Key annann nanan 632 CCDF Power Stat Measurement Meas Setup Re 633 CCDF Power Stat Measurement Trace View Key 0 00 eee 634 CCDF Power Stat Measurement Display Key 0
246. P o Rd albo 172 E A EE 172 ONES RE RTK asa epa Rd rea o OR CIRC CR eh CERO pe See oa d ea a C 206 INSTrunent NSELeet eintegero A EELER ska dd ee DA XR RE EORR RO ERROR E dde ee 205 21 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands LNS TEV PM rM 205 iNSTrument SELect BASIC CDMA CDMA1XEV CDMA2K EDGEGSM LINK NADC NFIG URBE PDC PNOISE SA WCDMA EE REENEN rhe Re ye y Re Ry Rhen 203 INS eae E KE pop dp F4 db RP Perd d abb deb o8 dde ap dp de pr ACE RC be 203 IPAs e KEE 306 MEAGGFIGIBEPOWerInl aisesosrbusbRR ERE E TOTP REN EE 320 MEAGure EH Power CEPOWOT ieezesesesesutuksktrXb E EEE RAND Tew REET eS Tee E ESSE 303 Ok E E DEN Givi sk puo acie nee ees dob op arde Qoog ub D pulp luba dips drub cg Rees 303 MEASuPQUI Paw cL uu eqedE RUP VETERE y Were HERE PERE ORES EE 303 MEAGure HARMonices AM Di tude ATI 316 MEASure ELARMaemcscAMPLatudeIn EE 316 MEASure HARMonics FREQuency ALL2 2l s 316 MEASure HARMonics FREQuency n essun nunnannunn enarrare rreren 317 MEA Sure HARMonics FUNDamental EE cee eee eens ee etwas eee eed nese EE 4 317 MEASure HARMonics DISTortion se gen Re RR RRR RRR R RRR RR RRR RRR 316 ME ure HAR MOni O unu ace Reda e pacc ERE e Plc Ca EU Plc E ER OUR CROP d Re dee c d C Mee acad a 317 Ee Ge ege ebe Se EE qdequa e pado dub bere 310 MEASGUPGMCPQWEET vsseseeserwukxee vp ERE S INAS PRA ER 310 MEASGuPONMCPQWETT
247. PAN 5 16 6 4 Res BW Res BW is used to set the resolution bandwidth mode of the analyzer If the range is zero span and Res BW is set to Auto the analyzer determines the optimum setting Res BW set to Man enables you to determine the setting Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Table 5 1 on page 414 Knob Increment Steps through the available resolution bandwidth filters Step Key Increment Steps through the available resolution bandwidth filters Range Resolution bandwidth range of your analyzer History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command This parameter can send up to 10 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 selects the mode SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution lt integer gt The query for this parameter always returns 10 values SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 416 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution el i U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7
248. PC PA EI ex rare o EX Had 49 ugar o EEUU 49 EE a sid deb Gee A A A peep HAD RM BORN ORA UR aO RE EO OA DS RA AG 50 DUNG THE 5 24062 EE e CGE ege EE Ee e ue EE ege E SAX EN 52 PRM Fm cec TT 52 Prosel E EE 54 Erosel MMe dg e pate dco Sor NO ea ed Pd RN Ed he eh ws do Re Ro ROREM 55 SA UTER Ww sedo x Ur SS hE ESE RUEE SASS SRE HR ERR PRIN RE RAE EP Rb Ree 56 BU Le ERU Soa a qaa act Seer eke odes ded pb pd dd b pq ded kde dpi ERR 58 Tnt EE 59 E EE 59 BEY in E s Sk S55 6S SRE OG ES we SENSO A SOE EAE RS BEES aUis SEEMS SS 68 PAGO OO a ERR HUE IUE ER EEE PLAGE REE EE do EU E Sab es eodd 68 Max Mirer Lyl xz2iisame ERES kitte 4344 CRUCE ASSES EOE e ROROR CRESS S Roo S SOS 69 JUI UD usan De ca UE AE ER oe RECIEN EE 71 PO UE ou uote ae ce d o ES Cd d RE ES Els SE ws See ee tone 71 BEI CDU EE T2 no QDI PCT 76 IDEE o E yox de eet US de Ae A DOS d CRGA NEAR CSI eR AN RAN 7T JO VBW EE 78 TE UU ETIE EA FS N E R E A E A NE TEES EEE ENE 79 ADC Ranei EE Ee tn oe aE EATE FIEREN A OA ORAR RRE dE 80 EE ee EA A eeh et deeg ER EE 83 bier on Apr EE 84 WEW REW Tcr 86 EE E Ae E N RE 87 ANVEN IDE certior E E SHEE RE EE SHOES EE AE 89 OPARO uud dk x Kd 4d REX UC dr e AED Wd b oid S3 dE Pei a ddr ba a quc X ded EE 93 Det Demad 22224 ERES RRGUOH EG KARE RR PN debe P RR OTE RO RARE RR Rd 95 RE Leda AAE R ch NE ue MER EE 95 Display 355 o HERI ERR 6 SSE Oa RUFI RENE Ge BSE GSS ee BSS E SE eee ey 103 Bull OPER cd d po ep Spe dE dede aD a E Rp Ed E Rp bd edoed ipe ba
249. Path System Chapter 4 279 N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 15 Keyboard Lock Remote Command Only Disables the instrument keyboard to prevent local input when instrument is controlled remotely An annunciator reading Klock alerts the local user that the keyboard is locked Or you can display a system message using SYSTem MESSage History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SYSTem KLOCK Example SYST KLOCK 4 8 16 Remote Message Enables remote user to send message that will appear in the Status Bar at bottom of the instrument display New message will overwrite any previous message Message will remain until removed by use of SYSTem MESSage OFF Example SYSTem MESSage Instrument currently in use remotely by Ted in R D Remarks Message appears as green text against a black background to differentiate it from internally generated messages which appear as white text against a black background The SYSTem KLOCk command will lock out the front panel keys History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SYSTem MESSage lt string gt Example SYSTem MESSage Instrument currently in use remotely by Tom 280 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 17 Remote Message Turned Off Removes any system message from the Status Bar at the bottom of the instrument display A message can be dis
250. Peak Threshold to be considered a peak This applies to all traces and all windows Press ESC or select another active function to hide the threshold line Applies to Next Peak Next Peak Left and Next Peak Right If Peak Search is set to Param it also applies to Peak Search Key Path Peak Search Search Param Dependencies Couplings This function is not available when Y Axis is set to Frequency instead of Amplitude State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 90 dBm Terminators dBmV dBuV dBuA V W A Default Terminator dBm Resolution Rounding Truncation 001 dBm Knob Increment amp scale LOG 1 of dB div or 0 01 the larger of the two amp scale LIN 0 1 dBm Step Key Increment amp scale LOG dB div amp scale LIN Range From the current reference level to the bottom of the display range Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PEAK THReshold lt ampl gt UP DOWN MIN MAX DEFault CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PEAK THReshold Remote Command Notes CALC MARK PEAK SEAR MODE must be set to PARameter if you want peak search to take advantage of the threshold excursion 216 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search Example CALC MARK PEAK THR 60 dBm sets the threshold to 60 dBm See the full example for the CALC MARK PEAK SEAR MODE command below 5 D o g c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Chapter 4 217 N A a o E Q
251. Questionable Frequency Event Query Questionable Frequency Negative Transition Questionable Frequency Positive Transition Integrity Registers STATus QUEStionable INTegrity lt keyword gt Questionable Integrity Condition Questionable Integrity Event Query Questionable Integrity Event Query Questionable Integrity Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Positive Transition Signal Integrity Registers STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal keyword Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Questionable Integrity Signal Enable Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition Calibration Integrity Registers STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated keyw ord 560 Chapter7 Using the STATus System Status System Commands STATus Commands Questionable Calibration Integrity Condition Questionable Calibration Integrity Enable Questionable Calibration Integrity Event Query Questionable Calibration Integrity Negative Transition Questionable Calibration Integrity Positive Transition Power Registers STATus QUEStionable POWer keyword Questionable Power Condition Questionable Power Enable Questionable Power Event Query Questionable Power Negative Transition Questionable Power Positive Transition
252. R OR CR EE ROSE Ro OR OX RR Reg 262 ALibration PLATROSSIE Li said b bete ee eei de ded doe do eh dlc e dee dedos 260 SPL eae LA Paves Oy v d ao co adde E boc br E Fabio de EE 260 CALibration FREQuencyE STATe OFkTONTOoIT III 258 CALibration FREQuencyLSTATel 0 55 e005 bes es RR ewe ee NEE REN ENEE EO EX 258 CALbrauorGAIN CSS Ee sos bw Gee bees ADR PRORA ECT AER ERE TERR pe ROUEN 261 SAEPE INDUIT SUBDIT un ak Meg pdt Ebr oC E AN RO RERO OR AO DR od SU RE EE 261 SK E EE E 259 17 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands d 38 uii ied epp aue Dg ew eed e dob d UP Publ Eod do do ede odo dede apego 259 POLIO BE S Pado pex iE BD EE RER sque dud pube sid d du 258 CALIbratom BET 644606 SREL EE e AE ERU RE TORE SERS LEME ee ER QeE FER HE RR RP Ed E E 258 CALibration TCORrections AUTO ON IOP n 262 RST BR GE EE 4 4pg Spi i RUE CROP hsc E WE ARE oboe arc EE 257 AE ALLY 2 auk kites otek saws thie wr d OO EE e EON OL ee eS 257 CR e 306 CONF Eure BPOV d EE dE E e dE A EE E E dE AE de 320 SEN Kee EH POWER Aer uk eo Rc parca X Rok a Re ene dea os TR eae hangs od RU de dien 303 SON Dump HARNI Se ra CR Ee EE KO ER de x E eb e d dc e eda i Re E dea 316 EE La E a id tnde pado d durs bau dud oak Damus dg Rb apr ui c oaa 310 RE EE auda es dpi dades Eo RRR EE H bed Good do bd e ER qo d EU odor 304 CONF EC N I A EEN TR E EE SONG Ea ERES EX REPE SHG OES Hy SEER Rs 314 HO
253. RANGe UPPer Bad Command Good Command PWR ATT 40dB POW ATT 40dB The short form of POWER is POW not PWR FREQ STAR 30MHz MIX RANG FREQ STAR 20dBm 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm The MIX RANG command is in the same SENSE subsystem as FREQ but executing the FREQ command puts you back at the SENSE level You must specify POW to get to the MIX RANG command FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm MIX and RANG require a colon to separate them POW ATT 40dB TRIG FREQ STAR 2 3GHz POW ATT 40dB FREQ STAR 2 3GHz FREQ STAR is in the SENSE subsystem not the TRIGGER subsystem s POW ATT FREQ STAR POW ATT FREQ STAR POW and FREQ are within the same SENSE subsystem but they are two separate commands so they should be separated with a semicolon not a colon POW ATT 5dB FREQ STAR 10MHz POW ATT 5dB FREQ STAR 10MHz Attenuation cannot be a negative value 510 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Improving Measurement Speed There are a number of things you can do in your programs to make them run faster Turn off the display updates on page 511 Use binary data format instead of ASCII on page 512 Minimize the number of GPIB transactions on page 512 Put ADC Ranging in Bypass for FFT Measurements on page 513 Minimize DUT instrument setup changes on page 513
254. REQuency NTRansition lt number gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Chapter 8 577 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E I E KA 2 ky 3 S Lr 7 o lt Ld Lei f N D NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable lt number gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Frequency Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Register Questionable Integrity Condition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionabl
255. RERO 103 DISPlay PSTatistic GAUSsian STATe OFF ON 0 1 2 0 cee eee eee 386 DISPlay PSTatisticGAUSsian STATe 7 x sore EN eee wk ede ew A ee wd oe aca 386 DISPlay PSTatistic REFerence STATe OFF ON 0O 1 0 0 cece eee 386 DISPlay PSTatistic REFerence STATe 0 2 cc eee eens 386 DISPlay PSTatisticXSCale lt rel amples A edid Re OR E de eR ao vet E e qos 389 al IK E RT KT EEE ART Le du der ato ar R4 Pd r3 d dp ea epe d d op d E o de a re 389 IDISPIay WINDaow ANNotation ALL OFF ON O T ae 8 0 R RR RRR RR AIR EE en 125 DISP WINDow AN Notation ALLI 2bckst ack E bed bord ax RE xd UR RR S RR RR uS dan 125 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe ampnlz e 104 TISPlas WINDowTRACe Y DLINe ample s 6 eek hee ee EEN See EEN E Re PEE RR e 104 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFF ON O 1 0 0 0 eee BRA 104 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFF ON O 1 0 0 0 eee eee eee 104 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe eee e ene 104 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe 0 eee 104 DISP WIN Dow TRACE CDLINS 2 694 e IER Rh EROR EE e RR OR RR dE E 104 I DISPlay WINDasc TRACE Y DLINGT L 0 N 9 TE EE EEN t es be ue ed dee N dos bab dd 104 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision power 52 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision 0 0 eee ee eh 52 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ampl gt 0 0 0 ee nee 49 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet rel powerz
256. Radio Standards available for which this measurement can be applied Pressing Meas Control allows you to pause or restart your measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement mode Key Path MEASURE Chapter 5 305 G E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command Measurement Results Available Condition Command Results Returned CONFigure ACPower Not Applicable TIN Tate AC Power Radio Std None and FETCh ACPower n only offset A is on MEASure ACPower n READ ACPower n Returns 3 comma separated values that correspond to main channel power lower adjacent channel power dBc and upper adjacent channel power dBc Radio Std z None or Radio Std 2 None and more than one offsetis on Meas Type Total Pwr Ref Returns 28 comma separated values that correspond in the following order 1 Main Channel relative power dB 2 Main Channel absolute power dBm 3 Main Channel relative power dB 4 Main Channel absolute power dBm 5 Negative Offset Frequency 1 relative power dB 6 Negative Offset Frequency 1 absolute power dBm 7 Positive Offset Frequency 1 relative power dB 8 Positive Offset Frequency 1
257. Rection CSETI1 2 3 4 X SPACing LINear LOGarithmic 67 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4ESTATe OFRFTONTIOIT m BRA 62 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 0STATe 0 0 0 RRR eee eee 62 SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude relative powers cece eee 68 31 E G C 9 e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands SENSe CORR ction OFFSet MAGNitudel ENEE uses rh hne K 68 petiNSaEDERTectar AUTO OFF ON 0 IE 2 iu ng dos E Epiri GE beu oc Rex qd acc pd tna 98 SENSeEDETector AUTO coi AE A etes e s Pee PEER SS EE EEN EE AE ewes EAE YES 98 SENSe DETector FUNCtion AVERage NEGative NORMal POSitive SAMPle RMS 96 SENSE DE lector FUN ON cc gto th eq dao Ede ROCK wees A bee wee A ee 96 BEN Se FEED RF AREFereng uses aw woe RERO ea A RR KE RKE AL RR AREA RR RER 171 EE EE 171 SENSe FREQuency CENTer frequency UP DOWN seeeeeeee ees 164 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0O 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 cece BR 167 SENSel FREQuency CEN Ter STEPIAUTO Ls eck eee eee eee eee Be ee ee ee 167 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement lt freq gt 0 ce cee eens 167 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement 0 0 0 0 0 c ccc cee eee eens 167 SENSeLBREQuence CEN Ter Au AER oo Y ERAS SSW ERS A EE HESS EE ES 164 SE NSekFREQuency OF Bet freq AEN NNN ies EE CERN cea ORO ORE OR E ee 168 SE
258. Reference Level so adjusting the Reference Level may change the Attenuation The analyzer selects an Attenuation setting that is as small as possible while keeping the Ref Level at or below the Max Mixer Lvl setting The current value is indicated by Atten at the top of the display A appears in front of Atten when Attenuation Man is selected CAUTION To prevent damage to the input mixer do not exceed a power level of 30 dBm at the input To prevent signal compression keep the power at the input mixer below 0 dBm 10 MHz 200 MHz below 3 dBm 200 MHz 6 6 GHz and below 2 dBm 6 6 GHz 50 0 GHz With the attenuator set to Auto a signal at or below the reference level results in a mixer level at or below 10 dBm Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Auto Coupled 10 dB for external amplifier gain of 0 dB Resolution Rounding Truncation The attenuation is resolved to 2 dB increments Value setting a logarithm if value is at least 0 5 dB over a value then the next higher value is selected Therefore 10 4 selects 10 while 10 5 selects 12 Range 0 dB to 70 dB Remote Command SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation rel power SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO Remote Command Notes The Reference Level setting may be affected when the Attenuation is changed See Ref Le
259. Restored by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command CALibration AUTO OFF ON ALERt CALibration AUTO Example CAL AUTO ON 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N 4 8 4 2 Align All Now Accesses the Align Now menu keys and immediately executes an alignment cycle of all the subsystems Align RF Align IF Align ADC and Align Current Sys Gain The instrument will stop any measurement currently underway perform the full alignment then restart the measurement from the beginning similar to pressing the Restart key All other operations are stopped and the alignments will be visible on the display Key Path System Alignments Remote Command CALibration ALL Performs a full alignment The following three commands perform a full alignment and return a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful A one is returned if any part of the alignment fails CALibration ALL CAL TST Example CAL The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful 4 8 4 3 Frequency Corrections Remote Command Only Turns the internal frequency corrections on off Saved State Not saved in instrument state Chapter 4 257 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System Factory Preset On F
260. S El D gt LI r Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY Channel Range Model Frequency Range E4440A 100 0000000 MHz to 27 0 GHz E4443A 100 0000000 MHz to 13 7 GHz E4445A 100 0000000 MHz to 7 2 GHz E4446A 100 0000000 MHz to 44 5 GHz E4448A 100 0000000 MHz to 51 0 GHz Remote Command SENSe FREQuency STOP frequency SENSe FREQuency STOP Example FREQ STOP 1600 FREQ STOP 2 6 4 CF Step Changes the step size for the center frequency and start stop frequency functions Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is activated the step keys and the UP DOWN parameters for Center Frequency from remote commands change center frequency by the step size value The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the current frequency span of the analyzer When auto coupled in a non zero span the center frequency step size is set to 10 of the span Key Path FREQUENCY State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Span 10 Knob Increment if Span 0 Hz increment RBW 20 if Span gt 0 Hz increment Span 200 Step Key Increment if CF Step auto Span 0 Hz step RBW if CF Step auto Span gt 0 Hz step Span 10 if CF Step manual step 1 2 5 sequence E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E 166 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L
261. S CPU d RHENO A Ae de D ac A IRL Ua aui SIRE oris 568 Dell Pasta 6 666 inde PO EE 568 KEE EEN 568 BGLIAIns SUbSVSLODE ones dE EE SE dod eRe EE AGE ORE CAO ORO Ce ES 571 EE EE 571 Preset the Statue Byte lt lt 2 AE s zEY 3 REESE CS URRE ETRE 6 HORE BREE SERS Yd EX RRS OS 573 Questionable E EE 573 Questionable Calibration Register 575 Questionable Frequency Register 576 Questionable Integrity Register naaras r rener 578 Questionable Integrity Signal Register 20 ccc ee eee ene 580 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register 582 Questionable Power Resister a a ws Fie OA wR ee ewe hee WE eS 583 Questionable Temperature Register ununun unnn n nnna 585 8 Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Alpha Editor Keys Lof EE 588 AMPLITUDE Y Scale Key 1 of 2 See page A0 590 Aute Couple Key 1 of 3 Gee page TL cc voi EEN REENEN d SEENEN E 592 BW Are Key See ate EE 595 11 C Z E H 2 D 5 OD o S ER Contents Det Demod Key See pase 9B i bk eee Ex XE Re deo a EERIE eee ACORDE eR ple 596 Display Key 1 of 2 See page 103 EELER RR RR RRR E RRO RA RR RRR ENEE EEN 597 File Key Lof 6 bes pase 127 iussa sek Ph hae dw eee a REA ee ek RR 599 FREQUENCY Channel Key See page 1621 605 Input Output Key See pape 171 pews dex baa xac e Y pd Y X ROG A Re eee RC Rd 606 Marker Key See page IT ise 58446 ka eh CR EERS FEES RR OR EROR ECCE A REOR EO 607 Marker gt Key See pase L A caw tee ed REA E
262. S Ex E e eres pes 310 REAO M PSUOET EE 311 23 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands READ OBW FERRO ci zo d peak he be ORE Poe RR EIE eta ele 4 ob ied dol P cn dea 304 d RE E ine quabp cneraxbbiiu qaidem ash Deua EE B DPI Ea p d 304 IREAD OBWAADB 4 0 9 0 0 KERE Seo OREN SSUES PESE SSeS CERE TE Ee ee IR REN YQ Ep EDENS 304 TREAD OBN S bec souder ebbe Hemd pd URS m E abe VICE S Meee ee RUE AE NOE PEERS 304 SUEDE ESSI HS ud uui dod axe REO ed REED ERA LO CE D d Rea RO DEI e b OL OEC Eod b RR 314 dE KEE 324 d or E TE 322 IEADITOIN IP2 5 ches dE ENEE EE EREM OKA SE E RUSO AE eR E 321 d A TOH EE 321 SUEDE dE Acid ao qus que puc S GE ep e P Eee pa RE IER Pd E edes dea deor Ea 321 PSP A aon UNDE se dE dE quid d dried See piane rd ba Bt i o pda 571 STATus OPERation ENABle integer EEN NENNEN AE aa 571 STATos OPE Ration ENABle 0 RKR ER wwe otr Seah AER EEE See ews Hees E 571 STATu us OFERatiom NTRansition lt integer gt oe R 00 Ra xe Mah eek eee Rh AE REDE RU FAO 572 Re NEEN ivi Ad wee ww eh PRE be EE 572 STATus OPERation PTRansition lt integer gt 1 0 eee eens 572 SS UATusOPE Ration PURansIDOD 41006 eis ee sees EES BEER EES BEER LEHR EERE GOOD 572 RTA Tua OPE Ratan RY ENZ EE EEN EE RR RR RR RRRREE3 PER ok ri RUE E RR e 572 DAT RRE ponies econ e deed bete dot Bede ates Oeo died ed deat edet de buco 573 STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition
263. SENSe TOIN AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe TOIN AVERage L STATe 7 Example TOIN AVER ON TOIN AVER Chapter 5 423 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Intermod TOI 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 424 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Intermod TOI 5 18 2 Avg Mode Press Avg Mode to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function to either Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat When you set Avg Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previous result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe TOIN AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe TOIN AVERage TCONrol Example TOIN AVG TCON EXP TOIN AVG TCON 5 18 3 TOI Span Press Sp
264. SET DELTa CENTer senunnuun narran 199 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET DELTa SPAN 00 ccc III 199 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET RLEVel 200 0 eee ene ene 200 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STARt KR eR cc cee eee R RR N 197 CALCulste EAR EREM EE 197 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STOP 2 0 0 0 ce cee eee eee 199 CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA lt dB gt lt dB gt lt dB gt 440 CALCulate MC Power OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA 2 0005 440 CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA lt dB gt lt dB gt lt dB gt 440 CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA 0 0 005 440 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum 0 00 397 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MINimum 0 0 0 0 eee 397 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE NORMal DELTa OFF 391 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE 0 cee cee eee eens 391 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe MEASured GAUSsian REFerence 394 16 List of Commands CALCulate PSTatisticc MARKer 1 2 3 4TRACe 0 eee eee B 394 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 X db 395 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition db 395 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition 0 0 0 0 eee 395 CALCulate PS Taa MAR Ker H Z 34X cau etd i
265. Save User Preset This key is only available when the Preset Type is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User Key Path Preset if preset type is set to User System Power On Preset See Save User Preset on page 213 Remote Command SYSTem PRESet L USER SAVE Example SYST PRES TYPE USER SYST PRES SAVE 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E Tl E E 1 E a U LI N Chapter 4 225 Instrument Functions P Z Preset N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 226 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Print 4 3 Print Initiates an output of the display data to the currently defined printer The screen remains frozen no further sweeps are taken until the data transfer to the printer is complete Refer to the key description for Print Setup on page 229 for more information about the printer functions There must be a valid printer set up for the print function to work The Getting Started Guide includes additional printer installation information If you need to abort a print in progress use the Esc escape key Key Path Front panel key Remote Command HCOPy IMMediate Example HCOPY 3 D a B c 3 f gt Tl E 5 fr e f 5 D v LI N 4 3 1 Abort the Printout Remote Command Only This command aborts the print that is currently in process Remote Command HCOPy ABORt Example HCOP ABOR Chapter 4
266. Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator dBc Range 200 dBc to 50 dBc Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt RCARrier rel ampl rel ampl up to five values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STARt RCARrier Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS 1 Example SEM OFFS LIST STAR RCAR 20 dBc SEM OFFS LIST STAR RCAR el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 5 22 4 10 Rel Stop Enables you to enter a relative level limit at Stop Freq ranging from 150 00 to 450 00 dBc with 0 01 dB resolution and to toggle this function between Couple and Man If set to Couple this is coupled to Rel Start to make a flat limit line If set to Man Rel Start and Rel Stop you can enter different values to make a sloped limit line Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Chapter 5 471 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Default Terminator dBc Range 200 dBc to 50 dBc Remote Command SENS
267. Saved State Saved in Instrument State 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E 84 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Factory Preset Auto 8 MHz Range 1 Hz to 50 MHz 5 D o E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls Chapter 2 85 E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Remote Command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO Example BAND VID 1 kHz BAND VID BWID VID AUTO ON BWID VID AUTO 2 2 3 VBW RBW Selects the ratio between the video and resolution bandwidths Video bandwidth wider than resolution bandwidth VBW RBW ratio 1 000 provides the best peak measurements of signals such as wideband radar pulses VBW narrower than RBW VBW RBW ratio 1 000 reduces the variance of noise like signals and makes spectral components close to the noise floor easier to view The knob and step keys change the ratio in a 1 3 10 sequence With Preset Type set to Factory pressing Preset or selecting Auto Couple Auto All sets the ratio to 1 000 X When VBW RBW Auto is selected the ratio is determined as indicated below Table 2 1 VBW RBW Ratio Auto Rules Detector Mode Noise Ratio Notes Marker Peak On 10 Noise response is estimated for wide VBW case Ne
268. Sel HARMonics AVERape STATE ENEE NN KEN REOR Rn X ee ER e s 409 SENSe HARMonics NUMBer integer 0 0 0 ees 410 LSENSel s FIA RN ones UN BG ae cca EE EE een Leese dee tees EELER EE ES 410 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo 418 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 418 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO 418 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo nana 418 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1416 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 416 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution lt integer gt 416 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth RESolution 417 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST FREQuency lt integer gt 0 0 0 ees 415 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST FREQuency 0 0 eee eee eens 415 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SPAN esseeeeeeeeeee n 416 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SPAN een 416 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 0 cee eee eee ee 415 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST STATe 0 eee eee 415 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEep TIME lt integer gt 0 0 0 cece eee 419 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 419 SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SW
269. Setup pe909a Vienu Maps One butiton Measuremen Functions Mode Setup Key 2 of 2 If Radio Std is None this menu appears If Radio Std is Bluetooth this menu appears If Radio Std is IS 95A J STD 008 cdma2000 W CDMA NADC PDC TETRA or GSM EDGE this menu appears If Radio Std is IS 95C this menu appears Std Setup Signal BN 3 000000 MHz Std Setup Packet Type DH1 DH3 DHS o Std Setup Device BTS MS i Std Setup Band Class Band Class Qr 0 US K or Cell US K or Cell Device 1 TS MS US PCS I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices sde nua Juswainseayy uoyng 3uo suonoun JUsWeNsee uojng euo sdejy nuaw ACP Measurement Meas Setup Key P o is aT anes G nup CUTE Messen t Meas Setup Meas Setup Meas Type Offset Limits S Bee Avg Number o Method Offset T g E IB RBW Total Pwr Ref ABCDEF t Total Pwr Ref Offset Freq fvg Mode 6 78 dBm PSD Ref t 3 00000000 khz KAD p Ruto Man On Off Note The menus under Chan Integ BW Limit Test t Ref BW Meas Setup a
270. Start and Rel Stop This is the default for MS measurements Abs OR Rel Fail is shown if one of the absolute spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit between Abs Start and Abs Stop inclusive OR one of the relative spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Rel Start and Rel Stop Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default 472 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value el i al E m pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 473 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST TEST ABSolute AND OR RELative ABSolute AND OR RELative ABSolute AND OR RELative ABSolute AND OR RELative SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST TEST Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS 1 Example SEM OFFS LIST TEST ABS REL ABS AND REL ABS OR REL SEM OFFS LIST TEST 5 22 4 11 1 Absolute Set the limit test to show Fail if one of the absolute spectrum emissio
271. TATe SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime lt time gt SENSe HARMonics SWEeptime Remote Command Notes ON is equal to automatic Auto OFF is equal to manual Man Example HARM SWE STAT OFF HARM SWE 100 ms 5 16 5 Range Table On Off Press Range Table to specify whether the range table is to be used or not When Range Table is set to Off the harmonics are measured When Range Table is set to On the first active range is considered to be the fundamental and the subsequent active ranges are used as the harmonics At least two ranges must be active if Range Table is set to On Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset See Table 5 1 on page 414 Range Off On History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe HARMonics RTABle STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe HARMonics RTABle STATe Example HARM RTAB STAT OFF 412 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion 5 16 6 Range Table Enables you to enter the settings for up to 10 ranges either using the instrument front panel keys or remotely Upon entering the range table the measurement stops then the analyzer is set to a constantly sweeping state The analyzer is then set to the current values for range 1 whether range 1 is on or off If a range is currently off the values in the range table for that range are replaced with see Range 5 in the illustration to indicate this range is currently inactive os Agilent
272. TM es aa PEU Id Dd d dig qu he Rd het Ii Pac pd d cda Ed dps 486 Range TADS 445 0504 Rb RR E E RR L E E SEER Pa ER OG Y Fnac XR do HR Pes 486 Diese ies 4 punks LT PLE 497 EE 498 45 vr 498 Fast Spunous MOas 2ssesd REY S AXE Up do REX RARE CRATE HORE ERR E ERR E RB 499 6 Programming Fundamentals 10 SUP leanne BASICS espe dard dox ac Dd CR ORO AERE det RO LORI AUC CREAR CIO ECOL RC aS 503 Command Keywords and Syntax 2 4555 ves sou RR XX R XX dd 0 N 503 Creating Valid Command ius pecxae eezed ex3 dba po IG de REL de aba e Reap E Rr 504 Special Characters 1n Commands iue sau ko UR REOR OHS OO RARUS EERE SLES E UR N 505 Parameters m OOS i iuilies aT A A H K REG REA ONCE RR RAE A RON CE 506 Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line llle 508 Improving Measurement Speed s KE doxes ee Xe gk ere NK ER RO Re Rex OE e a E RR 511 Tarn on the display apdales 1225s sdb EE EE EE ROUES Roto OR 511 Use binary data format instead of ASCI ccc s exa RR Y ER RR OX Rr 512 Minimize the number of GPIB transactions sananen eere 512 Avoid unnecessary use of EE Ra HE EX ERE E EC RO GR Ee yea 513 Put ADC Ranging in Bypass for FFT Measurements 0 000 c cece eee ees 513 Minimize DUT instrument setup changes ees 513 Consider using LAN instead af GPIB eet suu Rue SEH OS E A AE d YE 514 Using an Option Mode Minimize the number of GPIB transactions 514 Using an Option Mode Avoid automatic attenuator setting
273. Te OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger L SEQuence DELay STATe 290 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Trig Example TRIG DEL STAT ON TRIG DEL 100 ms 4 10 9 Trig Offset Remote Command Only This command sets the trigger offset Trigger offset refers to the specified time interval before or after the trigger event from which data is to be written to the trace and then displayed Ordinarily the trigger offset value is zero and trace data is displayed beginning at the trigger event A negative trigger offset value results in the display of trace data prior to the trigger event A positive trigger offset value results in an effective delay in the display of trace data after the trigger event The trigger offset value used when the feature is enabled will depend on the following parameters s Nominal trigger offset value originally entered s Specific instrument hardware in use e Sweep time s Number of sweep points The effective trigger offset value will be re calculated whenever any of these parameters change State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0s Range Hardware specific dependent upon the ADC being used current state and the number of sweep points History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet lt time gt TRIGger L SEQuence OFFSet TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe Remote Command Notes Trigge
274. Tegrity UNCalibrated EVENt 2 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 582 SLATase OUR Stiongble IN Tesritv E EVEN scusa sd sch Oke eae eo eed eee ee kas 579 25 E G C 9 e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a List of Commands STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt number gt 00000 ccc eee eens 574 SSTATus QUEStionable NTRansition gK N R K R RR eee eee eens 574 SSTATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition 0 0 0 00 lesen 583 STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt numberzs nanan nuren 584 SBTATus QUEStonable POWer ENABle uc cewek bee RR SNE NEEN ER RR SNE EORR RR a 584 STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition number 584 STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition 00 ccc eee eee eens 584 STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt number gt enanar narrer 585 HTAfus OUk tGonable DOWer D UR ansion T gt eh 585 STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt 0 0 RRR RRR RKR I 584 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition number 574 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 0 eee ERE Ep eens 574 SSTATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition 0 nunnana 0c eee ees 585 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle number 585 SSTATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle 0 00 000 ccc eee eee ees 585 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition lt number gt nannan rererua 586 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition ananunua eee ees 586 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerat
275. UINTeger 32 fastest Internal Units REAL 32 Amplitude Units REAL 64 Amplitude Units Example FORM REAL 32 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 ES El D gt LI r Chapter 2 161 Instrument Functions A L File 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 162 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY Channel 2 06 FREQUENCY Channel Displays the menu of frequency functions Depending on the Frequency entry mode either the center frequency or the start and stop frequency values appear below the graticule on the display In Center Span mode the Center Frequency and Span appear and the Center Freq function is automatically activated In Start Stop mode the Start and Stop frequencies appear and the Start Freq function is automatically activated NOTE Although the analyzer allows entry of frequencies greater than its specified range analyzer performance will be degraded if it is used beyond the specified frequency range 2 6 1 Center Freq Activates the function that sets the center of the displayed frequency range to the specified frequency Key Path FREQUENCY Annunciation Annotation Center lt value gt appears in the lower left corner of the display Dependencies Couplings Center frequency and span are coupled to each other State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Model Center Frequency E4440A 13 255 GHz E4443A 3 35
276. UTO On BWID AUTO 2 2 2 Video BW Enables you to change the analyzer post detection filter from 1 Hz to 8 MHz in approximately 10 steps In addition a wide open video filter bandwidth VBW may be chosen by selecting 50 MHz Video BW Auto selects automatic coupling of the Video BW filter to the resolution bandwidth filter using the VBW RBW ratio set by the VBW RBW key NOTE Sweep Time is coupled to Video Bandwidth VBW As the VBW is changed the sweep time when set to Auto is changed to maintain amplitude calibration This occurs because of common hardware between the two circuits even though the Video BW filter is not actually in circuit when the detector is set to Average Because the purpose of the average detector and the VBW filter are the same either can be used to reduce the variance of the result Although the VBW filter is not in circuit when using the average detector the Video BW key can have an effect on Auto sweep time and is not disabled In this case reducing the VBW setting increases the sweep time which increases the averaging time producing a lower variance trace When using the average detector with either Sweep Time set to Man or in zero span the VBW setting has no effect and is disabled greyed out A mark appears next to VBW on the bottom of the analyzer display when it is not coupled To couple the video bandwidth press Video BW Auto or press Auto All Key Path BW Avg
277. User s and Programmer s Reference Agilent Technologies PSA Spectrum Analyzers This manual provides documentation for the following instruments E4440A 3 Hz 26 5 GHz E4443A 3 Hz 6 7 GHz E4445A 3 Hz 13 2 GHz E4446A 3 Hz 44 0 GHz E4448A 3 Hz 50 0 GHz Agilent Technologies Manufacturing Part Number E4440 90189 Supersedes E4440 90061 Printed in USA December 2002 Copyright 2001 Agilent Technologies Legal Information The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Where to Find the Latest Information Documentation is updated periodically For the latest information about Agilent PSA spectrum analyzers including firmware upgrades and application information see http www agilent com find psa Contents D Ia bd 9 e o o E 1 Using This Document Ld B k Oroa EE 44 Tha icm Das Bel eos uad ad oa ER ACE EE 44 Terms Used in This BOG usse hey 9 EE ERE EP ESARCAIPICSRERReuweY SE XxMA3 ODE SERS 45 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDES Y ieaie aaa abd C EH P ERE ER
278. Wer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 383 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 384 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 11 Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Press Display to access menu keys that allow you to configure parameters for the CCDF measurement NOTE The keys described below are measurement dependent To access the display menus for the CCDF measurement press Measure Power Stat CCDF then Display 5 11 1 Full Screen Expands the measurement window horizontally over the entire instrument display Pressing any other key that results in a new menu cancels the full screen function Any error occurring turns full screen mode off Key Path Display Key Path Display State Saved Not saved in state Factory Preset Off Factory Default Off History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 11 2 Store Ref Trace Press Store Ref Trace to copy the currently measured curve as the user definable reference trace The captured data will remain until the other mode is chosen Pressing this key refreshes the reference trace G E
279. Z E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Key Path Mode Setup Factory Preset Off History Added with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard RPARams STATe ON Off 1 0 SENSe RADio STANdard RPARams L STATe Example RAD STAN REAR Off 5 3 4 Enable All Measurements Allows you to specify whether all measurements and radio standards are enabled set to Yes or not Set to No NOTE Enable All Measurements will be disabled greyed out if a measurement is entered when Enable All Measurements is set to Yes and the measurement entered does not support the currently selected Radio Std Select a valid radio standard measurement combination to enable will be displayed Key Path Mode Setup Factory Preset No History Added with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard EAMeas YES NO SENSe RADio STANdard EAMeas Example RAD STAN EAM YES 5 3 5 Autorange of Power Setting Remote command only This command is the remote version of the Optimize Ref Level key If this function is applicable to the currently selected measurement this command sets the reference level and attenuator to optimum values based on the signal present at the input NOTE There is always a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer inp
280. a comma separated list of strings that contain the names of all the installed applications modes These names can only be used with the INST SELECT command O 1 E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Iz s 7 Remote Command INSTrument CATalog Example INST CAT Query response SA CDMA PNOISE 206 Chapter 3 4 Instrument Functions P Z This chapter provides key descriptions and programming information for the front panel key functions of your analyzer starting with the letters P through Z The front panel functions are listed alphabetically and are described with their associated menu keys The lower level menu keys are arranged and described as they appear in your analyzer 207 5 o m E 3 oO E T E Ej 7 ES El D 70 N Instrument Functions P Z NOTE The front and rear panel features along with the numeric keypad and alpha numeric softkey fundamentals are illustrated and described in your Getting Started guide N a 2 E T O E 2 LL E o E E Iz s 7 208 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search 4 1 Peak Search Places a marker on the highest peak and displays the search menu If Peak Search Type Param is set to Excursion amp Threshold the peak found must meet the defined peak excursion and threshold values See Search Param on page 215 Peaks that are less than 1 of the current span aw
281. a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 584 Chapter 8 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Questionable Power Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 3276 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Temperature Register Questionable Temperature Condition STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Temperature Enable STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle lt number gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Tempera
282. aca Rer LOO vc facie EE SAO EW EE RR EEE Ae eS 456 Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask GEM 457 SUD DEER 457 Moas Dea das ee ee S ARR ac ed dc dH ee ee 458 Iu gue usada OPER CREAR GA SEU ER AC ROVER AC REC EE AR A 458 OBsel Lines Saepe rurUrrew CARRS EENREPEEEPITSeCP DIPQ TINePEI 3R SSR d qe E XE 462 onere mcsb o MDC MP 475 ERG EE 475 Witter Agi usu K 4 ao we a we ee ae A RR oh OS REO OIN 476 Trace View Spectrum Emissions Mask 477 ms Po BEER AEN ch cd eo Ra rg rk dud e d or E ped dd ed acea oe deg d 477 Bel Por te Pred EE 477 Integrated PONCDE g E A E AA E A SORORE EE 478 Display Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM ssesee eere 479 ie ees Oe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee er ee ee es ee 479 Limot Displays Pr S486 SACRE REA ARES ERE REEER ERE AS ACEO REESE RRL SO 479 IS EE EG 479 SPAN X Scale Spectrum Emissions Mask GEM 481 e EE 481 Ret uU 4 226 5 60443 re OM ASS CAE RED ARE KEIO RS ESE OER ERS AD ARES EHS HEROES 481 OR sok Edge RR REO De cR Ee Age 481 Marker Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 00 cee eee eens 483 PRC Mere Loa d Vu pur peu EE dog odo heet pene grade qp ded 483 C Z E H 2 D 5 OD o S ER Contents foror MET M 484 E Los nd ed Rae PR RR OR RR RR RES o CR Ea Foot oS oleas Ja d CR olo Roe RARE EERE 484 Meas Setup Spurious Emissions Luise ura EE R RKR sewi kine kar Auka SEKR AGE ACC RC 485 JUS R A EE EE EE EE 8 EME TAN EE NEE EPI Nr S PEERS RN 485 ZU
283. ace Displays all trace files TRC and CSV in the selected directory If selected it applies to all File functions Key Path File Catalog Type 2 5 1 1 4 Limits Displays all limits files LIM in the selected directory Key Path File Catalog Type 2 5 1 1 5 Screen Displays all screen files GIF and WMF in the selected directory Key Path File Catalog Type 2 5 1 1 6 Corrections Displays all correction files ANT CBL OTH and AMP in the selected directory 2 5 1 2 Sort Displays the Sort menu keys that enable you to view your saved files according to a selected file attribute The selections include By Date By Name By Extension By Size and Order Order Up sorts files in ascending order for example A B C Order Down sorts files in descending order for example C B A The Sort setting applies to all of the File functions except Save Key Path File Catalog State Saved The Sort order survives Preset but is not saved in the instrument state Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 2 5 1 2 1 By Date Sorts and displays the current file catalog by the date of the files Key Path File Catalog Sort 2 5 1 2 2 By Name Sorts and displays the current file catalog in alphabetical order of the name of the files Chapter 2 133 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T c E LO a E D gt LI r Instrument Functions A L File Key Path File Catalog Sort 1 lt o
284. ace Note The menus under BN Off Display are measurement Gaussian dependent and vary with each Trace measurement On Off Preferences sde nuan 1uauieJnseay uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw 9 9 6 191deu2 Functions CCDF Power Stat Measurement Span X Scale Key SPAN X Scale If measurement X Scale Scale Div 2 00 dB L chosen is Power Stat CCDF Note The menus under Span are measurement dependent and may vary with each measurement pe895a sde nuan Juewesnseay uojng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw CCDF Power Stat Measurement Marker Key ner O gt 5 If measurement E Power Stat CCDF Se aer Gaussian Note The menus under Marker are measurement Reference dependent and vary with each measurement Marker Trace Measured Marker All Off pe894a i A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function o e N suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan uawansea uonng eug suoljaun4 jueuiensee y uoyng 3u0 sde nuaw 8 9 6 191deu2 T Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions Channel Power Measurem
285. actory Default On Remote Command CALibration FREQuency STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALibration FREQuency STATe 7 Example CAL FREQ OFF 4 8 4 4 Align Subsys Displays keys that enable you to activate a partial alignment Key Path System Alignments Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 4 4 1 Align RF Initiates an alignment on the RF assembly Key Path System Alignments Align Subsys Annunciation Annotation Will display a series of pop up message boxes indicating an alignment is in progress If a signal is present which interfere with the alignment a message Align RF 50 MHz signal detected will be displayed SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies Status questionable calibration Bits 3 11 or 12 will be set if Align RF fails Remote Command CALibration RF CALibration RF Remote Command Notes The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful Example CAL RF 4 8 4 4 2 Align IF 258 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System Initiates an alignment on the IF assembly Key Path System Alignments Align Subsys Annunciation Annotation Will display a series of pop up message boxes indicating alignment progress SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies Status questionable calibration Bit 4 will be set if Align RF fails Remote Command CALibration IF CALibration IF Remote Command Notes The query performs the alignment and returns a
286. ak Threshold 90 dBm Peak Excursion 6 dB and Abs Stop Limit Mode Auto is set to 50 dBm The table below defines the other parameter s settings for the measurement The values for ranges 1 through 5 are based on the W CDMA 3GPP BTS Spurious Emission measurement el i U E pb E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Table 5 6 Range Table Default Settings Range Start Freq GHz Stop Freq GHz Res BW kHz 1 1 920 1 980 1200 2 1 894 1 920 510 3 2 100 2 102 100 4 2 175 2 180 100 5 0 800 1 000 4000 6 20 1 5 2 5 Auto Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command Chapter 5 487 o c e 5 o c E nt c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 5 27 9 Range Selects a range and updates the values on the other Range Table keys so that they reflect the settings for the selected range If Range is set to On it is used as part of the measurement when set to Off it is excluded Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Range Off On Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted For example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send
287. al exceeds the mask or not o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 302 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode If the current span setting is narrower than the mask width the mask will not be displayed and the message 10191 displayed Increase the span to at least the mask width to display the mask When the mask is not displayed the pass fail functionality will not be executed therefore no pass fail flag will be displayed To ensure accuracy this measurement requires a specific minimum Sweep Point to Span ratio This is calculated using Sweep Points Span Closest Mask Breakpoint 2 then rounded off For DVB T measurements using 24 MHz Span the number of Sweep Points is 2001 If the Sweep Point to Span ratio is changed to a value less than the value obtained using the above algorithm the message 10192 is then displayed although the measurement is still made using the new sweep point to span ratio Key Path MEASURE Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command Results Returned CONFigure CHPower Not Applicable INITiate H Dower FETCh CHPower Returns two values that correspond to the Channel MEASure CHPower Power and Power Spectral Density READ CHPower FETCh CHPower CHPower Returns a single value that corresponds to the Channel MEASure CHPower CHPower Power READ CHPower CHPower
288. all values up to 6 Subsequent values remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST STATe OFF ON 0 1 The query for this parameter will always return 20 values SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST STATe Example SPUR STAT OFF ON ON OFF ON ON lists values 1 through 6 5 27 3 2 Start Freq Used to set the start frequency of the analyzer Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment ly dub 24 By Bye VWwby 105 404 Range Frequency range of your analyzer Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STARt lt integer gt The query for this parameter will always return 20 values 488 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STARt el i al E m pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 489 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 5 27 3 3 Stop Freq Stop Freq is
289. alternative choices The EXTernal INTernal LINE effect of the command is l The choices are external different depending on l i hich parameter is selected internal and line pe pa Ex TRIG SOURCE INT is one possible command choice A vertical stroke between Command keywords indicates SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth identical effects exist for OFFSet are E the Two identical commands are Geste far Greg keyword Ex1 SENSE BWIDTH OFFSET i 2 SENSE BAND OFFSET Only one of these keywords P is used at a time keywords in square Command brackets are optional SENSe BANDwidth RESolu when composing the tion AUTO Command Tuc implied The following commands are keywords will be executed 8 all valid and have identical even if they are omitted effects Ex1 bandwidth auto Ex2 band resolution auto Ex3 sense bandwidth auto lt gt Angle brackets around a Command word or words indicates they are not to be used literally in the command They represent the needed item SENS FREQ lt freq gt In this command example the word lt freq gt should be replaced by an actual frequency Ex SENS FREQ 9 7MHz Parameters in braces can optionally be used in the command either not at all once or several times Command MEASure BW lt freq gt level A valid command is meas BW 6 MHz 3dB 60dB Chapter 6 505 E fe S 9 3 3 5 Co T E 5 2 D 3 f 3 S D
290. alues 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK THReshold integer 496 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions The query for this parameter will always return 20 values SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK THReshold 5 27 4 Meas Type Specifies the measurement type Examine or Full This parameter is coupled to the average mode If you select Examine the measurement sets Avg Mode to Exp If you select Full the measurement sets Avg Mode to Rep The behavior of each measurement type is described below Key Path State Saved All active ranges are measured Upon completion the measurement is set to the idle state The message No Spurs is displayed All active ranges are measured and the found spurs are reported Upon completion the measurement is set to the idle state The trace containing the worst spur is restored Spur is enabled no longer greyed out A marker is added set to the frequency of the worst spur All active ranges are measured Upon completion the analyzer remains set to the last range checked with an active trace The message No Spurs is displayed All active ranges are measured and the found spurs are reported Upon completion the analyzer is set to the range containing the worst spur found and continually sweeps this range
291. ame 143 154 155 renaming 153 renaming now 153 save 136 save now 137 screen 133 sort 133 146 149 152 154 state 131 trace 133 type 139 146 152 154 Lal file copying moving errors 540 File front panel key 127 file source 142 all traces 142 trace 1 142 trace 2 142 trace3 142 file type 127 149 Corrections 129 Limits 129 Index 4 Measurement Results 129 Screen 129 State 127 Trace 127 files deleting 157 limit lines 144 Filter Alpha key 364 402 444 476 finding peaks 209 210 211 212 213 flatness corrections on off 257 format Bitmap 141 CSV 141 Metafile 141 Reverse Bitmap 141 Reverse Metafile 141 Trace State 141 Format key 139 format data 160 Free Run key 287 Freq Interp key 118 Freq Offset key 167 Freq Ref key 268 frequency channel menu map 605 FREQUENCY Channel front panel key 163 frequency condition register 576 577 578 frequency corrections on off 257 frequency count 194 Frequency key 64 66 67 115 187 frequency offset ACP 354 frequency parameter variables 507 frequency reference 268 Front Panel Test key 274 front panel features see Getting Started guide 44 front panel key AMPLITUDE Y Scale 49 AUTO COUPLE 71 Display 103 385 File 127 FREQUENCY Channel 163 Input Output 171 425 426 Marker 177 391 483 Marker gt 197 Marker Fctn 191 Meas Setup 201 351 371 381 399 409 423 429 451 457 485 Measure Co
292. an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON or an INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single trigger cycle and then return to the idle state The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer 1 is returned when there is continuous triggering 0 is returned when there is only a single trigger Use the TRIGger L SEQuence SOURce command to select the trigger Source Example INIT CONT OFF 4 7 8 Auto Sweep Time Switches the analyzer between normal and accuracy sweep states Provides you the ability to select the rules for the control of sweep time when Sweep Time is set to Auto Setting Auto Sweep Time to Accy will result in slower sweep times usually about three times as long but better amplitude accuracy for CW signals The instrument specifications only apply when Sweep Time is set to Auto and Auto Sweep Time is set to Accy Additional amplitude errors occur when Auto Sweep Time is set to Norm are usually well under 0 1 dB though they are not guaranteed Because of the faster sweep times and still low errors Norm is the preferred setting of Auto Sweep Time Also when the Auto AII function is performed Auto Sweep Time is set to Norm Key Path Sweep Key Notes Greyed out in Zero Span and FFT but still shows user selected states Norm or Accy Goes to Norm on Auto All Dependencies Couplings Key is greyed out in Zero Span and FFT b
293. an cow E o RES t Rn A e 395 CALCulate PS Taba MAR Ker 1 2 S d Y cas etd cur eek ENK ERR Re are o eo 397 CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFbkIONTIOI nennnnananaaaa aa 392 CALCulate PSTatisticc MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATel lees 392 CALCulate PSTatisti STORe REFerence n e R 0 e e R RRR R tent en 385 CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 sese 02 eee 483 CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe 2 0 RRR R RR RRR ee eee 483 CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STARt lt integer gt 493 CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STARt 493 CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP lt integer gt lt inte o Sie A EE E ee a re Cr ey re ee et EE 495 CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP AUTO ORF ONT OF POIS OD euet eR ine wee e ee HERE Er TER HE EE p E Hd El Rd 495 CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP 495 CAL bran DC he usd sedet SFOS RHEE ENERE E EFE ENE ERNE CEOS SES SHEE ud d A E 259 CALD ADE eee ee ee wb ee ee eee ee ee eee ee ree er 259 CAL bree TO ORF ON LALEBE A AR RR R EK RRR X Sce ORES eR be RR RAE A 257 Tome K we d ge VOCE EE 257 E ER ENK KT 524229212 ama wA ERR RR high hieus bs sEk qrAdyvaAidqgass 261 CALibration DISPlay LEVel OFF T LOW HIGH 0 0 cece RII 262 CALibration DISPlay LEVel EEN eee e RR RUE ORA Y
294. an to specify the frequency span in which intermodulation products are measured Key Path Meas Setup Key Note If you modify the value of Span in the base instrument Span menu the value in the Meas Setup menu will be updated to reflect the new value and the measurement will restart if it is running Factory Preset 15 MHz or as defined by the radio standard selected Range Non Zero Span of Analyzer History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe TOIN FREQuency SPAN lt number gt SENSe TOIN FREQuency SPAN Chapter 5 425 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Intermod TOI Example TOIN FREQ SPAN 20 MHz TOIN FREO SPAN 5 18 4 Max Mixer Lvl Enables you to set the relationship between the highest signal that can be displayed the reference level and the input attenuation The relationship applies whenever the Attenuation is set to Auto The relationship is that the attenuation is given by reference level minus the max mixer level For example as the reference level changes the input attuanator changes to ensure that a signal at the reference level does not exceed the Max Mixer Lvl setting When the TOI measurement is on this key controls the maximum mixer level inde
295. and for more information If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings you can set up the measurement with the CONFigure command Use the commands in the SENSe lt measurement gt and CALCulate measurement subsystems to change the settings Then you can use the READ command to initiate the measurement and query the results See Figure 1 If you need to repeatedly make a given measurement with settings other than the factory defaults you can use the commands in the SENSe lt measurement gt and CALCulate lt measurement gt subsystems to set up the measurement Then use the READ command to initiate the measurement and query results Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then return to a previous one Use READ lt measurement gt if you want to use those persistent settings If you want to go back to the default settings use MEASure lt measurement gt Configure Commands CONFigure lt measurement gt This command stops the current measurement if any and sets up the instrument for the specified measurement using the factory default instrument settings It sets the instrument to single measurement mode but should not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INIT CONTinuous is ON After you change any measurement settings the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the settings back to their defaults The CONFigure
296. annel Key Path Meas Setup Ref Channel Factory Preset 3 84 MHz Range 10 to 100 of the setting of Chan Span Remote Command SENSe SEMask BANDwidth n BWIDth n INTegration lt number gt SENSe SEMask BANDwidth n BWIDth n INTegration Example SEM BAND n INT 4 MHz SEM BWID n INT 4 MHz SEM BAND n INT SEM BWID n INT 22 3 2 Chan Span Specifies the span used in measuring the power in the main channel Key Path Meas Setup Ref Channel Factory Preset 5 MHz Knob Increment 1 of the set span Range 1 kHz to 10 MHz Remote Command SENSe SEMask FREQuency SPAN lt number gt SENSe SEMask FREQuency SPAN el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Example SEM FREQ SPAN 4 MHz SEM FREQ SPAN 5 22 3 3 Sweep Time Specifies the sweep time used in measuring the power in the main channel Key Path Meas Setup Ref Channel Factory Preset Auto On Range 1 ms through 2 ks Chapter 5 459 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Remote Command SENSe SEMask SWEeptime number SENSe SEMask SWEept ime SENSe SEMask SWEeptime AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask SWEept ime AUTO Example SEM SWE 4 s SEM SWE SEM SWE AUTO 1 SEM SWE AUTO 5
297. are several issues to be understood about choosing the proper SCPI terminator and separator when this is the case There is no current SCPI standard for RS 232 Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface independent END is only defined for IEEE 488 operation At the time of this writing the RS 232 terminator issue was in the process of being addressed in IEEE standard 1174 A semicolon is not a SCPI terminator it is a separator The purpose of the separator is to queue multiple commands or queries in order to obtain multiple actions and or responses Make sure that you do not attempt to use the semicolon as a terminator when using RS 232 control All binary trace and response data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt as defined in Section 8 5 of IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 The following are some examples of good and bad commands The examples are created from a theoretical instrument with the simple set of commands indicated below SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation 40dB TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe POSitive Chapter 6 509 E fe Kei o 3 3 E io Tl E E Q E 3 bi E cE o o c E c 9 G E ra E E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics SENSe FREQuency STARt POWer RF MIXer
298. arkers in trace points CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer lt param gt Sets the mid point of the markers to a specific frequency with a range that matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer Returns the midpoint frequency CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN lt param gt Sets the spacing between the markers to a specified frequency with a range that matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN Returns the spacing of the markers in frequency Example CALC MARK3 MODE SPAN selects marker 3 and sets it to Span Pair CALC MARK4 X POS SPAN 200 sets the spacing between the markers to 200 trace points for marker pair 4 CALC MARK2 X POS CENT 300 sets the midpoint between the markers to the 300th trace point from the left of the display For a 601 point trace this will be the middle of the display 3 1 6 Off Turns off the selected marker In addition Off turns off functions related to the selected marker such as Signal Track Band Intvl Power and Marker Noise and removes marker annotation from the display Key Path Marker Remote Command See Select Marker on page 180 for the command to select the control mode Example CALC MARK3 STAT OFF selects marker 3 and sets it to Off 3 1 7 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker or marker pair to be placed on You can pick C
299. asurement related parameter e g center frequency is changed Restart is pressed Single Sweep is pressed In single sweep the specified number of averages is taken then the sweep stops In continuous sweep the specified number of averages is taken then the averaging continues 1 with each new sweep averaged in with a weight of eg and the old average Average Number 1 Average Number reduced by multiplying it by To turn off averaging press Average Off Key Path BW Avg Saved State Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Off 100 averages Chapter 2 87 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Range Count 1 to 8192 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 88 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Remote Commands SENSe AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe AVERage STATe 7 SENSe AVERage COUNt lt integer gt SENSe AVERage COUNt SENSe AVERage CLEar Remote Command Notes For valid average data you must re start the trace at the beginning of a sweep To do this remotely first abort ABORT the sweep and then initiate a single sweep INIT CONT OFF Example AVER ON AVER COUN 100 AVER CLE clears the current average and restarts the averaging process 2 2 5 Avg VBW Type Displays the functions that enable you to automatically or manually choose one o
300. ata on the floppy disk NOTE Many errors can be generated by a bad Save operation For this reason if an Unable to Save file message is seen you should check the error queue System Show Errors for the source of the error NOTE You are always safe pressing Save Now without entering a file name because the auto generated file name never conflicts with an existing file If the Path field above the directory box is empty when pressing Save Now the status line will display the error message Unable to save file invalid path In this case please select a drive Key Path File Save Chapter 2 137 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI r 4 LI lt o e 2 G E ra m c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L File Remote Command MMEMory STORe SCReen lt file name lt MMEMory STORe STATe 1 file name MMEMory STORe TRACe lt label gt lt file name This command is not available when you are outside the Spectrum Analysis mode and working in optional measurement modes MMEMory STORe LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name gt MMEMory STORe CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER file name gt MMEMory STORe RESults file name gt SAV lt register gt Remote Command Notes For the MMEM STOR TRAC label file name command Example Trace labels are TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 ALL The file name must have a file
301. ation 5 9 3 3 Max Hold See Max Hold on page 285 for more information 5 9 3 4 Min Hold See Min Hold on page 285 for more information 5 9 3 5 View See View on page 286 for more information 5 9 3 6 Blank See Blank on page 286 for more information el i al E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 379 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Burst Power 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 380 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 10 Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF When Power Stat CCDF has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu for the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF Power Complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF curves characterize the higher level power of the signal It provides the distribution of peak to average power ratios versus probability A CCDF curve is defined by how much time the waveform spends at or above the specified power level The percent of time the signal spends at or above this level defines the probability for that particular power level Key Path Front panel key History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remot
302. ation Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Operation Positive Transition SSTATus OPERation PTRansition lt integer gt STATus OPERation PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 572 Chapter8 NOTE NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Preset the Status Byte STATus PRESet Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state It presets all the Transition Filters Enable Registers and the Error Event Queue Enable It has no effect on Event Registers Error Event QUEue IEEE 488 2 ESE and SRE Registers as described in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Register Questionable Condition STATus QUEStionable CONDition This
303. aultTerminator seconds Remote Command SYSTem TIME ADJust seconds Example SYST TIME ADJ 3600 will advance the time one hour SYST TIME ADJ 86400 will back the date up one day without changing the time of day minutes or seconds 4 8 8 5 Set Date Allows you to set the date of the real time clock Enter the date in the YYYYMMDD format Key Path System Time Date State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State nor 254 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System restored by System Restore Sys Defaults SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default Not affected by Restore Sys Defaults Terminators Unitless Range Year YYYY 1970 to 2029 Month MM 01 to 12 Day 01 to 30 or 31 depending on the month Remote Command SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt SYSTem DATE Example SYST DATE 2000 12 24 Sets the date to December 24 2000 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N 4 8 4 Alignments Displays functions that control the automatic alignment of the instrument and load default values for the alignment system NOTE Most CALibration commands execute in the background permitting other SCPI commands to be processed concurrently If a measurement command is sent right after a CALibration command there can be interaction between background alignments and the measurement The WAI command should be issued after any
304. ause the state data is also saved the analyzer settings including all the annotation on the screen is restored as well To preserve the trace data the traces contained in the saved files Chapter 2 127 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L File are placed in View mode see Trace View page 283 so that they are not immediately overwritten by new trace data This means that you can save traces while making a measurement and later load them back into the analyzer where you can print them or transfer them to a computer in CSV format for analysis If you wish to compare two saved traces place traces in view mode before saving them This prevents the trace from being rewritten based on a state change from subsequent loads 128 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File CSV A file that contains trace data in comma separated values format CSV standard PC spreadsheet format to be read into a spreadsheet for analysis Most spreadsheet programs support CSV format They cannot be loaded back into the analyzer Limits A file that contains a copy of the analyzer limit sets at the time the file is saved Limits provide data sets to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications Limit sets can hold up to 200 points and can only be saved individually Refer to the File Save Source key descri
305. ay from 0 Hz are ignored For example if Span is 1 MHz peaks will not be found between 10 kHz and 10 kHz If no valid peak is found an error No Peak Found is displayed To clear this message press ESC before attempting another search The peak search parameters are Peak Threshold and Peak Excursion All searches except Peak Search Next Peak Next Left Next Right Peak Table SCPI PEAKS command obey the Search Parameters which means that only peaks which rise above the Peak Threshold by at least the Peak Excursion are found Peak Search obeys then when Peak Search is in PARAM mode When the Peak Search key is in MAX mode the search parameters are ignored for a Peak Search NOTE You can go into the Peak Search menu without actually performing a Peak Search by using the front panel Return key assuming you have previously accessed the Peak Search menu Press Return to navigate through the previously accessed menus until you return to the Peak Search menu Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum Remote Command Notes The CALC MARK PEAK SEARC MODE MAX PAR command specifies how a peak is identified for use with the marker commands See Peak Search on page 218 Example CALC MARK2 MAX performs a peak search using marker 2 CALC MARK2 Y queries the marker amplitude Y axis value for marker 2 For more information on this command see Marker on page 177 CALC MARK2 X queries the marker frequen
306. be accomplished in most systems by escaping out of telnet to the telnet gt prompt and then typing mode char If this does not work consult your telnet program s documentation for how to change to character by character mode 528 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument The Standard UNIX TELNET Command Synopsis telnet host port Description The telnet command is used to communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol When telnet is invoked with host or port arguments a connection is opened to host and input is sent from the user to host Options and Parameters telnet operates in line by line mode or in character at a time mode In line by line mode typed text is first echoed on the screen When the line is completed by pressing the Enter key the text line is then sent to host In character at a time mode text is echoed to the screen and sent to host as it is typed In some cases if your telnet connection is in line by line mode there is no local echo This means you will not be able to see the characters you are typing on your computer s display until after you press the Enter key To remedy this you need to change your telnet connection to character by character mode This can be accomplished in most systems by escaping out of telnet to the telnet prompt and then typing mode char Consult your telnet program s documentation for how to change to character by
307. begin a sweep only with the proper trigger condition In FFT measurements the trigger controls when the data is acquired for FFT conversion see Making Gated FFT Measurements With Your PSA on page 74 Key Path Front panel key State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Free Run Remote Command TRT Gaer SEQuence SOURce IMMediate VIDeo LINE EXTernal 1 EXTernal2 RFBurst TRIGger L SEQuence SOURce 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N IMM Free Run triggering VID Video triggers on the video signal level LINE Line triggers on the power line signal Ext1 External Front enables you to trigger on an externally connected trigger source Ext2 External Rear enables you to trigger on an externally connected trigger source Remote Command Notes Other trigger related commands are found in the INITiate and ABORt subsystems Example TRIG SOUR VID 4 10 1 Free Run Sets the trigger to start a new sweep measurement as soon as the last one has ended continuous sweep mode or immediately single sweep mode Key Path Trig Dependencies Couplings Trigger Slope and Delay adjustments are not available with Free Run triggering Remote Command See Trig on page 287 Example TRIG SOUR IMM Chapter 4 287 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z Trig 4 10 2 Video Activates the trigger condi
308. ber between 0 and 100 with no units Is a series of alpha numeric characters Specifies a series of bits rather than a numeric value The bit series is the binary representation of a numeric value There are no units Bit patterns are most often specified as hexadecimal numbers though octal binary or decimal numbers may also be used In the SCPI language these numbers are specified as s Hexadecimal Hdddd or hdddd where d represents a hexadecimal digit 0 to 9 and a to P So h14 can be used instead of the decimal number 20 s Octal Odddddd or odddddd where d represents an octal digit 0 to 7 So 024 can be used instead of the decimal number 20 507 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics e Binary Bdddddddddddddddd or bdddddddddddddddd where d represents a 1 or 0 So b10100 can be used instead of the decimal number 20 Block Program Data Some parameters consist of a block of data Block data There are a few standard types of block data Arbitrary blocks of program data can also be used lt trace gt Is an array of rational numbers corresponding to displayed trace data See FORMat DATA for information about available data formats A SCPI command often refers to a block of current trace data with a variable name such as Trace1 TRACE2 or trace
309. by the following command Calculate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Frequencies are always in Hz Time is always in seconds No unit is allowed in this parameter Range 30 Gs to 30 Gs for time limits 3 kHz to 350 GHz for frequency limits lt ampl gt amplitude values are always in units of dBm Up to two amplitude values can be provided for each x axis value by repeating lt x axis gt in the data list No unit is allowed in this parameter Range 140 dBm to 100 dBm connected connected values are either 0 or 1 A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point The connected value is ignored for the first point CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA MERGe x axis lt ampl gt lt connected gt lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt Adds the points with the specified values to the current limit line allowing you to merge limit line data Up to two amplitude values are allowed for each x value If more than 200 points are entered to be merged the first 200 points are merged into the existing limit then an error too many DATA entries is reported Remote Command Notes Up to 200 points total may be defined for each limit Example CALC LLIN1 DATA 1000000000 20 0 200000000 30 1 2 4 5 1 Limit 1 or Limit 2 Selects Limit 1 or Limit 2 for modification Key Path Display Li
310. byte clearing 563 register system 557 status byte IEEE command 567 status subsystem 571 Stop Freq key 165 490 stop frequency 490 Store Ref Trace key 385 string parameter variables 507 Subnet Mask key 265 sweep menu map 616 Sweep Cont Single key 242 SWEEP front panel key 241 sweep points 244 sweep states switching 243 sweep time 418 419 491 Sweep Time key 241 418 419 459 491 sweep time automatic 243 synchronization 565 568 system menu map 617 System front panel key 247 system message 280 281 T table range 413 486 setting range 412 414 488 talker 554 telnet over LAN 266 telnet using 527 temperature condition register 585 586 terms RST 45 Index 10 book 45 definition 45 dependencies couplings 45 example 45 factory preset 45 maximum value 45 maximum valuet 45 remote command 45 state saved 45 test limits 111 margin 112 Test key 111 test IEEE command 568 testing spurs 499 TETRA key 338 Third Order Intercept Meas Setup menu 642 throughput improving 511 time display on off 253 displaying 252 setting 252 254 time corrections 262 Time key 187 limits frequency 115 time parameter variables 507 time selective spectrum analysis 80 time since power on 281 Time Date key 252 253 timeout errors 539 timing control 565 568 Title key 122 Total Pwr Ref key 362 442 461 Total Pwr Refl key 458 Trace file type 127 trace
311. cece ee eee 635 CCDF Power Stat Measurement Span X Scale Rex 636 CCDF Power Stat Measurement Marker Ree 637 Channel Power Measurement Meas Setup Re 638 Channel Power Measurement Trace View Kev nner 639 Harmonic Distortion Measurement Meas Setup key 640 Harmonic Distortion Measurement Trace View ke 641 Intermed TOD Meas Setup Key c s cscs ek oes PORE EY hd SEEN ETERS ER RO OS 642 Multi Carrier Power Measurement Meas Setup Re 643 Multi Carrier Power Measurement Trace View Key 644 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Meas Setup Re 645 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Meas Setup Kev nnnnnnnaaa annaua 646 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Trace View Reu eee nnno 647 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Display Re 648 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Span X Scale Key 649 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Marker Re 650 Spurious Emissions Measurement Meas Setup be 651 12 List of Commands PERI Lepido ddp dp REESE ee ER ae pd aci pde rd qp d dd d hate but dos bd Pide 563 Le ur add had bp e ROSAS Id bad pq pd S Raia S pads d dpa pud doris 248 LS gen EE EE EE EE EE Ee SO HUNE IX EE Ae RET PE EE 563 SERE Sel uos on qb UC RR URP REND ERES Ace ERU V FPE PEU RSE PRES SS 563 e ANE Feb pud apo debuts Fl spia aar Ani x o dod SX dob d OE MME he ee EE 563 e EE 564 KI KEE 564 us PLUMIS 565 51 fateh dpa ddd PEA RD tid eRe HADES EERO RE HERE ROD ERT REE ROEHL CARRS DEA 565 S eee ee ee d EE da pb
312. ch range enabled after the fundamental the center frequency will be set to the frequency of each range If the current span is set to zero the amplitude is calculated by averaging the power in the trace and is displayed in the results table in the results window If the range has a non zero span the amplitude is calculated by making a band power measurement over the span and is displayed in the results table in the results window After the specified number of harmonics have been measured and their amplitudes displayed the total harmonic distortion is computed and displayed in the left hand portion of the window view is set to Harmonics amp THD If the measurement is in single mode the display will remain at the last harmonic setting and the analyzer sweep will be stopped If Chapter 5 315 O e i WA E Ki ps El D 7 E bi 3 bi E T E El 7 GA o e 7 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal Q E E el ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode the measurement is in continuous mode the measurement will continually measure the amplitude of the fundamental and harmonics For averaged measurements you may specify the number of sweeps over which the amplitude of each harmonic is measured This means that if the Avg Number is set to 10 ten sweeps will be taken and averaged for each harmonic to be measured The total ha
313. character mode Chapter 6 529 E D 3 ES E 3 T E E Q D 3 7 E cE 7 un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Using Socket LAN to Send Commands Your instrument implements a sockets Applications Programming Interface API compatible with Berkeley sockets Winsock and other standard sockets APIs You can write programs using sockets to control your instrument by sending SCPI commands to a socket connection you create in your program Refer to Using a Java Applet Over Socket LAN in this chapter for example programs using sockets to control the instrument Setting Up Your Instrument for Socket Programming Before you can use socket programming you must identify your instrument s socket port number The default is 5025 1 Press System Config I O SCPI LAN Socket Port 2 Notice that the port number you will use for your socket connection to the instrument is 5025 You may need to enable the termination character attribute when using the VISA libraries for socket communication If the termchar attribute is disabled then no termination character is sent with the data and the bus will time out waiting for it Set vi_attr_termchar_en LAN device clear capability has not been implemented in firmware revision A 01 xx Troubleshooting help You can verify t
314. corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable lt number gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Chapter 8 581 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 NOTE NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UN Calibrated CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register The data in this register is continuously up
315. ction CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E 1 a E a gt LI P Chapter 2 63 A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Lud c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Remote Command Notes SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe must be set to on for this command to function CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSET1 is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSETS is Other CSETA is User e freq is the frequency in Hz where the correction should be applied no unit is allowed in this parameter rel ampl is the amount of relative amplitude correction in dB needed no unit is allowed in this parameter Example CORR CSET2 DATA 900E6 0 3 1 0E9 0 35 1 3E9 0 2 2 0 10 2 2 1 Point Allows you to create or edit an amplitude correction factor data point Up to 200 points may be defined for each set Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad then press Enter or use the knob or step keys to move to an existing point After selecting a point Frequency becomes active Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Cable Other or User Edit State Saved Not part of instrument state saved in a corrections file Remote Command See Edit on page 62 2 0 10 2 2 2 Frequency Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency
316. ctions such as frequency counting and noise markers Factory Preset Off Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion BPOWer NOISe OFF CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion Example CALC MARK FUNC NOIS 3 2 1 Select Marker See Select Marker on page 180 Remote Command Example CALC MARK2 STAT ON selects marker 2 3 2 2 Marker Noise Activates a noise marker for the selected marker If the selected marker is off it is turned on and located at the center of the display Reads out the average noise level normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth around the active marker The noise marker averages 5 of the trace data values centered on the location of the marker The data displayed if the marker is in Normal mode is the noise density around the marker The value readout is followed by 1 Hz to remind you that display is normalized to a one Hz bandwidth To measure carrier to noise ratio be sure that the Marker Fctn is no Marker Noise Select a Marker Normal type marker Place the marker on the signal peak then select Delta marker Now place the active A marker on the noise and select Marker Noise to change the marker type In this case the reference marker has units of amplitude and the data displayed is the ratio of the noise density at the delta marker to the reference marker power The value readout is dB Hz if the Y axis units are logarithmic and if the Y axis units are linear It is understood i
317. cy or time X axis value for marker 2 For more information on this command see Marker on page 177 4 1 1 Next Peak Places the marker on the next highest peak with an amplitude less than the current peak The peak must meet the defined peak excursion and threshold values Peaks that are less than 1 of the current span away from 0 Hz are ignored If no valid peak is found an error No Peak Found is displayed Press ESC to clear this message before attempting another search Also see the Peak Excursn and Pk Threshold key descriptions Key Path Peak Search State Saved Not part of saved state Chapter 4 209 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a 2 E Q D O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum NEXT Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT selects marker 2 and moves it to the next highest peak 4 1 2 Next Pk Right Moves the marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker The peak must meet the defined peak excursion and threshold limits Peaks that are less than 1 of the current span away from 0 Hz are ignored If no valid peak is found an error No Peak Found is displayed Press ESC to clear this message before attempting another search Also see the Peak Excursn and Pk Threshold key descriptions Key Path Peak Search State Saved Not part of saved state
318. d an automatic zoom is performed and the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains at the center of the display If the span is zero signal track cannot be activated NOTE This function is intended to track signals with a frequency that is changing drifting and an amplitude that is not changing It keeps tracking if in continuous sweep mode If in single sweep mode the analyzer only does one center frequency adjustment as necessary Signal tracking can also be used with the A delta pair marker function This could be used to measure the amplitude at a frequency offset relative to the fundamental signal amplitude even if the fundamental is drifting In this situation the tracking function will be done on the delta marker not on the reference marker So you would want to put the ref marker on the frequency offset and put the A marker on the fundamental signal peak Then turn on signal tracking The frequency difference between the two markers will stay fixed The A marker on the fundamental will track to the center of the display The marker readout value will show the amplitude delta between the two markers Key Path FREQUENCY Annunciation Annotation ST appears near the lower left corner of the display An may appear in the upper right corner of the display while the analyzer whenever the analyzer finds that it must retune in order to center the signal on the 168 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY
319. d or 1 failed determined by testing the absolute power in each offset against the specified offset s absolute power limits 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E n 8 Returns 12 scalar values of the pass fail 0 2 passed or 1 failed results determined by testing the relative power in each offset against the specified offset s relative power limits 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E n 9 Returns 12 scalar values of frequency in Hz that have peak power in each offset 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 n 10 Returns 12 scalar values in dBm of the absolute peak power of the segment frequencies 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequenc
320. d device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator s seconds Range 1 ms to 2 ks Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime time lt time gt up to five Chapter 5 465 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime AUTO Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS Example SEM OFFS LIST SWE AUTO 4 ms SEM OFFS LIST SWE AUTO SEM OFFS LIST SWE 4 ms SEM OFFS LIST SWE 5 22 4 5 Res BW Specifies the resolution bandwidth used in measuring the offset pair When set to Auto the Res BW from the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 are used When set to Man the range of settings is the range of the available Res BW of the analyzer except the maximum is further limited to not exceed Stop Freq Start Freq Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator Hz Remote Command
321. d stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers The marker is then set to normal at the center frequency Only available in Delta Span Pair and Delta Pair modes this function is not available if the marker is off or in Normal mode or when the span is Zero Span Key Path Marker gt Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET DELTa SPAN Remote Command Notes Select the delta marker mode with CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE DELTa Example CALC MARK2 DELT SPAN sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers of marker 2 3 3 60 MkrA gt CF Sets the delta marker to the center frequency Only available in Delta Span Pair and Delta Pair modes this function is not available if the marker is off or in Normal mode or when the span is Zero Span Key Path Marker gt History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET DELTa CENTer Remote Command Notes Select the delta marker mode with CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE DELTa Example CALC MARK2 DELT CENT sets the center frequency to the value of the delta marker center frequency of marker 2 Chapter 3 199 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O o Instrument Functions M O Marker gt R E 2 E d z 3 3 7 Mkr RefLvl S Sets the reference level to the amplitude value of the active marker moving the marked E point to the referenc
322. d triggers the instrument when trigger conditions are met The trigger system is initiated it completes one full trigger cycle and returns to the waiting state Depending on the measurement selected and the number of averages there may be 330 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Control multiple data acquisitions with multiple trigger events for one full trigger cycle The instrument must have external triggering selected or the command will be ignored Use the TRIGer SEQuence SOURce EXT command to select the external trigger History Added in revision A 02 00 Remote Command INITiate IMMediate Remote Command Notes See also the TRG command and the TRIGger subsystem Use the SENSe meas TRIGger SOURce command to select the desired trigger The instrument must be in the single measurement mode If INITiate CONTinuous is ON then the command is ignored Use FETCh to transfer a measurement result from memory to the output buffer Refer to individual commands in the MEASure subsystem for more information Example INIT IMM 5 2 5 Abort the Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only Stops any sweep or measurement in progress and resets the sweep or trigger system A measurement refers to any of the measurements found in the MEASURE menu If the trigger conditions are met another sweep is initiated immediately If INITiate CONTinuous is off single measure then INITiate IMMediate will s
323. d with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower CARRier POWer SENSe ACPower CARRier AUTO STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower CARRier AUTO STATe Example ACP CARR AUTO 0 ACP CARR AUTO 5 6 9 PSD Ref Enables you to set the power spectral density in the carrier main channel that will be used to compute the relative power spectral density values for the offsets When the PSD Ref state is set to Auto this will be set to the measured carrier power spectral density Factory Preset 0 dBm Terminators dBm Default Terminator dBm Step Key Increment 1 1o 2a Range 999 dBm to 999 dBm History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower CARRier CPSD lt dBm gt SENSe ACPower CARRier CPSD Remote Command Notes This function is only available when measurement type is set to PSD Ref use the command SENSe ACPower TYPE PSDRef to select the measurement type 362 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP Example ACP CARR CPSD 5 5 6 10 Limit Test Pressing Limit Test turns the testing of the limit line on or off When Limit Test is set to On each offset is compared to its upper and lower offset limit In those cases where the power exceeds the limit a red F is placed next to the dBc result to indicate a failure If there are any failures the pass fail indicator area show FAIL in red if ther
324. d with firmware revision A 03 00 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Remote Command SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration Hz Hz Hz SENSe MCPower OFFSet LIST BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration Hz Hz Hz Example MCP OFFS LIST BWIDth 5MHz 3MHz 5MHz MCP OFFS LIST BWID 5 19 4 4 Upper Offset Limit Sets the limit for the selected offset refer to Offset above to the right of the carriers Chapter 5 439 o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB Default Terminator dB Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 5 Range 200 dB to 200 dB History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA lt dB gt lt dB gt lt dB gt CALCulate MCPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA Example CALC MCP OFFS LIST LIM POS DATA 50dB 55dB 60dB CALC MCP OFFS LIST LTM POS DATA 5 19 4 5 Lower Offset Limit Sets the limit for the selected offset refer to Offset above to the left of the carriers Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 dB
325. dance between sweeps which could cause input device instability When Auto Align All but RF is selected AB appears along the left edge of the display On the instrument behaves like the Alert but will automatically perform a full alignment when it is needed In addition every 15 minutes passing or 1 5 degrees temperature change will cause just the RF system gain to be aligned to achieve the best absolute amplitude accuracy For either alignment the instrument will stop any measurement currently in process perform the full alignment then restart the measurement from the beginning similar to pressing Restart If any alignment FAILs or is ABORTed by the user e g ESCape key the instrument will wait 5 minutes before retrying the necessary alignment This helps to avoid infinite recursive loops of alignment behavior in the event of broken hardware Also see Align All Now on page 257 256 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System There are 2 very quick alignments invisible to the user that are done every few minutes or when certain settings are changed These still occur even if AutoAlign is set to Off These alignments are the Current SysGain and Current IF Flatness methods which can also be forced to occur by user under the Align Subsys menu Key Path System Alignments State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Not affected by Preset Factory Default On
326. dated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register which also sets the Data Uncalibrated Summary bit bit 3 in the Questionable Integrity Register The variable lt number gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query SSTATus QUEStionable INTegrity UN Calibrated EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key 582 Chapter 8 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable IN Tegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition number STATus QUEStionable IN Tegrity UNCalibrated
327. de is selected the reference marker is placed at the current marker position If the marker is OFF both the active marker and the reference marker are placed at the center of the display The amplitude and frequency or time of the first marker is fixed The marker number is indicated above the delta marker and the same number is indicated with an R for example 1R above the reference marker You can adjust the trace point of the active delta marker Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the display indicates the frequency or time difference and amplitude difference of the two markers If marker noise is set to On while using Delta and the noise marker is placed on the noise floor the marker readout displays signal to noise Selecting Delta while already in Delta mode causes the reference marker to be reset to the current active A marker position enabling you to make delta measurements from differing reference points without having to turn off the markers and begin again Pressing Marker Normal moves the Reference Marker to the Delta Marker position and turns off Delta Marker The amplitude of the reference marker is fixed In non zero spans the frequency of the reference marker is fixed If the center frequency of the analyzer is changed such that the reference marker is off the screen an arrow will appear with the marker number at the left or the right side of the display This indicates where the trace point
328. ded e bn ee LE eee a ee ree ee ey Pra e dod d debe c ke are 566 e sk MUT 566 ei E EE oc ni eee dnd dado SAG LEE cb ded GOO ROE ed REOR Ua d ORO ER HERS 566 ke ee ee ee eee EE EVER ee ee ee rr a eS Pd PR ee ee ee ee ee 566 TAN a T oy ET 567 SOLE EE ee Ub A BOE RO ARTE de GR A AR UE dede te EEN 567 KEEN 567 KREE EE 567 ik EE 568 uii ERD ORDERS 257 shee eee ee ee ee ER ee ee E re ee unb eee a ee E ub eoe et p aas pd 568 WRN EE 568 120 eee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee 331 CALCulate AC Power OF FSet LIST LIMit NEGativel UPPer DATA rel power rel power rel power rel power rel power rel power 359 CALCulate ACPower OFFSet LIST LIMit NEGative UPPer DATA 359 CALCulate AC Power OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitivel UPPer DATA rel power rel power rel power rel power rel power rel power 359 CALCulate ACPower OFFSet LIST LIMit POSitive UPPer DATA 0 359 CALCulate BANDwidth NDB dB value 0 0 cee ree 214 GALCulate BANDwIdlh NDB srira KE TREE R T AKKA RRR R NADA CR NUR R ER PROS UA ED RR ES 214 CALCulate BANDwidth STATe ON OPF Oc x asus RR Rye RR RR e te 214 CALCU BAND width SITATE jor iw xa watched SOC ACER e OR SUCEDER COCA S ol 214 13 E G C S e 3 3 D 5 2 2 o E G E E G oO ke o be a
329. destination 146 points 158 saving 158 421 477 478 transfer data 158 421 477 478 Trace State format 141 key 141 Trace State trace type 127 Trace 1 key 142 146 Trace 2 key 142 147 Trace 3 key 142 147 trace averaging 451 452 582 583 trace data moving 421 477 478 trace data format 508 trace display 168 trace format 160 Trace key 133 284 368 369 378 405 406 448 trace points 284 trace type CSV 129 Trace State 127 trace view menu map 621 Trace View front panel key 283 367 377 405 421 447 477 479 transmit frequency error Occupied BW 455 trig menu map 622 Trig Delay key 290 TRIG front panel key 287 Trig Input key 173 Trig Offset command 291 Trig Slope key 290 trigger measurement 330 trigger IEEE command 568 turning markers off 185 394 484 type lower limit 110 upper limit 110 Type key 110 131 139 146 149 152 154 U units parameter commands 506 upper 110 upper limit 109 Upper Offset Limit key 439 URL Agilent Technologies 2 US PCS band class 342 US K band class 342 user correction 61 User key 250 User Preset key 222 user s reference using 44 V variable parameter commands 506 variables angle parameter 507 bit data parameter 507 degree parameter 507 frequency parameter 507 Index integer parameter 507 parameters 507 percent parameter 507 phaseparameter 507 power parameter 507 relative power
330. directory name celles 149 MMEMory STORe CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER file name 138 MMEMory STORe LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name eese 138 MMEMory STORe RESults file name 138 MMEMory STORe SCReen file name gt ssassn nnnsnnun unner n ennenen 138 MMEMory STORe STATe 1 lt file name 138 MMEMory STORe TRACe lt label gt lt file name eese 138 READ ACPOWer Ne ns 65 54 60 EE EE deg REEL E AER GEHE OR RR CUR E ERE ES 306 READ BPOWer Al osc sacs cies he RE R EE EEN n Ror RE RU EErEE AERA Sr P RR RO e AR 320 IBEAIEUHPOWerCIHIPOWeET Auge Ee d dedos Oe dob b de dole e dole dede edd e dicio 303 READ CH Paver DENSA sse kasd perse PAL CREER eR REPE C qe pid d Pa dpi 303 READS TOn hee ib ld das apes EE dE aS dq Open ca d ree Ab ab Bua 303 READ HARMonics AMPLitudeALL 0 00 eee tenet eens 316 READ HARMonice ABP EE 4 ROC esate ADU ERROUE VEO EE 316 READ HARMoni s REGQuencyAGG os R T RR e vag sk EG YD Oe RAR ES EROR UR ORTA OR e N 316 READ HAR Memes P REQuency lal uiia ed o RC RE ee ek A we 317 READHARMonica PUN Damental Sauber sa oe uw sere ea AA dE eke EO Oe 317 READ HARMornmest DISTortonl iissenasucaessee AEN en ewe edie RR NEE NIE EE d 316 EISATOELAR Maraog n 114 Reuse ep Reed Hod ted ole ee ie RE ree ER 317 REA os dabo a 4 eda p Oh RP Ee ie de eee ecl op Rd ede ace la buo da de bs s RE a 310 READ Power esris rener ta ICE Ede E be VIDE S dra ab Rd V
331. displayed Either Limit or Margin as well as Test must be turned on to turn on a limit test Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 Dependencies Couplings If neither of the limits or margins are turned on the test cannot be turned on That is if both Limit and Margin are set to Off then the test is turned off automatically If a margin has been set for this limit line and this key is used to change the limit type then the margin values is reset to 0 dB State Saved Not saved in instrument state Survives preset and power cycle Factory Preset and RST Off Factory Default Off when a limit line is created Default value is not affected by a preset Fundamental Units dB Terminators dB dB Default Terminator dB Resolution 0 1 dB Knob Increment 0 1 dB Upper 0 1 dB Lower Step Key Increment 1 dB Upper 1 dB Lower Range 0 to 40 dB Upper 0 to 40 dB Lower History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe OFF ON 0 1 turns on margins on or off If the margin and limit display are both turned off limit test is automatically turned off CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe 112 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display Responds with the margin state 0 off 1 on CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin ampl rel Defines the amount of measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line CALCulate
332. displayed when such a combination is encountered Key Path Mode Setup Factory Preset None History Updated with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard SELect NONE I895a JSTD IS95C GSM W3GPP C2000MC1 C2000DS C2000MC3 NADC PDC BLUEtoo th TETRa WL802DOT11A WL802DOT11B WL802DOT11G HIPERLAN2 DVBTGPN DVBTIPN SENSe RADio STANdard SELect O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 5 3 1 1 None Selects no radio standard If Radio Std None is selected when a measurement is running all measurement parameters are returned to their default values Analyzer parameters outside the MEASURE or Meas Setup key menus are not affected Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Chapter 5 333 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN NONE 5 3 1 2 IS 95A Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard IS 95A The Spectrum Emissions Mask Harmonic Distortion and Spu
333. e SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier real number real number gt SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier COUPle OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier COUPle Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS 1 Example SEM OFFS LIST STOP RCAR 20 dBm SEM OFFS LIST STOP RCAR SEM OFFS LIST STOP RCAR COUP 0 SEM OFFS LIST STOP RCAR COUP 5 22 4 11 Fail Mask Displays the menu to select one of the following logic keys for fail conditions between the measurement results and the test limits Absolute Relative Abs AND Rel and Abs OR Rel Absolute Fail is shown if one of the absolute spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit between Abs Start and Abs Stop inclusive This is the default selection for each offset for BTS measurements Relative Fail is shown if one of the relative spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit between Rel Start and Rel Stop inclusive o c e 5 o c E ns c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E m o E e Abs AND Rel Fail is shown if one of the absolute spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit between Abs Start and Abs Stop inclusive AND one of the relative spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Rel
334. e HCOP ITEM FFE Ejects the page if prints per page is set to 2 and only 1 print has completed Otherwise the page automatically ejects after the print is complete 4 4 5 Page Size Allows you to select from the following page sizes Executive Letter Legal Ledger A4 and A3 Key Path Print Setup State Saved Persistent survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Letter Remote Command HCOPy PAGE SIZE A B A3 A4 LETTer LEGal EXECutive LEDGer 232 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Print Setup HCOPy PAGE SIZE Remote Command Notes Page size A is letter and page size B is ledger There is no size standardization for legal or executive Example HCOP PAGE SIZE A4 5 D o g c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Chapter 4 233 Instrument Functions P Z Print Setup 4 4 5 1 Executive Letter Legal Ledger A4 or A3 Selectable page sizes available are as follows Executive Letter Legal Ledger A4 and A3 Key Path Print Setup Page Size State Saved Persistent survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Letter Remote Command HCOPy IMAGe COLor STATe OFF ON 0 1 HCOPy IMAGe COLor L STATe 7 Example HCOP IMAG COL ON 4 4 6 Color N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Allows you to select between color or black and wh
335. e Same as Metafile but the black display backgrounds are changed to white and the yellow traces are turned to green to preserve printer black ink Corrections A file that contains a copy of the analyzer correction tables at the time the file is saved CBL ANT OTH AMP Corrections provide a way to adjust the trace display for preset gain factors such as for cable loss A correction set can hold up to 200 points Pressing Corrections activates the Source key Refer to the File Save Source key description page 142 When you load a Corrections file into the analyzer you restore all of the corrections values that were in the instrument at the time of the save Measurement Results A file that contains a copy of the analyzer measurement data that was current at the time the file is saved Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing into spreadsheets When you load a Measurement Results file into the analyzer you restore all of the measurement data that was in the instrument at the time of the save Chapter 2 129 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 1 Catalog Displays directories and files located on the selected drive depending upon the preferences set under the Type page 131 and Sort page 133 keys Catalog displays menus to navigate the drives and to sort and select the files you wish to view NOTE The internal analyzer drive
336. e Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Channel Power CHP Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 22 when W CDMA is selected 0 35 for TETRA otherwise Off Knob Increment 0 01 Step Key Increment 0 1 Range 0 01 to 1 0 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 403 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Channel Power CHP Remote Command SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC ALPHA number SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC ALPHA Example CHP FILT ALPH 0 22 CHP FILT ALPH 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e 404 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Channel Power Measurement 5 15 Trace View Channel Power Measurement If Channel Power has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate Trace View menu for the channel power measurement Displays menu keys that enable you to set how trace information is stored and displayed Key Path Front panel key Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command for this function 5 15 1 Spectrum Pressing Spectrum selects the spectral display of the measurement Key Path Trace View
337. e Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 10 1 Meas BW Press Meas BW to set the measurement 3 dB bandwidth The range is 10 kHz to 8 MHz using the available RBW filters Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Defined by the radio standard selected Terminators Hz kHz MHz GHz Knob Increment Steps through available Res BW filters Step Key Increment Steps through available Res BW filters el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Range Lowest non zero Span supported by Analyzer to the maximum Span of the ESA History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe PSTatistic BANDwidth BWIDth freq SENSe PSTatistic BANDwidth BWIDth Remote Command Notes The entered value is rounded to the nearest Res BW filter frequency Chapter 5 381 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Example PST BAND 10 or PST BWID 10 PST BAND or PST BWID 5 10 2 Counts Press Counts to set the accumulated number of sampling points for data acquisition The range is 1 kpoints kilopoint 1000 points to 2 000000 Gpoints Giga point 10 point with 1 kpoint resolution While this key is activated enter a value from the numeric keypad by
338. e Integrity Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Integrity Enable STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle lt number gt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity 578 Chapter 8 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register which also sets the Integrity Summary bit bit 9 in the Questionable Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 3276 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Event Query STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Integrity Negative Transition STATus QUESt onable INTegrity NTRansition number STATus QUEStonable INTegrity NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integ
339. e accurate When Normal is selected Norm appears on the left side of the display Key Path Det Demod Remote Command See Detector on page 95 Example DET NORM 2 3 1 3 Average For each interval bucket in the trace Average detection displays the average of all samples within the interval using one of the following averaging methods log also known as video power also known as RMS voltage envelope To explicitly set the averaging method use the BW Avg Avg VBW Type key The combination of the average detector and the power method is equivalent to what is sometimes referred to as RMS detection When the method Avg VBW Type is set to Pwr Avg and Detector is set to Average the RMS method is selected When Average is selected Avg appears on the left side of the display Key Path Det Demod Detector Dependencies Couplings Use of Average affects the VBW setting See BW Avg VBW When in Average detection video trigger is not available Remote Command See Detector on page 95 98 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Det Demod Example DET AVER 2 3 1 4 Peak For each interval bucket in the trace Peak detection displays the highest amplitude within the interval Peak detection is used for CW measurements and some pulsed RF measurements For swept analysis peak detection basically obtains the maximum video signal between the end of the last bucket and the start of the next one Gai
340. e are none it shows PASS in green Any offsets that are in the off state see Offset Freq or Edge Freq on page 354 are not measured and their results will not be displayed on screen Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Updated with firmware revision A 03 00 Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower LIMit STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower LIMit STATe Example ACP LIM 1 ACP LIM 5 6 11 RRC Filter Pressing Filter turns the Root Raised Cosine filter on or off This filter is the type specified in the NADC and 3GPP W CDMA standards and is only available when 3GPP W CDMA or NADC is selected as the Radio Std from the Mode Setup menu If 3GPP W CDMA is selected the roll off value alpha for the filter will be initially set to 0 22 T is set to 1 RefBW default 260 ns If NADC is selected the roll off will be initially set to 0 35 T is set to 1 RefBW default 42 us If TETRA has been selected the roll off will be initially set to 0 35 T is set to 1 RefBW default 55 6 us The roll off value can be changed using Filter Alpha The filter is unavailable when the measurement method is set to RBW Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Chapter 5 363 el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1
341. e higher gains improving dynamic range Additional information about selecting FFTs Span can be found in a product note PSA Series Swept and FFT Analysis literature number 5980 3081EN available online through http www agilent com Key Path Auto Couple FFT amp Sweep State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 1 Range 1 to 400000 Chapter 2 75 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI LI lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple Remote Command SENSe SWEep FFT SPAN RATio integer SENSe SWEep FFT SPAN RATio Example SWE FFT SPAN RAT 20 2 1 3 PhNoise Opt Selects the LO local oscillator phase noise behavior for various operating conditions The selected value is displayed below the indicator on the left side of the screen It is preceded by if PhNoise Opt Auto has been selected Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Auto Remote Command SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis 1 2 3 1 selects optimization of phase noise for frequencies offset 50 kHz from the carrier 2 selects optimization of phase noise for frequencies offset 50 kHz from the carrier 3 selects optimization of LO for fast tuning SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO Example FREQ SYNT AUTO
342. e information see Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW on page 451 The occupied bandwidth function also indicates the difference between the analyzer center frequency and the center frequency of the channel referred to as Transmit Freq Error The measurement can be made in single or continuous sweep mode The center frequency reference level and channel spacing must be set by the user To configure measurement settings press Meas Setup after selecting Occupied BW Pressing Radio Standard after Mode Setup has been selected will access all the Radio Standards available for which this measurement can be applied Pressing Meas Control enables you to pause or restart a measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement Key Path MEASURE Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command Results Returned CONFigure OBW Not Applicable INITiate OBW FETCh OBW Returns two values that correspond to the Occupied BW and MEASure OBW Transmit Frequency Error in Hertz READ OBW FETCh OBW OBWAdth Returns a single value that corresponds to the Occupied BW in MEASure OBW OBWi1dth Hertz READ OBW OBWidth FETCh OBW FERRor MEASu Returns a single value that corresponds to the Transmit re OBW FERRor Frequency Error in Hertz READ OBW FERRor FETCh OBW XDB Returns a single value that corresponds to the x dB BW in MEASure OBW XDB Hertz READ OBW XDB Remote Command N
343. e level top line of the graticule Key Path Marker gt NOTE The reference level range is limited by the input attenuator setting the maximum mixer level the preamp setting etc Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET RLEVel Example CALC MARK2 RLEV sets the reference level of the analyzer to the amplitude of marker 2 200 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Meas Setup SA with Measurements Off 3 4 Meas Setup SA with Measurements Off 3 4 1 Measurement Setup Displays the setup menu for the currently selected measurement This menu is empty if no measurement is active This could be because Meas Off is selected in the Measure menu Key Path Front panel key Dependencies Couplings Menu choices depend on the currently selected Mode and Menu Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command Chapter 3 201 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 E v E LI O Instrument Functions M O Meas Setup SA with Measurements Off O 1 E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Be s 7 202 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O MODE 3 5 MODE Selects the measurement mode of your analyzer Spectrum Analysis mode is for general purpose measurement use The instrument comes with the Spectrum Analysis mode Additional measurement modes can be added to your instrument memory Refer to the individual measurement personality mode manuals for instructions on
344. e of the four possible markers Once a marker is selected it can be set to any of the control modes Normal or Off Key Path Marker State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Marker 1 History Remote command updated with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate SEMask MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe Remote Command Notes Sets or queries the state of a marker Setting a marker to state ON or 1 selects that marker Setting a marker which is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it on the screen to the right of the displayed measurement graph Setting a marker to state OFF or 0 selects that marker and turns it off The response to the query will be 0if OFF 1if ON Example CALC SEM MARK2 STAT ON selects marker 2 CALC SEM MARK STAT ON will not modify a marker that is already on Chapter 5 483 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 o c e 5 o c E H Ld c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Marker Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 26 2 Normal Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Normal see Select Marker on page 483 If the marker is off a single marker is activated and placed on the screen to the right of the measurement graph You can then adju
345. e reported Any spurs reported outside the limit will cause the measurement to fail See Abs Start Limit on page 493 for more information Key Path Meas Setup Saved State Ref Level state is saved to instrument state Ref Level value is recalculated for each active range the value is not stored in instrument state Factory Preset Off Range Off On History Add with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe SPURious FSMeas OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SPURious FSMeas el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Example SPUR FSM ON Chapter 5 499 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 500 Chapter 5 Programming Fundamentals E Ve D 3 ES io T E Ej a D 3 oO D 7 501 Programming Fundamentals e SCPI Language Basics on page 503 Improving Measurement Speed on page 511 Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes on page 519 Using the LAN to Control the Instrument on page 524 Programming in C Using the VTL on page 546 Overview of the GPIB Bus on page 554 o c o E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a 502 Chapter 6 NOTE Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics SCPI Lang
346. e state of a marker Setting a marker to state ON or 1 selects that marker Setting a marker which is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the display Setting a marker to state OFF or 0 selects that marker and turns it off The response to the query will be 0 if OFF 1 if ON Example CALC PST MARK2 ON selects marker 2 CALC PST MARK STAT ON will not modify a marker that is already on 5 13 2 Normal Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Normal If the marker is off a single marker is activated at the 0 dB point of the selected trace see Marker Trace on page 394 You can then adjust the selected marker using the numeric keypad knob or f U keys Key Path Marker after MEASURE Power Stat CCDF is selected Factory Preset Off Remote Command See Marker on page 177 for the mode command Example CALC PST MARK MODE NORM selects marker 1 and sets it to Normal 5 13 3 Delta Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta In Delta mode the display shows the difference between the active Delta marker and a reference marker When Delta mode is selected the reference marker is placed at the current marker position unless the marker was OFF in which case both the active marker and the reference marker are placed at 0 dB point of the selected trace see Marker Trace on page 394 You can adjust the trace point of the active delta marker Annotation in the active funct
347. eas Setup Channel Power CHP nananana nenene 399 EE 399 AUS Mode oarders 56 SASS USO PIRES THe se ribASESEERPEERSREAPECRIN RS GN GREEN ES 400 Ee 400 Chan Pwr SD zg EE kito E KA EE EE EE EE EE AGO RUP ES 401 Opine E E isis uh Lab ODER amp ha RON NE RO EE 402 BRO EPIIT 402 alid ANAS a 5 0 br ed XAR a E EH CAE e EE RUE PP p HO d pd e doe aca d Mod dede d 402 Trace View Channel Power Measurement nnnnnna nanan enaere 405 e aT uuo E he db Ref p UR FA he hee ee d E Rd 405 Cami rasert reptero eS URSER SOV EU SOE ES HOES SEM OX EC PW esee exe GNO EE 405 KEE EOD Pk EVE CEASE dc Se EN Id NER dte pe Er o era E deca e d 405 Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion lees 409 Mek a sou w sp AOI E dede e P b de BER IAE RR e ea Ad E UR ACA rd C OX URN A 409 Bip MOSS a ec bowed EET SSE S EHE ERE OCS SESE ESSE TAIPEI I NAE e 9 409 ENEE ENEE d bx ORS 3 5 RES EH CES EES 410 KSE EE 410 Bate lable EE os pa Ce RTSH E SCORE AENEA LO awe EC ORE REA e ARR E R 412 Ramee Table 12s RRCRARRIEIEGGu CWORRGHEWGUE E XA PP CETECR EK EXeRLIIN ESE ex d EGRE 413 Opm Bor Level 66 6553 ddp dad dea dk pado cedo Sd EE PEELE a 4 e d oe 419 Trace View HE arma EEN 421 EE 1 soc CR o SORORE OR Ee A EE 421 Harmonis s TID ues A S05 ORES CREM CARRE ESSE EG EERIEMREEG qe TE EOE EE SS 421 Meas Setup tIntermbd TOD uua ead xa cas RA arie Hp ecd Ek eda ca exa Ea 423 PRE bI PETITUM 423 Jm DID Li seca ep oe RR ee ARRA CAE de CREE AER ONG CO ea C I RE U
348. ed below instrument IP address 191 108 344 225 instrument GPIB name instO un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a 534 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument logical unit number 7 timeout value seconds 30 LOAD statement all on a single line LOAD BIN GPIBS DEV lan 191 108 344 225 instO TIME 30 ISC 7 Consult your BASIC documentation to learn how to load the SICL driver for BASIC After the SICL driver is loaded you control your instrument using commands such as the following OUTPUT 718 IDN ENTER 718 S where 18 is the device address for the instrument See the BASIC example program in this chapter for more information Controlling Your Instrument with SICL LAN and BASIC for UNIX Rocky Mountain BASIC Before you can use Rocky Mountain Basic HPRMB with SICL LAN you will need to set up the SICL LAN I O drivers for HPRMB Consult your system administrator for details Create a rmbrc file in your root directory of your UNIX workstation with the following entries SELECTIVE OPEN ON Interface 8 lan analyzer IP address GPIB name NORMAL Replace analyzer IP address with the IP address of your instrument and GPIB name with the GPIB name given to your instrument Also replace the 8 of Interface 8 with the logical unit number Consult your HPRMB documentation for the exact syntax After your SICL driver is configured co
349. ed carefully Minimize DUT instrument setup changes Some instrument setup parameters are common to multiple measurements You should look at your measurement process with an eye toward minimizing setup changes If your test process involves nested loops make sure that the inner most loop is the fastest Also check if the loops could be nested in a different order to reduce the number of parameter changes as you step through the test Are you are using the measurements under the MEASURE key Remember that if you have already set your Meas Setup parameters for a measurement and you want to make another one of these measurements later use READ lt meas gt The MEASure lt meas gt command resets all the settings to the defaults while READ changes back to that measurement without changing the setup parameters from the previous use Are you are using the Measurements under the MEASURE key Remember that Mode Setup parameters remain constant across all the measurements in that mode e g center channel frequency amplitude radio standard input selection trigger setup You don t have to re initialize them each time you change to a different measurement Chapter 6 513 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi D D Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Consider using LAN instead of GPIB LAN allows faster I O of data especially if you are moving large blocks of data You will not get
350. ed when in the Spectrum Analysis mode MMEM STOR TRAC This is because the instrument state must be saved along with the trace data and the state data varies depending on the number of modes currently available in the instrument Chapter 6 521 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b un c o E c 9 5 ra o E E E c CH o e LI D Programming Fundamentals Programming Command Compatibility Across Model Numbers and Across Modes Using Applications in PSA Series vs VSA E4406A NOTE This information only applies to the application modes Basic cdmaOne cdma2000 IxEV DO W CDMA GSM EDGE NADC and PDC Command PSA Series VSA E4406A A 04 00 VSA E4406A A 05 00 RST Resets instrument Resets instrument Resets instrument putting itin continuous putting it in single putting it in single measurement mode measurement mode One measurement mode No Use INIT CONT OFF to measurement is initiated measurement is initiated select single when the command is when the command is measurement mode and sent sent Use INIT IMM to INIT IMM to start one start one measurement measurement CONFigure Accesses the Same as PSA Accesses the measurement measurement and sets measurement and sets the instrument settings to the defaults If you were already in single measurement mode it takes one measurement and then waits Accesses the measurement and se
351. ed whenever leaving Zero Span Key Path Auto Couple FFT amp Sweep Saved State Saved in instrument state Remote Command SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO RULes SPEed DRANge selects the rules to use when SWE TYPE AUTO is selected This setting combined with your current analyzer setup is used to select either FFT or swept mode See Auto Best Dynamic Range on page 72 Example SWEep TYPE AUTO selects the automatic mode SWE TYPE AUTO RUL SPE sets the rules for the auto mode to speed 2 1 2 5 Manual Swept Manually selects swept analysis so it cannot change automatically to FFT While Zero Span is selected this key is greyed out The status of the FFT amp Swept selection is saved when entering zero span and is restored when leaving zero span Key Path Auto Couple FFT amp Sweep Saved State Saved in instrument state Remote Command Use SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO FFT SWEep See FFT amp Sweep on page 72 Example SWE TYPE SWE Chapter 2 73 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 2 1 2 4 Manual FFT Manually selects FFT analysis so it cannot change automatically to swept While Zero Span is selected this key is greyed out The status of the FFT amp Swept selection is saved when entering zero span and is restored when leaving zero span TIP Key Path Maki
352. efore attempting the connection An operation timed out message Check the LAN connection between the computer and the instrument Refer to If you cannot connect to the instrument in this section Increase the file time out value on your PC or workstation Cannot access internal web pages or import graphic images when using a point to point connection Disable the use of proxy servers You may have to specify this in a number of locations depending on the operating system and software you are using Disable the use of cached copies of web pages to ensure that you always get a new copy of the instrument s screen image If all else fails Contact your network administrator e f you still cannot solve the problem contact an Agilent Service Center for repair information Chapter 6 541 E fe Kei o 3 3 E io T E E Q E 3 bi E D o un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH E e LI a Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Pinging the Instrument from a Computer or Workstation Verify the communications link between the computer and the instrument remote file server using the ping utility From a UNIX workstation type ping hostname 64 10 where 64 is the packet size and 10 is the number of packets transmitted From a DOS or Windows environment type ping hostname 10 where 10 is the number of echo requests Normal Response f
353. en RN LE NAD Lossser aatesebesseaeesestssbbatea4kgPpaygRSseS4d seta 432 SENSe MCPower RCFRequency AUTO OFFTONTIOIT BI 433 SENSe MCPower RCFRequency AUTO eren 433 SENSe MCPower RCFRequency Freq eee eee 433 SENSe MCPower RCFRequency Raw 0 R RR ce eee hh 433 SENSe OBW AVERage COUNt lt integer gt 0 ee eee eens 451 SENSe OBW AVERage COUNt 1 0 2 0 cece eee een tarotu e n 451 SENSe OBW AVERage TCONtrol EXPonential REPeart 0 0 0 452 SRN Sel O BW AV Rae TGONt wiki daewoo ee ties EE 452 SENSe OBW AVERagel STATe OFF ON 1011 eee ee eee 451 SENSe OBW AVERagel STATe RRR RRR RRR een eee n 451 SENSe OBW FREQuency SPAN reg 454 L SENSe OBW EREQuency SPANT oo cca cece ea Lex beeen hee eee eee EE HORROR GR RR ER ES 454 LSENSe OBWMAXHeld OFF ON O E AE EN KEE be eee eed bee ex Ra bn een 452 POENG LOBW MSA EE 452 SENSeEOBW PERCent lt pertent gt 2455 bas e ko e y yk ESS X WO Y ANE E ERY EXER AE rS X 454 Rl EE R ccoosezieCermek c ee hea RAE ERROUE GOR RUP RONR HN OA CY RR UO 454 L SENSeI OBWidlluXDEB dB valies ci ccc Xe re eR Ebr ERROUR OE RED EERE VROCR NS 456 DSENSeDLOBVOdUPEXDBST cux ddp Rd e ORC E ROG doa o o Gow deba y E b b ca 456 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation lt rel_power gt eee nnn 50 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO ORFTONTIoIT B BRA 50 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO seeseeeeeeeeeee eee nnn 50 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation STEP INCRement
354. ence Returns 12 scalar values in dBm Hz of the absolute power of the segment frequencies 1 Total power reference dBm Hz 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E Using Total Power n 6 Total Power Reference PEIUS Returns 12 scalar values in dBc of the power relative to the carrier at the segment frequencies 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e Using Power Spectral n 6 Power Spectral Density Reference Ee Returns 12 scalar values in dBc Hz of the power relative to the carrier at the segment frequencies 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E 326 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Command n Results Returned Condition n 7 Returns 12 pass fail test results 0 passe
355. end all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 selects the mode SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution integer The query for this parameter always returns 20 values 490 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution AUTO SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution 7 5 27 3 5 Video BW Video BW is used to set the video bandwidth of the analyzer When Auto is selected the analyzer determines the optimum setting while Man enables you to determine the setting Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment Steps through the available video bandwidth filters Step Key Increment Steps through the available video bandwidth filters Range Video bandwidth range of your analyzer Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 selects the mode SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo lt
356. ends an echo request packet to the host once per second Each echo response packet that is returned is listed on the screen along with the round trip time of the echo request and echo response Options and Parameters r Bypasses the routing tables and sends the request directly to the host v Reports all packets that are received including the response packets 0 Requests information about the network paths taken by the requests and responses host The host name or IP address packetsize The size of each packet 8 bytes 4096 bytes count The number of packets to send before ending ping 1 281 1 If count is not specified ping sends packets until interrupted p fe S 9 3 3 5 Co T E 5 2 D 3 f 3 S D Chapter 6 543 o c o E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Table 6 3 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument EIA TIA 568B Wiring Information Straight Through Cable Unshielded twisted pair UTP cable with RJ 45 connectors Standard Straight Through Wiring each end Signal Name RJ 45 Pin Wire Color Pair RX 1 white orange 2 RX 2 orange TX 3 white green 3 TX 6 green Not 4 blue 1 Ke 5 white blue 7 white brown 4 8 brown Table 6 4 Cross Over Cable Unshielded twisted pair UTP cable with RJ 45 connectors Cross Over Wiring Connector A Connector B
357. ent Meas Setup Key Meas Setup If measurement L chosen is Channel Power Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe884a r Meas Setup Meas Setup Rvg Numben T 10 On Off Rvg Mode Exp Repeat t Integ BW 2 00000 MHZ Chan PwrSpan RRC Filter 3 00000000 MHz On Off t Filter Alpha 0 22 Optimize Ref Level More More e 1of2 E 2 of 2 A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function sde nuan Juswesnseayy uojng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw Channel Power Measurement Trace View Key Trace View If measurement chosen is Channel Power 6 1e deu2 y Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe885a Meas View Spectrum Trace 1 2 3 Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices GEO suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan uawansea uonng eug Suoroun jueuieJnsee y uoyng 3u0 sde nuaw 09 6 191deu2 Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions Harmonic Distortion Measurement Meas Setup Key Meas If measurement chosen is Setup
358. ent to wait until all pending commands processes are completed before executing any additional commands There is no query form for the command The instrument does not wait for completion of all processes The processes that are monitored are identified in the OPC command description Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key 568 Chapter 8 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands Example INIT CONT OFF INIT WAI Le o EJ Q Se gt oO D gt La Hd o lt Hd 4 oO E Chapter 8 569 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands E LG E KA gt ky 3 S LE 7 o L D GA D 570 Chapter 8 Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem NOTE NOTE STATus Subsystem The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI defined instrument status reporting structures Each status register has a set of five commands used for querying or masking that particular register Numeric values for bit patterns can be entered using decimal or hexidecimal representations i e 0 to 32767 is equivalent to H0 to H7FFF See the SCPI Basics information about using bit patterns for variable parameters Operation Register Operation Condition Query STATus OPERation CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent
359. eping error is compensated when using the peak and normal detectors by changing the overall gain But the gain is not changed when in the sample detector because to do so would cause errors in the response to noise Chapter 2 99 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L Det Demod When Sample is selected Samp appears on the left side of the display Key Path Det Demod Detector E 1 lt 2 c Q O E E LL E GU E E E KA E 100 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Det Demod Remote Command See Detector on page 95 Example DET SAMP 2 8 1 7 Negative Peak For each interval bucket in the trace Negative Peak detection displays the lowest sample within the interval Negative peak detection is similar to peak detection but selects the minimum video signal When Negative Peak is selected NPk appears on the left side of the display Key Path Det Demod Detector Remote Command See Detector on page 95 Example DET NEG 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 ES El D gt LI r Chapter 2 101 Instrument Functions A L Det Demod 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 102 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 Display Displays menu keys that enable you to control certain items on the display of the analyzer NOTE CCDF and SEM measurements have meas
360. er 372 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Burst Power SENSe BPOWer AVERage TYPe Example BPOW AVG TYP LPOWer to select Log type BPOW AVG TYP 5 8 4 Threshold Lvl Enables you to set the level above which the mean carrier power calculation is based The threshold level can be described in dB Rel or dBm Abs Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset 30 dB Terminators dBordBm Default Terminator dB Knob Increment 0 1 dB dBm Step Key Increment 6 dB dBm Range 60 dBm to 60 dBm in absolute mode 60 dB to 0 dB in relative mode History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe BPOWer THReshold lt number gt SENSe BPOWer THReshold SENSe BPOWer THReshold TYPE ABSolute RELative SENSe BPOWer THReshold TYPE Example SENS BPOW THR TYPE ABS el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 5 8 5 Meas Method Allows you to select the measurement method s Above Threshold Lvl Selects the user defined threshold level or default level 3 00 dB as the criteria in making the measurement e Measured Burst Width This measurement method is not available for the following radio standards IS 95 J STD 008 cdma2000 SR1 cdma2000 SR3 W DCMA 3GPP Chapter 5 373 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement F
361. er SEQuence VIDeo LEVel lt ampl gt 0 cc eee eee eens 288 TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency reg 288 TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency 0 0 2 0 ce eens 288 TRiGgerShQuencel Y T Deo Level ccccadavadrdcak REENEN EE dc 288 UNIT POWer DBM DBMV DBUV V W gg R R R RRR RRR RRR RR RRR KR RRR RRR RR eens 56 ONET POWE eire tokire pee RERO Ce P RERO EE KR UAR PORRO A OOo ea BOUE AE DA C Rel Red 56 SENCe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude Bol 173 SENCe CORRection MPedance INPut MAG Nude 0 eller 173 SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt integer sese 351 SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt e n 351 SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat 20 00 00 eee eee eee 353 SENSe ACPower AVERage TCON rol EN uo eor e m x RR ERR E EG RAE ON EE N 353 SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe OFF ONJ0 1 lesse RIA 351 SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe hrs 351 28 List of Commands SENSe ACPower BANDvwidth BWIDth INTegration reg 354 SENSe ACPower BAN Dwidth BWIDth INTegration eee 354 SENSe ACPower CARRier AUTO STATe OFRTIONTIOI ee RR 362 SENSe ACPower CARRier AUTO STATe 1 0 0 cece een eee ees 362 SENSe ACPower CARBier CPSD eg Be cick eek eek eae ew EELER ENEE ee an 362 d AXE Power CERIS C PIDE MORE wow ee QUE ye AE AE ee we CORN RE a ec 362 SENSe ACPower CARRier POWer 362 SENSe ACPower CORRection NOISe AUTO OFRT
362. er level adjusting 69 Mkr to CF key 212 mobile station setup 341 mode menu map 610 MODE front panel key 203 Mode key 251 Mode Preset key 224 Mode Setup menu 627 628 Mode Setup front panel key 333 modes applications loading 278 monitoring errors 567 monitoring instrument status 571 monitoring status 567 monitoring the instrument 557 Monochrome key 274 moving data to a file 158 markers 197 199 200 209 trace data 421 477 478 multi carrier power measurement trace 447 viewing trace 447 Multi Carrier Power Meas Setup menu 643 Trace View menu 644 multi carrier power measurement measurement setup 429 multiple users system message to 280 281 N NADC key 337 Name key 143 154 155 naming files 148 154 155 Neg Offset Limit key 359 Negative Peak key 101 Next Page key 248 Next Peak key 209 Next Pk Left key 210 Next Pk Right key 210 no response from host error 541 Noise Corr key 364 noise correction 364 445 Noise Correction key 445 None key 333 Normal key 98 180 392 484 numeric data file format setting 160 0 OBW Span key 454 Occ BW Pwr key 454 Occupied Bandwidth Meas Setup menu 645 occupied bandwidth measurement 304 measurement setup 423 451 457 485 Occupied BW measurement results 455 transmit frequency error 455 Occupied BW key 304 Off key marker 185 394 484 Offset Freq key 354 438 Offset IntegBW key 439 Offset key 354 438 off
363. er to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function sis Jeuy winaypeds sdejy nue Annotation On Off 01 eBed ees z jo Aen ejdsiq siskjeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 86S 8 191deu2 Display Key 2 of 2 See page 103 T Limits Limits Limit 1 Upper Limit 2 d Lower X Rxis Units Freq Time Limits Fixed Rel Delete RII Limits Freq Interp key grayed out in Time Limits Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis x Limit 1 Limit 1 Type t Freq Interp Upper Lower Log Lin Limit Display fimptd Interp On Off Log Lin Limit Test On Off Margin t 0 0 dB On Off Edit Delete Limit More More K 1of2 2 of 2 pe864a Edit Point i Frequency 300 MHz Amplitude 2 dB Connected To Previous Pt Yes No Delete Point ee Same as Limit 1 above but menu title is Limit 2 and default Type is Lower A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function 01 eBed ees z jo Je ejdsiq sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 66S File Key 1 of 6 See page 127 pe856a LR File Catalog gt Catalog Save Save KE Load Delete
364. erasing its contents Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Remarks See CLS Chapter 8 567 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands Trigger TRG This command triggers the instrument Use the TRIGger SEQuence SOURce command to select the trigger source If you have selected a one button measurement and it has been paused INITiate PAUSe or the CONFigure meas command was used The command causes the system to exit this waiting state and go to the initiated state The trigger system is initiated and completes one full trigger cycle It returns to the waiting state on completion of the trigger cycle See the MEASURE key for more information about controlling the measurement process The instrument must be in the single measurement mode If INIT CONT ON then the command is ignored Depending upon the measurement and the number of averages there may be multiple data acquisitions with multiple trigger events for one full trigger cycle Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Remarks See also the INITiate IMMediate command Front Panel Access Restart Self Test Query TST For PSA analyzers NO tests are performed TST always returns 0 Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Wait to Continue WAI This command causes the instrum
365. ero span and Sweep Time is set to Auto the sweep time will be 200 divided by the resolution bandwidth or 10 ms whichever is greater If the range is non zero span and Sweep Time is set to Auto the analyzer determines the optimum setting Sweep Time set to Man enables you to determine the setting Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset Auto Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 1 5 2 34 5 7 5 10 Range Sweep time range of your analyzer History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 418 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion Remote Command This parameter can send up to 10 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 selects the mode SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEep TIME lt integer gt The query for this parameter will always return 10 values SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEep TIME AUTO SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SWEep TIME 5 16 6 7 Auto Fill Range Table Auto Fill Range Table is used to automatically setup the range table based on the current range center frequency and span When selected the current center frequency is taken as the fundamental and the frequency in range one
366. ers Instrument Functions A L Instrument Functions M O and Instrument Functions P Z Programming Fundamentals provides information on SCPI and C programming language basics and on using GPIB and LAN Using the STATus System provides information about the instruments internal status monitoring system with information on how to monitor the status using a remote program and descriptions of all the available commands s Menu Maps illustrates the menu structure of the front panel and lower level keys Refer to this chapter to identify the lower level softkeys associated with the front panel keys BS E E El 5 O s 2 Lei 7 D 44 Chapter 1 Using This Document Book Organization Terms Used in This Book The following terms are used to describe each key Note that a key description may not use all the terms State Saved Indicates what happens to a particular function when the instrument state is saved either to floppy disk or the internal ch drive It also indicates whether the current settings of the function are maintained if the instrument is powered on or preset using Power On Last State or User Preset Dependencies Couplings Describes dependencies or interactions to other functions or settings in the analyzer Factory Preset Describes the function settings after a Factory Preset Default Terminator Indicates the units that will be attached to the numerical value that yo
367. ers The status byte registers summarize the states of the other registers It is also responsible for generating service requests Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Standard Event Status Enable ESE number ESE Selects the desired bits from the standard event status enable register This register monitors I O errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete request control query error device dependent error execution error command error and power on The selected bits are OR d to become a summary bit bit 5 in the status byte register which can be queried The query returns the state of the standard event status enable Chapter 8 563 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands register Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Range Integer 0 to 255 Standard Event Status Register Query ESR Queries and clears the standard event status event register This is a destructive read Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Range Integer 0 to 255 Identification Query DN Returns an instrument identification information The string will contain the model number serial number and firmware revision The response is organized into four fields separated by commas The field definitions are as follows Manufacturer
368. eset type is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User Restores the analyzer to a user defined state that has been saved for all analyzer modes You defined this state when Save User Preset was pressed If the you have never saved a user preset state then the factory preset state is stored as the user preset state If the user preset state has been saved but the load fails for any reason the error message Unable to load user state is displayed in the status line and the state is reset to whatever it was before the Preset key was pressed This can sometimes happen if firmware has been upgraded or applications have been un installed after the user preset state was saved Save User Preset can be accessed by pressing System Power On Preset Key Path Preset Remote Command SYSTem PRESet See SYSTem PRESet on page 186 Example SYST PRES SAVE saves a user state that will be used for the preset SYST PRES TYPE USER selects the user type preset SYST PRES immediately presets the analyzer to the user preset 222 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Preset 5 D o g c 3 D 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Chapter 4 223 N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Preset 4 2 2 Mode Preset This key is only available when the preset type is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User A mode preset does not change
369. et use SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe Example CORR CSET ALL ON CORR CSET ALL 2 0 10 2 Antenna Cable Other and User Keys Pressing Antenna Cable Other or User accesses the Correction menu for that type of correction data These 4 keys display the status of correction sets If the key indicates On then amplitude corrections for this type have been enabled To perform the corrections both this key and Apply Corrections must indicate Yes The status is toggled in the correction set menu located under Correction Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Remote Command There is no remote command for this key Chapter 2 61 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 10 2 1 Correction Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the specific set of correction data The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied NOTE Antenna Cable and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values This indicates a loss in the external device User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Cable Other or User State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset No Remote Co
370. et and RST but is set to All Traces at power up 2 5 2 4 1 Trace 1 Selects trace 1 to be saved Key Path File Save Source 2 5 2 4 2 Trace 2 Selects trace 2 to be saved Key Path File Save Source 2 5 2 4 3 Trace 3 Selects trace 3 to be saved Key Path File Save Source 2 5 2 4 4 All Traces Selects all the traces to be saved Key Path File Save Source 142 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 2 5 Name Displays the Alpha Editor and enables you to enter a filename The numeric keypad can also be used while entering file names Press Enter or Return to complete the name entry NOTE Only capital letters A Z and digits 0 9 may appear in file names 8 characters maximum Additionally file names include a 3 digit extension which is automatically set by the instrument depending on the file type and format Key Path File Save Remote Command The file name is entered as part of the directory path name that is sent with the SCPI command See Save Now on page 137 2 5 2 6 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Save Remote Command The directory is entered as part of the directory path name that is sent with the SCPI command See Save Now on page 137 2 5 2 7 Dir Select Displays the highlighted directory
371. et to Auto Power Averaging is selected other choices of detector and Avg VBW type will usually cause measurement inaccuracy The active marker pair indicate the edges of the band Only Delta Pair and Span Pair marker control modes can be used while in this function selecting any other mode for example Normal or Delta turns off this function Key Path Marker Fctn Dependencies Couplings Video triggering is not available when the detector is Average therefore marker functions that would set the detector to Average and thus conflict with video triggering are not available when the Video trigger is On Selecting Band Intvl Power when the marker control function is off normal or delta will set the marker control function to delta pair Chapter 3 193 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O O 1 E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Iz s 7 E Instrument Functions M O Marker Fctn Remote Command See Marker Fctn on page 191 for the command to select the function Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW turns on marker one as a band power marker CALC MARK Y returns the value of the Band Intvl Power function for marker 1 if Band Intvl Power is ON for marker 1 3 2 4 Function Off Turns off marker functions Band Intvl Power and Marker Noise NOTE Delta markers will remain on screen Key Path Marker Fctn Remote Command See Marker Fctn on page 191 for the command to
372. eter variables 507 Annotation key 125 480 antenna correction 61 Antenna correction key 61 62 64 applet 538 applications installing 278 selecting 203 204 206 applications selecting 203 Appling Corrections key 61 arbitrary block data 508 ASCII data format 160 Attenuation key 50 attenuator step 10 dB 68 2 dB 68 Attn Step key 68 Auto Align key 255 Auto All key 71 auto couple 71 menu map 592 593 594 AUTO COUPLE front panel key 71 auto coupling Auto All 71 Auto key 90 97 phase noise 76 Auto Sweep Time key 243 Autorange key ADC ranging autorange 81 Average key 87 98 average mode 353 372 409 430 486 average number 351 399 429 485 averaging 87 log power 89 power 89 traces 451 452 582 583 type 93 Auto 90 Log power 90 power 91 voltage 91 video 89 voltage 89 Avg Mode key 353 372 409 430 452 486 Avg Number key 351 371 399 409 423 429 451 457 485 Avg VBW Type key 89 93 phase noise 78 B B M T measurements 514 Band Class key 342 Band Intvl Power key 193 bandwidth power 193 bandwidth ratio video to resolution 86 base station setup 341 BASIC programming 531 binary data order setting 160 bit pattern parameter variables 507 Bitmap format 141 screen file 129 Bitmap key 141 Blank key 286 370 379 407 450 block data arbitrary 508 identifying block size 508 parsing output 508 Bluetooth key 338 book terms 45 book
373. ets When Man is selected this can be set by the user when Auto is selected this is the measured mean power spectral density in the reference carrier Key Path Meas Setup Ref Channel Factory Preset 0 00 dBm Off Range 200 0 dBm to 200 0 dBm el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 461 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Remote Command SENSe SEMask CARRier POWer lt ampl gt SENSe SEMask CARRier L POWer SENSe SEMask CARRier AUTO STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask CARRier AUTO STATe Example SRM CARR 0 dBm SEM CARR SEM CARR AUTO 1 SEM CARR AUTO 5 22 4 Offset Limits Displays the menus where you can change the following parameters for offset frequency settings and pass fail tests Offset Start Freq Stop Freq Sweep Time Res BW and Limits If Spectrum Segment is set to Offset Refer to the tables below for default settings of particular radio standards of interest Table 5 2 Offsets amp Limits Defaulted for W CDMA 3GPP Base Station I Measurements E Offset Start Stop ResBW Abs Abs Abs Rel Rel Meas 2 Freq Freq kHz Start Stop Couple Start Stop BW E MHz MHz dBm dBm dBc dBo 5 A On 2 515 2 715 30 00 14 00 14 00 Couple 30 00 30 00 1 E B On 2 715 3 515 30 00 14 00 26 00 Man 30 00 30 00
374. ets you to make transmitter power measurements such as adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and harmonic distortion measurements If other modes are available and have been selected the measurements for that particular mode will be displayed Some common settings can be made for these measurements using the function under the Mode Setup key For example you may select one of several radio standards available by pressing Mode Setup Radio Std NOTE The measurements described in the One Button Measurement Functions chapter are available in SA mode see Mode key Other measurements are available in other modes if an optional personality is installed Dependencies Couplings When a measurement is activated Signal Track Video Averaging Segmented Sweep Band Power and Marker Noise will be turned off Remote Command Info 5 1 1 Command Interactions MEASure CONFigure FETCh INITiate and READ Figure 1 Measurement Group of Commands MEASure CONFigure INITiate Current acquired data is calculated and returned Sets default state then waits Start from Any Inst State G Ej i WA E Ki ps El D 7 E bi 3 E T E El 7 GA o e 7 Initialize taking of data ABORt SENSe amp CALCulate returns commands to this change the point settings from the defaults eabla Chapter 5 297 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c
375. etup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM specified in the 3GPP W CDMA standards This parameter is only available when 3GPP W CDMA is selected as the Radio Std from the Mode Setup menu If 3GPP W CDMA is selected the roll off value alpha for the filter will be initially set to 0 22 and T will be 260 ns The roll off value can be changed using Filter Alpha Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe Example SEM FILT 1 SEM FILT 5 22 7 Filter Alpha Press RRC Filter to input the alpha value for the RRC Filter This parameter is only available when 3GPP W CDMA is selected as the Radio Std from the Mode Setup menu Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 0 22 when W CDMA is selected otherwise Off Knob Increment 0 01 Step Key Increment 0 1 Range 0 01 to 1 0 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC ALPHA number SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC ALPHA 476 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Trace View Spectrum Emissions Mask 5 23 Trace View Spectrum Emissions Mask If Spectrum Emission Mask has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate Trace View menu for
376. ey Path Front panel key Factory Default Trace 1 Clear Write Trace 2 Blank Trace 3 Blank Remote Command 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANk WRITe Clear Write MAXHold Max Hold MINHold Min Hold VIEW View BLANK Blank TRACe 1 2 3 MODE Example TRAC MODE WRIT TRAC MODE MAXH TRAC MODE MINH TRAC MODE VIEW TRAC MODE BLANk TRAC MODE Chapter 4 283 N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Trace View 4 9 1 Query Trace Data Remote Command Only This query returns the current values of the designated trace amplitude values The data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt For GPIB this is newline or linefeed followed by EOI set true For RS 232 this is newline only The number of trace points returned is set by SENSE SWE POIN from 101 to 8192 Factory Preset Real 32 for Spectrum Analysis mode History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRACe DATA lt trace_name gt trace name gt is TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 Remote Command Notes The FORMat DATA command describes the different types of data formats that can be used with trace data See Format Numeric Data Remote Command Only on page 160 Use the FORMat BORDer command to set the byte order See Set Data Byte Order Remote Command Only on page 160
377. f Power On User Option Alpha Editor 1 10 0000000 MHz Last Preset 4 Int Ext Oy Be Buia A 1 MHz Out Preset Ep EZ License Key d Aloha Editor 1 Off on Save User Activate Proset Factory License Front Panel Delete Test License Show License Shov License ML pe876a sis Jeuy uingjoedsg sdejy nue Lpz aed ees p Jo Aay uejs g sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua 0c9 8 1e1deu2 System Key 4 of 4 See page 247 pe907a T A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings GENERE TQUE 7 Show Hor Show System Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Show License Personality Show Errors Show Hdwr Show System Show License T Previous Page Next Page Clear Error Queue Personality Lpz oDed ees y jo Aay uejs g sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 LZ9 Trace View Key See page 283 Trace View j If no measurement K is chosen Meas Off Selected gt Trace View Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pes79a A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indica
378. f the following averaging scales log power video power RMS or voltage averaging NOTE When you select log power averaging the measurement results are the average of the signal level in logarithmic units decibels When you select power average RMS all measured results are converted into power units before averaging and filtering operations and converted back to decibels for displaying Remember there can be significant differences between the average of the log of power and the log of the average power The following are the averaging processes within a spectrum analyzer all of which are affected by this setting Trace averaging see BW Avg averages signal amplitudes on a trace to trace basis Average detector see Detector Average averages signal amplitudes during the time or frequency interval represented by a particular measurement point e Noise Marker see Marker Noise averages signal amplitudes across measurement points to reduce variations for noisy signals e VBW filtering adds video filtering which is a form of averaging of the video signal When manual is selected the type is shown on the left side of the display with a When auto is selected the analyzer chooses the type of averaging When one of the average types is selected manually the analyzer uses that type regardless of other analyzer settings and sets Avg VBW Type to Man Key Path BW Avg or Auto Couple Chapter 2 89 5 D 8 E c 3
379. ference for the multi carrier power measurement Relative values are displayed referenced to the Power Reference value Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Measured power in the reference carrier Terminators dBm Default Terminator dBm History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower CARRier AUTO STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower CARRier AUTO STATe SENSe MCPower CARRier POWer lt dBm gt SENSe MCPower CARRier L POWer 442 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Example MCP CARR AUTO 0 MCP CARR AUTO MCP CARR 100 MCP CARR 5 19 9 Limit Test Pressing Limit Test turns the testing of the limit line on or off When Limit Test is set to On each offset is compared to its upper and lower offset limit In those cases where the power exceeds the limit a red F is placed next to the dBc result to indicate a failure If there are any failures the pass fail indicator area show FAIL in red if there are none it shows PASS in green Any offsets that are in the off state see Offset Freq on page 438 are not measured and their results will not be displayed on screen Key Path Meas Setup More State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 O E WA c e EI bi D
380. fied number of measurements average count is reached s EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat When you set Avg Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previous result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential Remote Command SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONro1 Example CHP AVG TCON EXP CHP AVG TCON 5 14 3 Integ BW Press Integ BW to specify the range of integration used in calculating the power in the channel for example set the main center channel bandwidth Note that the integration bandwidth is displayed on the trace as two markers connected by an arrow Be sure the Span of the instrument is set between 1 and 10 times the integration bandwidth Key Path Meas Setup Key Notes If RRC Filter is on the actual integration bandwidth used is the displayed integration bandwidth multiplied by 1 Filter Alpha State Saved Saved in instrument state 400 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setu
381. fy the horizontal location of the marker Terminators dB Step Key Increment 1dB Range 0 to 50 dB History Added in A 02 00 Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 X dB Sets the marker X position in the current X axis units dB CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 x el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Queries the marker X position in the current x axis units For the response to be valid the marker must be on CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition dB CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition This defines marker X position in display points from 0 to 50 dB Example CALC PST MARK X 30 dB activates a normal marker marker 1 at the 30 dB location on the specified trace see Marker Trace on page 394 CALC PST MARK2 X POS 10 selects marker 2 and moves it to 1 dB location on the specified trace Chapter 5 395 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 13 8 Marker Y Position Remote Command Only Displays the marker Y position vertical of the specified trace see Marker Trace on page 394 in the current Y axis units percent History Added in A 02 00 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 396 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulat
382. g Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previous result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONro1 Example ACP AVG TCON EXP ACP AVG TCON 5 6 3 Chan Integ BW Press Chan Integ BW to specify the range of integration used in calculating the power in the main channel Key Path Meas Setup Key Notes If RRC Filter is on the actual integration bandwidth used is the displayed integration bandwidth multiplied by 1 Filter Alpha State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 2 0 MHz or as defined by the selected radio standard Default Terminator Hz Knob Increment Span 50 if non zero span RBW 100 if zero span Step Key Increment RBW if CF Step is set to Auto with zero span Chapter 5 353 G Ej i WA E Ki ps El D H E bi 3 bi E Ku E El 7 GA Ej Ki 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP Span 10 if CF Step is set to Auto with non zero span CF Step if CF Step is set to Manual Range Depends on the adjacent channel settings and the minimum and maximum
383. g standard Selecting a DVB T filtering standard modifies spectrum analyzer settings for the CHP or CCDF measurement activated under the MEASURE menu 5 3 1 15 1 L SECAM NICAM Pressing L SECAM NICAM selects the filtering masks for the L SECAM NICAM analog television system Key Path Mode Setup DVB T History Added with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 5 3 1 15 2 G PAL NICAM Pressing G PAL NICAM selects the filtering masks for the G PAL NICAM analog television system Key Path Mode Setup DVB T History Added with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 5 3 1 15 3 PAL NICAM Pressing V PAL NICAM selects the filtering masks for the I PAL NICAM analog television system Key Path Mode Setup DVB T History Added with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 340 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 3 2 Radio Std Setup Accesses the key menu for selecting the device packet type or signal bandwidth to be measured Key Path Mode Setup History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 3 2 1 Signal BW Allows you to set the measurement bandwidth when Radio Std None is selected This function is available only when you select None as the standard Key Path Mode Setup Std Setup Factory Preset 3 0 MHz Default Terminator Hz Range The non ze
384. g the frequency or sweep time of the analyzer does not change the trace point of the markers You cannot move the markers off the screen Key Path Marker Factory Preset Ref is the active parameter Factory preset marker mode is Off Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command under Points on page 244 Remote Command See Marker on page 177 for the command to select the control mode CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP lt param gt Sets the reference Start or delta Stop marker X position to a specified point on the X axis in display points values of 0 to 600 or the current number of points in the sweep The marker must already be on CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP Returns the reference Start or delta Stop marker X position in display points Example CALC MARK3 MODE BAND activates or selects marker 3 and sets it to Delta Pair Refer to Marker on page 177 CALC MARK3 X POS STAR 0 moves the reference marker 3 to the left edge 182 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker of the display S a o E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O Chapter 2 183 e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od c o E 5 hea a E Instrument Functions M O Marker 3 1 5 Span Pair Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Span Pai
385. gative Peak On 10 Don t care Average On 0 1 Narrow VBW for low sigma marker readout Normal On 0 1 Don t care noise marker makes is not valid with normal detection Sample On 0 1 Narrow VBW for low sigma marker readout Peak Off 10 Wide VBW for good impulse BW pulsed RF Negative peak Off 10 Don t care Average Off 0 1 Narrow VBW for low sigma trace results Normal Off 1 0 Swept analysis CW signal setting Sample Off 1 0 Wide VBW for good impulse BW pulsed RF 86 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Key Path BW Avg Saved State Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Auto 1 0 Range 0 00001 to 3 0e6 3 000 000 Remote Command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio number SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO Example BAND VID RAT 2 BAND VID RAT BAND VID RAT AUTO 0 BAND VID RAT AUTO 2 2 4 Average Initiates a digital averaging routine that averages the trace points in a number of successive sweeps resulting in trace smoothing You can select the number of sweeps average number with the numeric keypad not the knob or step keys Increasing the average number further smooths the trace To select the type of averaging used press BW Avg Avg VBW Type Averaging restarts when any of the following occurs anew average number is entered any me
386. ge 171 Input Output Key not shown in 44 and 50 GHz models pe863a A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices Input Output Input Port RF RF Coupling Bc DC Input Port RF fimptd Ref f250 MHz LLL eBed aes Key 1ndinojindul sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan Marker Key See page 177 we Oo If no measurement So ischosen Meas Off md Marker Marker e Selected co Select Marker Select Marker Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3 Period Note The menus under Readout Marker are measurement Frequency dependent and vary with each Delta Pai measurement elta Pair Tracking Ref Marker Table LN Inverse Time On Off Ref A pan Pair Marker RII Off Span Center More 2of2 pe865a I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function T A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings sis Jeuy winijeds sdejy nue 209 ULL eBed ees lav Jee sis jeuy unge sde nua 809 8 191deu2 i Menu Maps Spectrum A
387. gnal are shown below in Figure 3 NOTE It is important to set the correct center frequency before initiating this measurement Figure 3 Power Stat CCDF Measurement Results Agilent 19 12 48 Jan 10 2001 Base CH Freq 2 17 GHz Trig Free CCDF HCDMA 36PP MITIS Average Power 13 20 dBm 182 12 8 17 8 817 8 8817 312 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Pressing Meas Setup after Power Stat CCDF has been selected will access the Power Stat CCDF measurement setup menu The factory defaults provide a good starting point for this measurement The settings are adjustable however to meet specific requirements Pressing Radio Standard after Mode Setup has been selected will access all the Radio Standards available for which this measurement can be applied Pressing Meas Control after Power Stat CCDF has been selected will access the Power Stat CCDF measurement control menu which allows you to pause or restart your measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement Key Path MEASURE el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 313 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ ps o c e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command n Results Re
388. h and without power present Example MCP CARR PPR YES NO YES NO YES MCP CARR PPR 5 19 3 4 3 Carrier Width Press Carrier Width to specify the width of each carrier including carriers with no power present There is a corresponding one to one relationship between each carrier width value and the specified number of carriers First press the Carrier key and select the carrier number you wish to define using the Step Keys U fl the knob or the numeric keypad The carrier number selected is shown on the Carrier key Then press the Carrier Width key and enter the width using the numeric keypad Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers Key Notes The Carrier key determines which carrier width you are defining State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz Terminators Hz kHz MHz GHz Chapter 5 435 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Default Terminator Hz Resolution 1Hz Step Key Increment If CF Step Auto is selected span 10 If CF Step Man is selected CF Step Range 0 Hz to 45 MHz History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 436 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power
389. hapter 3 185 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od c o E 5 hea a E Instrument Functions M O Marker Marker Trace 1 2 or 3 or Auto In Auto mode the analyzer places markers on the lowest numbered trace that is in Clear Write mode If no trace is in Clear Write mode it places the marker on the lowest numbered trace in Max Hold mode If there are none then it uses the lowest number trace in Min Hold mode then in View mode For example if trace 1 is in view and trace 2 is in clear write any new marker is assigned to trace 2 Key Path Marker State Saved The Marker Trace for each marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Auto on Trace 1 Range 1to3 Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe 11213 Puts the marker on the specified trace and turns Auto OFF for that marker CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker currently resides even if that marker is in Auto mode CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 Turning Auto off sets the Marker Trace value to the number of the trace on which the marker currently resides CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO The response to the query will be 0 if OFF 1 if ON Example CALC MARK1 TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2 3 1 8 Readout This access a menu that enables you to affect how the x axis informat
390. hat you can open a socket connection to your instrument by using telnet telnet IP address 5025 Characters typed from your keyboard won t be echoed from the instrument and the SCPI prompt won t be given However you will be able to send commands and query the instrument For example you can type idn and the instrument identification string will be returned 530 Chapter 6 NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Using SICL LAN to Control the Instrument SICL LAN is a LAN protocol using the Standard Instrument Control Library SICL It provides control of your instrument over the LAN using a variety of computing platforms I O interfaces and operating systems With SICL LAN you control your remote instrument over the LAN with the same methods you use for a local instrument connected directly to the controller with the GPIB More information about SICL LAN can be found in the HP Standard Instrument Control Library user s guide for HP UX part number E2091 90004 Your instrument implements a SICL LAN server To control the instrument you need a SICL LAN client application running on a computer or workstation that is connected to the instrument over a LAN Typical applications implementing a SICL LAN client include HP Agilent VEE HP Agilent BASIC s National Instrument s LabView with HP Agilent VISA SICL client drivers The SICL LAN protocol is Agilent s implementation of the VXI 1
391. he limit lines display function for spectrum emission mask measurements between On and Off If set to On the absolute limit lines and the relative limit lines are shown on the spectrum emission mask measurement display Key Path Display Limit Display O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset On History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 24 3 Preferences Displays menu keys that enable you to turn the graticule and annotation on or off Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Chapter 5 479 One Button Measurement Functions Display Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 24 3 1 Graticule On Off Pressing Graticule turns the display graticules On or Off Key Path Display Preferences Factory Preset On Factory Default On Terminators Enter History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 24 3 2 Annotation On Off Turns the screen annotation on or off however menu key annotation will remain on the display The screen annotation may not be required for prints or during remote operation Key Path Display Factory Preset and RST On Factory Default On Terminators Enter History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 480 Chapter 5
392. he option number and license key number will also be cleared from the License Key and Option key If your entry was incorrect the error message License key invalid will appear in the status line of your display The option number and license key number can be edited until Chapter 4 277 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z System they are correct NOTE It is possible to enable an option for which the analyzer is not yet configured Therefore the message Option activated does not mean that the option will immediately function For a display of options that are enabled and for which the analyzer is properly configured press System More Show System Key Path System Licensing Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 12 4 Delete License Deletes the license key from memory however the option firmware is not deleted Key Path System Licensing Remote Command SYSTem LKEY DELete application option license key gt Example SYST LKEY DEL BAC 4 8 12 5 Show License Displays the number and description of the licenses installed in your instrument Key Path System Licensing Annunciation Annotation Text Screen Dependencies Couplings The active function is disabled Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 4 8 12 6 I
393. he value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were The query for this parameter will always return 20 values Example SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF ON SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST SWEep TIME 4ms 10ms 5 27 3 7 Abs Start Limit Abs Start Limit is used to set the absolute start limit to the set value then sets the absolute stop limit to the same value as the start limit If any spurs are located above the current setting of Peak Excursn will be added to the results table A red F will be appended to the amplitude value of the spur if the measured amplitude of the spur is above the limit set with Abs Start Limit Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Dependencies Couplings If the limit is set to Auto Abs Start Limit and Abs Stop Limit are coupled to make a flat limit line If set to Man the absolute start and stop limits can take different values to make a sloped limit line Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 0 1 dB Step Key Increment 1dB Range 150 dBm to 50 dBm History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STARt lt integer gt CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STARt Remote Command Notes Th
394. her measurements except Multi Carrier Power Harmonic Distortion Spurious Emissions and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are available for this standard Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN PDC 5 3 1 12 Bluetooth Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard Bluetooth Chapter 5 337 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Power Stat CCDF and Burst Power are the only measurements available for this standard Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN BLUE 5 3 1 13 TETRA Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard TETRA This standard is only available for the Channel Power and ACP measurements Key Type
395. ime of 5 milliseconds WAV BAND TYPE FLAT selects the flat filter type WAV DEC 4 DEC STAT ON selects a decimation of 4 and turns on decimation This reduces the amount of data that needs to be sent since the instrument hardware decimates throws some away INIT to initiate a measurement and acquire the data CALC DATA2 COMP MEAN 25us 526us 579 6us 8 to return the desired data There are two versions of this command depending on your firmware revision Earlier revisions require the optional variables be entered in terms of their position in the trace data array Current instruments allow the variables to be entered in terms of time For early firmware revisions you need to know the sample interval In the waveform measurement it is equal to the aperture value Query WAVeform APERture to find the sample interval Note the WAV APER command always takes decimation into account The sample interval aperture value is dependent on the settings for resolution bandwidth filter type and decimation See the following table to see how these value relate The parameters for this GSM example are MEAN 9 197 1730 or with later firmware MEAN 25us 526us 579 6us 8 MEAN calculates the mean of the measurement points indicated e 9is how many points you want to discard before you look at the data This allows you to skip over any unsettled values at the beginning of the burst You can calculate this start offset by 25us sampleIn
396. imit 2 Dependencies Couplings If either of the limits or margins are turned off the test cannot be turned on That is if both Limit and Margin are set to Off then the test is turned off automatically State Saved Not saved in instrument state Factory Preset and RST Off Factory Default Off when a limit line is created History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 to turn limit lines on or off CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe CALCulate LLINe 1 2 FAIL Example CALC LLIN STATE 1 sets limit line 1 test on CALC LLIN STATE responds with the limit line test status Chapter 2 111 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L Display CALC LLIN FAIL Queries the status of the limit line testing Returns a o if the data passes and returns a 1 if there is a failure This query value is valid only if Margin or Test is On 2 4 5 1 4 Margin On Off Turns margin On or Off Selecting On allows you to set a limit line offset for the selected limit line Only positive margins are allowed for lower limits and only negative margins are allowed for upper limits The margin lines are displayed in a light grey color If the limit lines are off and margin is on the trace is checked against the margin then a pass or fail margin is
397. integer eee 399 SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt lesse m RR R 399 SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONrol K bonentpalIRkfeat 000 eee eee 400 SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONYrol 400 L SENSeLCHPower AVE Rape STATE OFF ON D L a cossesnen nan cand kk esiri Rin 399 SENSe CHPower AVERagel STATe sw gR a RR RR es 399 SENSe CHPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration reg 401 SENSe CHPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration 0 0 cece ne 401 SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC ALPHA number 404 SENSe C HPower FILTer RRC ALPHA 0 0 ee eee nee 404 SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 eee ee ee eee ee 402 SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC STATe 0 0 cece eee ene 402 SENSe C HPower FREQuency SPAN lt freq gt nnno nn nnana naana aaae 401 L SENSe CHPower FREQuency SPAN ui xa aR a RKR eee eee dekre ede eee C RR RE Rus 401 SENSE COBBecium CSETALUDELG uasa pentran Rec RR RR RR RR RR KE 67 SENSe CORRection CSET ALLI STATe ObIONTolTI n BRRVMRR 61 LSENSel CORRection CSETALLISTATEe 0 ac ces eee ee ee RR RR RAE N RN RR RR 61 SENSe CORRection CSETI1 2 3 4 DATA lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt 62 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA MERGe freq rel ampl freq rel ampl 62 LSENSel CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA A agg RKR RENE RR RR de RR RO RR RR RR Rm d 63 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DELete RR 66 SENSe COR
398. integer gt The query for this parameter will always return 20 values SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO L SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo 5 27 3 6 Sweep Time Sweep Time is used to set the sweep time of the analyzer When Auto is selected the analyzer determines the optimum setting while Man enables you to determine the setting Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 1525 2 35 b 7 5 10 2 Range Sweep time range of your analyzer Chapter 5 491 el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E O One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions Remote Command SENSe SPURious RANGe SENSe SPURious RANGe SENSe SPURious RANGe sweeptimes SENSe SPURious RANGe 492 LIST LIST LIST LIST SWEep TIME AUTO SWEep TIME time time SWEep TIME SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 up to 20 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions Remote Command Notes This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range t
399. ints Low displays every 10th trace Chapter 4 261 N LI a N E 2 O E 2 LL E o E E E s 7 E Instrument Functions P Z System High displays every trace Factory Preset Low Remote Command CALibration DISPlay LEVel OFF LOW HIGH CALibration DISPlay LEVel Example CAL DISP LEV HIGH 4 8 4 7 Select Time Corrections Remote Command Only Controls time corrections used to compensate for the complex magnitude and phase response of the analog and digital IF hardware When only scalar magnitude FFT flatness is required time corrections take more CPU cycles and so are less efficient than frequency corrections For demod or other time based not FFT measurements only time corrections can improve the flatness that results from imperfect IF hardware When the time correction functionality is set to Auto the default the individual measurements activate the corrections when they are needed NOTE Turning time corrections on or off effects all measurements Time corrections should be left in Auto unless you have specific reasons for forcing them on or off Always return time corrections to Auto Factory Preset Auto Remote Command CALibration TCORrections AUTO ON OFF Example CAL TCOR OFF 4 8 5 Config I O Displays the keys and menus that enable you to identify and change the current GPIB address and LAN settings Key Path System Remote Command There is no remote command for this key
400. ion block and in the upper right corner of the display indicates the power ratio dB difference and probability percentage difference of the two markers 392 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Key Path Marker after MEASURE Power Stat CCDF is selected el i U E pb E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 393 o c e 5 o c E H Ld c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Remote Command See Marker on page 177 for the mode command Example CALC PST MARK3 MODE DELT selects marker 3 as a delta marker and places a reference marker at the 0 dB point on the specified trace see Marker Trace on page 394 If marker 3 is OFF it places both the active and the reference markers at the 0 dB point of the specified trace 5 13 4 Off Turns off the selected marker In addition Off also turns off functions related to the selected marker Key Path Marker after MEASURE Power Stat CCDF is selected Remote Command See Select Marker on page 180 for the command to select the control mode Example CALC PST MARK3 STAT OFF selects marker 3 and sets it to Off 5 13 5 Marker Trace Chooses which trace the selected marker will be placed on You can pic
401. ion for individual options in the measurement personalities user s guides NOTE Not all options can be enabled using this system and there is no way to turn off an option through this system Once an option has been licensed for a given analyzer it cannot be transferred to a different analyzer Key Path System Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 12 1 Option Activates the alpha editor enabling you to enter the designation for the option to be installed An option is a three character string that specifies the option or application that is to be installed as found in the catalog To terminate the entry press Enter or Return An external keyboard may also be used for this entry The option number will appear on the second line of the Option key Key Path System Licensing State Saved Not saved in instrument state SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Remote Command See License Key on page 277 Example SYST LKEY B78 B62A35B37679 SYST LKEY B78 276 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 12 2 License Key Activates the alpha editor to allow you to enter the license key number for the option to be installed The license key number is a hexadecimal number that will require entry of both letters and numbers Use the front panel numeric keyboard to enter numerical values You will see your entry in the active function area A license key is a 12 character hexadecimal st
402. ion for the selected marker is displayed in the marker area top right of display and the active function area of the display It only affects the readout on the display of the horizontal position information for example frequency NOTE It does not affect the way this information is sent remotely in response to the CALC MARK X command Key Path Marker State Saved In instrument state for each marker Factory Preset Frequency for non zero spans and Time for zero spans Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout FREQuency TIME ITIMe PER1od 186 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout Example CALC MARK3 X READ TIME sets the marker 3 Readout to Time 3 1 8 1 Frequency Sets the marker readout to Frequency displaying the absolute frequency of a normal marker or the frequency of the delta marker relative to the reference marker Frequency readout is the default setting in non zero spans and is not available in zero spans Key Path Marker Readout Remote Command See Readout on page 186 for this command Example CALC MARK2 X READ FREQ sets the marker 2 Readout to Frequency 3 1 8 2 Period Sets the marker readout to Period displaying the reciprocal of the frequency at the marker position or the reciprocal of the frequency separation of the two markers in a delta marker mode Period readout is not available in zero spans If the markers are at the sa
403. ions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Integrity Signal Enable STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal ENABle number STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register which also sets the Integrity Summary bit bit 9 in the Questionable Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the 580 Chapter 8 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Signal Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition STATus QUESt onable INTegrity SIGNal NTRansition number STATus QUEStonable INTegrity SIGNal NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register will set the
404. ions M O Marker There are four conditions that can occur when Delta Pair mode is selected s f marker mode is Off the delta marker and reference marker are placed at the center of the display s f marker mode is Normal the delta marker and reference marker are placed at the current marker position on the trace e Ifthe marker mode is Delta the current marker position remains unchanged and the reference marker is placed on the trace at the reference marker position e Ifthe marker mode is Span Pair the marker positions remain unchanged The difference between Delta Pair and Delta modes is that in Delta Pair mode the reference marker stays on the trace and you can adjust its trace point The note Tracking Ref appears on the Delta Pair key because in effect the reference marker tracks the trace By comparison in Delta mode the reference marker does not track changes in the trace results it remains anchored in amplitude and frequency Once positioned the markers stay on the trace points you have selected Ref and Delta markers maintain their displayed x axis location but not their frequency values when you change a parameter that redefines the x axis scale Reset these markers when parameters such as Span or Center Freq are changed Adjusting the Span changes the difference between the two markers Changing the Center changes the center point of the two markers This function is useful in functions such as Band Power Changin
405. ird order intermodulation TOI measurement computes and displays the output intercept point IP3 and places markers upon the trace to indicate the measured signals and third order products For more information see Meas Setup Intermod TOI on page 423 Key Path MEASURE Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command Results Returned CONFigureTOIN Not Applicable INITiate TOIN FETCh TOIN Returns 6 scalar results in the following order MEASure TOIN READ TOIN 1 The worst case Output Intercept Power value in dBm The worst case Output Intermod Point in Hz The lower Output Intercept Power value in dBm The lower Output Intermod Point in Hz The upper Output Intercept Power value in dBm The upper Output Intermod Point in Hz ON Lh MA KM FETCh TOIN IP2 Returns 12 scalar results in the following order MEASure TOIN IP2 READ TOIN IP2 1 The worst case Output Intermod Point value in Hz 2 The worst case Output Intermod Power value in dBm 3 The worst case Output Intercept Power value in dBm The lower base frequency value in Hz The lower base power value in dBm The upper base frequency value in Hz The upper base power value in dBm The lower Output Intermod Point in Hz 9 The lower Output Intermod Power value in dBm 10 The lower Output Intercept Power value in dBm 11 The upper Output Intermod Power value in dBm 12 The upper Output Intermod Point in Hz 13 The
406. irmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 7 2 Bar Graph Pressing Bars turns the graphic bar display on or off O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Key Path Trace View Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function Chapter 5 367 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Trace View ACP Measurement 5 7 3 Combined Pressing Combined selects the measurement to be displayed as a bar graph and spectrum as shown below 3 Agilent 17 14 33 Jun 6 2002 Meas Setup Rvg Number 18 Base Ch Freq 1 6Hz Trig Free Rdj Channel Power NRDC mm n Off Number of Averages 10 Avg Mode Exp Repeat Chan Integ BH 48 0000 kHz Offset Limits Meas Type Total Pwr Ref Optimize Ref Level More luf Key Path Trace View Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 7 4 Combined View Units Pressing Combined View Units selects the units dBc or dBm for the floating numeric displays when Combined is selected Key Path Trace View Factory Preset dBc History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no rem
407. is for the reference marker In Zero Span the reference marker remains fixed at the trace point on which it was placed Also changing Center Frequency does not move the reference marker while in Zero Span The markers will be turned off if the scale type is changed between log and linear Key Path Marker Remote Command See Marker on page 177 for the mode command Example CALC MARK4 MODE DELT selects marker 4 as a delta marker and places a reference marker at the marker 4 position If marker 4 is OFF it places both the active and the reference markers at the center of the display 3 1 4 Delta Pair Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta Pair see Marker on page 177 In Delta Pair mode the display shows the difference between the delta marker and a reference marker and enables you to adjust both the Ref start and Delta stop markers independently After you turn on the delta Pair function pressing the key again toggles between the two markers you are controlling When Ref is underlined you are controlling the reference marker When A is underlined you are controlling the delta marker The start marker number is indicated with a number and an R above the marker for example 1R and the delta marker is indicated with a marker number Chapter 3 181 a o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od c o E 5 hea a E Instrument Funct
408. is parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were The query for this parameter will always return 20 values Related commands are SENSe SPURious RANGe L LIST SWEep TIME AUTO SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST SWEep TIME Chapter 5 493 el i al E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 494 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 5 27 3 8 Abs Stop Limit Abs Stop Limit is used to determine the limit above which spurs will report a failure If any spurs are located above the current setting of Peak Excursn will be added to the results table A red F will be appended to the amplitude value of the spur if the measured amplitude of the spur is above the limit set with Abs Stop Limit Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Dependencies Couplings If the limit is set to Auto Abs Start Limit and Abs Stop Limit are coupled to make a flat limit line If set to Man the absolute start and stop limits can take different values to
409. isa h include lt stdio h gt void main Open session to GPIB device at address 18 ViOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM ViOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp vi Initialize device viPrintf vi RST n Send an IDN string to the device printf vi IDN WMn Read results viScanf vi t amp buf Print results printf Instrument identification string s n buf Close sessions viClose vi viClose defaultRM Including the VISA Declarations File For C and C programs you must include the visa h header file at the beginning of every file that contains VTL function calls include visa h This header file contains the VISA function prototypes and the definitions for all VISA constants and error codes The visa h header file includes the visatype h header file The visatype h header file defines most of the VISA types The VISA types are used throughout VTL to specify data types used in the functions For example the viOpenDefaultRM function requires a pointer to a parameter of type ViSession If you find ViSession in the visatype h header file you will find that ViSession is eventually typed as an unsigned long Opening a Session A session is a channel of communication Sessions must first be opened Chapter 6 549 E fe Kei o 3 3 E io T E E Q E 3 bi E D o un c E c 9 G E ra o E
410. ise ratio Bypass or for the best FF T speed Autorange Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in Instrument State 80 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple Factory Preset Autorange Remote Command SENSe ADC RANGe AUTO NONE SENSe ADC RANGe Example ADC RANG NONE 2 1 7 1 Autorange Turns the ADC ranging to automatic which provides the best signal to noise ratio Auto Couple All sets the ADC ranging to Autorange Autorange is usually preferred over Bypass Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in Instrument State Remote Command Example ADC RANG AUTO 2 1 7 2 Bypass Turning the ADC ranging to bypass mode allows higher throughput for FFT measurements It can improve FFT measurement speed by 10 to 50 Bypass also provides better phase noise though the effect is negligible when using swept analysis or for offsets below 300 kHz The f improvement is a few dB in FFT mode at 800 kHz offset Bypass allows triggered FFT measurements to occur at the trigger time instead of following an autoranging time Therefore whenever the trigger selected is anything other than Free Run and the Manual FFT sweep selection is made the ADC hardware is set to Bypass regardless of the setting of ADC Ranging See Making Gated FFT Measurements With Your PSA on page 74 Another advantage of Bypass is lower IF harmonic distortion which may be visible with very high signal levels at the input
411. isplayed at the end of each sweep Off disables the measurement averaging Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Range 1 to 1000 Remote Command SENSe SPURious AVERage COUNt integer SENSe SPURious AVERage COUNt 7 el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 SENSe SPURious AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 turns the averaging on or off SENSe SPURious AVERage L STATe 7 Example SPUR AVER COUN 10 SPUR AVER OFF Chapter 5 485 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 5 27 2 Avg Mode Selects the type of termination control used for the averaging function Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat When you set Avg Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previous result data is cleared and the
412. itching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Hence any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up Factory Preset 1 Spectrum Analysis If Preset Type Mode is selected then the analyzer settings are preset but it stays in that selected mode Remote Command INSTrument NSELect lt integer gt INSTrument NSELect Remote Command Notes Enter one of the following integers in the command to set the analyzer mode Mode NSELect Mode Keyword Number Basic 8 BASIC cdmaOne 4 CDMA CDMA1xEV DO 15 CDMAI1XEV cdma2000 10 CDMA2K EDGE with GSM 13 EDGEGSM 89600 VSA Link Software 231 LINK NADC 5 NADC Noise Figure 219 NFIGURE PDC 6 PDC Phase Noise 14 PNOISE Spectrum Analysis 1 SA W CDMA for 3GPP 9 WCDMA Example INST NSEL 4 Chapter 3 205 S 7 E 3 oO E T E Ej 7 El n LI O Instrument Functions M O MODE 3 5 8 Application Mode Catalog Query Remote command only Returns
413. ite printing on color capable printers This key is inactive greyed out if Color Capable is set to No see page 230 Key Path Print Setup State Saved Persistent survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Off Remote Command HCOPy IMAGe COLor STATe OFF ON 0 1 HCOPy IMAGe COLor L STATe 7 Example HCOP IMAG COL ON 234 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Save 4 5 Save Saves analyzer states traces and screen data to a floppy drive or internal flash memory C drive as configured by the File menu For example if you have configured the instrument to save a trace to the C drive every time you press Save it will save the current trace to a file with a new default trace file name You must first configure the save file Type Format Source and Destination by using File Save before pressing the front panel Save key Pressing the front panel Save key will then be the same as pressing File Save Save Now Key Path Front panel key Remote Command See File on page 127 Use MMEMory STORe SCReen file name gt Use MMEMory STORe STATe 1 file name Use MMEMory STORe TRACe label file name Use MMEMory STORe LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 file name gt Use MMEMory STORe CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER lt file name gt Chapter 4 235 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Instrume
414. ith your VEE application Consult your VEE documentation for information how to do this If you are using Agilent VEE and SICL LAN the logical unit number is limited to the range of 0 8 The logical unit number is the same as the interface select code ISC VEE reserves ISC values 9 18 and does not allow you to use them for SICL LAN communications with your instrument VEE also does not allow any ISC values higher than 18 After you have the VISA SICL LAN I O drivers installed perform the steps below to set up VEE to control your instrument 1 On your computer or workstation select I O Instrument Manager 2 Add a new GPIB device with an address of 7XX where XX is the GPIB device address from your instrument Chapter 6 533 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Figure 6 1 Adding Your Instrument as a VEE Device File Edit View Debug Flow Device I O Data Display Window Help Olsens KIS lell Slr a al l isl Xlii Spx i e WRITE TEXT IDN STR EOL x HEWLETT PACKARD 8712ET US36100007 W 00 17 T Instrument Manager EI Device Configuration Instrument List ______________________ Configuration EIS L My configuration Add Name FESTTEAET T N HP IBO d x3 HP IBZ Delete Interface HP iB x m E99 HP IB7 at 15 4 45 236 Edit Address eg 714 718 Refresh Gateway 15 4 45 236
415. ithm below 1 Cntr Freq 1 Ref Freq 0 5 Carrier Width of Ref Carrier 2 Cntr Freq 2 Cntr Freq 1 Total of all Carrier Widths excluding the Ref Carrier Width 3 Cntr Freq Cntr Freq 2 Total of all Carrier Widths 2 Pressing Ref Carrier Freq Auto distributes the carriers evenly around the current center frequency The reference carrier frequency is then calculated using the algorithm below 1 Ref Freq 1 Cntr Freq Total of all Carrier Widths 2 2 Ref Freq 2 Ref Freq 1 Total of all Carrier Widths excluding the Ref Carrier Width 3 Ref Freq Ref Freq 2 0 5 Carrier Width of Ref Carrier The above procedure ensures carrier visibility on the analyzer display Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Dependencies Couplings The reference carrier can be re assigned by implementing changes to carrier power present values State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Auto Calculated based on current center frequency Refer to the algorithm above when defining the Ref Carrier Freq Auto key Terminators Hz kHz MHz GHz Default Terminator GHz Resolution 1 Hz Knob Increment Span 50 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Step Key Increment If CF Step Auto is selected span 10 If CF Step Man is selected CF Step Range Analyzer minimum to analyzer maximum History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote
416. ive Distribution Function CCDF Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 yY Queries the marker Y value or delta in the current y axis units The marker must be ON for the response to be valid Example CALC PST MARK1 Y 5 13 9 Marker Maximum and Minimum Remote Command Only Moves the marker to the maximum or minimum detected amplitude value on the display If the marker is off this command has no effect History Added in A 02 00 Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 MINimum Example CALC PST MARK MAX CALC PST MARK3 MIN el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 397 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 398 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Channel Power CHP 5 14 Meas Setup Channel Power CHP When the channel power measurement has been selected in the Measure key menu of the Spectrum Analysis Mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu The Channel Power measurement measures the power and power spectral density in the channel bandwidth that you specify One marker pair on the display indicates the edges of the channel bandwidth The center frequency
417. k Measured Gaussian or Reference Key Path Marker after MEASURE Power Stat CCDF is selected State Saved The Marker Trace for each marker is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Measured Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe MEASured GAUSsian REFerence Puts the marker on the specified trace CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe The query returns the type of the trace on which the marker currently resides Example CALC PST MARK1 TRAC GAUSsian places marker 1 on the Gaussian trace 5 13 6 Marker All Off Turns off all markers 394 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Marker Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF NOTE Selecting any measurement including Meas Off under Measure turns off the marker table Key Path Marker after MEASURE Power Stat CCDF is selected Remote Command CALCulate PSTatistic MARKer 1 2 3 4 AOFF Example CALC PST MARK AOFF turns off all markers 5 13 7 Marker X Position Sets the marker X position horizontal to a specified point on the X axis in the current X axis units dB If the value chosen would place the marker off screen the marker will be placed at the left or right side of the display on the specified trace see Marker Trace on page 394 If the marker is off this command has no effect Key Path Marker Key Notes When a marker is active you may use the knob numeric keypad or ft U keys to speci
418. lable is dependent on the reference level offset That is Ref Level Ref Level Offset must be in the range 170 to 30 dBm For example the reference level value range can be initially set to values from 170 dBm to 30 dBm with no reference level offset If the reference level is first set to 20 dBm then the reference level offset can be set to values of 50 to 150 dB If the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB then the reference level can be set to values of 200 dBm to 0 dBm In this case the reference level is clamped at 0 dBm because the maximum limit of 30 dBm is reached with a reference level setting of 0 dBm with an offset of 30 dB If instead the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB then the reference level can be set to values of 140 to 60 dBm When a reference level offset is entered the offset value appears on the left side of the display under Offst as opposed to frequency offsets which appear at the bottom of the display To eliminate an offset press Ref Lvl Offst 0 and dB Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale Key Notes Only numeric entries are valid the knob and step keys are not applicable to this function Annunciation 58 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Annotation The offset is displayed to left of Trace window third from the top just below the scale type State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 0 0 dB Range 327 6 dB to 327 6 dB
419. le Save Format 2 5 2 3 5 Reverse Bitmap When the file type is Screen this key selects the inverse bitmap file format GIF for your saved data For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path File Save Format 2 5 2 3 6 Reverse Metafile When the file type is Screen this key selects the inverse metafile file format WMF for your saved data For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path File Save Format Chapter 2 141 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI LI lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 2 4 Source When the file type is set to Trace this key allows you to save trace 1 2 3 or All Saving trace All saves all traces in a single TRC file When the file type is set to Corrections Source accesses the Antenna Cable Other and User menu keys which allow you to select the type of correction to be saved When the file type is set to Limits Source accesses the Limit 1 and Limit 2 menu keys Limit 1 and Limit 2 provide data sets to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications Limit sets can hold up to 200 points and can only be saved individually For any other Save type Source is disabled greyed out Key Path File Save State Saved Source is not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Source survives Factory Pres
420. le INTegrity NTRansition number 579 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition 2 0 0 0 ee eee eens 579 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition number 0 00 cee eee eee 579 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition cee eens 579 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal CONDition 0 0 0 0 0 0 ccc es 580 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal ENABle number 580 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal ENABle 0 0 0 ene 580 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal NTRansition number 581 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal NTRansition 0 0 0 00 cece eens 581 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal PTRansition number 581 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal PTRansition 0 00000 cece eens 581 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal EVENt 0 0 ee eee eee eee 580 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated CONDition 0 0 00 c ee eee ee 582 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle 00 ccc cee eee eee 582 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle 00 ccc cee eee 582 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition lt number gt 583 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition 0 0 00 cee eee 583 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition lt number gt 583 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition nananana aaneen 583 STATus QUEStionable IN
421. le and preset Factory Preset No effect persistent variable survives power cycle and preset 106 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display Factory Default Center History Added with firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command DISPlay AFUNction POSition TOP Example DISP AFUN POS TOP 2 4 4 2 Center Displays the active function in the center left side of the display 3 Agilent 03 55 12 Nov 8 2001 Marker Wel 25 00 GHz S Select Marker Ee Sr Atten 16 dB Normal Marker 25 000000000 GHz Delta Pair 61 65 dBm p Ino WD Span Pair Span Center Center 25 00 GHz Res EN 3 MHz Key Path Display Active Fctn Position Readback Center reads back to line 3 of this key State Saved Not saved in instrument state survives power cycle and preset Factory Preset No effect persistent variable survives power cycle and preset Factory Default Center History Added with firmware revision A 04 00 Remote Command DISPlay AFUNction POSition CENTer Example DISP AFUN POS CENT 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Chapter 2 107 A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Ld c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 4 3 Bottom Displays the active function in the bottom left corner of the display 3 Agilent 01 44 29 Nov 8 2001 Marker r1 25 80 GHz Atten 10 dB 59 99 dBm eee Normal Delta Delta Pair
422. lent com pub mpusup pc binfiles iop index html The following assumes a LAN connection between your computer and your instrument This will not work for the GPIB to LAN gateway 1 Install VISA revision G 02 02 or higher un c o E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a 532 Chapter 6 NOTE NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Run I O configuration Select LAN Client from the available interface types Press Configure Enter an interface name such as lanl Enter a logical unit number such as 7 Select Okay Select VISA LAN Client from the available interface types o 0 A Oo 0 Fw M Press Configure 10 Enter a VISA interface name such as GPIBI 11 Enter the host name or IP address of your instrument in the host name field such as aaa companyname com or 137 12 255 755 Changing the host name in your instrument does not change your LAN system representation of the host name You must work through your local system administrator to change the host name on your LAN system and then change it to match in your instrument 12 Enter a Remote SICL address such as GPIB7 13 Set the LAN interface to match the defined LAN client 14 Select OK 15 Close I O Configuration by selecting OK Controlling Your Instrument with SICL LAN and HP Agilent VEE Before you can use SICL LAN with VEE you need to set up VISA SICL LAN I O drivers for use w
423. level offset Max Mixer Level Y Axis Units State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 0 dBm Range Determined by the settings of the input attenuator reference level offset external amplitude gain and whether the preamp Option 1DS is on or off Examples 170 dBm to 30 dBm with zero reference level offset 180 dBm to 20 dBm with 10 dB ext amp gain 160 dBm to 40 dBm with 10 dB reference level offset 170 dBm to 0 dBm with preamp on Option 1DS Remote Command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ampl gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVe1 Example DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 20 dbm Sets the reference level to 20 dBm which displays in the current Y Axis Units For example if the Y Axis Units are dBuV then 127 dBuV will be displayed Chapter 2 49 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E n c o E 5 Im E D E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 2 Attenuation Allows you to adjust the input attenuation Press Atten Step to set the attenuation step so that attenuation will change in 2 dB or 10 dB increments The analyzer input attenuator reduces the power level of the input signal delivered to the input mixer If set manually the attenuator is recoupled when Attenuation Auto is selected To enter a value below 6 dB you must use the front panel numeric keypad Attenuation is coupled to
424. ll of the contents of directory xxxxxx Press Delete Now again to proceed or any other key to abort xxxxxx is the full path and directory name To quickly delete all of the file in a directory select the file at the top of the list and press Delete Now repeatedly until all the files are deleted Key Path File Delete Remote Command MMEMory DELete file name gt deletes a file MMEMory RDIRectory lt directory name gt deletes a directory Remote Command Notes If lt file name gt does not exist a File Name Error occurs file name gt and directory name gt must include the complete path Lowercase characters are read as uppercase Example MMEM DEL C Mdestinat trc removes the file C DESTINAT TRC MMEM RDIR C myDir removes directory C MMYDIR and all files and subdirectories within that directory 2 5 4 2 Type Allows you to select the type of file you want to delete See File Types on page 127 and Type on page 131 for more information Allows you to select the type of files to be displayed for you to delete Common types of instrument data files include trace data limit line data and amplitude correction data The catalog displays all files if Type is set to All or files of the currently selected file type All directories are always displayed Key Path File Delete 2 5 4 3 Sort Allows you to view your saved files according to a selected file attribute
425. ly if the selected spur is in the range that is different from the current range settings A marker identifies the currently selected spur on the trace NOTE This key is enabled only when Meas Type is set to Examine and only upon completion of a measurement Key Path Meas Setup Saved State No values are saved to state Factory Preset 1 Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 Range 1 to 100 Remote Command SENSe SPURious SPUR integer SENSe SPURious SPUR 5 27 6 Ref Level Pressing Ref Level sets the reference level of the analyzer Key Path Meas Setup Saved State Ref Level state is saved to instrument state Ref Level value is recalculated for each active range the value is not stored in instrument state Factory Preset 0 00 dBm Knob Increment 1 Step Key 498 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions Increment 10 Range 180 dBm to 20 dBm Remote Command SENSe SPURious POWer RF LEVel lt integer gt SENSe SPURious POWer L RF LEVel SENSe SPURious POWer RF RANGe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SPURious POWer RF RANGe AUTO Example SPUR POW RF LEV 10 SPUR POW RF RANG AUTO ON 5 27 7 Fast Spurious Meas Pressing Fast Spurious Meas turns the fast spurious measurement test on or off Pressing Fast Spurious Meas to On provides a faster method of execution as with fast spurious testing spurs above the limit line ar
426. m For Scale Type Lin Volts Remote Command UNIT POWer DBM DBMV DBUV V W UNIT POWer Remote Command Notes The settings of Y Axis Units and Scale Type affect how the data is read over the remote interface When using the remote interface no units are returned so you must know what the Y Axis units are to interpret the results Example 1 set the following Scale Type Log Y Axis Units dBm Scale Div 1 dB Ref Level 10 dBm This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB Thus if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely as 5 Example 2 set the following Scale Type Lin Y Axis Units Volts Ref Level 100 mV 10 mV div 56 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale This sets the top line to 100 mV and the bottom line to 0 V so each vertical division represents 10 mV Thus if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top it represents 50 mV and will read out remotely as 50 Example UNIT POW d m UNIT POW 2 0 7 1 dBm Sets the amplitude units to dBm Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Y Axis Units Remote Command See Y Axis Units on page 56 Example UNIT POW DBM 2 0 7 2 dBmV Sets the amplitude units to dBmV Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Y Axis Units Remote Command See Y Axis Units on page 56 Example UNIT POW DBMV 2 0 7 3 dBuV Set
427. m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Spectrum Emissions Mask 5 23 3 Integrated Power Press Integrated Power to view the measurement results of Spectrum Ref Total Pwr Seg Offset measurements in the graph window as integrated absolute and relative peak power and frequency The absolute and relative peak power levels integrated throughout the bandwidths between the start and stop frequencies and those corresponding offset frequency ranges on both sides of the reference channel are displayed in the text window Key Path Trace View Saved State Saved in instrument state Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 478 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Display Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM 5 24 Display Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Displays menu keys that enable you to configure parameters for the CCDF measurement NOTE The keys described below are measurement dependent To access the display menus for the SEM measurement press Measure Spectrum Emission Mask then Display 5 24 1 Full Screen Expands the measurement window horizontally over the entire instrument display Pressing any other key that results in a new menu cancels the full screen function Key Path Display Key Path Display State Saved Not saved in state Factory Preset Off Factory Default Off History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 5 24 2 Limit Display Allows you to toggle t
428. make a sloped limit line Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 0 1 dB Step Key Increment 1dB Range 150 dBm to 50 dBm History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate SPURious RANGe L LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP lt integer gt lt integer gt CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP CALCulate SPURious RANGe LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate SPURious RANGe L LIST LIMit ABSolute UPPER DATA STOP AUTO Remote Command Notes This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were The query for this command will always return 20 values Example CALC SPUR LIN ABS DATA 23 27 CALC SPUR LIM ABS DATA AUTO ON ON ON ON Chapter 5 495 O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 5 27 3 9 Peak Excursn Peak Excursn sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals tha
429. me frequency in a delta marker mode the result will be the reciprocal of 0 which is infinitely large The display will show a very large number Key Path Marker Readout Remote Command See Readout on page 186 for this command Example CALC MARK2 X READ PER 3 1 8 3 Time Sets the marker readout to Time displaying the time interval between a normal marker and the start of a sweep or the time of the delta marker relative to the reference marker Time is the default setting in zero spans With a span of zero the time value is the time position relative to the start of the sweep In a delta marker mode it is the sweep time interval between the two markers Key Path Marker Readout Remote Command See Readout on page 186 for this command Example CALC MARK2 X READ TIME Chapter 3 187 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O Instrument Functions M O Marker 3 1 8 4 Inverse Time Sets the marker readout to Inverse Time displaying the reciprocal of sweep time between two markers This function is only available when in both zero span and in a delta marker modes If the markers are at the same x position the time between them is 0 so the reciprocal of sweep time is infinitely large The display will show a very large number O 1 E KA E 2 E 2 LL E o E E Iz s 7 Key Path Marker Readout Remote Command See Readout on page 186 for thi
430. ment Functions Meas Setup Burst Power 5 8 Meas Setup Burst Power When Burst Power has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis Mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu The burst power measurement is an accurate method of determining the average power for the specified burst Key Path Front panel key History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 8 1 Avg Number Press Avg Number On to specify the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result The average is displayed at the end of each sweep Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Range 1to 1000 History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe BPOWer AVERage COUNt integer SENSe BPOWer AVERage COUNt el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 SENSe BPOWer AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BPOWer AVERage L STATe Example BPOW AVER COUN 100 BPOW AVER ON Chapter 5 371 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Burst Power 5 8 2 Avg Mode Press Avg Mode to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function to either Exp or Repeat This deter
431. ment Results Agilent 18 15 28 Jan 8 2001 Meas Setup Base CHFreq 2 17 GHz Trig Free Rvg Number Occupied Bandwidth cdma2000 SR1 P uM Number of Averages 10 NER Exp Repeat Atten 5 dB Max Hold On Off 9 p Occ BH Z Pwr o 99 00 7 E OBH Span 2 00000000 MHz g s z USU E e Occupied Bandwidth Occ BW 7 Pur 26 00 p 1 2472 MHz S Transmit Freq Error Optimize T x dB Bandwidth Ref Level 5 ET S NOTE The Transmit Freq Error displayed above is defined as the difference between the f nl and the tuned center frequency of the signal Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 26 dB Default Terminator dB Range 100 0 dB through 0 1 dB Chapter 5 455 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW Remote Command SENSe OBWidth XDB dB value SENSe OBWidth XDB Example OBW XDB 50 dB OBW XDB 5 21 7 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There will always be a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset n a Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e 456
432. mines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat When you set Avg Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previous result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential Range EXPonential REPeat History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe BPOWer AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe BPOWer AVERage TCONro1 Example BPOW AVG TCON EXP BPOW AVG TCON 5 8 3 Average Type Allows you to specify the type of result averaging to be performed Log Selects averaging that sums the trace data and divides by the number of data points s RMS Selects averaging that converts trace data from dB to power units then averages the power trace data This selection requires more time to perform Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset RMS Range RMS or Log History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe BPOWer AVERage TYPe LPOWer POW
433. mit values are computed between points in the limit table The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale which may be linear or logarithmic Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 State Saved Persistent retains settings even through a power cycle Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Factory Default Log for a new limit History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE Example CALC LLIN AMPLLINT TYPE LOG sets limit lines 1 amplitude interpolation to LOG CALC LLIN AMPLLINT TYPE responds with the limit line interpolation type Chapter 2 119 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 2 X Axis Units Selects how the limit line segments are defined Pressing X Axis Units selects whether the limit lines will be entered using frequency Freq or sweep time Time to define the segments They can be specified as a table of limit line segments of amplitude versus frequency or of amplitude versus time A time value of zero corresponds to the start of the sweep which is at the left edge of the graticule Switching the limit line definition between Freq and Time will erase both of the curre
434. mits State Saved Not saved in instrument state History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Chapter 2 109 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 1 4 Type Upper Lower Allows you to define the limit you are editing as either an upper or lower limit An Upper limit fails if the trace exceeds the limit Lower limit fails if the trace falls below the limit Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 Dependencies Couplings If a margin has already been set for this limit line and this key is used to change the limit type then the margin value is reset to 0 dB State Saved Not saved in instrument state Survives power cycle and preset The limit line data is saved in files Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Factory Default Limits are off by default Upper for Limit 1 then a limit line is created Lower for Limit 2 then a limit line is created History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 TYPE UPPer LOWer CALCulate LLINe 1 12 TYPE Example CALC LLIN2 TYPE LOW sets limit line 2 as a lower limit CALC LLIN1 TYPE responds with the limit line 1 limit type 2 4 5 1 2 Limit Display Turns limit line display On or Off Either Limit or Margin as well as Test must be turned on to turn o
435. mmand SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe Remote Command Notes SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe must be set to on for this command to function CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSETI is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSETS is Other CSETA is User Example CORR CSET2 ON CORR CSET2 2 0 10 2 2 Edit Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude correction factor set It puts the analyzer into a split screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data Pressing ESC while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen New points will be applied only after the editor is closed Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Cable Other or User Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel_amp1 gt Creates an amplitude correction factor set SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA MERGe freq rel ampl freq rel ampl Adds the points with the specified values to the current amplitude correction data allowing you to merge correction data If too much 62 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale data is merged as many points as possible are merged into the existing data and then an error is reported SENSe CORRe
436. model number product number serial number ethernet address host ID firmware revision revision date options and system statistics Key Path System Annunciation Annotation Text Screen Dependencies Couplings Active function is disabled SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Preset Off Remote Command IDN Returns four fields separated by commas Manufacturer Model Serial number Firmware version Example of returned string Agilent Technologies E4440A US00000123 A 01 01 SYSTem OPTions OPT Returns a string of all the installed instrument options It is a comma separated list such as BAC BAH Example IDN 270 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System OPT 4 88 Show Hdwr Gives detailed information about the hardware installed on your instrument Key Path System Annunciation Annotation Text screen Dependencies Couplings Active function is disabled SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Preset Off Remote Command 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N SYSTem CONF HARD ON OFF Example SYST CONF HARD OFF 4 8 9 Color Palette Displays the Color Palette menu keys that set the display screen attributes Key Path System SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None State Saved Not saved in Instrument State survives Preset and power cycle Preset Not affected by Preset Factory Default Default Remote
437. mware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio value SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency SPAN BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO Example FREQ SPAN BAND RAT 200 sets a ratio of 200 1 and turns off the auto coupling FREQ SPAN BAND RAT AUTO ON FREQ SPAN BAND RAT Chapter 2 93 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L BW Avg 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 94 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Det Demod 2 3 Det Demod Displays the menu keys that control parameters associated with the detector modes 2 3 Detector Select a specific type of detector or choose Auto to let the instrument select the appropriate detector for a particular measurement When discussing detectors it is important to understand the concept of a trace bucket For every trace point displayed in swept and zero span analysis there is a finite time during which the data for that point is collected The analyzer has the ability to look at all of the data collected during that time and present a single point of trace data based on the detector mode We call the interval during which the data for that trace point is being collected the bucket Thus a trace is m
438. n When this type of averaging is selected LgAv appears on the left side of the display The equation for trace averaging on the log pwr scale is shown below where N is the number of averages accumulated In continuous sweep mode once N has reached the Average Number N stays at that value providing a running average New avg es Assumes all values in decibel scale 90 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Key Path BW Avg Avg VBW Type or Auto Couple Avg VBW Type Remote Command See Avg VBW Type on page 89 Example AVER TYPE LOG 2 2 5 3 Pwr Avg RMS In this average type all filtering and averaging processes work on the power the square of the magnitude of the signal instead of its log or envelope voltage This scale is best for measuring the true time power of complex signals This scale is sometimes called RMS because the resulting voltage is proportional to the square root of the mean of the square of the voltage When this type of averaging is selected PAvg appears on the left side of the display In the equation for averaging on this scale below N is the number of averages accumulated In continuous sweep mode once N has reached the Average Number N stays at that value Old Avg New dat 10 10 New Avg 10x log Ss i E Assumes all values in dB Key Path BW Avg Avg VBW Type or Auto Couple Avg VBW Type Remote Command See Avg VBW Type on page 89 Example AVER TYPE
439. n a 999 0 when queried Example SEM OFFS LIST FREO STAR 2 MHz SEM OFFS LIST FREO STAR 464 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM SEM OFFS LIST STAT 1 SEM OFFS LIST STAT 5 22 4 3 Stop Freq Specifies the outer limit frequency furthest from the carrier for both segments of the specified offset pair The lower range is limited to the setting of Start Freq Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator Hz Range The Start Freq for that offset plus 10 Hz to 100 MHz Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STOP freq lt freq gt upto five values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STOP Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS Example SEM OFFS LIST FREO STOP 4 MHz SEM OFFS LIST FREO STOP 5 22 4 4 Sweep Time Specifies the sweep time for the currently selected offset and toggles this function between Auto and Manual for each offset O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard an
440. n a limit test Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 State Saved Not saved in instrument state SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies No OPC dependencies Factory Preset and RST Off Factory Default Off when a limit line is created History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 110 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay OFF ON 1011 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay queries the current limit line Example CALC LLIN2 DISP OFF turns off the display of the limit lines CALC LLIN1 DISP tells you whether the limit lines are being displayed 2 4 5 1 3 Limit Test Turns the testing of the limit line On or Off If the trace is at or within the bounds of the set limit or margin PASS LIMIT or PASS MARGIN is displayed in green in the upper left corner of the measurement area where is the number of the selected limit line Only positive margins are allowed for lower limits and only negative margins are allowed for upper limits If the trace is out of the limit or margin boundaries FAIL LIMIT or FAIL MARGIN is displayed in red The results for Limit 2 are displayed below those for Limit 1 Either Limit or Margin must be turned on for Test to be turned on NOTE The color of your screen annotation is dependent on your analyzer settings and may not correspond to the colors described above Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits L
441. n is increased to compensate for the effects of faster sweep rates to keep the displayed value accurate For FFT analysis the highest spectral amplitude is displayed even if that peak amplitude falls between samples of the spectrum computed in the FF T process When Peak is selected Peak appears on the left side of the display Key Path Det Demod Detector Remote Command See Detector on page 95 Example DET POS 2 3 1 5 RMS Remote Command Only Selects the Average Detector If BW Avg Avg VBW Type is set to Auto or Pwr Avg this will yield the RMS voltage average power for each trace point See 3 4 1 3 Average Key Path There is no key selection for this setting but you can access it by using Average Detector see Average on page 98 Remote Command See Detector on page 95 Example DET RMS 2 3 1 6 Sample The sample detector displays the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the interval bucket represented by each trace point Sample detection is primarily used to display noise or noise like signals Sample detection is not best for amplitude measurements of CW like signals for two reasons First the peak response to a signal can occur between samples so unless the Span to RBW ratio is lower than usual the highest sample can be well below the peak signal amplitude Second for the high sweep rates normally used the peak response of the RBW filters is up to 0 5 dB This swe
442. n mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Abs Start and or Abs Stop This is the default selection for each offset Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More Fail Mask State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Remote Command Refer to Fail Mask on page 472 5 22 4 11 2 Relative Sets the limit test to show Fail if one of the relative spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Rel Start and or Rel Stop Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More Fail Mask State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Remote Command Refer to Fail Mask on page 472 5 22 4 11 3 Abs AND Rel Set the limit test to show Fail if one of the absolute spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Abs Start and Abs Stop AND one of the relative spectrum emission mask measurement results is larger than the limit for Rel Start and Rel Stop 474 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More Fail Mask State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default
443. n page 250 Example SYST PRES TYPE MODE defines the type of preset as the mode preset After you have selected mode as the preset type use SYST PRES to do a mode preset 4 8 2 2 8 Factory Sets the preset type to Factory When you do a preset all of the factory default instrument state will be restored A factory preset switches the analyzer to the Spectrum Analysis mode and resets the settings of all the modes to the factory defaults i e Spectrum Analysis Mode with continuous sweep Refer to Preset on page 221 for more information Key Path System Power On Preset Preset Type Annunciation Annotation Factory State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Chapter 4 251 N LI a 2 E Q D O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System Default Mode Remote Command See Preset Type on page 250 Example SYST PRES TYPE FACT defines the type of preset as the factory preset With factory preset selected use SYST PRES to do a factory preset 4 8 2 8 Save User Preset Saves the current state of the analyzer into the User Preset state registor for recall when the instrument Preset Type is set to User and you perform a preset operation After you save a state here you must go to the Preset Type key and select User in order to have this state used as the preset state Refer to Preset on page 221 key description for
444. n the screen Pressing Span Zoom is the same as pressing Frequency Signal Track On and Span See Signal Track on page 168 Key Path SPAN X Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Remote Command No equivalent SCPI command 4 6 3 Full Span Changes the displayed frequency span to show the full frequency range of the analyzer When using external mixing it changes the displayed frequency span to the frequency range specified for the selected external mixing band Key Path SPAN X Scale Remote Command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL Example FREQ SPAN FULL 4 6 4 Zero Span Changes the displayed frequency span to zero Hertz The horizontal axis changes to time rather than frequency The input signal that is at the current center frequency is the displayed amplitude This is a special operation mode that changes several measurement functions couplings The instrument behavior is similar to an oscilloscope with a frequency selective detector installed in front of the oscilloscope See Application Note 150 for more information on how to use this mode Key Path SPAN X Scale 238 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z SPAN X Scale Remote Command See SENSe FREQuency SPAN 0 Hz Example FREQ SPAN 0 Hz 4 6 5 Last Span Changes the displayed frequency span to the previous span setting If it is pressed immediately after Signal Track or Span Zoom is turned off then span setting returns to the span tha
445. n this case that stands for the units Hz for volts units and Hz for watts units To measure the ratio of the noise densities at two locations be sure that the Marker Fctn is Marker Noise The noise is averaged over a region that is 5 of the span centered at the marker location Select Marker Normal before selecting Delta marker Then move the active A marker to the second noise location In this case both markers have units of noise density for example dBm Hz so the data displayed represents the ratio of the noise density at the delta marker to the noise density at the reference marker The value readout Chapter 3 191 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O Instrument Functions M O Marker Fctn is displayed as a ratio dB or 96 e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od E o E 5 AL 7 E 192 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker Fctn To guarantee accurate data for noise like signals a correction for equivalent noise bandwidth is made by the analyzer The Marker Noise function accuracy is best when the detector is set to Average or Sample because neither of these detectors will peak bias the noise The trade off between sweep time and variance of the result is best when Avg VBW Type is set to Power Averaging Auto coupling therefore normally chooses the Average detector and Power Averaging The Marker Noise function works with all settings of detector and Avg VBW Ty
446. nalysis Marker gt Key See page 197 Marker gt i Mkr gt CF Note This key is disabled if the t Mkr gt CF Step Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement is chosen i Mkr gt Start i Mkr gt Stop i MkrA Span i Mkr A CF i Mkr gt Ref Lv pe866a A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings 16 abed eas oy aye sis jeuy unjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 609 Marker Fctn Key See page 191 Note This key is disabled if the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement is chosen pe867a Marker Fctn gt Marker Count Select Marker Marker Count 1 2 3 4 On Off Gate Time Marker Noise 100 0 ms Auto Man Band Intvl Power Function Off Marker Count I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function T sis Jeuy winayeds sdejy nue L6 eBed ees Aen ujoJ Jop sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua 019 8 191deu2 MODE Key See page 203 pe868a MODE Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Mode Spectrum Analysis Note when measurement applications are loaded this
447. nce VIDeo LEVel FREQuency freq sets the Video Trigger level when in FM Demod and Demod View is on TRIGger L SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency Example TRIG SOUR VID selects video triggering 4 10 3 Line Sets the trigger to start a new sweep measurement to be synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage Key Path Trig 288 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Trig Remote Command See Trig on page 287 Example TRIG SOUR LINE selects line triggering 4 10 4 Ext Front Sets the trigger to start a new sweep measurement whenever the external voltage connected to EXT TRIGGER INPUT on the front panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL type signal Key Path Trig SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies Line trigger is not available when operating from a dc power source Remote Command See Trig on page 287 Example TRIG SOUR EXT to select front panel external triggering 4 10 5 Ext Rear Sets the trigger to start a new sweep measurement whenever the external voltage connected to TRIGGER IN on the rear panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL type signal Key Path Trig Remote Command See Trig on page 287 Example TRIG SOUR EXT2 selects rear panel external triggering 4 10 6 RF Burst Wideband Allows the analyzer to be triggered by an RF burst envelope signal Ke
448. nction CCDF el i U E E E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E m T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 387 o c e 5 o c E H Ld c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 11 5 1 Graticule Pressing Graticule turns the display graticules On or Off Key Path Display Preferences Factory Preset On Factory Default On Terminators Enter History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 388 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions SPAN X Scale Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF 5 12 SPAN X Scale Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Activates the Span function for the CCDF measurement and displays the menu of span functions Key Path Front panel key State Saved Saved in Instrument State Remote Command See the Scale Div command below 5 12 1 Scale Div Allows you to enter a numeric value to change the horizontal display sensitivity by setting the decibel units per horizontal graticule division Key Path MEASURE Power Stat CCDF SPAN X Scale State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 2 0 dB Default Terminator dB Range 0 1 to 20 00 dB with 0 01 dB resolution Remote Command DISPlay PSTatistic XSCale rel ampl lt DISPlay PSTatistic XSCale Example DISP PST XSC 10 dB DISP PST XS
449. ndent and may vary with each measurement pe895a sis Jeuy winayeds sdejy nue 69 abed ees 1ueueunseeyy 4022 10 o ajeoSs X NVdS sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 919 8 191deu2 Sweep Key See page 241 pe873a Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Auto Single Sweep Time Sweep 66 24 ms Man Sweep Cont Norm Auto Sweep Time Accy Points 601 Lpz abed eas Aen deoue sis jeuy unge sde nua 8 1e deu2 Z9 System Key 1 of 4 See page 247 SYSTEM pe874a System Show Errors gt Shov Errors N d PowerOn Zu DN Preset gt wr mPreset Time Date LK neie Alignments gt Alignments T Config 1 0 eech Configl O Reference gt LK Refererence More 10f3 System Show System System MM 2 Show System Licensing ___Licensing Show Hdwre Shov M er wee Personality o Personality Color Palette Color Palette Diagnostics Restore Sys Defaults More Diagnostics es Service Service 2 of 3 More 3of 3 sis Jeuy uingjoedsg sdejy nue Lpz aed ees p Jo Aay wayshs sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis
450. ng Gated FFT Measurements With Your PSA The process of making a spectrum measurement with FFTs is inherently a gated process in that the spectrum is computed from a time record of short duration much like a gate signal in swept gated analysis The duration of the time record is 1 83 divided by the RBW within a tolerance of about 3 for bandwidths up through 1 MHz Therefore unlike swept gated analysis the duration of the analysis is fixed by the RBW not by the gate signal Because FFT analysis is inherently faster than swept analysis the gated FFT measurements can have better frequency resolution a narrower RBW than would swept analysis for a given duration of the signal to be analyzed FFT analysis in the PSA usually involves making auto ranged measurements and the time required to autorange the FFT can be both long and inconsistent The PSA hardware automatically sets the ADC Ranging to Bypass when any trigger except Free Run is selected The width of a single FF T measurement can be up to 10 MHz so gated FFT measurements can only be made for spans of 10 MHz or less To make a gated FFT measurement set the analyzer as follows 1 Press Auto Couple FFT amp Sweep to select ManuaL FFT 2 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 83 divided by the required analysis time or higher by pressing BW Avg Res BW 3 Set the trigger source to the desired trigger by pressing Trig 4 Set the trigger delay to observe the signal starti
451. ng at the required time relative to the trigger Negative delays are possible by pressing Trig Trig Delay Auto Couple FFT amp Sweep Remote Command Use SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO FFT SWEep See FFT amp Sweep on page 72 Example SWE TYPE FFT 74 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 2 1 2 5 FFTs Span Displays and controls the number of FFT segments used to measure the entire Span This key is inactive greyed out unless Sweep Type has been set to FFT If Sweep Type is set to Auto and FFTs are selected FFTs Span is still greyed out and the number of FFTs automatically selected is shown If Sweep Type is set to Manual FFT FFTs Span becomes available Press FFTs Span and an integer can be entered The analyzer will try to use the number entered but it may need to use more due to hardware or software limitations An FFT can only be performed over a limited span or segment also known as the FFT width Several FFT widths may need to be combined to measure the entire span The FFT Width is Span FFTs Span and affects the ADC Dither function See Auto Couple FFT measurements require that the signal level driving the A D converter in the IF be small enough to avoid overloading and that the gain that controls that signal level remain fixed during the measurement of an entire FFT segment This constraint can allow higher dynamic ranges in swept mode in some cases but increasing FFTs Span can res
452. ng speed 511 multi carrier power 429 occupied bandwidth 304 pausing 330 query current 328 resuming 330 setting default values remotely 298 turning off 300 menu map ACP Meas Setup key 629 Trace View key 630 alpha editor 588 589 amplitude Y scale 590 591 auto couple 592 593 594 Burst Power Meas Setup key 631 Trace View key 632 BW Avg 595 CCDF Power Stat Display key 635 Marker key 637 Meas Setup key 633 SPAN X Scale key 636 Trace View key 634 Channel Power Meas Setup key 638 Trace View key 639 Det Demod 596 display 597 598 file 599 600 601 602 603 604 frequency channel 605 Harmonic Distortion Meas Setup key 640 Trace View key 641 input output 606 marker 607 marker fctn 609 marker to 608 Meas Control 626 MEASURE 625 mode 610 Mode Setup 627 628 Multi Carrier Power Meas Setup key 643 Trace View key 644 Occupied Bandwidth Meas Setup key 645 peak search 611 preset 612 span X scale 614 CCDF 615 Spectrum Emission Mask Display key 648 Marker key 650 Meas Setup key 646 SPAN X Scale key 649 Trace View key 647 Spurious Emissions Meas Setup key 651 sweep 616 system 617 Third Order Intercept Meas Setup key 642 trace view 621 trig 622 message to other users 280 281 Metafile format 141 screen file 129 Metafile key 141 Method key 360 441 Min Hold key 285 369 379 406 450 Index Min Search key 211 mix
453. ng the VISA Declarations le 549 renin a SERRE apex ed d E dn ECRIRE ERE XR E Ceo OEC dr pcd a dedo sod pex 549 Device SeSBIOHS ee ee ee 550 E E sorres E xaO eo RC CC OP EN URGE owes EE 551 Closing a EE 243 SUK EE R EROS RARE EE SEO GK SHR E PGEdU S AR 553 Ovandew pf the GPIB Bust ciao kh Re eee EE eee SEK EC 554 GPIB Command Statements zexcmhek K o deen RL E eee wees se rire miro ACER SCR 554 7 Using the STATus System Status System Commands EE 559 Common IEEE Commands 222452269 R KR AS ob iube rt A RR YER E dE EG 563 Calibration NEED EE ped qaad pi dx p ARAR KR I Pe e baa gd d ede ex 563 Clear Status orare rire EE dE E EE AE ELE ARCA Reese AER E 563 Standard Event Status Enable incu d REEL ea EECH ACA UMOR ON a 563 Standard Event Status Register Query e 564 It E od DES 1a K dd Paco RC PARERE RU E EXE Red COR Eee C E e op eg ped 564 Instrument State HUEY A SE EE E EE SECA OREO X URGE FS REO ES 564 Uperation EN iuo 3 Sca e ORARE OPE SCR AWE A EE oO A a OR 565 Query Instrument Options A 22 EE AEN A uA dora ERG EA ERO e REA o EEN He 565 Power Qoa Dtatus Cleat LerieserbxacidPeTi4rd4deadd prd Few eid eee 566 Recall a e EE EE ROUES REOR bnc ALEGRE doe RUE aci wo 566 l Ludus Sus ge AH d EE d ANDE E RR Ree AUD RR do 566 BV ee ee LAE RR ee E d ee ee eee NP NIE RIPE ee re re Gas ox v ees 567 Pervice Regu st Rebeet KREE EE EUER RC Fr ROO eC A e RRS 567 Read Status Byte Quarry 225 546865 REOR EE EE EE REOR ONU For REOR DR 567 NK A E A uA
454. ng the average count all previous result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset EXPonential Remote Command SENSe OBW AVERage TCONtrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe OBW AVERage TCONtrol Example OBW AVG TCON EXP OBW AVG TCON 5 21 3 Max Hold Enables you to turn maximum hold trace feature On or Off for the measurement Maximum hold displays and holds the maximum responses of a signal Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Remote Command SENSe OBW MAXHold OFF ON 0 1 SENSe OBW MAXHold Example OBW MAXH ON OBW MAXH 452 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW el i U E E E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E m T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 453 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Occupied Bandwidth OBW 5 21 4 Occ BW Pwr Enables you to change the percentage of signal power used when determining the occupied bandwidth Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 99 0 Range 10 0 through 99 99 Remote Command SENSe OBW PERCent percent SENSe OBW PERCent Example OBW PERC 98 OBW PERC 5 21 5 OBW Span Enables you to specify the range of integration used in calculating the total power from which the
455. nitions dependencies couplings 45 example 45 factory preset 45 maximum value 45 remote command 45 state saved 45 terms 45 degree parameter variables 507 Delete key 278 Delete All key 157 Delete All Limits key 122 Delete All Now key 157 Delete key 147 Delete Limit key 116 Delete Now key 149 Delete Point key 116 deleting files 147 149 157 limits 122 options 278 Delta key 181 392 Delta Pair key 181 dependencies 45 Dependencies Couplings term 45 destination trace 1 146 trace 2 147 trace 3 147 Destination key 146 Det Demod menu map 596 Det Demod key 95 detection auto on off 97 average 98 negative peak 101 normal 98 peak 99 RMS 99 sample 99 detector RMS averaging 90 rules for auto selection 97 Detector key 95 phase noise 77 Device BTS MS key 341 device clear command 530 diagnostics 279 Diagnostics key 274 Dir From To key 152 Dir Select key 135 148 147 151 153 155 157 Dir Up key 135 143 147 151 153 155 157 directories creating 155 selecting 147 display marker readout 186 frequency 187 inverse time 188 period 187 time 187 menu map 597 598 on off 125 trace 168 Display front panel key 103 385 display line adjusting 103 104 106 107 108 Display Line key 103 104 106 107 108 display windows Marker Table 189 displaying errors 247 pages 248 divisions scaling 52 documentation using 44 DVB T key 340 E echo
456. nng euo sde nuaw Burst Power Measurement Meas Setup Key Meas If measurement chosen is Setup Burst Power Meas Setup 6 1e deu2 Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe899a Avg Number 10 On Off Avg Mode Exp Repeat Average Type Log RMS Threshold Lvl 30 00 dB Abs Re Meas Method Above Threshold Lvl Meas Method Measured Burst Width Burst Width 542 8us Auto Man Optimize Ref Leve T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function LE9 suonouny jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nuan uawansea uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uoyng 3u0 sde nuaw ZER 6 191deu2 Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions Burst Power Measurement Trace View Key Trace View If measurement L chosen is Burst Power Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe900a I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices Meas View RF Envelope Combined Trace Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold sde nuan Juswesnseayy uojng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw 6 1e deu2 ECO
457. ns Trace View Harmonics 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 422 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Intermod TOI 5 18 Meas Setup Intermod TOD When Intermod TOI measurement has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis Mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu for third order intercept TOI The TOI measurement computes and displays the output intercept point IP3 and places markers upon the trace to indicate the measured signals and third order products Key Path Front panel key Dependencies Couplings Menu changes depending on the Mode and Measurement selected History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 18 1 Avg Number Set Avg Number to On to specify the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Setting Avg Number to Off disables measurement averaging Key Path Meas setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Range 1 through 1000 History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Remote Command SENSe TOIN AVERage COUNt integer SENSe TOIN AVERage COUNT
458. ns under the Meas Setup key Key Path MEASURE Remote Command CONFigure SANalyzer Remote Command Notes CONFigure SANalyzer causes the present measurement to exit and places the analyzer in spectrum analysis mode Example CONF SAN 300 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 3 Channel Power Channel Power measures the power and power spectral density in the channel bandwidth that you specify One marker pair on the display indicates the edges of the channel bandwidth The center frequency reference level and channel bandwidth must be set by the user For more information see Meas Setup Channel Power CHP on page 399 You can configure measurement settings by pressing Meas Setup after selecting Channel Power You can make a measurement in single or continuous sweep mode Pressing Meas Control enables you to pause or restart a measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement To set Ref Level automatically use Optimize Ref Level Figure 2 Channel Power Measurement Results 3 Agilent 18 05 24 Jun 4 2002 Base Ch Freq 1 GHz Trig Free Channel Power NADC S 10 Number of Averages 10 Atten 10 dB EU 12 kHz Channel Power Power Spectral Density 11 41 dBm 32 8000 kHz b6 57 dBm Hz NOTE The displayed trace is the current trace not the averaged trace Pressing Meas Setup after Channel Power has been selected will access the channel power measuremen
459. nstall an Application Mode Remote command only Installs the specified application from an external drive to the instrument Each application allows you to make a specific set of measurements easily and accurately Installation requires a 12 character license key that you received with your application The license key number is unique to the option and instrument serial number If it cannot be located contact your local Agilent Technologies and service office to re obtain the information Have the instrument model number host ID serial number available 278 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System Remote Command See also OPT Example OPT returns a string with all the application options currently installed in the instrument e g B7J 202 204 BAC 4 8 13 Personality Pressing Personality displays information about the personalities installed and their license status as shown in the following illustration X Agilent 12 06 20 Rug 14 2001 Personality onality Information Option 5 D o g c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Key Path System Annunciation Annotation Text Screen Dependencies Couplings The active function is disabled SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Preset Off 4 8 14 Service These functions are used only for servicing the analyzer A password is required to access them Refer to the Service Guide for more information Key
460. nt Functions A L File 2 5 2 Save Displays menu keys that enable you to save files to the floppy A or internal C drive The menus allow you to fill in data entry fields for file name type format source and path directory Some fields may be blank depending on file type The catalog list box is active and can be used for selecting the directory in which to save the file Saved files that match the current Type and Format are shown The Sort Order is always Down By Date NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE Key Path Never remove the floppy disk during a save operation To do so could corrupt all data on the floppy disk Saving directly to floppy drive A can be slow Try saving first to internal drive C and then transfer the file to the floppy drive Many errors can be generated by a bad Save operation For this reason if an Unable to Save file message is seen you should check the error queue System Show Errors for the source of the error You can press the front panel Save key to immediately save a file using an automatically generated file name The current Save parameters will be used as though Save Now had been pressed If saving a Screen the screen saved is the screen that was displayed before pressing File For this reason the screens seen while in the File menus cannot be saved File Factory Preset State is the default file type at power on 136 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File
461. nt Functions P Z Save N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 236 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z SPAN X Scale 4 6 SPAN X Scale Activates the Span function and displays the menu of span functions 4 6 1 Span Changes the displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span Key Path SPAN X Scale d Dependencies E Couplings Span is coupled to center frequency The maximum span may be limited by S the center frequency setting g State Saved Saved in Instrument State S Factory Preset g Model Span d E4440A 26 49 GHz E4443A 6 69 GHz E4445A 13 19 GHz E4446A 43 99 GHz E4448A 49 99 GHz Fundamental Units Hz Terminators GHz MHz kHz Hz Default Terminator Hz Range Model 0 Hz Span Range E4440A 10 Hz to 26 5 GHz E4443A 10 Hz to 6 7 GHz E4445A 10 Hz to 13 2 GHz E4446A 10 Hz to 44 0 GHz E4448A 10 Hz to 50 0 GHz Chapter 4 237 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z SPAN X Scale Remote Command SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt freq gt SENSe FREQuency SPAN Example FREQ SPAN 2 GHZ 4 6 2 Span Zoom Turns on signal tracking and activates the span function Entering a new span value will then change the span while keeping the marker used for signal tracking centered o
462. nt limit lines The following message will appear on screen Changing X axis units will delete all limits If you are sure press key again to change units CAUTION Changing this setting deletes all existing limit data from the analyzer In other words if a limit line has already been defined changing the units clears the existing limit line Press X Axis Units again to purge both limit lines and to switch between frequency and time Key Path Display Limits Factory Default Frequency for a new limit History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain FREQuency TIME CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Remote Command Notes For TIME the limit line segments are placed on the spectrum analyze display with respect to the sweep time setting of the analyzer with 0 at the left edge of the display For FREQuency segments are placed according to the frequency that is specified for each segment Example CALC LLIN CONT DOM FREQ sets limit lines 1 and 2 x axis units to frequency CALC LLIN CONT DOM TIME sets limit lines 1 and 2 x axis units to time CALC LLIN CONT DOM responds with limit lines 1 and 2 x axis unit type 120 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 8 Limits Fixed Rel Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative Pressing Limits to choose fixed Fixed or relative Rel limit lines The fixed Fixed type uses the current limit
463. nted first Then the key menus unique to each measurement are displayed Use the following table to locate the menus you wish to view and Table on page 294 to locate the key descriptions and programming commands for these measurements Menu Map Location Menu Map Location Measure Page 625 Mult Carrier Power Menus Meas Control Page 626 Meas Setup Page 643 Mode Setup Page 627 Trace View Page 644 ACP Menus Occupied BW Menus Meas Setup Page 629 Meas Setup Page 645 Trace View Page 630 Spectrum Emission Mask Menus Burst Power Menus Display Page 648 Meas Setup Page 631 Marker Page 650 Trace View Page 632 Meas Setup Page 646 CCDF Menus Power Stat Span X Scale Page 649 o Display Page 635 Trace View Page 647 G Marker Page 637 Spurious Emissions Menus GC Meas Setup Page 633 Meas Setup Page 651 Span X Scale Page 636 Trace View Page 634 Channel Power Menus Meas Setup Page 638 Trace View Page 639 Harmonic Distortion Menus Meas Setup Page 640 Trace View Page 641 Intermod TOI Menus Meas Setup Page 642 624 Chapter 9 6 1e3deu2 SCH MEASURE Key MERSURE j pe882a oOo Measure Meas Off Channel Power Measure Harmonic Distortion Occupied BW Burst Power ACP Multi Carrier Power Intermod TOI Spurious Emissions Power Stat CCDF Spectrum Emission Mask More lof2
464. ntrol 329 MODE 203 Mode Setup 333 Peak Search 209 Preset 221 Print 227 Print Setup 229 Restart 347 Save 235 Single 349 SPAN X Scale 237 389 481 SWEEP 241 System 247 Trace View 283 367 377 405 421 447 477 479 TRIG 287 front panel keys Det Demod 95 Input Output 309 312 318 321 322 MEASURE 297 Full Screen key 103 385 479 Full Span key 238 Function Off key 194 G G PAL NICAM 340 Gate Time key 196 Gated FFT measurement 74 gaussian trace 386 Gaussian Trace key 386 GPIB Address key 263 GPIB bus information 554 GPIB command statements 554 GSM EDGE key 335 H handset setup 341 hardware status 557 571 Harmonic Dist key 315 Harmonic Distortion Meas Setup menu 640 Trace View menu 641 harmonic distortion key 315 measurement 315 harmonic distortion measurement measurement setup 409 harmonics key 410 Hiper LAN 2 key 339 Host ID 264 Host Name key 264 HP BASIC 531 HP VEE over socket LAN 536 HP VISA libraries 532 HP IB address 263 Index I I PAL NICAM 340 identity IEEE command options query model number query 564 IEEE command 564 IEEE command termination 509 IEEE command event status enable 563 IEEE common commands commands IEEE 563 impedance setting 172 initiate measurement 330 568 Input Port key 171 Input Z Corr key 172 input output menu map 606 Input Output front panel key 171 309 312 318 321 322 425 426 in
465. nts greater than 601 you are optimizing frequency resolution and accuracy while accepting a reduced measurement speed In addition to sweep points the span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth average detection and center frequency will also affect measurement speed This function is coupled with the span setting Increasing the span can change the number of sweep points In order to maintain accurate measurements the number of sweep points is increased if required to keep the width of each sweep point at most 150 MHz When zone span is set to On press Span Zone Zone each window has its own value for points Key Path Sweep Dependencies Couplings Affected by log sweep segmented sweep Affects the following functions whenever the number of sweep points change All trace data is erased Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode Sweep time is re quantized Any limit lines that are on will be updated State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 601 Range 101 to 8192 2 to 8192 in zero span 244 Chapter 4 Remote Command SENSe SWEep POINts number of points gt SENSe SWEep POINts Example SWE POIN 501 SWE POIN Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z SWEEP 245 5 D o g c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Instrument Functions P Z SWEEP N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 246 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z
466. o 503 command parameters 506 command syntax 503 keyword parameters 506 valid commands 504 screen divisions scaling 52 Screen file type 129 Screen files Bitmap 129 Metafile 129 Screen key 133 Search Param key 215 searching parameters 215 peak excursion 215 peak threshold 216 peaks 209 210 211 212 213 Select Marker key 180 392 483 selecting ac coupling 172 amplitude reference 171 color palette 274 de coupling 172 directories 135 143 147 151 153 155 157 display color schemes 272 frequency reference external 268 internal 268 instrument modes 204 marker pairs 180 392 483 markers 180 392 483 Marker Trace 185 394 modes 204 single or continuous sweep 242 source 152 sweep time 241 sweep type FFTs Span 75 selecting printer paper size 232 self test 568 SEM measurement trace 421 477 viewing trace 421 477 serial number query 564 Service key 279 service request IEEE command 567 service requests 557 Set Date key 254 Set Time key 253 setting center frequency 163 center frequency step 166 date 254 frequency offset 167 numeric data file format 160 parameters peak search 218 start frequency 164 stop frequency 165 the input port 171 time 253 time and date 252 trigger external trigger input 173 289 free run 287 line 288 offset 291 polarity 290 RF Burst 289 time delay 290 video 288 setting impedance 172 show errors 247 Show Errors key
467. o Couple this is coupled to Abs Start to make a flat limit line If set to Man Abs Start and Abs Stop you can enter different values to make a sloped limit line Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator dBm Chapter 5 469 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Range 200 dBm to 50 dBm Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute ampl ampl up to five values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute COUPle OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute COUPle o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 470 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS 1 Example SEM OFFS LIST STOP ABS 20 dBm SEM OFFS LIST STOP ABS SEM OFFS LIST STOP ABS COUP 0 SEM OFFS LIST STOP ABS COUP 5 22 4 9 Rel Start Enables you to enter a relative level limit at Start Freq ranging from 150 00 to 450 00 dBc with 0 01 dB resolution Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits More State
468. o the appropriate amplitude specifications and characteristics for your analyzer CAUTION When operating in DC coupled mode ensure protection of the input mixer by limiting the input level to within 200 mV of 0 Vdc In AC or DC coupling limit the input RF power to 30 dBm Key Path Input Output Dependencies Couplings Not available on 40 GHz or 50 GHz analyzers State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset AC Remote Command INPut COUPling AC DC INPut COUPling Example INP COUP DC 2 7 8 Input Z Corr Sets the input impedance for voltage to power conversions The impedance you select is for computational purposes only since the actual impedance is set by internal hardware to 50 ohm The default is 50 ohm Setting the computational input impedance to 75 ohm is useful when using a 75 ohm to 50 ohm adapter to measure a 75 ohm device on an analyzer having a 50 ohm input impedance Key Path Input Output State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 50 Q 172 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Input Output Remote Command SENCe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude 50 75 SENCe CORRection IMPedance L INPut MAGNitude Example CORR IMP 75 sets the input impedance correction to 75 ohms CORR IMP 2 7 4 Trig Input Sets the external trigger input source to the front panel trigger input connector EXT TRIGGER INPUT Ext 1 or the rear panel trigger input connector TRI
469. ociated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Calibration Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition number STATus QUESt onable CALibration N TRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Calibration Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable CA Libration PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable lt number gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Frequency Register Questionable Frequency
470. of the bits in the Questionable Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable N TRansition number STATus QUEStionable N TRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable 574 Chapter8 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 3276 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Calibration Register
471. oint numbers in percent that represent the user definable reference trace This is the probability that at specific power levels average power will occur as follows 1 Probability at 0 dB power 2 Probability at 0 1 dB power 9 Probability at 0 2 dB power 501 Probability at 50 0 dB power Remote Command Notes To save trace data use the fetch methods shown above Example FETC PST or MEAS PST or READ PST FETC PST2 or MEAS PST2 or READ PST2 FETC PST3 or MEAS PST3 or READ PST3 5 1 8 Harmonic Distortion The range table state determines which harmonics are to be measured If Range Table is set to Off for each harmonic to be measured the center frequency will be set to the appropriate integer multiple of the fundamental frequency and a sweep taken The amplitude is calculated by averaging the power in the trace and is displayed in the results table in the results window The desired Res BW value for each harmonic is calculated by multiplying the harmonic number with the Res BW of the fundamental This results in the smallest Res BW available being used that is greater than or equal to the computed value If a Res BW greater than the instrument maximum is calculated then the maximum Res BW of the instrument is used and an asterisk is displayed after the amplitude result of the harmonic to indicate that the desired Res BW was not used The span for each harmonic is set to zero If Range Table is set to On for ea
472. old Lvl Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset 542 777 us Terminators s ms us ns from front panel only Default Terminator seconds s Knob Increment 0 1 us Step Key Increment 10 us 374 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Burst Power Range 0 1 us to 2 ks History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe BPOWer BURSt WIDTh time SENSe BPOWer BURSt WIDTh SENSe BPOWer BURSt AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BPOWer BURSt AUTO Remote Command Notes Burst width cannot be set remotely as a percent of the current burst width That functionality is available from the front panel but the command must be sent with a time value Example SENS BPOW BURST AUTO ON 5 8 7 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There will always be a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset n a History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command O e i WA E Ki ps El D 7 E bi 3 bi E T E El 7 GA Ej Ki SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE Chapter 5 375 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Burst Power 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou
473. on Textual Information Screen Dependencies Couplings Removes any active functions Saved State Not saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off Chapter 4 247 N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z System Remote Command SYSTem ERRor L NEXT Remote Command Notes The SYSTem ERRor NEXT command queries the earliest entry to the error queue and then deletes that entry Example SYST ERR returns error number error string gt for example 113 Undefined header CLS clears the entire error queue 4 8 1 1 Previous Page Displays the previous page of the Show Errors screen This key is inactive greyed out if there is no previous page 4 8 1 2 Next Page Displays the next page of the Show Errors screen This key is inactive greyed out if there is no next page 4 8 1 3 Clear Error Queue Clears the front panel error queue from the Show Errors display Key Path System Show Errors Remote Command CLS 4 8 2 Power On Preset Displays keys that enable you to define the instrument power on state and user preset state NOTE If Power On is set to Preset and Preset Type is set to Factory turning on the analyzer performs a factory preset The last state of the analyzer before it was turned off is recalled if Power On is set to Last The user preset state is recalled if Power On is set to Preset and Preset Type is set to User
474. on LANDscape PObfrat 0 0 c ec eens 231 POP PAGE EE 231 HOOP y PAGE PRINS Sieger ANE wey aC RR eh OR Re e e de 232 MICE CAO H cian corsa tentd owtadetedewnyadsiue dew qedicrex epp ibd pfe xd 232 HCOPy PAGE SIZE A B A3 A4 LETTer LEGal EXECutive LEDGer 232 ACOP PAGE SIZE ese Ede wea Abu ace e de je hang AC RS bd bep 233 HIPS Ee ch eee Dit dioe ee et a ACER ORE d Reed o de acd dede Eod 227 Ae EE 306 lh H WEE skeet ar aS hiot mines KRE du bed pease bel ca Eb bg dE 8 eons 320 IN SK CH PONG adsessor ko REA 4 E Al AR EE AE AE ME AEN SHEER SH Ka Rege du 303 ISNEDsict ON TD nacus OFF JON O I Nee i RR R RTE RRR N KE RR H R RE RR N 242 CH WE ME cr c FEM TT 242 INED TAR MON a use dased qQodeben sq Ciubems Remi deus sS SKbeodesahdustdaqad s 316 JNFDIaGMIGOBW E REEL dE 54040 dE Rd RE RTE RATER EE EE EE dE EE aeRO x 304 SUN aaen uer RR EE EE RES REE E RAD HERR RE RU EErEE RR E CR ERREUR CR 330 INTA P c cnm 314 TNE AERES T T rrr 329 TAI is Al ago spi qup R ab E RS qu dU Edda d B quei p qe d pb S a pd d piri 347 SINEMA RE SUMS sospire ketaki EES El TEESE NEE ENDE E dee Ae RD ERG AR CR 330 INEDAIGGEN AE sx pb TREES EE RR Er OPE MENON PP EU S pbe YER Reb RE 324 ITTA PURDE ade hw be OSEAN E RRR T RAR RR Vibe EE 322 ENEE OI iia eee die ee gee ee oy hae dk wed be 321 Nae D E EE 331 IN SNR IMMediatel 522 x dere EE EE ERROR ROSEO dE LEE OR CR ROREM CR OR dew e 349 INP RR E 61 R AC DM uid cese Rice soR Heo RR te Ree de rea RU e e RR RU
475. open a session to the default resource manager with the viOpenDefaultRM function The first call to this function initializes the default resource manager and returns a session to that resource manager session You only need to open the default manager session once However subsequent calls to viOpenDefaultRM returns a session to a unique session to the same default resource manager resource Next you open a session with a specific device with the viOpen function This function uses the session returned from viOpenDefaultRM and returns its own session to identify the device session The following shows the function syntax viOpenDefaultRM sesn viOpen sesn rsrcName accessMode timeout vi The session returned from viOpenDefaultRM must be used in the sesn parameter of the viOpen function The viOpen function then uses that session and the device address specified in the rsrcName parameter to open a device session The vi parameter in viOpen returns a session identifier that can be used with other VTL functions Your program may have several sessions open at the same time by 550 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL creating multiple session identifiers by calling the viOpen function multiple times The following summarizes the parameters in the previous function calls sesn This is a session returned from the viOpenDefaultRM function that identifies the resource manager session rsrcName This i
476. ople to understand and is required by SCPI for RST However data input output is faster using the binary formats FORMat DATA REAL 64 selects the 64 bit binary data format for all your numerical data queries You may need to swap the byte order if you are using a PC rather than UNIX NoRMal1 is the default byte order Use FORMat BORDer SWAP to change the byte order so that the least significant byte is sent first Real 32 which is smaller and somewhat faster should only be used if you don t need full resolution for your data Some frequency data may require full 64 bit resolution When using the binary format data is sent in a block of bytes with an ASCII header A data query would return the block of data in the following format DNNN lt nnn binary data bytes To parse the data s Read two characters D where D tells you how many N characters follow the D character e Read D characters the resulting integer specifies the number of data bytes sent Read the bytes into a real array For example suppose the header is 512320 The first character digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits there are in the header The 12320 means 12 thousand 3 hundred 20 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your current data format bytes data point 8 for real 64 For this example there are 1540 data points in the block of data Minimize the number of GPIB transactions When yo
477. or power cycle Reset to the factory default Int 10 MHz by pressing System Restore Sys Defaults Default Internal 10 MHz Range 1 MHz to 30 MHz Remote Command L SENSe ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal SENSe ROSCillator SOURce SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency value SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Example Before switching to the external reference source specify the frequency of the external reference that you plan to use ROSC EXT FREQ 20 MHz sets the external reference frequency to 20 MHz 268 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z System but does not select the external reference ROSC SOUR EXT selects the external reference 5 D o g c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Chapter 4 269 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 6 2 10 MHz Out Switches the 10 MHz out signal on the rear panel of the analyzer on or off Key Path System Reference State Saved Not Saved in Instrument State Not affected by factory preset or power cycle Reset to the factory default Off 10 MHz by pressing System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command SENSe ROSCillator OUTPut STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ROSCillator OUTPut STATe 7 Example ROSC OUTP ON 4 8 7 Show System Displays the number and description of the options installed in your instrument It also displays the instrument
478. or UNIX A normal response to the ping will be a total of 9 10 or possibly 11 packets received with a minimal average round trip time The minimal average will be different from network to network LAN traffic will cause the round trip time to vary widely Because the number of packets received depends on your network traffic and integrity the normal number might be different for your network Normal Response for DOS or Windows A normal response to the ping will be a total of 9 10 or possibly 11 packets received if 10 echo requests were specified Because the number of packets received depends on your network traffic and integrity the normal number might be different for your network Error Messages If error messages appear then check the command syntax before continuing with the troubleshooting If the syntax is correct then resolve the error messages using your network documentation or by consulting your network administrator If an unknown host error message appears then check that the host name and IP address for your instrument are correctly entered from the front panel Press System Config I O No Response No packets received indicates no response from a ping If there is no response try typing in the IP address with the ping command instead of using the host name Check that the typed address matches the IP address assigned in the System Config I O menu then check the other addresses in the menu Check that
479. or a file that already exists in the To directory the text message File already exists appears in the status line Key Path File Copy Remote Command MMEMory COPY file namel file name2 gt Remote Command Notes The file names must include the complete file paths Lowercase characters are read as uppercase The original file is lt file name1 gt and the new copy of the file is lt file name2 gt Example MMEM COPY C oldname sta A newname sta copies C OLDNAME STA to A NNEWNAME STA Chapter 2 151 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI E 1 lt 2 c Q O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 5 2 Type Enables you to select the type of file you want to copy See File Types on page 127 and Type on page 131 for more information If Type is set to All the catalog displays all files otherwise the files of the currently selected file type are displayed All directories are always displayed Type Format Extension State State STA Trace Trace state TRC Comma separated trace values CSV Limit Internal data format LIM Screen Bitmap GIF Reverse bitmap GIF Metafile WMF Reverse metafile WMF Corrections Internal data format ANT CBL OTH and AMP Measurement Comma separated values CSV Results Key Path File Copy 2 5 5
480. or a linear frequency scale and for a decibel amplitude scale If the logarithmic mode is selected frequency values between points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both table values and the intermediate value while using decibel amplitude values Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections State Saved Not saved in instrument state Factory Preset Not affected by Factory Preset Will be set to linear by Restore Factory Defaults Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 X SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Example CORR CSET4 X SPAC LOG 2 0 10 4 Delete All Corrections Allows you to delete all amplitude correction sets Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Dependencies Couplings If corrections are on corrections are turned off Remote Command SENSe CORRection CSET ALL DELete Example CORR CSET ALL DEL Chapter 2 67 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E 1 a E a gt LI P 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E n c o E 5 Im E D E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 41 Ext Amp Gain Compensates for external gain loss The function is similar to the Ref Lvl Offset function however the value is considered along with the maximum mixer level setting to determine the attenuation required 10 dB of Attenuation is added for every 10 dB of External Amp Gain The gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout so that the displayed
481. ore than a series of single points It is actually a series of trace buckets The data may be sampled many times within each bucket In swept analysis the time interval of data collection for a display bucket also represents a frequency interval In FFT analysis the bucket represents just a frequency interval The detector determines the relationship between the spectrum computed by the FFT and the single data point displayed for the bucket When the Detector choice is Auto the detector selected depends on marker functions trace functions and the trace averaging function See Auto Rules For Detector Selection on page 97 for information on the Auto detector selection When you manually selected a detector instead of selecting Auto that detector is used regardless of other analyzer settings The detector choices are The Sample detector displays the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the bucket represented by each display point The Normal detector displays the peak of CW like signals and maximums and minimums of noise like signals The Average detector displays the average of the signal within the bucket The averaging method depends upon Avg Type selection voltage power or log scales The Peak detector displays the maximum of the signal within the bucket The Negative Peak detector displays the minimum of the signal within the bucket Chapter 2 95 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5
482. ote command for this function 5 7 5 Trace One button measurements do not change this function See Trace on page 284 for more 368 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Trace View ACP Measurement information 5 7 5 1 Trace 123 Determines which trace the menu keys will affect Press Trace 123 until the number of the desired trace is underlined Key Path Trace View Trace State Saved Saved in Instrument State for all traces History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRACe 1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANk WRITe Clear Write MAXHold Max Hold MINHold Min Hold VIEW View BLANK Blank TRACe 1 2 3 MODE Example TRAC MODE WRIT TRAC MODE MAXH TRAC MODE MINH TRAC MODE VIEW TRAC MODE BLANk TRAC MODE 5 7 5 2 Clear Write el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 See Clear Write on page 285 for more information 5 7 5 3 Max Hold See Max Hold on page 285 for more information 5 7 5 4 Min Hold See Min Hold on page 285 for more information 5 7 5 5 View See View on page 286 for more information Chapter 5 369 One Button Measurement Functions Trace View ACP Measurement 5 7 5 6 Blank See Blank on page 286 for more information o c e Ei o c E H o E o LI 3 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 370 Chapter5 Une Button Measure
483. otes The results for both values are returned in Hz Example FETC OBW or MEAS OBW or READ OBW command returns scalar results of occupied bandwidth and transmit frequency error FETC OBW OBW or MEAS OBW FERR or READ OBW FERR commands 304 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode will return the single scalar result specified 5 1 5 Adjacent Channel Power ACP Adjacent Channel Power ACP is a measure of the power that leaks into adjacent transmit channels Depending on the radio standard selected from the Mode Setup menu this measurement can run in several different modes in order to measure different types of signals For more information see Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP on page 351 Turns on the adjacent channel power measurement The center frequency reference level and channel bandwidth must be set by the user The span is set according to the frequency and bandwidth of the offsets that are on and whether the RRC filter is on The screen is split and the lower window displays the absolute power in the main channel in dBm and the power in each of the adjacent channels in both dBm and dB relative to the main channel power Also displayed for each offset are offset frequency and reference bandwidth The measurement settings may be configured by pressing Meas Setup after ACP has been selected Pressing Radio Standard after Mode Setup has been selected will access all the
484. ower cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Portrait Remote Command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait E c HCOPy PAGE ORIentation 3 El Example HCOP PAGE ORI LAND E a S 4 4 2 1 Portrait i Selects Portrait orientation for the printouts from the analyzer I Key Path Print Setup Orientation Readback Portrait Remote Command See Orientation on page 231 Example HCOP PAGE ORI PORT 4 4 2 2 Landscape Selects Landscape orientation for the printouts from the analyzer Key Path Print Setup Orientation Readback Landscape Remote Command See Orientation on page 231 Example HCOP PAGE ORI LAND Chapter 4 231 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z Print Setup 4 4 8 Prints Page Selects the number of display prints per page when orientation is set to Portrait The page will be ejected after the selected number of prints has been printed NOTE For Landscape printing Prints Page is always set to 1 Key Path Print Setup Orientation State Saved Persistent survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 1 print page Range 2 Remote Command HCOPy PAGE PRINts lt integer gt HCOPy PAGE PRINts Example HCOP PAGE PRIN 2 4 4 4 Eject Page Ejects your printed page Key Path Print Setup Orientation Remote Command HCOPy ITEM FFEed IMMediate Exampl
485. p Channel Power CHP Factory Preset 2 MHz or as defined by the selected radio standard Terminators GHz MHz kHz Hz Default Terminator Hz Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment l 1 5 2 34 5 75 5 105 Range 100 Hz to maximum span supported by your analyzer Remote Command SENSe CHPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration freq SENSe CHPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegration Example CHP BAND INT 1 MHz CHP BAND INT 5 14 4 Chan Pwr Span Press Chan Pwr Span to set the analyzer span for the channel power measurement When the RRC Filter is set to On the lower limit for the span is 1 alpha x Integration BW Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 3 MHz or as defined by the selected radio standard Default Terminator Hz KnobIncrement 1 1 5 2 3 5 7 5 10 el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Step Key Increment 196 Range Current integration bandwidth to 10 times the integration bandwidth or span of your analyzer Remote Command SENSe CHPower FREQuency SPAN freq SENSe CHPower FREQuency SPAN Example CHP FREQ SPAN 2 MHz CHP FREQ SPAN Chapter 5 401 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Channel Power CHP 5 14 5 Optimize Ref Level Sets
486. p menu Press System Config I O IP Address When connecting to your instrument over a closed network directly through a hub or crossover cable it may help to set the instrument to its default settings for subnet mask and gateway subnet mask 255 255 0 0 gateway 0 0 0 0 Ifthe instrument and the computer are on different networks or subnets make sure the gateway address and subnet mask values 540 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument are set correctly Cannot access the file system via ftp Ifyou get a connection refused message try the following solutions Ifthe power to the instrument was just turned on make sure that you wait about 25 seconds before attempting the connection e Ifyou get a connection timed out message Verify the LAN connection between your computer and the instrument Refer to If you cannot connect to the instrument earlier in this section Cannot telnet to the command parser port Fora connection refused message Check the telnet port number from the front panel keys Fora connection timed out or no response from host message Verify the LAN connection between your computer and the instrument Refer to If you cannot connect to the instrument earlier in this section Fora connection refused or no response from host message If the instrument was just turned on make sure that you wait about 25 seconds b
487. parameter 507 string parameter 507 time parameter 507 voltage parameter 507 VBW RBW key 86 VBW RBW ratio 86 VEE over socket LAN 536 VEE using it over LAN 536 video averaging 89 video bandwidth 418 491 video bandwidth adjusting 84 Video BW 84 Video BW key 84 418 491 Video key 288 View key 286 369 379 406 450 VISA libraries 532 VISA library 547 549 Vision Impair 1 key 272 Vision Impair 2 key 272 voltage averaging 89 Voltage Avg key 91 voltage parameter variables 507 Volts key 57 VSA versus PSA series programming compatibility 522 VTL compiling and linking C language 547 W wait IEEE command 568 Watts key 58 windows Marker Table 189 X X Axis Units key 120 x dB key 455 Y Y Axis Units dBm 57 dBmV 57 dBuV 57 volts 57 watts 58 Y Axis Units key 56 Z Zero Span key 238 Index 11 Index Index 12
488. pe There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Temperature Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable TEM Perature PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Temperature Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 586 Chapter 8 8 Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis This chapter provide a visual representation of the front panel keys and their associated menu keys Spectrum Analysis mode is selected These menu maps are in alphabetical order by the front panel key label or oval cross reference label You can locate detailed information about each key function at the page number listed in the figure title for each menu For one button measurement menus see Chapter 9 on page 623 587 e 5 E E D ke n Hd ke Lad c 3 gt 5 D lt o D 889 8 1 de y9 Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis Alpha Editor Keys 1 of 2 Aloha Editor 1 The Alpha Editor T menu is used to configure system options licensing and the LAN interface pe846a o
489. pe but using the positive or negative peak detectors does not gives less accurate measurement results Note that the value when the Y axis units are watts is the square of the value when the Y axis units are volts For example when the percent ratio with Y axis units in volts is 2096 0 2 the percent ratio with Y axis units in watts will be 4 0 2 0 04 When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether you are in log dB or linear percent and if linear whether volts or watts Key Path Marker Fctn Dependencies Couplings Video triggering is not available when the detector is Average therefore marker functions that would set the detector to Average and thus conflict with video triggering are not available when the Video trigger is On Remote Command See Marker Fctn on page 191 for the command to select a function Example CALC MARK FUNC NOIS turns on marker 1 as a noise marker CALC MARK FUNC returns the current setting of marker function for the marker specified In this case it returns the string NOIS CALC MARK Y returns the y axis value of the Marker Noise function for marker 1 if Marker Noise is ON for marker 1 3 2 8 Band Intvl Power Measures the power in a bandwidth non zero span or time interval zero span specified by the user If no marker is on this key activates the delta pair marker mode If the detector mode is set to Auto the average detector is selected If the Avg VBW type is s
490. pe marker and places it at the center of the display This will be marker 1 if you have not previously selected a different marker There are five control modes for the markers Normal Position A single marker that can be moved to any point on the trace Delta DELTa fixed reference marker and a moveable marker that you can place at any point on the trace Delta Pair BAND Both a movable delta and a movable reference marker You can independently adjust the position of each marker Span Pair SPAN A moveable reference and a movable delta marker You can adjust the center point of the markers and the frequency span between the markers Off O Turns off the active marker or marker pair Your instrument stores data to a high degree of resolution and accuracy It is often difficult to read the trace data directly from the screen to the desired accuracy Markers are diamond shaped pointers that can be placed at any point on a trace to accurately read the data at that point Markers may also be use in pairs to read the difference or delta between two data points The marker number is indicated above the marker Use the data controls to position the marker The knob and or Up Down keys move the marker left or right If a value is entered from the numeric keypad the marker is moved to the trace point nearest to that value The data for the active marker the one currently be controlled appears in the upper right corner of
491. pendent of the previous setting of Max Mixer Lvl located under Amplitude When the TOI measurement is Off the previous maximum Max Mixer Lvl is restored Setting Max Mixer Lvl to Auto sets the maximum mixer level to 30 dBm Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset 30 00 dBm Auto Range History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe UPPer lt number gt SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe UPPer SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe TOIN FREQuency MIXer RANGe AUTO Example TOIN FREQ MIX RANG 10 dBm TOIN FREQ MIX RANG TOIN FREQ MIX RANG AUTO 1 TOIN FREO MIX RANG AUTO 5 18 5 Optimize Ref Level Sets the reference level to place the tones near the top of the display When input attenuation is set to Auto pressing Optimize Ref Level sets the input attenuation according to the auto rules described in Max Mixer Lvl based on this reference level You may want to trade off analyzer noise and analyzer induced distortion by manually changing the attenuation setting from this starting point 426 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Intermod TOI NOTE There is always a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 O e i WA E m El D 7 E bi 3
492. pep ap eo 103 Display LARS CCP 103 Iaspbas EE 104 Acto Pola Postion ius S shes EE Swe be RE erto REX ex XXaqed REX 106 Elis cuu pieptdvdnpae d dpattdug EAE eS ES quib Seded d Mob oed dE aie din EE 108 dE 122 PEIOIGEBSUCON qo sucks np Rode ad b nO ADU de BOR CAO Ede RUN NOR ea Ag ILC UR ACA ok S NERO UN 123 Display Enable Remote Command Only eee 125 EE DEE 127 EE 130 DU Boni d LS are EU ok asap ap Ec ee ET TRU dde de qup aM UE a 136 Contents 2 S E 2 9 E E E WEE 143 Delete ee EE EELER EE EE WEE CEA CK AER 9 147 EY visu daa OW ee hau nV d nd dE descartan 4 ARE dE a aes oro 151 Konami sad 9 deed CoA PY ORE RS RR REA AEN A OME E RR RE Se RR Ran ec A 153 EE EE 155 Delete All 2212s oak EE SERRE RERO EE EE AUR RR EE CARE AR x 157 Query Trace Data Remote Command Only 158 Move Data to a File Remote Command Only 158 Set Data Byte Order Remote Command Only 160 Format Numeric Data Remote Command Only 160 FREGQUENGYChac al 2 EE ANE E ACEN HREG VARENA ee dee aa 163 Canter PEG 2 9 5 0 9 E PUER SPESE RR REL Idque Eb IE E Ed RE PE Ee Edd E 163 GE EO A EEN Eet EE EE dee ee 164 POD EE 165 EE DID LL oue qaa de Ep a a Rf a RR REAPER E dO dad GERE dc RSEN OUR CR b det 166 Iro LESE gege Ee Ee Se EE e EUER ue E IE RP ERAS S 167 PIs PE oo qp epiac daa Odd doped e d oed se foede edhe X appa do pa aeq e 168 TiyrotfC a EE 171 Ino EE 171 RP Eeer 4 4 EEN Ee A SORA PROC RARE NER REG Ee bo
493. play 879 6 191deu2 If measurement chosen is M gt gt Spectrum Emission gt Display Preferences Mask Graticut raticule Full Screen on K Limit Display finnotation On Off On Off Note The menus under Display are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe905a Preferences sdey nuan puawansea uonng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw 6 1e3deu2 ev9 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Span X Scale Key SPAN X Scale If measurement chosen is Spectrum Emissions Mask Note The menus under Span are measurement dependent and may vary with each measurement pe895 1a suonouny jueuieJnseo y UOoung au0 sde y nus X Scale Scale Div 2 00 dB Ref Value 1 500000006Hz Ref Position Left Ctr Right sde nuan 1uauieJnseay uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw 0S9 6 191deu2 Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions me If measurement chosen is Spectrum Emission Mask Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Marker Key Marker gt Note The menus under Marker are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe908a Select Marker 1 2 3 4 Norma Off Peak Search EE Freq Count Marker Fctn w n Marker
494. played using the SYSTem MESSage command History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SYSTem MESSage OFF Example SYST MESS OFF 4 8 18 Power On Elapsed Time Remote Command Only Returns the number of seconds that have elapsed since the instrument was turned on for the very first time Remote Command SYSTem PON ETIMe 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Example SYST PON ETIM 4 8 19 SCPI Version Query Remote Command Only Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies The SCPI industry standard changes regularly This command indicates the version used when creating the instrument SCPI commands Remote Command SYSTem VERSion Example SYST VERS Chapter 4 281 Instrument Functions P Z System N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 282 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Trace View 4 9 Trace View Displays menu keys that enable you to set how trace information is stored and displayed Each trace is comprised of a series of data points in which x and y axis information is stored The analyzer updates the information for the active trace with each sweep NOTE If you have selected ACP Burst Power Channel Power Harmonic Distortion Multi Carrier Power Power Stat CCDF or Spectrum Emission Mask in the MEASURE menu refer to the Trace View sections specific to those measurements K
495. power 16 67 ms for 60 Hz power the counter rejects incidental modulation at the power line rate The shortest gate time that rejects both 50 and 60 Hz modulation is 100 ms which is the value chosen when gate time is in Auto Key Path Marker Fctn Marker Count State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Auto 100 ms Range 1 us to 500 ms Remote Command CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATetime AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATet ime AUTO CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATetime lt time gt CALCulate MARKer FCOunt GATet ime Example CALC MARK FCO GAT AUTO On CALC MARK FCO GAT 1e 2 sets the gate time to 107 s 10 ms 196 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker gt 3 3 Marker Accesses menu keys that can copy the current marker value into other instrument parameters for example Center Frequency 3 39 Mkr gt CF Sets the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the selected marker The marker stays at this frequency so it moves to the center of the display This function is not available in Zero Span Key Path Marker gt Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET CENTer Example CALC MARK2 CENT sets the CF of the analyzer to the value of marker 2 3 9 2 Mkr gt CF Step Sets the center frequency CF step size of the analyzer to the marker frequency or in a delta marker mode to the frequency difference between the delta and reference marke
496. ppear in the status line on your display If you try to rename a file with a name that already exists the text message File already exists appears in the status line Placing the cursor on a file name causes it to be loaded into the file name field Key Path File Rename Remote Command MMEMory MOVE file namel file name2 gt Remote Command Notes file name gt must include the complete path and the case must match that of the file to be renamed ile name2 gt must contain the complete path of the destination and the case of any directories in the path must match those of the directories in the destination path The case of the destination file name is always interpreted as uppercase You can use this command to move files between directories and drives even though there is no way to do this from the front panel Example MMEM MOVE C NSTATEOO1 STA C NVFREQ STA Chapter 2 153 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 6 2 Type Enables you to select the type of file you want to rename See File Types on page 127 and Type on page 131 for more information If Type is set to All the catalog displays all files otherwise the files of the currently selected file type are displayed All directories are always displayed
497. ption page 142 When you load a Limits file into the analyzer you restore all of the limit sets that were in the instrument at the time of the save NOTE When loading Limits files be sure you have selected the appropriate X Axis Units frequency or time Display Limits Properties X Axis Units If you are in time X Axis Units and you load frequency limits all current limit line data will be erased and the analyzer will switch to frequency units The reverse of the this situation also holds true Screen A file that contains an exact representation of the analyzer display at the time it was saved You cannot extract data from Screen files as you can with Trace files but you can print them or include them in other documents Screen files look exactly as the display looked when the file was saved They cannot be loaded into the analyzer There are four formats for screen files Bitmap Metafile Reverse Bitmap and Reverse Metafile Bitmap A file that contains an exact bit representation of the screen Stored in Graphics Interchange Format GIF format Metafile A file that contains information about the objects on the screen Stored in Windows Metafile Format WMF format a format that can be read with Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel among others Reverse Bitmap Same as Bitmap but the black display backgrounds are changed to white and the yellow traces are turned to green to preserve printer black ink Reverse Metafil
498. put the analyzer in single sweep mode then take a sweep Key Path Sweep State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Continuous Remote Command INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 INITiate CONTinuous INITiate IMMediate Remote Command Notes This command affects sweep if not in a measurement and affects trigger when in a measurement A measurement refers to any of the functions under the MEASURE key This corresponds to continuous sweep or single sweep operation when not in a measurement and continuous measurement or single measurement operation when in a measurement When NOT in a measurement this command does the following When ON at the completion of each sweep cycle the sweep system immediately initiates another sweep cycle s When OFF the sweep system remains in an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON or an INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single sweep cycle and then return to the idle state 242 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z SWEEP The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer 1 is returned when there is continuous sweeping 0 is returned when there is only a single sweep When in a measurement this command does the following When ON at the completion of each trigger cycle the trigger system immediately initiates another trigger cycle When OFF the trigger system remains in
499. quency of spur Hz Amplitude of spur dBm Absolute limit dBm Pass or Fail 1 0 Di gv A dx DU pa n 2 through 21 Returns trace data values for the selected frequency range where range number n 1 If the selected range is not active then 9 91E37 is returned for each non active trace data element n 22 Returns the number of spurs found Example MEAS SPUR 5 1 12 Spectrum Emission Mask Spectrum Emission Mask measurement includes the in band and out of band spurious emissions As it applies to W CDMA 3GPP this is the power contained in a specified frequency bandwidth at certain offsets relative to the total carrier power It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band For WLAN the reference power is taken as the peak PSD in the signal 322 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode and all offset results are also the peak PSD in that offset as opposed to the integrated power Offsets that are turned off inactive will return 999 0 when their results are queried over SCPI For more information see Meas Setup Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM on page 457 Key Path MEASURE el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 323 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command
500. query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Enable STATus QUEStionable ENABle number STATus QUEStionable ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Event register will set the Questionable Status Summary bit bit3 in the Status Byte Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The preset condition is all bits in this enable register set to 0 To have any Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register one or more bits need to be set to 1 The Status Byte Event Register should be queried after each measurement to check the Questionable Status Summary bit 3 If it is equal to 1 a condition during the test may have made the test results invalid If it is equal to 0 this indicates that no hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer Chapter 8 573 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei E GA NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Event Query STATus QUEStionable EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum
501. r 485 SEN Se SPU Rieu AVER age COUNT Laos sepa pL d wok kina RKE KR KR OCCORRE RR ta 485 SENSe SPURious AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat 000 eee eee 486 LSENSSESPUBious NR E EE 486 SENSe SPURious AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 lesse RB 485 SRN Sel PLU Roue AV ERagel STATE ENEE cae ee Ree xe RR RR RERO RERO Ra 485 SRN Re RPU Rans PS Meas OEF ON 0 Live uo eoa ke x nere De ken 499 SENSE GELT E OM Em pio tuned as ook qd bad ie dod ated dra ddr Ae Redes 499 SENSe SPURious POWer RF LEVel integer es 499 SENSe SPURious POWerE RFELEVel gR KR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR I 0 499 SENSe SPURious POWer RF RANGe AUTO OFRTIONTIOIL nnnanaanaaanaanaaaan 499 SENSe SPURious POWer RF RANGe AUTO aR R na RRR RRR KR NK RRR eens 499 Bee Be NEE E A EE 498 L SENSe SPURIouSBSPUR 2 2222 b REOR EE EES EE LORE EROS RE n 498 SENSe SPURious TYPE EXAMine FULL I 498 PeENSe SPURIOUS TYPE uses de ich RR ic C oe dediti o doe ee dp duh ded Race 498 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 490 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 4 491 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution lt integer gt 490 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BANDwidth RESolution 491 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BAN Dw 1d Gh V De0 nnana 491 SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST BWIDth BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO O
502. r see Marker on page 177 In Span Pair mode the display shows the difference between the delta marker and a reference marker and enables you to adjust both the ref and delta markers The start marker number is indicated with a number and an R above the marker for example 1R and the stop marker is indicated with a marker number After you turn on the Span Pair function pressing the key again toggles between the two marker parameters you are controlling span and center Adjusting the Span Span is underlined changes the frequency difference between the two markers Adjusting Center Center is underlined maintains the marker spacing and changes the frequency of the midpoint between the markers Adjusting the span changes the frequency difference between the two markers while maintaining the midpoint between the two markers at a fixed frequency Changing the center changes the center point between the two markers while maintaining the frequency difference There are four conditions that can occur when Span Pair mode is selected s f marker mode is Off the delta marker and reference marker are placed at the center of the display f marker mode is Normal the delta marker and reference marker are placed at the current marker position on the trace e Ifthe marker mode is Delta the current marker position remains unchanged and the reference marker is placed on the trace at the reference marker position s Ifthe marker mode is Delta Pai
503. r the marker positions remain unchanged The difference between Span Pair and Delta modes is that in Span Pair mode the reference marker stays on the trace and you can adjust its trace point Once positioned the markers stay on the trace points on which they have been placed Changing the frequency or time of the analyzer does not change the trace point of the markers that is they stay at the same horizontal position on the display You cannot move the markers off the screen If you adjust either center or span to a value that would cause one of the markers to move off screen the marker will be placed at the right or left side of the display on the trace Changing the Center marker changes the center point of the two markers This function is useful in functions such as Band Power Key Path Marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command under Points on page 244 Remote Command See Marker on page 177 for the command to select the control mode CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer lt param gt Sets the mid point of the markers to a specific trace point CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer 184 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker Returns the midpoint trace point CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN lt param gt Sets the spacing between the markers to a specified number of trace points CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN Returns the spacing of the m
504. r FFT sweeps the auto manual function of this key is not applicable When Sweep Time Auto is selected in non zero span any changes to Sweep Time while in zero span will revert to the Auto value when you return to non zero span When Sweep Time Man is selected in non zero span any changes to Sweep Time while in zero span will be maintained when you return to non zero span within the available sweep time range When entering zero span from a non zero span the sweep time does not change Key Path Sweep Annunciation Annotation The sweep is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen Also the points displayed parenthetically State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Auto Model Sweep Time E4440A 66 24 ms E4443A 11 16 ms E4445A 22 00 ms E4446A 110 00 ms E4448A 125 00 ms Chapter 4 241 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a 2 E Q D O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z SWEEP Default Terminator seconds Range in zero span 1 us to 6000s in swept spans 1 ms to 2000s Remote Command SENSe SWEep TIME lt time gt SENSe SWEep TIME SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO Example SWE TIME 500 ms SWE TIME AUTO OFF 4 7 2 Sweep Switches the analyzer between continuous sweep and single sweep mode Pressing the front panel Single key will also
505. r Fast Tuning In this mode the LO behavior compromises phase noise at all offsets from the carrier below approximately 2 MHz This allows rapid measurement throughput when changing the center frequency or span Key Path Auto Couple Remote Command See PhNoise Opt on page 76 Example FREQ SYNT 3 2 1 4 Detector See Detector in Det Demod menu Key Path Auto Couple Chapter 2 77 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI r Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 2 1 5 Avg VBW Type See Avg VBW Type in the BW Avg menu Key Path Auto Couple 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 78 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple 2 1 6 ADC Dither Access the menu to set ADC Dither to On Off or Auto Key Path Auto Couple Remote Command SENSe ADC DITHer STATe OFF ON AUTO SENSe ADC DITHer STATe Example ADC DITH OFF 2 1 6 1 Auto Turns the ADC dither to automatic It then chooses on or off according to which is most likely to be the best selection based on the other analyzer settings such as span resolution BW and sweep type FFT or swept Sweep type MU Chunk width gt gt 2 MHz Yes In ADC ranging is Bypass Yes Swp No RBW lt 100 Sech d Yes Dither is On gt Dither is Off psaswptype vsd Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in instrument state Facto
506. r offset can only be turned on when in zero span and the resolution bandwidth is 1 kHz or greater non digital bandwidths Trigger offset is available for all trigger modes Example TRIG OFFS 100 ms TRIG OFFS STAT ON turns on the trigger offset Chapter 4 291 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Instrument Functions P Z Trig N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 292 Chapter 4 5 One Button Measurement Functions This chapter provides you with functional descriptions and remote programming commands for all measurements available to you when you press the front panel Measure key Spectrum Analysis mode is selected 293 el i U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Functions This section provides key descriptions and programming information for each key associated with the measurements available when you press the front panel Measure key Note that the information for keys common to all measurements Measure Meas Control Mode Setup Restart and Single is presented first and the information unique to each measurement is grouped by measurement type Use the table below to locate the key descriptions and remote commands for the measurement of interest
507. r over the remote bus A definite length block of data starts with an ASCII header that begins with and indicates how many additional data points are following in the block Suppose the header is 512320 s The first digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits bytes there are in the header The 12320 means 12 320 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your selected data format bytes point either 8 for real 64 or 4 for real 32 In this example if you are using real 64 then there are 1540 points in the block Remote Command MMEMory DATA lt file name gt lt definite length block MMEMory DATA lt file name gt Example MMEM DATA C DEST TXT 14abcd Loads the data abcd into C DEST TXT MMEM DATA C SCRENO01 GIF Initiates a transfer of data from file C SCRENO01 GIF 158 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L File 5 D o E c 3 D 5 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls Chapter 2 159 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 41 Set Data Byte Order Remote Command Only This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode Normal mode is when the byte sequence begins with the most significant byte MSB first and ends with the least significant byte LSB last in
508. r revision Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Range registers are an integer 0 to 127 Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe Example RCL 12 Front Panel Access File Recall State Reset RST This command presets the instrument to a factory defined condition that is appropriate for remote programming operation In Spectrum Analysis Mode RST is equivalent to performing the commands e SYSTem PRESet with preset type set to MODE s CLS which clears the STATus bits and error queue 566 Chapter 8 Using the STATus System Common IEEE Commands RST does not change the mode and only resets the parameters for the current mode The SYSTem PRESet command is equivalent to a front panel Preset key Save SAV lt register gt This command saves the instrument state to the specified instrument memory register Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Range Registers are an integer 0 to 127 Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe Example SAV 12 Front Panel Access File Save State Service Request Enable SRE integer SRE This command sets the value of the service request enable register The query returns the value of the register Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Range Integer 0 to 255 Example SRE 22 Read Status Byte Query STB Returns the value of the status byte register without
509. r to Off disables the measurement averaging Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 Off Range 1 through 1000 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Commands SENSe MCPower AVERage COUNt lt integer gt SENSe MCPower AVERage COUNt SENSe MCPower AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower AVERage L STATe Example MCP AVER COUN 10 MCP AVER COUN Chapter 5 429 o c e 5 o c E nt Ld c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP MCP AVER OFF MCP AVER 5 19 2 Avg Mode Press Avg Mode to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function as either Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached s EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat When you set Avg Mode to Repeat after reaching the average count all previou
510. raticule turns the display graticules On or Off Key Path Display Factory Preset and RST On Factory Default On Terminators Enter History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe Example DISP WIND TRAC GRAT GRID OFF Chapter 2 123 7 Ind E 3 bi E T c E LO a E D gt LI r Instrument Functions A L Display 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 124 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 7 2 Annotation Turns the screen annotation on or off for all windows however menu key annotation will remain on the display The screen annotation may not be required for prints or during remote operation Key Path Display Factory Preset and RST On Remote Command DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL Example DISP WIND ANN OFF 2 4 8 Display Enable Remote Command Only Turns the display on off If enable is set to off the display will appear to blank This can make the measurement run faster since the instrument does not have to update the display after every data acquisition There is often no need to update the display information when using remote operation s Sending SYSTem PRESet or TST commands will turn it on RST will not Key Path None no front panel control State
511. re measurement t 1 2300 MHz On Off 2 00000000 MHz dependent and vary with each Lee measurement Pos Offse Offset Limits gt RRC Filter T Limit On off 0 00 dt Note Offset Freq changes to Neg Offse Edge Freq when IS 95C eege t ier ane T Limit cdma2000 MC 1X cdma2000 j l 0 00 dE MC 3X or cdma2000 DS is Se Noise the selected radio standard Optimize Correction Ref Level on Oft More More pe887a Re 1of2 E 2 of 2 i A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function suonouny jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus 629 suoljaun4 jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw sde nuan 1uauieJnseay uonng eug 0 9 6 191deu2 Vienu Maps One button Measuremen Functions ACP Measurement Trace View Key Trace View j If measurement chosen is ACP Note The menus under Trace View are measurement dependent and vary with each measurement pe888a Meas View Spectrum Bar Graph 1 2 3 Clear Write Combined Max Hold Combined View Units Min Hold Rel Abs View Blank Trace I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices sde nug Juswesnseayy uojng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uo
512. reate Dir Displays the functions to create a new subdirectory in the currently selected directory Key Path File 2 5 7 1 Create Dir Now Executes the create a new directory function While the directory is being created a popup message is displayed Creating directory followed by Reading directory After the successful creation of a directory the text message Directory xxxxxx created where xxxxxx is the new directory name appears in the status line If the creation of a new directory is being performed for a directory name that already exists the text message Directory already exists appears in the status line Key Path File Create Dir Remote Command MMEMory MDIRectory lt dir name gt Remote Command Notes lt dir name gt must contain the complete path for the new directory Lowercase characters are interpreted as uppercase Example MMEM MDIR C myDir creates directory MYDIR on the C drive 2 5 7 2 Name Displays the Alpha Editor and enables you to enter a directory name The numeric keypad can also be used to enter a directory name while the alpha editor is accessed To complete the entry press Return or Enter Chapter 2 155 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L File NOTE Only capital letters A Z and digits 0 9 may appear in directory names 8 characters maximum Key Path File Create Dir 1
513. reference level and channel bandwidth must be set by the user Key Path Front panel key Dependencies Couplings Menu changes depending on the Mode and Measurement selected State Saved No save History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 14 1 Avg Number To specify the number of measurement averages used when calculating the measurement result set Avg Number to On The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep Setting Avg Number to Off disables measurement averaging Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 averages Off Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 Range 1 to 1000 Remote Command SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt integer SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage L STATe Chapter 5 399 el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 o c e 5 o c E nt c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Channel Power CHP Example CHP AVER COUN 10 CHP AVER COUN CHP AVER OFF CHP AVER 5 14 2 Avg Mode Press Avg Mode to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function to either Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the speci
514. remotely it can only be queried Example SYST HID 264 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 5 5 Subnet Mask Changes the subnet mask of the instrument The subnet mask is a 32 bit address mask used in IP networks to indicate the bits of an IP address that are used for the subnet address The default address is 255 255 0 0 for a class B network Key Path System Config I O State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Default 255 255 0 0 Not reset by System Restore Sys Defaults History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 4 8 5 6 Gateway Address Allows you to set the gateway address The gateway address feature is used to manipulate the gateway used to reach the destination The gateway address can be changed by entering a numeric address composed of numbers and decimal points Press ENTER to complete the entry Key Path System Config I O State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Factory Default 0 0 0 0 Not reset by System Restore Sys Defaults History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 8 5 7 SCPI LAN Displays keys to enable SCPI functionality over LAN There are a number of different ways to send SCPI remote commands to the instrument over the LAN It can be a problem to have multiple u
515. ring given with the option The license key is unique to a specific option installed and instrument host ID To terminate the entry press Enter or Return An external keyboard may also be used for this entry The license key number will appear on the second line of the License Key menu key Key Path System Licensing Dependencies Couplings None State Saved Not saved in instrument state SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Preset Clears the current value Remote Command SYSTem LKEY option license key SYSTem LKEY option Remote Command Notes The query returns a string that contains the license key for a specified application or option that is already installed in the instrument The license key will also be returned if the application is not currently in memory but had been installed at some previous time The license key is unique to a specific option host ID and serial number Host ID can be returned by SYSTem HID Example SYST LKEY B78 B62A35B370679 SYST LKEY B78 The query would return B62A35B37679 If the instrument does not have a license key for that option the query would return 4 8 12 3 Activate License Activates the specified option When a valid option key number and license key number have been entered press Activate If your entry was correct the option will be enabled and the message Option activated will appear in the status line of your display T
516. rint Setup Printer Setup Graved out unless PCL5 printer Orientation Portrait Page Size Letter Grayed out unless Color Capable printer pe871a Color On Off More 1of2 Page Size Executive Orientation Landscape Printer Setup Language PCL3 PCL5 Color Capable Yes No Print Setup L Prints Page 2 Eject Page More 2of2 I A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings 19 sis Jeuy uingjoedsg sdejy nue ezz abed ees lav dnyas yung sis jeuy uinjjoedg sde nuan Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis SPAN X Scale Key See page 237 SPAN X Scale vl9 p Span Span 26 4900000 GHz Span Zoom Full Span Zero Span Last Span pe872a 8 191deu2 UEZ eBed eec Aen ALIS X NVdS siskjeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 Sr9 SPAN X Scale Key for CCDF Measurement See page 389 SPAN X Scale E X Scale If measurement L chosen is Power Stat CCDF Scale Div 2 00 dB Note The menus under Span are measurement depe
517. rious Emissions measurements are not available when this radio standard is selected Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN IS95 5 3 1 3 J STD 008 Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard J STD 008 The Spectrum Emissions Mask Harmonic Distortion MCP and Spurious Emissions measurements are not available when this radio standard is selected Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN JSTD 5 3 1 4 IS 95C Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard IS 95C The Spectrum Emissions Mask Harmonic Distortion and Spurious Emissions measurements are not available when this radio standard is selected Key Type 1 of N menu 334 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command Use SE
518. rity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 0 Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable IN Tegrity PTRansition lt number gt STATus QUEStonable INTegrity PTRansition Chapter 8 579 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E I E KA 2 ky 3 S Lr 7 o lt Ld Lei f N D NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable lt number gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Signal Register Questionable Integrity Signal Condition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity SIGNal CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current condit
519. rmines that the average detector has a better speed variance trade off for noise type signals Refer to Figure 2 1 which shows a decision tree of how detection type is determined Figure 2 1 Auto Rules For Detector Selection Marker Noise YES ON Band Intvl YES 2 Power ON P NO pue w YES Bunn we BWIAIQ Average ON UNS ype gt _ lt Avg ype gt En T N AUTO 7 Log Pwr NO YES ves i i SAMPLE AVERAGE Any trace in _ YES Max Hold d l NO T PM Any trace in gt SAMPLE K Min Hold NO Any trace in NEGATIVE Min Hold PEAK PEAK NORMAL Key Path Det Demod Detector Factory Preset On Normal 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Chapter 2 97 E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L Det Demod Remote Command SENSe DETector AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DETector AUTO Example DET AUTO ON 2 3 1 2 Normal Displays the peak detected level in the interval bucket being displayed when the signal is CW like If the signal is noise like within a bucket the signal both rose and fell the even bucket shows the peak maximum within a two bucket interval and the odd bucket shows the negative peak minimum Gain is increased to compensate for the effects of faster sweep rates to keep the displayed valu
520. rmonic distortion would then be calculated from these averaged amplitude readings Note that averaging applies only to the amplitude of the harmonic and does not affect the frequency at which the amplitude is measured Key Path MEASURE Remote Command Measurement Results Available Command n Results Returned CONFigure HARMonics N A Not Applicable INITiate HARMonics FETCh HARMonics AMPLitude ALL N A Returns the amplitude values of the first ten MEASure HARMonics AMPLitude A Darmomes Tuo Het vA UD L2 fundamental is measured in dBm The remaining harmonics are measured in dBm READ HARMonics AMPLitude ALL from the fundamental If fewer than ten harmonics are measured zero is returned for any harmonic not measured FETCh HARMonics AMPLitude n n 1 to 10 Returns the amplitude of the specified MEASure HARMonics AMPLitudeln n 1 for n harmonic number n where n l returns the 9 not amplitude of the fundamental in units of l specified dBm D I A R M 9 READ eee For example n 9 returns the amplitude of the ninth harmonic measured in dBc from the fundamental FETCh HARMonics DISTortion N A Returns the computed total harmonic MEASure HARMonics DISTortion GEES READ HARMonics DISTortion FETCh HARMonics FREQuency ALL N A Returns the frequency values of the first ten MEASure HARMonics FREQuency A LL READ HARMonics FREQuency ALL harmonics in Hz
521. ro span range of the analyzer History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard SBWidth lt freq gt SENSe RADio STANdard SBWidth Example RAD STAN SBW 2MHZ 5 3 2 2 Device BTS MS This function is only available when you have selected the standard IS 95 J STD 008 cdma2000 W CDMA NADC PDC TETRA or GSM It enables you to select either the base transmitter station BTS setup defaults or the mobile station MS defaults for the standard that you have selected This key is unavailable when you select Bluetooth el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Key Path Mode Setup Std Setup Factory Preset BTS History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard DEVice BTS MS SENSe RADio STANdard DEVice Chapter 5 341 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Example RAD STAN DEV MS 5 3 2 3 Packet Type This function is only available when the standard you have selected is Bluetooth It enables you to set the instrument settings for testing DH1 DH3 or DH5 packet type Key Path Mode Setup Std Setup Factory Preset DH1 History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe RADio STANdard PACKet DH1 DH3 DH5
522. rpolation and log frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as died 2 log f log f y ias T TUE og fj y y log f For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as log y log y log y ee ed log Yi i i For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as log y log y log y Bir df log f log f logy i Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 Persistent retains settings even through a power cycle Factory Preset and RST Log History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 118 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Display Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE Example CALC LLIN2 CONT INT TYPE LIN sets limit line 2 frequency interpolation to linear 2 4 5 1 8 Amptd Intern Allows you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table The available interpolation modes are linear Lin and logarithmic Log If the linear mode is used for both frequency and amplitude a straight line is used when interpolating between points in a limit table This function does not work in zero span when the analyzer is in time domain Refer to the Note in Freq Interp on page 118 for more information NOTE Interpolation modes determine how li
523. rrectly on your UNIX workstation you control your instrument using commands such as the following OUTPUT 818 IDN ENTER 818 S where 18 is the device address for the instrument Chapter 6 535 D 2 S 3 E 5 rs T c 5 2 D 3 E zi S D un c o E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH E e LI a NOTE Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Using HP Agilent VEE Over Socket LAN There is a VEE example program provided on the documentation CD ROM There is a LabView example program provided on the documentation CD ROM To control your instrument via socket LAN using VEE click on the VEE menu titled I O Then select To From Socket and position the I O object box on the screen Fill in the following fields Connect Port 5025 Host Name lt your_hostname gt Timeout 15 For faster troubleshooting you may want to set the timeout to a smaller number If the host name you enter doesn t work try using the IP address of your instrument example 191 108 43 5 Using the IP address rather than the hostname may also be faster See Figure 5 for an example of an VEE screen Changing the host name in the instrument does not change your LAN system s representation of the host name You must work through your local system administrator to change the host name on your LAN system 536 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to
524. rs See the following section Compiling and Linking a VTL Program for information on how to use the VTL run time libraries Compiling and Linking a VTL Program 32 bit Applications The following is a summary of important compiler specific considerations for several C C compiler products when developing WIN32 applications For Microsoft Visual C version 2 0 compilers e Select Project Update All Dependencies from the menu e Select Project Settings from the menu Click on the C C button Select Code Generation from the Use Run Time Libraries list box VTL requires these definitions for WIN32 Click on OK to close the dialog boxes Select Project Settings from the menu Click on the Link button and add visa32 1ibtothe Object Library Modules list box Optionally you may add the library directly to your project file Click on OK to close the dialog boxes You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths Chapter 6 547 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL They are set by doing the following 1 Select Tools Options from the menu 2 Click on the Directories button to set the include file path 3 Select Include Files from the Show Directories For list box 4 Click on the Add button and type in the following C VXIPNP WIN95 INCLUDE 5 Select Library Files from the Show Directories For list
525. rs The step size can be verified by pressing Frequency Center Freq The step size is displayed in the third line of the active function area of the display This function is not available in Zero Span Key Path Marker gt Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STEP Example CALC MARK1 STEP sets the CF step to the value or delta value of marker 1 3 3 8 Mkr gt Start Changes the start frequency to the frequency of the active marker The marker stays at this frequency so it moves to the left of the display This function is not available in Zero Span Key Path Marker gt Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STARt Chapter 3 197 5 D o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O Instrument Functions M O Marker Example CALC MARK1 STAR sets the start frequency to the value or delta value of marker 1 e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od c o E 5 AL a E 198 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker gt 3 3 4 Mkr gt Stop Changes the stop frequency to the frequency of the active marker The marker stays at this frequency so it moves to the right of the display This function is not available in Zero Span Key Path Marker gt Remote Command CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STOP Example CALC MARK1 STOP sets the stop frequency to the value or delta value of marker 1 3 3 5 MkrA gt Span Sets the start an
526. rument to work with your network often requires detailed knowledge of your local network software This section attempts to help you with some common problems Contact your network administrator for additional assistance The instrument LAN interface does not need or include any proprietary driver software It was designed to operate with common network utilities and drivers 538 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Using the LAN to Control the Instrument Either a hardware problem or a software problem can prevent the instrument s remote file server from communicating over the LAN The following common problems may be encountered Communications Not Established If you have just installed and configured the LAN interface and you have never been able to access the instrument via ftp or telnet go directly to Pinging the Instrument from a Computer or Workstation on page 6 542 If you have previously been able to access the instrument via ftp or telnet and now cannot do so check the following o Has any hardware been added or moved on your network This includes adding or removing any workstations or peripherals or changing any cabling o Have software applications been added to the network o Has the functionality been turned off from the front panel Press System Config I O SCPI LAN o Have any configuration files been modified Pressing System Restore Sys Defaults restores the original factory defaults and you will have to re
527. ry Preset 0 Hz Range 250 MHz to 250 MHz Remote Command SENSe POWer RF MW PADJust lt freq gt SENSe POWer RF MW PADJust SENSe POWer RF MMW PADJust freq Chapter 2 55 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI LI lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale SENSe POWer L RF MMW PADJust Example POW MW PADJ 100 POW MW PADJ 2 0 7 Y Axis Units Displays the menu keys that enable you to change the vertical Y axis amplitude units The analyzer retains the entered Y Axis Units separately for both Log and Lin amplitude scale types For example if Scale Type has been set to Log and you set Y Axis Units to dBm pressing Scale Type Log sets the Y Axis Units to dBm If Scale Type has been set to Lin and you set Y Axis Units to Volts pressing Scale Type Lin sets the Y Axis Units to Volts Pressing Scale Type Log again sets the Y Axis units back to dBm This key is unavailable greyed out when the FM Demod View is on Y Axis Units in conjunction with the Scale Type affect how the data is read off the display markers and over the remote interface When using the remote interface no units are returned so you must know what the Y Axis units are to interpret the results Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset For Scale Type Log dB
528. ry Preset Auto 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 ES El D gt LI r Chapter 2 79 E LI KA E Q D O E E LL E GU E E E KA E Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple Remote Command Use SENSe ADC DITHer STATe AUTO Example ADC DITH AUTO 2 1 6 2 On When ADC Dither is On the linearity of low level signals is improved However the ADC dynamic range is reduced to make room for the dither As a result the noise floor of the analyzer is somewhat compromised So making measurements with ADC dither on gives you better amplitude linearity but turning ADC dither off gives you a lower noise floor better sensitivity Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in instrument state Remote Command SENSe ADC DITHer STATe ON Example ADC DITH ON 2 1 6 3 Off When ADC Dither is Off the instrument noise floor is improved If ADC dither is on the ADC dynamic range is reduced to make room for the dither As a result the noise floor of the analyzer is somewhat compromised So making measurements with ADC dither on gives you improved amplitude linearity but turning ADC dither off gives you a lower noise floor better sensitivity Key Path Auto Couple State Saved Saved in instrument state Remote Command Use SENSe ADC DITHer STATe OFF Example ADC DITH OFF 2 1 7 ADC Ranging Accesses the keys to set the ADC ranging to provide for the best signal to no
529. s Trace View Multi Carrier Power Measurement 5 20 Trace View Multi Carrier Power Measurement If Multi Carrier Power has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate Trace View menu for the multi carrier power measurement Displays menu keys that enable you to set how trace information is stored and displayed Key Path Front panel key History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command for this function 5 20 1 Spectrum Pressing Spectrum selects the spectral display of the measurement Key Path Trace View Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 20 2 Combined Pressing Combined selects the measurement to be displayed as a bar graph and spectrum Key Path Trace View O e i WA E Ki ps El D 7 E bi 3 bi E Ku E El 7 GA o e 7 Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function Chapter 5 447 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E O One Button Measurement Functions Trace View Multi Carrier Power Measurement 5 20 3 Combined View Units Pressing Combined View Units selects the units dBc or dBm for the floating numeric displays
530. s result data is cleared and the average count is set back to 1 Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Exponential History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower AVERage TCONrol EXPonential REPeat SENSe MCPower AVERage TCONro1 Example MCP AVG TCON EXP MCP AVG TCON 5 19 3 Carrier Setup Accesses the Carrier Setup and Configure Carriers menus that allow you to define the various parameters for each carrier Key Path Meas Setup History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 430 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP 5 19 3 1 Carriers Press Carriers to specify the number of carriers to be measured Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Factory Preset 4 Step Key Increment 1 Range 2 to 12 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower CARRier COUNt lt integer gt SENSe MCPower CARRier COUNt Example MCP CARR COUN 10 MCP CARR COUN 5 19 3 2 Ref Carrier Press Ref Carrier Man to specify the carrier identified by a numeric position from which all relative power measurements will be made When Ref Carrier is set to Auto the analyzer selects the carrier with the highest power as the reference Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Key Notes The carrier must have power pre
531. s Emissions Chapter 5 335 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode and Spectrum Emission Mask are available for this standard Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN C2000MC1 5 3 1 8 cdma2000 MC 3X Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard cdma2000 MC 3X All measurements except Multi Carrier Power Harmonic Distortion Spurious Emissions and Spectrum Emission Mask are available for this standard Key Type 1 of N menu Key Path Mode Setup Radio Std History Modified with PSA firmware revision A 04 00 Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command Use SENSe RADio STANdard SELect See Radio Std on page 333 Example RAD STAN C2000MC3 5 3 1 9 cdma2000 DS Sets the specific parameters for the selected measurement located under the MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode key description appropriate for industry standard cdma2000 D8 All measurements except Multi Carrier Power Harmonic Distortion Spurious Emissions and Spectrum Emission Mask
532. s a fine tuning adjustment of the system gain primarily to correct for small amplitude variations that occur as resolution BW is switched Key Path System Alignments Align Subsys Annunciation Annotation Will display a series of pop up message boxes explaining what is being aligned a subset of the Align All Now message boxes Remote Command CALibration GAIN CSYStem CALibration GAIN CSYStem Remote Command Notes The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful Example CAL GAIN CSYS 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N 4 8 4 5 Restore Align Defaults Loads the default values for the alignment system turns on the frequency corrections and resets the timebase to the factory values Align All Now must be executed 3 times after pressing Restore Align Defaults to meet specifications Key Path System Alignments Annunciation Annotation System Alignments Align Now All required Dependencies Couplings None SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies Status questionable calibration Bit 14 will be set Remote Command CALibration DATA DEFault Example CAL DATA DEF 4 8 4 6 Set Calibration Display Detail Remote Command Only Controls the amount of detail shown on the display while the alignment routines are running The routines run faster if the display level is off so they do not have to update the display Off displays no trace po
533. s a unique symbolic name of the device device address accessMode This parameter is not used for VTL Use VI NULL timeout This parameter is not used for VTL Use VI NULL vi This is a pointer to the session identifier for this particular device session This pointer will be used to identify this device session when using other VTL functions The following is an example of opening sessions with a GPIB multimeter and a GPIB VXI scanner ViSession defaultRM dmm scanner viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viOpen defaultRM GPIBO0 22 01NSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp dmm viOpen defaultRM GPIB VXI0 24 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp scanner viClose scanner viClose dmm viClose defaultRM The above function first opens a session with the default resource manager The session returned from the resource manager and a device address is then used to open a session with the GPIB device at address 22 That session will now be identified as dmm when using other VTL functions The session returned from the resource manager is then used again with another device address to open a session with the GPIB VXI device at primary address 9 and VXI logical address 24 That session will now be identified as scanner when using other VTL functions See the following section for information on addressing particular devices Addressing a Session As seen in the previous section the rsrcName parameter in the viOpen function is used
534. s command Example CALC MARK2 X READ ITIM 188 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker 3 1 9 Marker Table When set to On the display is split into a measurement window and a marker data display window For each marker pair information is displayed in the data display window which includes the marker number trace number marker type X axis value and the amplitude of the marker or the delta value if a delta marker or the function value if in a marker function such as Marker Noise or Band Intvl Power NOTE Selecting any measurement including Meas Off under Measure turns off the marker table Key Path Marker Factory Preset Off Remote Command CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe returns 1 if ON or 0 if OFF Example CALC MARK TABL STAT ON turns on the marker table 3 1 0 Marker AU Off Turns off all markers including markers used for signal track This key also turns off marker related functions such as Signal Track Band Interval Power and Marker Noise Key Path Marker Remote Command CALCulate MARKer AOFF Example CALC MARK AOFF turns off all markers Chapter 3 189 Si 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 E v E LI O Instrument Functions M O Marker e LI o Z 9 o 5 ra L od E o E 5 AL 7 E 190 Chapter 3 Instrument Functions M O Marker Fctn 3 2 Marker Fctn Access special marker fun
535. s the amplitude units to dBuV Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Y Axis Units Remote Command See Y Axis Units on page 56 Example UNIT POW DBUV 2 0 7 4 Volts Sets the amplitude units to volts Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Y Axis Units Chapter 2 57 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E 1 a E a gt LI P A LI lt o e 2 G E ra m c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Remote Command See Y Axis Units on page 56 Example UNIT POW V 2 0 7 5 Watts Sets the amplitude units to watts Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Y Axis Units Remote Command See Y Axis Units on page 56 Example UNIT POW W 2 0 8 Ref Lvl Offset Allows you to add an offset value to the displayed reference level The reference level is the absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display Reference level offsets are entered by using the numeric keypad or programming commands The knob and step keys are not active Offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the analyzer input Thus the signal level measured by the analyzer may be thought of as the level at the input of an external amplitude conversion device Entering an offset does not affect the trace position or attenuation value just the displayed value readouts such as reference level and marker amplitudes The maximum reference level avai
536. sent in order to be assigned as a reference carrier frequency If you change the reference carrier s power present value from yes to no the next carrier to the left or to the right if there are none to the left will be assigned as the reference carrier If it currently has power present set to No this will change to Yes This is also true when there are only two carriers with a yes value Refer to the Carrier Pwr Present key description for more information on setting the carrier power present value el i al E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Factory Preset Auto Range Auto Man 1to 12 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower RCARrier AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower RCARrier AUTO SENSe MCPower RCARrier lt integer gt Chapter 5 431 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP SENSe MCPower RCARrier Remote Command Notes Refer to Key Notes above Example MCP RCAR AUTO ON MCP RCAR 3 MCP RCAR o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 432 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP 5 19 3 3 Ref Carrier Freq Press Ref Carrier Freq Man to select the reference carrier frequency for this measurement The center frequency is then calculated using the algor
537. sers simultaneously accessing the instrument over the LAN These keys allow you to limit that somewhat by disabling the telnet socket and or SICL capability Key Path System Config I O Remote Command There is no remote command for this key Chapter 4 265 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 Instrument Functions P Z System 4 8 5 7 1 SCPI Telnet Turns on off the SCPI LAN telnet capability allowing you to limit SCPI access over LAN via telnet Key Path System SCPI Lan State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default On Reset by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI TELNet ENABle OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI TELNet ENABle Example SYST COMM LAN SCPI TELN ENAB ON 4 8 5 7 2 SCPI Socket Turns on off the capability of establishing Socket LAN sessions This allows you to limit SCPI access over LAN via socket sessions Key Path System SCPI Lan State Saved Survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies None Factory Default On Reset by System Restore Sys Defaults Remote Command SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI SOCKet ENABle OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI SOCKet ENABle Example SYST CO
538. set limit 357 359 Offset Limits key 354 offsets and limits limits absolute start level 469 Offsets Limits key 438 one measurement 329 openSocket 538 operation complete IEEE command 565 operation condition register 571 572 operation status 571 Optical Filter key 272 Optimize L f key frequencies 77 frequencies gt 50 kHz 77 Optimize LO key fast tuning 77 optimize ref level 344 360 375 383 402 419 427 441 456 475 Optimize Ref Level key 344 360 375 383 402 419 427 441 456 475 Option key 276 Option 1DS 59 options activating 277 deleting 278 query 565 selecting 206 options IEEE command 565 Order Up Down key 135 orientation landscape 231 portrait 231 Orientation key 231 other correction 61 other users system message to 280 281 output data identifying block size 508 P packet errors 540 Packet Type key 342 344 Page Size key 232 pages displaying next 248 displaying previous 248 paper orientation 231 parameter variables 507 parameters commands 506 parameters variable 507 Pause key 330 PDC key 337 peak excursion 496 Peak Excursn key 215 496 Peak key 99 peak search menu map 611 Peak Search front panel key 209 Peak Search key 218 peak threshold 496 percent parameter variables 507 Period key 187 persistent settings 539 personalities selecting 203 204 206 phase noise Auto 76 optimization 76 77 phase parameter variables 507
539. signal level represents the signal level at the input of the external device Gains may only be entered with the numeric keypad or programming commands not the knob or step keys Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State and survives Preset and power cycle Factory Default 0 dB NOTE Ext Amp Gain is not affected by Factory Preset or power cycle It can be reset to the factory default by pressing System Restore Sys Defaults Range 81 90 dB to 81 90 dB Remote Command SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude relative power in dB SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude Example CORR OFFS MAGN 7 3 DB Sets the Ext Amp Gain to 7 3 dB The only valid suffix is dB If no suffix is sent dB is assumed 2 0 12 Atten Step Permits the selection of 2 dB for PSA 5 dB for ESA or 10 dB for PSA ESA step resolution for input attenuation Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale Saved State Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 2 dB for PSA 5 dB for ESA Remote Command SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation STEP INCRement integer in dB SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation STEP INCRement Example POW ATT STEP 10 68 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale Sets the Attenuation to 10 dB The only valid suffix is dB If no suffix is sent dB is assumed If a value gt 5 is entered 10 is used If a value lt 5 is entered 2 is used for PSA or 5 is used for ES
540. sing the VTL Programming in C Using the VTL The programming examples that are provided are written using the C programming language and the Agilent VTL VISA transition library This section includes some basic information about programming in the C language Note that some of this information may not be relevant to your particular application For example if you are not using VXI instruments the VXI references will not be relevant Refer to your C programming language documentation for more details This information is taken from the manual VISA Transition Library part number E2090 90026 The following topics are included Typical Example Program Contents on page 546 Linking to VTL Libraries on page 547 Compiling and Linking a VTL Program on page 547 Example Program on page 549 Including the VISA Declarations File on page 549 Opening a Session on page 549 Device Sessions on page 550 Addressing a Session on page 551 Closing a Session on page 553 Typical Example Program Contents The following is a summary of the VTL function calls used in the example programs visa h This file is included at the beginning of the file to provide the function prototypes and constants defined by VTL ViSession The ViSession is a VTL data type Each object that will establish a communication channel must be defined as ViSession viOpenDefaultRM You must first open a session with
541. single trace file If the data is for all three traces Source was All when they were saved the data will be returned to the original trace registers regardless of the Destination setting When Type is set to Limits Destination allows you to direct your data to Limit 1 or Limit 2 Key Path File Load State Saved Not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Trace file format is All Traces at power on 2 5 3 4 1 Tracel Selects trace 1 for the trace data to be loaded into 146 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File Key Path File Load Destination State Saved Not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Not affected by Preset Power up and Restore Sys Defaults sets Trace 1 2 5 3 4 2 Trace 2 Selects trace 2 for the trace data to be loaded into Key Path File Load Destination State Saved Not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Not affected by Preset Power up and Restore Sys Defaults sets Trace 1 2 5 3 4 3 Trace 3 Selects trace 3 for the trace data to be loaded into Key Path File Load Destination State Saved Not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Not affected by Preset Power up and Restore Sys Defaults sets Trace 1 2 5 3 5 Dir Up Moves up one subdirectory level within a directory If your position is in the top level of the drive already it moves up to the drive level and the current drive is highlighted A or C Key Path File Load State Saved Not saved in Instrumen
542. specified file name The csv extension is required 138 Chapter2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 2 2 Type Allows you to select the type of data you want to save The file types available for saving are described below See File Types on page 127 and Type on page 131 for more information Type Format Source Extension State State STA Trace Trace state Trace 1 2 3 or all traces TRC Comma separated trace values Trace 1 2 3 or all traces CSV Limit Internal data format LIM Screen Bitmap GIF Reverse bitmap GIF Metafile WMF Reverse metafile WMF Corrections Internal data format ANT CBL OTH and AMP Measurement Comma separated values CSV Results NOTE Allis not an option in Save you have to specify the desired file type Key Path File Save State Saved Type is not saved in the instrument state Factory Preset Type survives Factory Preset and RST but is set to State at power on 2 5 2 3 Format When Type is set to Trace Format allows you to choose between Trace State and CSV formats For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 When Type is set to Screen Format allows you to choose between Bitmap Metafile Reverse Bitmap and Reverse Metafile formats For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path File Save State Saved Format is not saved in Instrument State Factory Prese
543. st the trace point of the marker using the knob numeric keypad or U keys Key Path Marker Factory Preset Off History Remote command updated with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command See Marker Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM on page 483 for the mode command Example CALC SEM MARK STAT ON selects marker 1 and sets it to Normal 5 26 3 Off Turns off the selected marker In addition Off also turns off functions related to the selected marker Key Path Marker Factory Preset Off History Remote command updated with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command See Select Marker on page 483 for the command to select the control mode Example CALC SEM MARK3 STAT OFF selects marker 3 and sets it to Off 484 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Spurious Emissions 5 27 Meas Setup Spurious Emissions When the spurious emissions measurement has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate measurement setup menu The spurious emissions measurement identifies and determines the power level of spurious emissions in certain frequency bands Key Path Front panel key History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command 5 27 1 Avg Number Press Avg Number to On to specify the number of measurements that will be averaged when calculating the measurement result The average will be d
544. state Factory Preset Off 364 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower CORRection NOISe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe ACPower CORRection NOISe AUTO Remote Command Notes The noise correction feature is not available when the radio standard is set to NADC or PDC Example ACP CORR NOIS 1 ACP CORR NOIS el i al E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 365 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 366 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Trace View ACP Measurement 5 7 Trace View ACP Measurement If ACP has been selected in the Measure menu of the Spectrum Analysis mode this key displays the appropriate Trace View menu for the adjacent channel power ACP measurement Displays menu keys that enable you to set how trace information is stored and displayed Key Path Front panel key Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no equivalent remote command for this function 5 7 1 Spectrum Pressing Spectrum selects the spectral display of the measurement Key Path Trace View Factory Preset Spectrum History Added with f
545. status register mask to look for the waiting for trigger condition bit 5 Use STATus OPERation ENABle 32 Then in the measurement loop Chapter 6 515 E fe S 9 3 3 5 Co T E 5 2 D 3 f 3 S D un c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed 1 STATus OPERation EVENt This query of the operation event register is to clear the current register contents 2 READ PVT initiates a measurement in this example for GSM power versus time using the previous setup The measurement will then be waiting for the trigger Make sure the attenuation is set manually Do NOT use automatic attenuation as this requires an additional burst to determine the proper attenuation level before the measurement can be made 3 Create a small loop that will serial poll the instrument for a status byte value of binary 128 Then wait 1 msec 100 ms if the display is left on enabled before checking again to keep the bus traffic down These two commands are repeated until the condition is set so we know that the trigger is armed and ready 4 Trigger your DUT to send the burst 5 Return the measurement data to your computer This process cannot be done by using with the current VXI plug n play driver implementation You will need to use the above SCPI commands Using an Option Mode When making power measurements on multiple
546. strument preset 566 instrument status 557 5 71 monitoring 567 monitoring status monitoring 567 Int Preamp key 59 integer variable variables 507 integration bandwidth 400 Integration BW key 400 integrity condition register 578 579 integrity signal condition register 580 581 Inverse Time key 188 IP Address key 263 265 IS95 key 334 J Java program 538 programing socket LAN 538 J STD 008 key 334 K key press counter 274 keyboard lock 280 keys control 47 175 207 keyword parameter commands 506 L L SECAM NICAM 340 LabView using it over LAN 536 LAN bus 524 C program 538 cable 544 Java program 538 SICL 267 531 socket programming 530 sockets 266 telnet 266 527 types of access 265 using 524 VEE program 536 LAN defaults 539 LAN troubleshooting 538 Landscape key 231 Language key 230 Last Span key 239 481 License Key key 277 Licensing key 276 279 limit off 110 on 110 test off 111 test on 111 Limit 1 key 109 Limit 2 key 109 Limit key 110 Limit Test key 363 443 limit type 110 Limits file type 129 limits amplitude editing limits 115 connecting points editing limits 116 deleting 122 deleting limits editing limits 116 deleting points editing limits 116 editing 114 fail mask condition 472 474 475 fixed 121 interpolation 118 119 Lin 118 119 Log 118 119 lower 109 margin 112 point 114 relative 121 segments 1
547. t gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Questionable Power Enable SSTATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle number STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register which also sets the Power Summary bit bit 3 in the Questionable Register The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Questionable Power Event Query STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Power Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition number STATus QUEStionable POWer N TRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has
548. t Format survives Factory Preset and RST but Trace file format is Trace State at power on Chapter 2 139 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 a E a gt LI P Instrument Functions A L File Screen file format is Bitmap at power on 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 140 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 2 3 1 Trace State When the file type is Trace this key selects the Trace State instrument readable file TRC format for your file For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path File Save Format 2 5 2 3 2 CSV When the file type is Trace this key selects the trace data as comma separated values CSV The CSV format is readable by a spreadsheet on your computer but the trace cannot be restored to the analyzer display For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path File Save Format 2 5 2 3 3 Bitmap When the file type is Screen this key selects the bitmap Graphics Interchange Format GIF file format for your saved data For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path File Save Format 2 5 2 3 4 Metafile When the file type is Screen this key selects the metafile Windows Metafile Format WMF file format for your saved data For more information on file types refer to File Types on page 127 Key Path Fi
549. t lt integer gt 1 6 eee eee ees 457 SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt 0 0 RRR RR areia eee tence eens 457 SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe OFWION 1011 0 0 0 ee eens 457 PSENSE S EMaskiAVERape STATS EE 457 SENSe SEMask BANDvwidth n BWIDth n INTegration lt numberz 459 SENSe SEMask BANDwidthIn BWIDth n NTegration 0 0 00 cece eee 459 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution reg 460 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 460 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO 0 2 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 460 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution lees 460 SENSe SEMask CARRier AUTO STATe OkFTONTIOIT n eee 462 SENSe SEMask CARRier AUTO STATe R 462 SENSe SEMask CARRier POWer ampl ccc ee eee eee nn 462 PORN Sel PEM RT DN KEE 462 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC ALPHA number 476 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRCIE ALPHA ie cea sce RR RR R RARE EA ES 476 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON O 1 0 0 eee ee eee eee 476 ESENSel Bi Mask EILTerERRCIESTATe icc aK ci KR RKR dee ER RR Reb Rh R 476 SENSe SEMask FREQuency SPAN number 459 SENSe SEMask FREQuency SPAN 0 0 eee m eens 459 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth IMULti integer 468 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST BANDwidth BWIDth IMULti 0 0 00 0000 468 arlane BWIDth RESolution
550. t 6 6L 6M 6P 6MP PCL5 no HP Professional Series 2500CM PCL3 yes HP DesignJet 755CM PCL5 yes Chapter 4 229 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions P Z Print Setup Key Path Print Setup Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 4 1 1 Language Lets you define your printer language as a PCL3 Deskjet or PCL5 Laserjet printer Key Path Print Setup Printer Setup State Saved Persistent survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Remote Command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage PCL3 PCL5 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage Example HCOP DEV LANG PCL5 4 4 1 2 Color Capable Allows you to define whether you printer is color capable Yes or not No NOTE Color Capable does not specify whether you want a printout in color See Color on page 234 for information Key Path Print Setup Printer Setup State Saved Persistent survives Preset and power cycle but not saved in Instrument State Remote Command HCOPy DEVice COLor NO YES HCOPy DEVi ce COLor Example HCOP DEV COL YES 230 Chapter4 Instrument Functions P Z Print Setup 4 4 2 Orientation Allows you to select either Portrait or Landscape printing Landscape is not available with a PCL3 Deskjet printer Key Path Print Setup State Saved Persistent survives Preset and p
551. t State Factory Preset Trace file format is All Traces at power on 2 5 3 6 Dir Select Displays the highlighted directory See Dir Select on page 135 for more information Key Path File Load State Saved Not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Trace file format is All Traces at power on 2 5 4 Delete Displays the Delete menu keys that enable you to delete instrument data files from the selected directory The catalog list box is active and can be used for selecting file information for the data entry fields Only files that match the current type are shown Chapter 2 147 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L File Placing the cursor on a file name causes it to be loaded into the file name field Key Path File 1 lt o ra 9 9 G E IL c o E E Im 5 D E 148 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 4 1 Delete Now Executes the delete function After you select the file or directory you want to delete press Delete Now to perform the delete While the file is being deleted the popup message Deleting file followed by Reading directory are displayed After a successful deletion the text message xxxxxx file deleted where xxxxxx is the file name appears in the status line If you select a directory or subdirectory to delete the following popup message is displayed WARNING You are about to delete a
552. t be experiencing timeout problems See the previous section on Timeout Errors Common Problems After a Connection is Made This section describes common problems you may encounter when using the instrument on a LAN It assumes you have been able to connect to the instrument in the past If this is not so refer to the previous sections first Pressing Preset does not affect LAN settings but pressing System Restore Sys Defaults will reset to the original factory defaults You will then have to re set the instrument IP address and other LAN settings in System Config I O Remember that in any type of programming using LAN you should avoid constantly opening and closing connections This uses up processing resources adds to your system overhead and can cause problems with asynchronise implementation of successive commands When you are sending the instrument multiple commands open the connection send all the commands and close the connection Cannot connect to the analyzer e Ifyou suspect a bad LAN connection between your computer and instrument you can verify the network connection by using the ping command described later in this chapter or another similar echo request utility e Ifa bad connection is revealed try the following solutions Make sure the instrument is turned on Check the physical connection to the LAN Make sure the internet IP Address of the instrument is set up correctly in the LAN port setu
553. t can be identified as peaks For example if a value of 6 dB is selected peaks that rise and fall more than the 6 dB above the peak threshold value are identified Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 1 dB Step Key Increment 1dB Range 0 0 dB to 100 0 dB Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK EXCursion integer The query for this parameter will always return 20 values SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST PEAK EXCursion 5 27 3 10 Pk Threshold Pk Threshold sets the minimum amplitude of signals that can be identified as peaks For example if a value of 90 dBm is selected only peaks that rise and fall more than the peak excursion value which is above 90 dBm are identified Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 1 dB Step Key Increment 1dB Range 100 dB to 0 0 dB Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change v
554. t setup menu Pressing Radio Standard after Mode Setup has been selected will access all the Radio Standards available for which this measurement can be applied Pressing Meas Control after Channel Power has been selected will access the channel power measurement control menu which allows you to pause or restart your measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement When a DVB T radio standard is selected this measurement will also compare the input signal against a pre defined spectrum mask The mask amplitudes defined in the DVB T specification ETSI EN 300 744 V1 4 1 range from 0 dB to 100 dB This is for power measured in a 4kHz bandwidth therefore an adjustment to these values will need to be made as the measurement is made in a 7 61MHz bandwidth The measurement makes two sweeps one in a 4kHz bandwidth and one in a 7 61MHz bandwidth then computes the difference between the two This value will be used to adjust the mask settings As this value is calculated as part of the measurement setup it is Chapter 5 301 G E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode expected that the DVB T signal to be measured will be present prior to the standard being selected The mask will be positioned relative to the power measured in the 7 61MHz bandwidth The pass fail indicator will be used to determine if the input sign
555. t was in effect before these function were turned on Key Path SPAN X Scale Remote Command SENSe FREQuency SPAN PREVious Example FREQ SPAN PREV gt o pb E 3 oO E Tl E Ej 7 ES El D U LI N Chapter 4 239 Instrument Functions P Z SPAN X Scale N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E E E 7 240 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z SWEEP 47 SWEEP Activates the Sweep Time function and displays the sweep function menu keys Key Path Front panel key 4 7 1 Sweep Time Selects the length of time in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency span In swept spans the sweep time varies from 1 millisecond to 2000 seconds plus time for setup which is not calculated as part of the sweep time Reducing the sweep time increases the rate of sweeps In zero span the sweep time may be set from 1 us to 6000 s In FFT spans the sweep time is not controlled by the user but is an estimate of the time required to make FFT measurements Sweep time is coupled to RBW and VBW so changing those parameters may change the sweep time When the analyzer has been set to FFT Sweep Time and Auto Sweep Time are disabled greyed out You may select a sweep time less than the auto coupled value however this may generate measurement errors If this happens the error message Meas Uncal will appear in the upper right corner of the display NOTE In zero span o
556. tart a new single measurement If INITiate CONTinuous is on continuous measure a new continuous measurement begins immediately The INITiate and or TRIGger subsystems contain additional related commands History Added in revision A 02 00 Remote Command el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 ABORt Remote Command Notes In the continuous measurement mode the Restart key is equivalent to ABORt Example ABOR Chapter 5 331 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Control 2 E 2 5 E El LL E Ou pe 3 2 bd GU E e EJ D O E e 332 Chapter 5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 3 Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Enables you to change measurement settings common to all measurements in the MEASURE menu In Spectrum Analysis mode there are several built in power measurements Parameters that you set in the Mode Setup menu affect all of these measurements Key Path Front panel key 5 3 1 Radio Std Accesses the radio standards key menu to enable you to select a radio standard Selecting a radio standard modifies spectrum analyzer settings for the measurement activated under the MEASURE menu NOTE Measurements that are not relevant to the selected radio standard are not supported and the message Measurement does not support the current radio standard will be
557. tate Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset 10 Off Range 1 to 1000 History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt lt integer gt el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 turns the averaging on or off SENSe ACPower AVERage L STATe Example ACP AVER COUN 10 ACP AVER COUN ACP AVER OFF ACP AVER Chapter 5 351 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 352 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP 5 6 2 Avg Mode Press Avg Mode to select the type of termination control used for the averaging function as either Exp or Repeat This determines the averaging action after the specified number of measurements average count is reached EXP Exponential Averaging mode When you set Avg Mode to Exp each successive data acquisition after the average count is reached is exponentially weighted and combined with the existing average Exponential averaging weights new data more than old data which facilitates tracking of slow changing signals The average will be displayed at the end of each sweep s Repeat When you set Av
558. terval l s 197 is the length of the data you want to use This would be the portion of the burst that you want to find the mean power over You can calculate this length by 526us sampleInterval 1730 is how much data you have before you repeat the process For this example it s the time between the start offset point on the burst in the first slot first frame to the same spot on the burst in the first slot second frame You can calculate this by 576 9us N sampleInterval where N is the number of data items that you want In this case it is the number of slots in the frame N28 Chapter 6 517 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi D D Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Table 6 1 GSM Parameters for 1 Slot Frame Measurement Requirements Resolution Filter Decimation Aperture Start Length Repeat Bandwidth Type 500 or 300 Flat or 4or 1 dependent 24 usec 526 usec 576 9 usec kHz Gaussian on settings 500 kHz Gaussian 1 0 2 usec 124 2630 2884 6 500 kHz Gaussian 4 0 8 usec 31 657 721 15 500 kHz Flat 1 0 4 usec 61 1315 1442 3 500 kHz Flat 4 1 6 usec 15 329 360 575 300 kHz Gaussian 1 0 2667 usec 90 1972 2163 1 300 kHz Gaussian 4 1 07 usec 22 492 539 16 300 kHz Flat 1 0 6667 usec 36 789 865 31 300 kHz Flat 4 2 667 usec 9 197 216 33 a The use of time values is only allowed in firmware versions of A 02 00 and later o
559. tes that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices sis Jeuy winayeds sdejy nue Trace 2 3 Clear Write IF Max Hold Min Hold egz abed aas Aay werA o2e1L sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nua Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis ZC 8 191deu2 Trig Key See page 287 TRIG j Trig Trig Trig Delay Video f 1 000 us On Off Line Ext Front Ext Rear RF Burst Wideband More More Ee 1of2 gt 2 of 2 pe880a A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices t A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings 19 eDed eas ey Bu sis jeuy unjjoeds sde nuan mn c Es LI 2 4 Q E 7 9 Menu Maps One Button Measurement Functions This chapter provides you with menu maps for all measurements available to you when you press the front panel Measure key Spectrum Analysis mode is selected 623 Menu Maps One Button Measurement Functions One Button Measurement Menu Maps One Button Measurement Menu Maps This section provides a visual representation of all front panel key menus associated with the measurements available when you press the front panel Measure key The key menus common to all measurements Measure Meas Control and Mode Setup are prese
560. the default resource manager with the viOpenDefaultRM function This function will initialize the default resource manager and return a pointer to that resource manager session viOpen This function establishes a communication channel with the device specified A session identifier that can be used with other VTL functions is returned This call must be made for each device you will be using viPrintf viScanf These are the VTL formatted I O functions that are patterned after those used in the C programming 546 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL language The viPrintf call sends the IEEE 488 2 RST command to the instrument and puts it in a known state The viPrintf call is used again to query for the device identification IDN The viScanf call is then used to read the results viClose This function must be used to close each session When you close a device session all data structures that had been allocated for the session will be de allocated When you close the default manager session all sessions opened using the default manager session will be closed Linking to VTL Libraries Your application must link to one of the VTL import libraries 32 bit Version C NVXIPNPNWIN95NLIBMMSCNVISA32 LIB for Microsoft compilers C VXIPNP WIN95 LIB BC VISA32 L1B for Borland compilers 16 bit Version C VXIPNP WIN LIB MSC VISA LIB for Microsoft compilers C VXIPNP WIN LIB BC VISA LIB for Borland compile
561. the display In addition when a marker is being actively controlled the marker data appears in the active function area of the display There are four markers in your instrument each can be controlled as a single marker or as a reference delta pair A trace is a connected series of points displayed on the instrument screen The left most point is point 0 and the right most point default is 600 You control markers by moving them from trace point to trace point Markers are shaped like diamonds The lowest point of the diamond shape represents the trace point that is being read The marker number is indicated above the active marker The same marker number is indicated with an R for example 1R above the reference marker when in a delta mode delta delta pair and span pair Marker Units Normal markers the display shows the value of the Y axis position of the marker in the current Y axis units See Amplitude Y Axis Units Delta Delta Pair or Span Pair markers the display shows the ratio difference when expressed in dB between two markers If the Y axis units are logarithmic dBm dBmV dBuV the ratio is express in dB If the Y axis units are linear volts watts the ratio is expressed in percent where 100 is the same as 0 dB difference Note that the value when the Y axis units are watts is the square of the value when the Y axis units are Chapter 3 177 S a o E c 3 bd 3 Tn c 5 e 5 v E LI O
562. the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement which is its freedom from errors due to input compression NOTE There will always be a minimum of 6 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Not saved Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE 5 14 6 RRC Filter Pressing RRC Filter turns the Root Raised Cosine filter on or off This filter is the type specified in the TETRA and 3GPP W CDMA standards This parameter is only available when either 3GPP W CDMA or TETRA has been selected as the Radio Std from the Mode Setup menu If 3GPP W CDMA is selected the roll off value alpha for the filter will be initially set to 0 22 T is set to I RefBW default 260 ns If TETRA is selected the roll off will be initially set to 0 35 T is set to 1 RefBW default 55 56 us The roll off value can be changed using Filter Alpha Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe CHPower FILTer RRC STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CHPower FILTer L RRC STATe 7 Example CHP FILT 1 CHP FILT 5 14 7 Filter Alpha Press RRC Filter to input the alpha value for the RRC Filter This parameter is only available when either 3GPP W CDMA or TETRA has been selected as the Radio Std from the Mode Setup menu 402 Chapter 5 Un
563. the sequence 1 2 3 4 Swapped mode is when the byte sequence begins with the LSB first and ends with the MSB last in the sequence 4 3 2 1 State Saved Survives Preset but not power cycle Not saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Normal Remote Command FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer Example FORM BORD SWAP 2 5 12 Format Numeric Data Remote Command Only This command changes the format of the data It specifies the format used for trace data during data transfer across any remote port REAL and ASCII formats will format trace data in the current amplitude units The format of state data cannot be changed It is always in a machine readable format only NOTE One button measurement functions only support Binary Real 32 Binary Real 64 and ASCII data formats When in Spectrum Analysis mode using older instrument firmware you were only allowed to change the format of trace type data that was returned using TRACe DATA With this old firmware other types of measurement data was only available in the ASCII format That is data returned using FETCh MEASure and READ commands while in Signal Analysis mode For corrected trace data TRACe DATA with parameter trace name REAL and ASCII formats will provide trace data in the current amplitude units INTeger format will provide trace data in mdBm The fastest mode is INTeger 32 However some measurement data will not fit in 32 bit integers ASCII
564. the spectrum emission mask SEM Displays menu keys that enable you to set how trace information is stored and displayed Key Path Front panel key History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 23 1 Abs Pwr amp Freq Press Abs Pwr amp Freq to view the measurement results of Spectrum Ref Total Pwr Seg Offset measurements in the graph window as absolute peak power and frequency The absolute peak power levels in dBm and those corresponding offset frequency ranges on both sides of the reference channel are displayed in the text window Key Path Trace View Saved State Saved in instrument state Factory Preset On Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 23 2 Rel Pwr amp Freq Press Rel Pwr amp Freq to view the measurement results of Spectrum Ref Total Pwr Seg Offset measurements in the graph window as power relative to the carrier power and frequency The relative power levels in dBc and those corresponding offset frequency ranges on both sides of the reference channel are displayed in the text window O E WA c e EI bi D 7 E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 Key Path Trace View Saved State Saved in instrument state Remote Command There is no remote command for this function Chapter 5 477 o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E
565. tion for the current frequency and amplitude settings of the analyzer If a time and amplitude limit line is used the amplitude values change but the time values remain the same Key Path Display Limits Factory Default Fixed for a new limit History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command NOTE If you need to change the domain with CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain do it before this command Changing the domain deletes all the existing limit line values CALCulate LLINe CMODe FIXed RELative CALCulate LLINe CMODe Example CALC LLIN CMOD FIX sets limit lines 1 and 2 limits to fixed Chapter 2 121 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Lud c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 4 Delete All Limits Deletes the selected limit line Pressing Delete Limits purges the data from the limit line tables Pressing Delete Limits after the prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will delete the limits Key Path Display Limits Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe ALL DELete Example CALC LLIN ALL DEL deletes all of the data points for limits lines 1 and 2 2 4 06 Title Displays menu keys that enable you to change or clear a title on your display Key Path Display 2 4 6 1 Change Title
566. tion that allows the next sweep to start if the detected RF envelope voltage crosses a level set by the video trigger level When Video is pressed a line appears on the display The analyzer triggers when the input signal exceeds the trigger level at the left edge of the display You can change the trigger level using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad The line remains as long as video trigger is the trigger type Key Path Trig Dependencies Couplings Trigger Delay adjustment is not available with Video triggering Video triggering is not available when the detector is Average Marker Functions that set the detector to average such as Marker Noise or Band Intvl Power are not available when the video trigger is on This function is not available when the Resolution Bandwidth is less than 1 kHz If a Resolution Bandwidth less than 1 kHz is selected while in Video Trigger mode the Trigger mode changes to Free Run Factory Preset 25 dBm Range Using logarithmic scale from 10 display divisions below the reference level up to the reference level Using linear scale from 100 dB below the reference level up to the reference level For more information see Scale Type on page 52 Remote Command See Trig on page 287 for the command that sets trigger mode The following commands set read the trigger level TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel ampl TRIGger L SEQuence VIDeo LEVel TRIGger SEQue
567. to 10 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST FREQuency integer The query for this parameter will always return 10 values SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST FREQuency Example HARM RANG LIST FREQ 300 5 16 6 3 Span Span is used to set the span of the analyzer Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Table 5 1 on page 414 Chapter 5 415 el i U E Ki E z bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 o c e 5 o c E nt c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Harmonic Distortion Knob Increment Steps through the available spans Step Key Increment Steps through the available spans Range Span of your analyzer History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command This parameter can send up to 10 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST SPAN SENSe HARMonics RANGe LIST S
568. to identify a specific device This parameter is made up of the VTL interface name and the device address The interface name is determined when you run the VTL Configuration Utility This name Chapter 6 551 D 2 S 3 E 5 rs T c 5 2 D 3 E zi S D un c E c 9 G E ra E E E E c CH o e LI a NOTE Programming Fundamentals Programming in C Using the VTL is usually the interface type followed by a number The following table illustrates the format of the rsrcName for the different interface types Interface Syntax VXI VXI board VXI logical address INSTR GPIB VXI GPIB VXI board VXI logical address INSTR GPIB GPIB board primary address secondary address INSTR The following describes the parameters used above board This optional parameter is used if you have more than one interface of the same type The default value for board is 0 VSI logical address This is the logical address of the VXI instrument primary address This is the primary address of the GPIB device secondary address This optional parameter is the secondary address of the GPIB device If no secondary address is specified none is assumed INSTR This is an optional parameter that indicates that you are communicating with a resource that is of type INSTR meaning instrument If you want to be compatible with future releases of VTL and VISA
569. to the stop frequency minus one half of the span or to the stop frequency minus 5 Hz and Res BW and VBW will be set to 1 Hz Key Path FREQUENCY Dependencies Couplings Start Freq is unavailable when Segmented sweep is on State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 10 MHz 164 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L FREQUENCY Channel Range Model Frequency Range E4440A 100 0000000 MHz to 26 99999999 GHz E4443A 100 0000000 MHz to 7 19999999 GHz E4445A 100 0000000 MHz to 13 69999999 GHz E4446A 100 0000000 MHz to 44 49999999 GHz E4448A 100 0000000 MHz to 50 99999999 GHz Remote Command SENSe FREQuency STARt freq SENSe FREQuency STARCt Example FREQ STAR 200 MHz FREO STAR 2 6 3 Stop Freq Sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule and sets the frequency entry mode to Start Stop When the Start Stop Frequency entry mode is activate the start and stop frequency values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies Key Path FREQUENCY State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset Model Stop Frequency E4440A 26 50000000 GHz E4443A 6 70000000 GHz E4445A 13 20000000 GHz E4446A 44 00000000 GHz E4448A 50 00000000 GHz Chapter 2 165 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 E
570. tore that dynamic range to FFT measurements at the expense of losing some of the speed advantages of the FFT For example in pulsed RF measurements such as radar it is often possible to make high dynamic range measurements with signal levels approaching the compression threshold of the analyzer in swept spans well over 0 dBm while resolving the spectral components to levels below the maximum IF drive level about 8 dBm at the input mixer But FFT processing experiences overloads at the maximum IF drive level even if the RBW is small enough that no single spectral component exceeds the maximum IF drive level If the user reduces the width of an FFT using the FFTs Span function an analog filter is placed before the ADC that is about 1 3 times as wide as the FFT segment width This spreads out the pulsed RF in time and reduces the maximum signal level seen by the ADC Therefore the input attenuation can be reduced and the dynamic range increased without overloading the ADC Further improvement in dynamic range is possible by changing the ADC gain In swept analysis in PSA the gain is normally auto ranged such that it can track the signal power as the analyzer sweeps through CW like signals Since FFT processing cannot autorange the gain within the measurement of a single FFT segment the autoranging advantage is lost for single FFT measurements But if the segments are reduced in width by using more FFTs Span then individual FFT segments can us
571. ts the instrument settings to the defaults If you were already in single measurement mode it takes one measurement and then waits the instrument settings to the defaults If you were already in single measurement mode it does not initiate a measurement Use INIT IMM to make one measurement ESE default Default is 255 which means that every error status bit change that has occurred will be returned with a ESR query You must set the value of ESE to choose only the bits status that you want returned Default is 0 which means that none of the error status bit changes that have occurred will be returned with a ESR query You must set the value of ESE to choose the bits status that you want returned Same as VSA A 04 00 Default is 0 which means that none of the error status bit changes that have occurred will be returned with a ESR query You must set the value of ESE to choose the bits status that you want returned LRN The command is not The command is The command is available available available TRIGger In Spectrum Analysis You can select a unique Same as VSA A 04 00 commands mode only one value can trigger source for each be set for the trigger s source delay level or polarity Basic GSM EDGE cdmaOne cdma2000 W CDMA NADC PDC modes function the same as VSA mode Each trigger source can have unique settings for the its delay level and polarity
572. ture Event register which also sets the Temperature Summary bit bit 4 in the Questionable Register The variable lt number gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Factory Preset 32767 all 1 s Range 0 to 32767 Chapter 8 585 Cc o 5 E zt gt bd M c O Ka lt D o b 3 E E D gt wn S E Ku GU L Lei GA 2 NOTE Using the STATus System STATus Subsystem Questionable Temperature Event Query STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Event register The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the register is cleared Key Type There is no equivalent front panel key Questionable Temperature Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature N TRansition number STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature N TRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Temperature Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Key Ty
573. turned CONFigure PSTatistic N A Not Applicable INITiate PSTatistic FETCh PSTatistic n n 1 or not Returns 10 scalar results in the following order MEASure PSTat stic n specified READ PSTatistic n 1 Average input power in dBm 2 Probability at the average input power in 3 Power level that has 10 of the power 4 Power level that has 1 of the power 5 Power level that has 0 1 of the power 6 Power level that has 0 01 of the power 7 Power level that has 0 001 of the power 8 Power level that has 0 0001 of the power 9 Peak power in dB 10 Count n 2 Returns a series of 501 floating point numbers in percent that represent the current measured power statistics trace This is the probability at specific power levels average power in the following order 1 Probability at 0 dB power 2 Probability at 0 1 dB power 3 Probability at 0 2 dB power 501 Probability at 50 0 dB power n 3 Returns a series of 501 floating point numbers in percent that represent the Gaussian trace This is the probability at specific power levels average power in the following order 1 Probability at 0 dB power 2 Probability at 0 1 dB power 3 Probability at 0 2 dB power 501 Probability at 50 0 dB power 314 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Command n Results Returned n 4 Returns a series of 501 floating p
574. u have entered This default will be used from the front panel when you terminate your entry by pressing the Enter key rather then selecting a units key This default will be used remotely when you send the command without specifying any units after your value s Range Describes the range of the smallest to largest values to which the function can be set If you try to set a value below the minimum value the analyzer defaults to the minimum value If you try to set a value above the maximum value the analyzer defaults to the maximum value History Describes the firmware revision history Only applies after first firmware release Remote Command Shows the syntax requirements for each SCPI command Example Provides command examples using the indicated remote command syntax 5 E D o o 3 fo 5 Chapter 1 45 Using This Document Book Organization E o E 2 o e D 2 E T D GA D 46 Chapter 1 2 Instrument Functions A L This chapter provides key descriptions and programming information for the front panel key functions of your analyzer starting with the letters A through L The front panel functions are listed alphabetically and are described with their associated menu keys The lower level menu keys are arranged and described as they appear in your analyzer S 7 e x E 3 bi E Tl E E 1 a E o gt I r 47 Instrument Functions
575. u are using the GPIB for control of your instrument each transaction requires driver overhead and bus handshaking so minimizing these transactions reduces the time used You can reduce bus transactions by sending multiple commands per transaction See the information on Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line in the SCPI Language Basics section If you are using the MEASURE key measurements and are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup use the single READ command It is faster then using INITiate and FETCh 512 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Avoid unnecessary use of RST Remember that while RST does not change the current Mode it presets all the measurements and settings to their factory defaults This forces you to reset your analyzer s measurement settings even if they use similar mode setup or measurement settings See Minimize DUT instrument setup changes below Also note that RST may put the instrument in single measurement sweep for some modes Put ADC Ranging in Bypass for FFT Measurements Setting ADC ranging to the Bypass mode can speed FFT measurements up by 10 to 50 Use ADC RANG NONE Bypass allows triggered FFT measurements to occur at the trigger time instead of following an autoranging time so it can improve measurement speed It does however add additional noise degrading your signal to noise level so it should be us
576. uage Basics This section is not intended to teach you everything about the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments programming language The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide that level of detailed information Topics covered in this chapter include Creating Valid Commands on page 504 Command Keywords and Syntax on page 503 e Special Characters in Commands on page 505 Parameters in Commands on page 506 e Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line on page 508 For more information refer to IEEE Standard 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation New York NY 1998 IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Comment Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std488 1 1987 New York NY 1998 Command Keywords and Syntax A typical command is made up of keywords set off by colons The keywords are followed by parameters that can be followed by optional units Example SENSe FREQuency STARt 1 5 MHZ The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters In the documentation upper case letters indicate the short form of the keyword The lower case letters indicate the long form of the keyword Either form may be used in the command Example Sens Freq Star 1 5 mhz is the same as SENSE FREQ start 1 5 MHz The command SENS FREQU STAR is not valid because FREQU is neither the short nor the long form of the command Onl
577. ual function of this key is not applicable When Res BW Auto is selected in non zero span any changes to Res BW while in zero span will revert to the Auto value when you return to non zero span When Res BW Man is selected in non zero span any changes to Res BW while in zero span will be maintained when you return to non zero span A mark appears next to Res BWon the bottom of the analyzer display when it is not coupled To couple the resolution bandwidth press Res BW Auto or Auto All NOTE For applications that require 6 dB resolution bandwidths it is possible to use an equivalent 3 dB resolution bandwidth Because the analyzer has Gaussian RBW the equivalent 6 dB bandwidth of any RBW filter can be determined using the following formula 6 dB RBW 3 dB RBW x 1 414 For example if a 6 dB RBW of 100 kHz is required the equivalent 3 dB RBW Filter would be 100 kHz 1 414 70 7 kHz The closest RBW filter for the analyzer that would be used is 68 kHz Key Path BW Avg Saved State Saved in Instrument State Chapter 2 83 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI Instrument Functions A L BW Avg Factory Preset Auto 3 MHz Range 1 Hz to 8 MHz Remote Command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution L SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO Example BAND 1 kHz BAND BWID A
578. ue of the point is selected If an arrow key is pressed the Point number automatically increments to allow entry of the Connected value of the next point If it is a new point the Frequency may be entered for the new point Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Edit Display Limits Limit 2 Edit Factory Preset and RST Yes Factory Default Yes Knob Increment Toggles to other selection Step Key Increment Toggles to other selection History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 2 4 5 1 5 5 Delete Point Deleting the current limit point can be achieved by pressing Delete Point You will be prompted with the message If you are sure press key again to delete Pressing Delete Point again will delete the limit point Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Edit Display Limits Limit 2 Edit History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 2 4 5 1 6 Delete Limit Deleting the current limit set can be achieved by pressing Delete You will be prompted with the message If you are sure press key again to delete Pressing Delete again will delete the limit set Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Display Limits Limit 2 Factory Preset and RST Off History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DELete 116 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Display Example CALC LLIN DEL deletes limit line margin 1 LLIN defaults to Limit Line 1 5 D o E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e
579. umber of points included in the average 3 This value is then displayed in logarithmic form dBm Pavg 10log10 318 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode where Pavg average power n is the start trace point m the stop trace point and p the trace point amplitude power in dBm Figure 4 shows an example of the results obtained when measuring a Bluetooth signal and with a user defined burst width Figure 4 Burst Power Measurement Results Agilent 11 37 16 Jun 7 2002 Meas Setup Rvg Number 18 DH1 Ch Freq 1 GHz Burst Power Bluetooth E p On Off Number of Averages 18 Avg Mode Exp Repeat Average Type Log RMS Threshold Lvl 3 00 dB Abs Rel Meas Method Measured Burst Hidth Burst Width 2 00 AB 221 7 ps Output Power Amplitude Threshold 3 00 db MM Man Measured Burst Width Current Data 11 38 dBm i Optimize Full Burst Hidth s 38 dB 29 dB 47 dB Ref Level NOTE The analyzer defaults to zero span mode and the sweep time is set to capture at least one burst The sweep time can be changed by pressing Sweep Sweep Time Pressing Meas Setup after Burst Power has been selected displays the burst power measurement setup menu Pressing Meas Control after Burst Power has been selected displays the burst power control menu where you can pause or restart a measurement or toggle between continuous and single measurement Key Access MEASUR
580. unctions Meas Setup Burst Power NOTE The measurements described above are those available in SA mode see Mode key Other measurements are available in other modes if an optional personality is installed Key Path Meas Setup Factory Preset Above Threshold Lvl THReshold Range Measured Burst Width BWIDth to Above Threshold Lvl THReshold History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe BPOWer METHod THReshold BWIDth SENSe BPOWer METHod Example BPOW METH BWID to select burst width as the measurement method 5 8 6 Burst Width Sets the burst width parameter to automatic mode Auto or manual mode Man Auto The burst width is automatically calculated based on the threshold level For example if the threshold level is set to 3 dB the burst width will be the time between the two 3 dB points This will update after each sweep but before any results are calculated Since the measurement only measures over the burst width this will force a measurement between the 3 dB points s Man The burst width used for computing the burst power is controlled by either entering it directly or as a percentage of the measured burst width In the percentage case the burst width is computed just once based on the most recent measured burst width In either case the burst width is centered on the observed burst in each measurement NOTE This key will be greyed out if Meas Method is set to Above Thresh
581. upied BW On Off Avg Mode Exp Repeat Max Hold On Off Note The menus under Meas Setup are measurement o dependent and vary with each t Occ BH oP wr measurement 99 00 t OBW Span 3 0000000 MHz t x dB 26 00 dB Optimize Ref Level pe886a T A dagger to the left of the softkey indicates that when the key is pressed this is an active function o r3 ai suonoun4 jueuieJnseoe y UOoung au0 sde y nus sde nua uawansea uonng eug Suoroun jueuiensee y uonng euo sde nuaw Meas Setup If measurement chosen is Spectrum Emission Mask Functions Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement Meas Setup Key sde nuan Juswesnseay uonng eug Suoioun jueuieinsee A uonng euo sde nuaw o Rh o L Meas Setup Meas Setup 9 Offset Limits Offset Limits Fail Mask Ref Channel Meas Type Rvg Number Offset Offset Chan Integ BH t 10 n a CU Y D DE fibsolute T Pen Fi Total Pwr Ref On Off te Start Freq Meas Type ae Abs Start Chan Span wie T 2 51500 MHz T D Relative t Geert PSD Ref Note The On Off menus under Stop Freq Abs Stop Sweep Time Meas Setup are Ref Channeb gt T WE LBP t _ 1400 dBm Abs AND Rel f 3 400 ms measurement Couple Man Auto Man dependent and l Sweep Time Res BM vary with each Offset Limits
582. upper offset B relative power dBc 12 upper offset B absolute power dBm 13 lower offset C relative power dBc 14 lower offset C absolute power dBm 15 upper offset C relative power dBc 16 upper offset C absolute power dBm 17 NaN returned 18 NaN returned 19 NaN returned 20 NaN returned o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e If the results are not available 999 0 is returned FETCh MCPower n 2 13 Returns absolute and relative values for carrier n 1 If results are not MEASure MC Power available 999 0 is returned READ MCPower 310 Chapter 5 Une Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Command n Results Returned FETCh MCPower n 14 Returns 36 comma separated scalar results in the MEASure MCPower following order READ MCPower 1 to 24 All carriers absolute and relative values 25 lower offset A relative power dBc 26 lower offset A absolute power dBm 27 upper offset A relative power dBc 28 upper offset A absolute power dBm 29 lower offset B relative power dBc 30 lower offset B absolute power dBm 31 upper offset B relative power dBc 32 upper offset B absolute power dBm 33 lower offset C relative power dBc 34 lower offset C absolute power dBm 35 upper offset C relative power dBc 96
583. ure PTRansition number 586 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition essel eee 586 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt 0 0 0 0 00000 ccc eee ee ees 586 lA OURS EE EVEN KEE EE 574 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess integer 0 0 ee ees 263 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIBESELF ADDRess 0 0 0 0 00 263 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPESICL ENABle OFF ON O 1 0 00020 267 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPI SICL ENABle ee 267 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPESOCKet ENABle OFRTIONTIOIT oneennanaaanaaaa 266 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPESOCKet ENABle 0 0 cee eee eee 266 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPETELNet ENABle ObtTONTOIT 266 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SCPETELNet ENABle 0 0 cece eee 266 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SELF IP stung 263 Ir Den DOUBT upEcabe LANPSELF D os dercises beds durs babes d Rd aee p aed 263 26 List of Commands io lem CONFHARD ON WE EE EE 271 SYSTem DATE year cmonth days EE RRR RRR RR EEN EELER EEN EELER R 255 Sih RK a4 dads Re3x9 Ee EER E RE ee ee ee ee ee EE 255 Sys ero NEXT LcoRpuuAeCpe RR ROVRO EWU A DRE Geo WP RON NA UE P RUN OR 248 aeaoe TR E sega d ET 264 or oem pea A ROUEN ODE RERO ee EUR oa OE Acc ad do ego o WES sd ot 280 SYSTem LKEY lt option gt lt license key m een EEN NEEN EEN tsi ke ae x raa Rud ax ATI SYSTem LKEY DELete lt application option gt lt license key gt 00
584. urement specific Display menus For the Display description for a CCDF measurement see Display Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF on page 385 for the SEM measurement see Display Spectrum Emissions Mask SEM on page 479 Key Path Front panel key 2 4 1 Full Screen When Full Screen is pressed the measurement window expands horizontally over the entire instrument display It turns on off the display of the softkey labels Pressing any other key that results in a new menu will cancel the full screen function Key Path Display State Saved Not saved in state Factory Preset Off Factory Default Off History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command DISPlay FSCReen STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay FSCReen STATe Example DISP FSCR ON 2 4 2 Display Line Activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference line The line has an amplitude value that corresponds to its vertical position relative to the reference level The value of the display line appears on the left side of the display below the label D1 The display line can be adjusted using the step keys knob or numeric keypad The units of Display Line are determined by the Y Axis Units setting under Amplitude Key Path Display State Saved Saved in instrument state Chapter 2 103 5 7 Ind E 3 bi E T E E 1 a E a gt LI P l S lt 2 E S 2 LE E 3 Ww
585. used to set the stop frequency of the analyzer Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment L dl15 2 39 5 4 Fy 105 Range Frequency range of your analyzer Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must send all values up to 6 Subsequent values will remain as they were SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STOP integer The query for this parameter will always return 20 values SENSe SPURious RANGe LIST FREQuency STOP 5 27 3 4 Res BW Res BW is used to set the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer When Auto is selected the analyzer determines the optimum setting while Man enables you to determine the setting Key Path Meas Setup Range Table Factory Preset See Range Table on page 486 Knob Increment Steps through the available resolution bandwidth filters Step Key Increment Steps through the available resolution bandwidth filters Range Resolution bandwidth range of your analyzer Remote Command This parameter can receive up to 20 values The location in the list sent corresponds to the range the value is associated with Missing values are not permitted for example if you want to change values 2 and 6 you must s
586. using 44 boolean parameter commands 506 bottom middle top measurements 514 Burst Power Meas Setup menu 631 Trace View menu 632 burst power measurement trace view 377 bus clear command 530 Index 1 Index LAN 524 LAN cable 544 BW Avg menu map 595 BW Avg front panel key 83 180 181 184 185 186 187 188 189 201 329 330 331 391 392 394 483 By Date key 133 By Extension key 135 By Name key 133 By Size key 135 Bypass key 81 byte order setting data 160 C C language addressing sessions 551 closing sessions 553 compiling and linking 547 creating 546 example 549 opening session 549 sessions 550 using VISA library 546 using VISA transition library 547 549 C programming socket LAN 538 cable correction 61 cable LAN 544 calibration amount displayed 261 condition register 575 576 defaults 261 frequency corrections on off 257 functions 279 IEEE command 563 query 563 time corrections 262 calibration condition register 575 576 Carrier IntegBW key 437 Carrier key 434 Carrier Pwr Present key 434 Carrier Result key 441 Carrier Setup key 430 Carrier Width key 435 Carriers key 431 Catalog key 130 CCDF Power Stat Display menu 635 Marker menu 637 Meas Setup menu 633 SPAN X Scale menu 636 Trace View menu 634 Index 2 CCDF measurement Display key 385 display settings 385 cdma2000 SR1 key 335 cdma2000 SR3 DS key 336 cdma2000 SR
587. ut History Added with PSA firmware revision A 02 00 344 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE el U E pb E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 345 One Button Measurement Functions Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode o c e Ei o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 346 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Restart 5 4 Restart This function restarts a previously paused measurement at the beginning If the measurement is active it will stop it as soon as possible and restart it from the beginning If no measurement is active and Sweep Single is selected a new sweep is initiated When in Average On mode BW Avg Average the averaging function is restarted the trace is reset and the average number is reset to zero Key Path Front panel key It can also be found under Meas Control Remote Command INITiate RESTart Remote Command Notes This command is equivalent to sending an ABORt command followed by an INITiate IMMediate command See Abort the Sweep or Measurement Remote Command Only on page 331 for more information Example INIT REST el i al E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5
588. ut still shows user selected states Norm or Accy Goes to Norm on Auto All State Saved Save Factory Preset Norm Remote Command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO RULes NORMal ACCuracy SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO RULes Chapter 4 243 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a o E 9 G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z SWEEP Example SWE TIME AUTO RUL ACC 4 7 4 Points Sets the number of points per sweep from 101 to 8192 in non zero span and 2 to 8192 in zero span Resolution of setting the sweep time will depend on the number of points selected If Factory Preset is selected or the analyzer power is cycled the number of points per sweep will default to 601 The current value of points is displayed parenthetically next to the sweep time in the lower right corner of the display refer to Display Annotation in your Getting Started guide Changing the number of points has several effects on the analyzer Since markers are read at the point location the marker reading may change All trace data for the active trace is cleared If sweep is set to Cont press Sweep Sweep a new sweep begins immediately If average is set to On press BW Avg Average the averaging starts over with a count of 0 If limit lines are set to On press Display Limits Modify Limit 1 or 2 the limit lines are updated NOTE By selecting a number of sweep poi
589. ute COUPle 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 470 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP ABSolute 20 0 eee eee 470 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier real number gt lt real number gt 472 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier COUPle OFF ON 0 1 472 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier COUPle nura 472 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STOP RCARrier 0000 0 eee ee eee 472 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime time Lomezl eee 465 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime AUTO OFFIONTIOIT 466 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST SWEeptime AUTO aga RRR RRR R torrie ris iat 466 SENSe SEMask OF FSet n LIST SWEHeptime 0 0 cee eee ee eee 466 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST TEST ABSolute AND OR RELative ABSo lute AND OR RELative ABSolute AND OR RELative ABSolute AND OR RELative 474 SENSe SEMask OF FSet n LIST TEST gw R RRR RRR RRR RR RRR RR RRR RRR RR nee 474 SENSe SEMask SWEeptime lt numberz annuun enneren earn 460 SENSe SEMask SWEeptime AUTO ObRTIONTIoOIT RR I 460 SENSe SEMask SWEeptime amp e AUTOZ aK aa ARENS ER AR ewe EIERE NNN ee 460 38 List of Commands LSEN Se SEMask SWBeplmg uiu verde heb c Cx ICON O Qe RC ee we oes 460 ESRENSELSEMasITTPR TERRE PSDEEL EE 458 DL SENSELSEMaskTdYPETS Ae E EE y RE HESSEN UES SEE RE RE RR CER RE ALE ER ES 458 SENSe SPURious AVERage COUNt intege
590. uto Best fiuto Dynamic Range Log Pwr Avg Auto Best Optimize Average Log RMS V f for Manual Swept f gt 50 kHz Optimize Voltage Rvg LO for Manual FFT Fast Tuning FFTs Span i 2 Minimum Negative Peak pe850a A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices T A double dagger to the left of the softkey indicates a function that is not always available It is dependent on other instrument settings sis Jeuy winayeds sdejy nue LZ eBed ees c jo ay ejdno2 oiny sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan ves 8 191deu2 Auto Couple Key 3 of 3 See page 71 ADC Dither pe851a A bar on the left of two or more softkeys indicates that the keys are a set of mutually exclusive choices IDC Ranging ADC Dither Menu Maps Spectrum Analysis ADC Ranging Autorange Best S N Bypass Best f LZ eBed ees jo Ady ajdno9g ony sis jeuy uinjjoeds sde nuan 8 1e deu2 BW Avg pe852a BW Avg Key See page 83 E BW RVG Res BW 3 00000000kHz Ruto Man Video BW 3 00000000 kHz Auto Man VBW RBW 1 00000 Average 100 On Off Avg VBW Type Log Pwr Video gt Auto Man Avg VBW Type Auto Log Pwr Avg Video Voltage Avg
591. ved el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE 5 19 7 Method Enables you to set the measurement method to either the integration bandwidth method IBW or the resolution bandwidth method RBW The resolution bandwidth method is Chapter 5 441 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP most useful for measuring cdmaOne and cdma2000 signals the integration bandwidth medthod is preferred for other signals Key Path Meas Setup Key Notes When Method is set to RBW neither Noise Correction nor RRC Filter are available State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset IBW Range IBW RBW History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command L SENSe MCPower METHod IBW RBW SENSe MCPower METHod Example MCP METH RBW MCP METH 5 19 8 Power Ref Enables you to set the multi carrier power reference to automatic or manual When set to automatic the carrier power result reflects the measured power value in the selected reference carrier Meas Setup Carrier Setup Ref Carrier When set to manual the result is referenced to the last measured value or you may specify the re
592. ved is loaded along with the trace Also the loaded trace s is are placed in view mode NOTE To compare two saved traces from different saves place traces in view mode before saving them This prevents the trace from being rewritten based on a state change from subsequent loads Key Path File Load Remote Command MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 file name gt loads the specified state file into the current active state of the instrument RCL lt register gt loads the state from the specified internal register into the current active state of the instrument The available register numbers are 0 to 127 MMEMory LOAD TRACe lt label gt lt file name gt MMEMory LOAD CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER lt file name gt MMEMory LOAD LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name gt Remote Command Notes For the MMEM LOAD TRAC lt file name gt command file name gt must include the following Complete path A file extension of TRC Use all uppercase letters Trace labels are TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 For the MMEM LOAD STAT 1 command e Ifthe firmware revision of the state being loaded is newer than the firmware revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported s Ifthe firmware revision of the state being loaded is the same as the firmware revision of the instrument all settings of the state will be loaded 144 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L File Ifthe firm
593. vel Example POW ATT 30 POW ATT POW ATT AUTO ON 50 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale POW ATT AUTO 5 D o E c 3 D 5 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI ls Chapter 2 51 A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Lud c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L AMPLITUDE Y Scale 2 0 3 Scale Div Sets the units per vertical graticule division on the display This function is only available when Scale Type Log is selected and the vertical scale is power or Demod View is on and the vertical scale is hertz When Scale Type Lin is selected Scale Div is greyed out Key Path AMPLITUDE Y Scale State Saved Saved in Instrument State Factory Preset 10 dB in logarithmic scale type Fundamental Units dB kHz Terminators dB Hz kHz MHz GHz Default Terminator dB kHz Range 0 1 dB to 20 dB 1 kHz to 240 kHz When Demod View On is selected Remote Command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision power DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Example DISP WIND TRAC Y PDIV 5 DB 2 0 4 Scale Type Allows you to choose a linear or logarithmic vertical scale for the display and for remote data readout The scale type for display and remote data readout may be different from the scale used for averaging processes For information on the scale used for averaging process Avg VBW Type on page 89 When Scale Type Log is
594. ves the arrows will move with the marker unless there is no data N dB below the marker Key Path Peak Search Annunciation Annotation Second line in upper right hand corner N dB meas result State Saved If On the fact is saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off 3 dB Factory Default Off 3 dB Terminators dB Default Terminator dB Resolution Rounding Truncation 0 01 dB Knob Increment 0 1 dB Step Key Increment 10 dB Range 80 dB to 1 dB Chapter 4 213 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search Remote Command CALCulate BANDwidth NDB dB value CALCulate BANDwidth NDB CALCulate BANDwidth STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate BANDwidth STATe 7 N 1 a 2 E 2 T O E E LL E o E EJ Ee 7 214 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions P Z Peak Search 4 1 9 Search Param Displays the search parameter criteria menu that enables you to adjust the parameters for the peak search functions Key Path Peak Search Remote Command There is no remote command for this key 4 1 9 1 Peak Excursn Sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the marker can identify as a separate peak For example if a value of 10 dB is selected the marker Next Peak function moves only to peaks that rise more than 10 dB above the Peak Threshold and then fall back to the Peak Threshold This criteria applies
595. ware revision A 03 00 444 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Remote Command SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC ALPHA number SENSe MCPower FILTer RRC ALPHA Example MCP FILT ALPHA 33 MCP FILT ALPHA 5 19 12 Noise Correction Pressing Noise Correction turns noise correction on or off When you set Noise Correction to On a calibration of the noise floor is performed and used to correct for analyzer noise floor contribution to measurement levels increasing dynamic range Key Path Meas Setup More Key Notes This key is not available when Meas Setup Method RBW is selected or when signal tracking is on State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower CORRection NOISe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MCPower CORRection NOISe AUTO 7 Remote Command Notes The noise correction feature is not available when the measurement method is RBW Meas Setup Method RBW or when signal tracking is on Example MCP CORR NOIS 1 MCP CORR NOIS el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 445 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP o c e Ei o c E H o E o LI 3 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 446 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Function
596. ware revision of the state being loaded is older than the firmware revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the older settings of the state Example MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C MYSTATE STA loads the state file C MYSTATE STA MMEM LOAD TRAC TRACE3 C MYTRACE TRC loads the trace in file C MMYTRACE TRC into trace 3 5 7 Ind E 3 oO E T E 7 ES El D gt LI r Chapter 2 145 1 lt o 2 9 9 G E IL c o E 5 Im 5 D E Instrument Functions A L File 2 5 3 2 Type Enables you to select the type of file you want to load See File Types on page 127 and Type on page 131 for more information The file types available for loading are described in the following table Type Format Destination Extension State State STA Trace Trace 4 state Trace 1 2 3 or all traces TRC Comma separated trace values Trace 1 2 3 or all traces CSV Limit Internal data format LIM Corrections Internal data format ANT CBL OTH and AMP NOTE Allis not a file type option in Load you have to specify the desired file type Key Path File Load 2 5 3 8 Sort Allows you to view saved files according to a selected file attribute See Sort on page 133 for more information Key Path File Load 2 5 3 4 Destination When Type is set to Trace Destination allows you to direct your data to Trace 1 Trace 2 or Trace 3 for a
597. wept or it lets the analyzer automatically choose the type of analysis to use based on current instrument settings SENSe SWEep TYPE Example SWE TYPE FFT 2 1 2 1 Auto Best Dynamic Range This function is automatically activated when Auto Allis selected Selecting Auto Best Dynamic Range tells the analyzer to choose between swept and FFT analysis with a primary goal of optimizing dynamic range If the dynamic range is very close between swept and FFT then it chooses the faster one While Zero Span is selected this key is greyed out The status of the FFT amp Swept selection is saved when entering zero span and is restored when leaving zero span Key Path Auto Couple FFT amp Sweep Saved State Saved in instrument state 72 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple Remote Command SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO RULes SPEed DRANge selects the rules to use when SWE TYPE AUTO is selected This setting combined with your current analyzer setup is used to select either FFT or swept mode SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO RULes Example SWEep TYPE AUTO selects the automatic mode SWE TYPE AUTO RUL DRAN sets the rules for the auto mode to dynamic range 2 1 2 2 Auto Best Speed Selecting Auto Best Speed tells the analyzer to choose between FFT or swept analysis based on the fastest analyzer speed While Zero Span is selected this key is greyed out The auto couple settings are kept in memory and are restor
598. wr Present key to indicate either yes or no If a carrier is defined as having no power present the power displayed will be relative to the reference carrier If a carrier is defined as having power present the absolute power will be displayed Carriers with power present are included in the total carrier power result 434 Chapter5 Une Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Multi Carrier Power MCP Key Path Meas Setup Carrier Setup Configure Carriers Dependencies Couplings This key assigns a value yes or no to the carrier number displayed on the Carrier key State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset YES YES YES YES Range Yes or No History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remote Command SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST PPResent YES NO SENSe MCPower CARRier LIST PPResent Remote Command Notes The position number in the list sent corresponds to the carrier number you are designating For example YES YES NO YES YES NO defines six carriers Carriers 1 2 4 and 5 are defined as having power present whereas carriers 3 and 6 do not have power present If you need to change carrier 5 you must send all carriers up to 5 Carrier 6 will remain unchanged If you send more values than the number of carriers specified using the Carriers key in this example there are six carriers they will be ignored The query for this parameter returns the current value for all carriers wit
599. xample FETC HARM AMPL ALL MEAS HARM AMPL2 returns the amplitude of the second harmonic measured in dBc from the fundamental READ HARM FREQ10 returns the frequency of the tenth harmonic in Hz el i U E Ki E E bd 5 7 E E bi 3 bi E T E E 1 7 Chapter 5 317 2 E Q D LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode 5 1 9 Burst Power The burst power measurement is an accurate method of determining the average power for the specified burst The analyzer is set into zero span mode with a sweep time that captures at least one burst For more information see Meas Setup Burst Power on page 371 Burst Width Peak Start Point Stop Point Threshold Level ndB down from peak Burst Center Measured Area pl746b The burst power measurement acquires data from the Measured Area above when a radio standard is chosen and when Meas Setup Meas Method Measured Burst Width is selected When Meas Setup Meas Method Above Threshold Lvl is selected the Measured Area extends the burst width delimiter lines to the start and stop points The mean carrier power is calculated by 1 converting each trace point amplitude from dBm into linear power 2 Adding the above amplitudes together and dividing by the n
600. y A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E Chapter 5 327 One Button Measurement Functions MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode Measurement Results Available Continued Command n Results Returned Condition n 11 Returns 12 scalar values in dBc of the peak power relative to the carrier at the segment frequencies 1 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 2 Reserved for the future use returns 999 0 3 Negative offset frequency A 4 Positive offset frequency A 11 Negative offset frequency E 12 Positive offset frequency E n 12 Returns the band power result when in WLAN standard If not in WLAN standard the value returned will be 999 0 Example FETC SEM or MEA SEM or READ SEM 5 1 13 Current Measurement Query Remote Command Only This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running Remote Command CONFigure Example CONF o c e 5 o c E H c o E o LI 5 o bi o c o E E E m o E e 328 Chapter5 One Button Measurement Functions Meas Control 5 2 Meas Control These functions allow you to pause and resume the currently selected measurement and to select between continuous or single measurements NOTE If no measurement has been selected from the MEASURE menu these functions are not available Key Path Front panel key
601. y Limits Limit 1 Edit Display Limits Limit 2 Edit State Saved Not affected by state Factory Preset and RST 1 Factory Default 1 Terminators Enter Default Terminator Enter Resolution 1 Knob Increment 1 Step Key Increment 1 History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Range 1 to 200 114 Chapter 2 Instrument Functions A L Display 2 4 5 1 5 2 Frequency or Time Note that this key label changes to Time if X Axis Units has been selected Pressing this key allows you to enter a value for a limit point in frequency or time After entering a value the limit table is sorted to place the value in the correct order For a new point Amplitude defaults to 0 dBm and Connected defaults to Yes Amplitude then becomes active Key Path Display Limits Limit 1 Edit Display Limits Limit 2 Edit Dependencies Couplings Limit line points are selected according to the X axis units selected for example if frequency is selected as your X axis units then the limit points are frequency values Also if both upper and lower limit lines are selected for the trace then both need to be defined using the same X axis units Fundamental Units Hz s Factory Preset and RST 300 MHz 120 Ms Terminators Hz s Default Terminator Hz frequency s time Knob Increment 0 2 MHz 30 Ms Step Key Increment 20 MHz 12 Ms Range 3 kHz to 350 GHz 30 Gs to 30 Gs History Added with firmware revision
602. y Path Trig Remote Command See Trig on page 287 Example TRIG SOUR RFB Chapter 4 289 5 D o E c 3 5 T c 5 e ES n U LI N N LI a o E Q G E ra m c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Trig 4 10 7 Trig Slope Controls the trigger polarity It is positive to trigger on a rising edge and negative to trigger on a falling edge Key Path Trig Dependencies Couplings Not available for Free Run State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Positive rising edge Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Example TRIG SLOP NEG 4 10 8 Trig Delay Allows you to control a time delay during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external or line trigger signal You can use negative delay to pre trigger the instrument NOTE Trigger Delay is not available in Free Run so turning Free Run on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay Key Path Trig Dependencies Couplings This function is not available when Trigger is Free Run or Video This function is not available when Gate is on State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Off 1 us Range 150 ms to 500 ms History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command TRIGger SEQuence DELay lt time gt TRIGger L SEQuence DELay TRIGger L SEQuence DELay STA
603. y the short and long forms of the keywords are allowed in valid commands Chapter 6 503 D we 2 S 3 E 5 a T c 5 2 D 3 E zi m b o c E c 9 G E ra o E E E c CH o e LI a Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics Creating Valid Commands Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of writing a particular command These are examples of valid commands for a given command syntax Command Syntax Sample Valid Commands SENSe BANDwidth RESolution lt freq gt The following sample commands are all identical They will all cause the same result e Sense Band Res 1700 e BANDWIDTH RESOLUTION 1 7e3 Seng band 1 7KHZ SENS band 1 7E3Hz band 1 7kHz bandwidth RES 1 7e3Hz MEASure SPECtrum n MEAS SPEC Meas spec meas spec3 The number 3 in the last meas example causes it to return different results then the commands above it See the command description for more information SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGative POSitive SAMPle DET FUNC neg Detector Func Pos INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF 1 0 504 The sample commands below are identical e INIT CONT ON init continuous 1 Chapter 6 Programming Fundamentals SCPI Language Basics Special Characters in Commands Special E 1 Character Meaning xample A vertical stroke between Command parameters indicates TRIGger SOURce
604. ype Press Meas Type to specify the reference for the measurement either Total Pwr Ref or PSD Ref Relative values can be displayed referenced to either the total power Total Pwr Ref or the power spectral density PSD Ref measured in the main channel Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Total Pwr Ref History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe ACPower TYPE PSDRef TPRef Chapter 5 359 G E WA c e EI bi D bi E L 3 o 5 T c 3 bi 7 2 E Q LZ E EJ LL E 7 E HI E KA bal GU E E fe ke EJ m o c e One Button Measurement Functions Meas Setup Adjacent Channel Power ACP SENSe ACPower TYPE Example ACP TYPE PSDR ACP TYPE 5 6 6 Optimize Ref Level Sets the input attenuator to optimize the robustness of the measurement in which it is free from errors due to input compression This setting will not necessarily give the optimum dynamic range nor the optimum accuracy No single setting can optimize both and the optimum setting often depends on the signal characteristics NOTE There will always be a minimum of 2 dB of attenuation set to protect the analyzer input Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Not saved History Added with firmware revision A 02 00 Remote Command SENSe POWer RF RANGe AUTO ONCE Example POW RANG AUTO ONCE 5 6
605. ys the memory selection menu from A to E where you can store up to 5 sets of values for Start Freq Stop Freq Sweep Time Res BW Meas BW Abs Start Abs Stop and so forth Press Offset until the letter of the desired offset A B C D or E is underlined Only one selection at a time is shown on this key label Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset A Remote Command There is no remote command for this function 5 22 4 2 Start Freq Specifies the inner limit frequency closest to the carrier for both segments of the specified offset pair When Start Freq Off is selected the offset pair is not measured Key Path Meas Setup Offset Limits State Saved Saved in instrument state Factory Preset Dependent upon Radio Standard and device selected refer to the default tables for Offset Limits on page 462 for this value Default Terminator Hz Range 0 Hz to the Stop Freq for that offset minus 10 Hz Remote Command SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STARt freq lt freq gt up to five values SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST FREQuency STARt SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STATe OFF ON 0 SENSe SEMask OFFSet n LIST STATe Remote Command Notes Comma separated list of up to 5 values n 1 for BTS and n 2 for MS Default is BTS Offsets that are turned off for the currently selected offset will retur
606. yzer memory s The status byte is set to 0 NOTE Recalling any state including the user preset state will affect the conditions of more parameters than are affected by a factory preset For example external preamp gain and input impedance correction are not affected by a factory preset but will be affected by a user preset Key Path Front panel key Chapter 4 221 N LI a o E Q G E ra L od c o E 5 x a Instrument Functions P Z Preset Dependencies Couplings Depends on the preset type user mode or factory setting in the System Power On Preset keys SCPI Status Bits OPC Dependencies Clears all pending OPC bits The status byte is set to 0 Remote Command SYSTem PRESet Remote Command Notes The SYSTem PRESet command immediately presets the instrument state to values dependent on the preset type that is currently selected FACTory USER MODE SYSTem PRESet will not reset persistent functions such as IP address time date display style or auto alignment state to their factory defaults Use SYSTem PRESet PERSistent See Restore Sys Defaults on page 231 SYSTem PRESet TYPE sets the type of preset See Preset Type on page 211 Example SYST PRES TYPE MODE sets the preset mode type to mode See Preset Type on page 211 SYST PRES presets the instrument to the currently selected preset type 4 2 1 User Preset This key is only available when the pr
607. zero span e Attenuation couples to Ref Level Ext Amp Gain Atten Step Max Mixer Lvl and Int Preamp s FFT amp Sweep couples to Res BW and Span e PhNoise Opt phase noise optimization couples to Res BW Span and FFT A Sweep sweep type Detector couples to marker functions Avg VBW Type Average On Off Max Hold and Min Hold e Average Type couples to the marker functions Detector and Scale Type s ADC Dither couples to Sweep Type Span Res BW ADC Ranging and FFTs Span Chapter 2 71 5 D 8 E c 3 3 Tn c 5 e ES 5 n gt LI r A LI lt o e 2 G E ra Ld c o E 5 x a E Instrument Functions A L Auto Couple e VBW RBW ratio is set to 1 0 e Span RBW ratio is set to Auto e Auto Sweep Time is set to Normal s FFT amp Sweep is set to Auto Best Dynamic Range s ADC Ranging is set to Autorange s Marker Count Gate Time is set to Auto NOTE Marker Trace and Printer have an Auto setting but are not affected by Auto All Remote Command COUPle ALL NONE COUPle Remote Command Notes sets all the functions to the manual not coupled mode There is no front panel key equivalent to the COUPle NONE command ALL puts all the functions into the auto coupled mode Example COUP ALL 2 1 2 FFT amp Sweep Selects the FFT vs Sweep key functions Key Path Auto Couple Remote Command SENSe SWEep TYPE AUTO FFT SWEep changes the sweep type to FFT or s

Agilent Technologies E4440

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents